Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data seventh edition The Reference of Architectural Fundamentals Donald W...

Author: Michael J. Crosbie | John Hancock Callender

113279 downloads 179715 Views 73MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data seventh edition The Reference of Architectural Fundamentals

Donald Watson, FAIA, editor-in-chief Michael J. Crosbie, Ph.D., senior editor John Hancock Callender in memorium associate editors:

Donald Baerman, AIA Walter Cooper Martin Gehner, P.E. William Hall Bruce W. Hisley Richard Rittelmann, FAIA Timothy T. Taylor, AIA, ASTM

Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

iii

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Time-saver standards for architectural design data / edited by Donald Watson, Michael J. Crosbie, John Hancock Callender—7th ed. p. cm. Rev. ed. of: Time-saver standards for architectural design data. 6th ed. c1982. Includes index. ISBN 0-07-068506-1 1. Building—Handbooks, manuals, etc. 2. Building—Standards— Handbooks, manuals, etc. 3. Architectural design—Handbooks, manuals, etc. I. Watson, Donald, 1937. II. Crosbie, Michael J. III. Callender, John Hancock. IV. Title: Time-saver standards for architectural design data. TH151.T55 1997 721—DC21 97-18390 CIP Copyright © 1997, 1982, 1974, 1966, 1954, 1950, 1946 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976. No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.

The McGraw-Hill Professional Book Group editor is Wendy Lochner. Printed and bound by Book design: Sandra Olenik, Printworks, Ltd., Madison, CT, USA. Computer graphics: Birch Bidwell Assistant: Kathleen Beckert www.Printworks-Ltd.com Cover design: Sandra Olenik and Margaret Webster-Shapiro Photography in this volume is by Donald Watson, FAIA, except as noted. Disclaimer The information in this book has been obtained from many sources, including government organizations, trade associations, manufacturers and professionals in research and in practice. The publisher, editors and authors have made every reasonable effort to make this reference work accurate and authoritative, but make no warranty, and assume no liability for the accuracy or completeness of the text, tables or illustrations or its fitness for any particular purpose. The appearance of technical data or editorial material in this publication does not constitute endorsement, warranty or guarantee by the publisher, editors or authors of any product, design, service, or process. It is the responsibility of users to apply their professional knowledge in the use of information and recommendations contained in this book, to consult original sources for more detailed information and to seek expert advice as required or as appropriate for the design and construction of buildings. Neither the authors, editors or McGraw-Hill shall have any liability to any party for any damages resulting from the use, application or adaptation of information contained in Time-Saver Standards, whether such damages be direct or indirect, or in the nature of lost profits or consequential damages. The Times-Saver Standards is published with the understanding that McGraw-Hill is not engaged in providing architectural, engineering design or other professional services.

For more information about other McGraw-Hill materials, call 1-800-2-MCGRAW, in the United States. In other countries, call your nearest McGraw-Hill office. I.S.B.N. 0-07-068506-1

iv


Contents • • • • •

Contributors Preface to the Seventh Edition Editors of the Seventh Edition Exemplary professional and technical reference books Introduction

PART I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

ix xiii xiv xv xvii

ARCHITECTURAL FUNDAMENTALS

Universal design and accessible design John P. S. Salmen, AIA and Elaine Ostroff Architecture and regulation Francis Ventre Bioclimatic design Donald Watson, FAIA and Murray Milne Solar control Steven V. Szokolay Daylighting design Benjamin Evans, FAIA Natural ventilation Benjamin Evans, FAIA Indoor air quality Hal Levin Acoustics: theory and applications M. David Egan, P.E., Steven Haas and Christopher Jaffe, Ph.D. History of building and urban technologies John P. Eberhard, FAIA Construction materials technology L. Reed Brantley and Ruth T. Brantley Intelligent building systems Jong-Jin Kim, Ph.D. Design of atriums for people and plants Donald Watson, FAIA Building economics David S. Haviland, Hon. AIA Estimating and design cost analysis Robert P. Charette, P.E. and Brian Bowen, FRICS Environmental life cycle assessment Joel Ann Todd, Nadav Malin and Alex Wilson Construction and demolition waste management Harry T. Gordon, FAIA Construction specifications Donald Baerman, AIA Design-Build delivery system Dana Cuff, Ph.D. Building commissioning: a guide for architects Carolyn Dasher, Nancy Benner, Tudi Haasl, and Karl Stum, P.E. Building performance evaluation Wolfgang F. E. Preiser, Ph.D. and Ulrich Schramm, Ph.D. Monitoring building performance William Burke, Charles C. Benton, and Allan Daly

1 9 21

35 63 75 85 101 117 125 139 151 157 169 183 193 199 209 215 231 239


v

Contents

PART II

SUBSTRUCTURE

A-1

A1

FOUNDATIONS AND BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION

A-1

A1.1

Soils and foundation types Philip P. Page, Jr. Retaining walls Martin Gehner, P.E. Subsurface moisture protection Donald Watson, FAIA and Murray Milne Residential foundation design John Carmody and Joseph Lstiburek, P.Eng. Termite control Donald Pearman

A-3

A

A1.2 A1.3 A1.4 A1.5

A-9 A-13 A-19 A-35

B

SHELL

B-1

B1

SUPERSTRUCTURE

B-1

B1.1 B1.2

An overview of structures Design loads Martin Gehner, P.E. Structural design-wood Martin Gehner, P.E. Structural design-steel Jonathan Ochshorn Structural design-concrete Robert M. Darvas Structural design - masonry Martin Gehner, P.E. Earthquake resistant design Elmer E. Botsai, FAIA Tension fabric structures R. E. Shaeffer, P.E. and Craig Huntington, S.E.

B1.3 B1.4 B1.5 B1.6 B1.7 B1-8

B-3 B-19 B-27 B-47 B-61 B-77 B-101 B-119

B2

EXTERIOR CLOSURE

B-127

B2.1 B2.2

Exterior wall systems: an overview Thermal Insulation Donald Baerman, AIA Building movement Donald Baerman, AIA Corrosion of metals Donald Baerman, AIA Moisture control Joseph Lstiburek, P.Eng. Watertight exterior walls Stephen S. Ruggiero and James C. Myers Exterior doors and hardware Timothy T. Taylor Residential windows John C. Carmody and Stephen Selkowitz

B-129 B-143

B3

ROOFING

B-217

B3.1

Roofing systems Donald Baerman, AIA

B-219

B2.3 B2.4 B2.5 B2.6 B2.7 B2.8

vi

DESIGN DATA


B-155 B-165 B-171 B-183 B-193 B-209

Contents

B-239

B3.2 Gutters and downspouts Donald Baerman, AIA B3.3 Roof openings and accessories Donald Baerman, AIA B3.4 Radiant barrier systems Philip Fairey C C1

B-247 B-253

INTERIORS

C-1

INTERIOR CONSTRUCTIONS

C-1

C1-1 Suspended ceiling systems William Hall C1-2 Interior partitions and panels William Hall C1-3 Interior doors and hardware Timothy T. Taylor C1-4 Flexible infrastructure Vivian Loftness, AIA and Volker Hartkopf, Ph.D C2

STAIRCASES

C-3 C-13 C-23 C-35 C-49

C2-1 Stair design checklist John Templer C2-2 Stair design to reduce injuries John Templer C2-3 Stair dimensioning Ernest Irving Freese

C-51

C3

INTERIOR FINISHES

C-67

C3-1 Wall and ceiling finishes William Hall C3-2 Flooring William Hall.

C-69

C-61 C-64

C-79

D

SERVICES

D-1

D1

CONVEYING SYSTEMS

D-1

D1-1 Escalators and elevators Peter R. Smith D2

PLUMBING

D-3 D-17

D2-1 Plumbing systems Arturo De La Vega D2-2 Sanitary waste systems Arturo De La Vega D2-3 Special plumbing systems Arturo De La Vega D2-4 Solar domestic water heating Everett M. Barber, Jr.

D-19

D3

D-63

HVAC

D3-1 Energy sources for houses William Bobenhausen D3-2 Heating and cooling of houses William Bobenhausen D3-3 Energy sources for commercial buildings William Bobenhausen

D-27 D-33 D-41

D-65 D-71 D-83


vii

Contents

D3-4 Thermal assessment for HVAC design Richard Rittelmann, FAIA and John Holton, P.E., RA D3-5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings Richard Rittelmann, FAIA and Paul Scanlon, P.E. D3-6 HVAC specialties Catherine Coombs, CIH, CSP D4

FIRE PROTECTION

D-111 D-145 D-151

D4-1 Fire safety design Fred Malven, Ph.D. D4-2 Fire protection sprinkler systems Bruce W. Hisley D4-3 Standpipe systems Bruce W. Hisley D4-4 Fire extinguishers and cabinets Bruce W. Hisley D4-5 Special fire protection systems Bruce W. Hisley D4-6 Fire alarm systems Walter Cooper

D-153

D5

D-191

ELECTRICAL

D5-1 Electrical wiring systems Benjamin Stein D5-2 Communication and security systems Walter Cooper and Robert DeGrazio D5-3 Electrical system specialties Andrew Prager D5-4 Lighting John Bullough D5-5 Solar electric systems for residences Everett M. Barber, Jr. APPENDIX

D-161 D-171 D-175 D-179 D-187

D-193 D-199 D-219 D-231 D-255

III

1

TABLES AND REFERENCE DATA Dimensions of the human figure Insulation values Lighting tables

AP-1 AP-3 AP-9 AP-19

2

MATHEMATICS Properties of the circle Area, surfaces and volumes Areas-Perimeter ratios William Blackwell Useful curves and curved surfaces Seymour Howard, Architect Drawing accurate curves Sterling M. Palm, Architect Modular coordination Hans J. Milton and Byron Bloomfield, AIA UNITS OF MEASUREMENT AND METRICATION Units of measurement Introduction to SI metric system R.E. Shaeffer, P.E. Metrication

AP-25 AP-25 AP-29 AP-33

3

viii

D-89

Index Reader Response Form Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

AP-36 AP-74 AP-79 AP-85 AP-85

AP-91

Contributors Contributors to the 6th edition (represented in 7th edition revision) Articles of the following authors are reprinted from the 6th edition of Time-Saver Standards (1982), acknowledging their legacy to professional knowledge represented in this volume: William Blackwell, Architectual Consultant Byron C. Bloomfield, AIA, Modular Building Standards Association Ernest Irving Freese Seymour Howard, Professor Emeritus of Architecture, Pratt Institute Hans J. Milton, FRAIA, Center for Building Technology, National Bureau of Standards Sterling M. Palm, AIA Architect Philip P. Page, Jr., Consulting Engineer Syska & Hennessy, Consulting Engineers Howard P. Vermilya, AIA Architect New contributions to the 7th edition Authors: The following authors have prepared articles for the Seventh Edition. Their contributions are gratefully acknowledged. Their professional addresses and contact information are indicated where appropriate. AIA California Council. ADAPT Production Committee. 1303 J St., Sacramento, CA 95814. Gordon H. Chong, chair; Stephan Castellanos, Donald M. Comstock, Michael J. Bocchicchio, Sr., Dana Cuff, Ph.D., Betsey O. Dougherty, Joseph Ehrlich, Harry C. Hallenbeck, Lee Schwager, John G. Stafford, Bruce R. Starkweather, Arba H. Stinnett, Julie Thompson, Paul W. Welch, Jr. Donald Baerman, AIA, 42 Wayland Street, North Haven, CT 06473. FAX (203) 288-7557. Everett M. Barber, Jr., Sunsearch , Inc., P.O. Box 590, Guilford CT 06437. FAX (203) 458-9011. Nancy Benner (1947-1997) Charles C. Benton, Associate Professor, Department of Architecture, University of Califormia, Berkeley, CA 94720-1800. William Bobenhausen, Steven Winter Associates, 50 Washington Street, Norwalk, CT 06854. Elmer E. Botsai, FAIA, Professor Emeritus, School of Architecture, University of Hawaii at Manoa, Honolulu, HI 96822. Brian Bowen, FRICS, Principal, Hanscomb, Inc., 1175 Peachtree Street, NE, Atlanta, GA 30309. L. Reed Brantley and Ruth T. Brantley, 2908 Robert Place, Honolulu, HI 96816-1720. John Bullough, Research Associate, Lighting Research Center, School of Architecture, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, NY 12180. William Burke, Vital Signs Project, Department of Architecture, University of Califormia, 232 Wurster Hall #1500, Berkeley, CA 94720-1800. John Carmody, College of Architecture and Landscape Architecture, University of Minnesota, 1425 University Avenue SE #220, Minneapolis, MN 55455. Robert P. Charette, P.E., CVS, 138 Avenue Trenton, Montreal, Quebec H3P 1Z4. Catherine Coombs, CIH, CSP, Steven Winter Associates, 50 Washington Street, Norwalk, CT 06854. Walter Cooper, Flack + Kurtz, 475 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10017. Michael J. Crosbie, Ph.D., 47 Grandview Terrace, Essex, CT 06426. Dana Cuff, Ph.D., Professor, University of California, Los Angeles, School of Arts and Architecture, 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90095-1427. Arturo De La Vega, URS Greiner, 1120 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000, Washington, DC 20036. Allan Daly, Department of Architecture, University of Califormia, 232 Wurster Hall #1500, Berkeley, CA 94720-1800. Robert M. Darvas, Professor Emeritus, University of Michigan, College of Architecture and Urban Planning, 2000 Bonisteel Blvd., Ann Arbor, MI 48109-2069. Carolyn Dasher, Portland Energy Conservation, Inc., 921 SW Washington, Suite 312, Portland, OR 97205. Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

ix

Contributors Robert DeGrazio, Flack + Kurtz, 475 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10017. John P. Eberhard, FAIA, 400 Madison Street, Apt. 702, Alexandria, VA 22314. M. David Egan, P.E., PO Box 365, Anderson, SC 29622. Benjamin Evans, FAIA (1926-1997) Philip W. Fairey, Deputy Director, Florida Solar Energy Center, Clearlake Road, Cocoa, FL 32922-5703. http:// www.fsec.ucf.edu Martin D. Gehner, P.E., Professor of Architectural Engineering, School of Architecture, Yale University, New Haven, CT 06520. Harry T. Gordon, FAIA, Burt Hill Kosar Rittelmann Associates, 1056 Thomas Jefferson Street, NW, Washington, DC 20007. William Hall, MHTN Architects, 2 Exchange Place, Salt Lake City, UT 84111. Steven Haas, Jaffe Holden Scarbrough Acoustics Inc., 114-A Washington Street, Norwalk, CT 06854. Tudi Haasl, Portland Energy Conservation, Inc., 921 SW Washington,, Suite 312, Portland, OR 97205. Volker Hartkopf, Ph.D., Professor and Director, Center for Building Performance and Diagnostics, Department of Architecture, Carnegie Mellon University, Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890. David S. Haviland, Hon. AIA, Professor, School of Architecture, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 110 8th Street, Troy, NY 12180. Bruce W. Hisley, 27 Northern Pike Trail, Fairfield, PA 17320 John Holton, P.E., Burt Hill Kosar Rittelmann, 400 Morgan Center, Butler, PA 16001. Craig Huntington, S.E., Huntington Design Associates, Inc., 1736 Franklin Street Suite 500, Oakland, CA 94612. Christopher Jaffe, Ph.D., Jaffe Holden Scarborough Acoustics, Inc., 144A Washington Street, Norwalk, CT 06854. Jong-Jin Kim, Ph.D., Associate Professor, College of Architecture and Urban Planning, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI 48109. Hal Levin, Hal Levin & Associates, 2548 Empire Grade, Santa Cruz, CA 95060. Vivian Loftness, AIA, Professor and Chair, Department of Architecture, Carnegie Mellon University, Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890. Joseph Lstiburek, P.Eng., Building Science Corporation, 70 Main Street, Westford, MA 01886. FAX (508) 589-5103. Nadav Malin, Associate Editor, Environmental Building News, RR 1, Box 161, Brattleboro, VT 05301. FAX (802) 257-7304. Fred M. Malven, Ph.D., Professor, Iowa State University, College of Design, Ames, IA 50011-3093. Murray A. Milne, Professor Emeritus, School of the Arts and Architecture, UCLA, B-315 Perloff Hall, Los Angeles, CA 90095-1427. e-mail: [email protected] James C. Myers, Simpson Gumpertz & Heger, 297 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02174 Jonathan Ochshorn, Associate Professor, Department of Architecture, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY 14853. Elaine Ostroff, Adaptive Environments Center, Congress Street, Suite 301, Boston, MA 02210. Donald Pearman, 2001 Hoover Avenue, Oakland, CA 94602 Wolfgang F. E. Preiser, Ph. D., University of Cincinnati, College of Design, Architecture, Art and Planning, Cincinnati, OH 45221-0016. Richard Rittelmann, FAIA, Burt Hill Koser Rittelmann, 400 Morgan Center, Butler, PA 16001. Stephen S. Ruggiero, Simpson Gumpertz & Heger, 297 Broadway, Arlington, MA 02174. John P. S. Salmen, AIA , Universal Designers & Consultants, Inc. , 1700 Rockville Pike, Rockville, MD 20852. FAX (301) 770-4338. Paul Scanlon, Burt Hill Koser Rittelmann, 400 Morgan Center, Butler, PA 16001.

x


Contributors Ulrich Schramm, Ph.D., Fakultat fur Architectur und Stadplanung, Universitat Stuttgart, Keplerstrasse 11, 70174 Stuttgart, Germany. Stephen Selkowitz, Director, Windows and Daylighting Program. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. One Cyclotron Road. Berkeley, CA 94720. R. E. Shaeffer, P.E., Professor, Florida A&M University, School of Architecture, 1936 S. Martin Luther King Blvd., Tallahassee, FL 32307. Peter R. Smith, Ph.D., FRAIA, Head, Department of Architectural Science, University of Sydney, Sydney, NSW 2006, Australia. Karl Stum. P.E., Portland Energy Conservation, Inc., 921 SW Washington, Suite 312, Portland, OR 97205. Russ Sullivan, P.E., Burt Hill Koser Rittelmann, 400 Morgan Center, Butler, PA 16001. Steven V. Szokolay, P O Box 851, Kenmore, 4069, Queensland, Australia. Timothy T. Taylor, AIA, URS Greiner, 1120 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000, Washington, DC 20036. John Templer, 114 Verdier Road, Beauford, SC 29902. Joel Ann Todd, The Scientific Consulting Group, Inc., 656 Quince Orchard Road, Suite 210, Gaithersburg, Maryland 20878-1409. Francis Ventre, Ph.D., 4007 Rickover Road, Silver Spring, MD 20902. Donald Watson, FAIA, 54 Larkspur Drive, Trumbull, CT 06611. [email protected] Alex Wilson, Editor, Environmental Building News, RR 1, Box 161, Brattleboro, VT 05301. FAX (802) 257-7304. Additional contributors and reviewers The special contributions and reviews of the following individuals are gratefuly acknowledged: William A. Brenner, AIA, Executive Director, Construction Metrication Council, National Institute of Building Sciences, 1201 L Street, NW, Washington, DC 20005. Jack Embersits, President, Facilities Resource Management Co., FRM Park, 135 New Road, Madison, CT 06443-2545. Tom Fisher, Dean, College of Architecture and Landscape Architecture, University of Minneapolis, 1425 University Avenue, SE, Minneapolis MN 55455. Rita M. Harrold, Director of Educational & Technical Development, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 120 Wall Street, New York, New York 10005-4001. Steve Mawn, American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428. Marietta Millet, Professor, Department of Architecture, University of Washington, 208 Gould Hall, Seattle, WA 98195. Mark Rea, Director, Lighting Research Center, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, NY 12180. Daniel L. Schodek, Professor, Harvard University Graduate School of Design, Cambridge, MA 02138. Richard Solomon, P.E., Chief Building Fire Protection Engineer, National Fire Protection Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269-9101. Fred Stitt, San Francisco Institute of Architecture, Box 749, Orinda, CA 94563. Gordon Tully, AIA, Steven Winter Associates, 50 Washington Street, Norwalk, CT 06854.


xi

xii


Preface With this the Seventh edition, a 60-year publishing tradition continues for Time-Saver Standards. Conceived in the mid1930s as a compilation of reference articles, Time-Saver Standards features first appeared in American Architect, which subsequently merged with and continued the series in Architectural Record. The first hardbound edition of Time-Saver Standards was published in 1946, with the purpose then stated as [to assist in] “the greatest possible efficiency in drafting, design and specification writing.” In the Second Edition in 1950, the editorial intent was described as “[a volume of] carefully edited reference data in condensed graphic style.” One contribution from this edition, authored by Sterling M. Palm, appears as a reprint in the present Volume’s Appendix. In the Third Edition of 1954, the Preface offered the commentary, “the underlying formula of these pages was established in 1935. Since 1937, Architectural Record has been presenting each month, articles, graphs, tables and charts, with a minimum of verbiage...its compilation in Time-Saver Standards was a ‘workbook’ of material of this kind.” The Fourth edition of Time-Saver Standards, published in 1966, was the first edited by John Hancock Callender, who continued as Editor-in-Chief for the subsequent Fifth and Sixth editions. In his 1966 Preface, he wrote that the volume was “intended primarily to meet the needs of those who design buildings [and]—almost equally useful to draftsmen, contractors, superintendents, maintenance engineers, and students—to all in fact who design, construct and maintain buildings.” The Preface to each ensuing edition carried short statements by the Editor-in-Chief. In the Fifth edition (1974), perhaps in relief of many months of editing, John Hancock Calendar offered that, Now and again we hear it said that building has not changed significantly since the age of the pyramids. Anyone who subscribes to this view should be given the task of trying to keep Time-Saver Standards up to date. Society’s needs and aspirations are constantly changing, making new demands on buildings; functional requirements change and new building types appear; building materials proliferate and new building techniques come into use, without displacing the old. The result is a constant increase in the amount of technical data needed by building designers. In his Preface to Sixth edition (1982), John Hancock Callender used the occasion to comment upon the need to adopt metrication in the U. S. building industry. The present edition carries metric equivalents throughout the text wherever practical. The Appendix to the present Volume carries the most recent update of the ASTM standard on metrication, along with an introduction written for architects. In preparing this the Seventh edition, the first revision in more than a dozen years, the editors were challenged in many respects. This is evident in the fact that the volume has been almost entirely rewritten, with new articles by over eighty authors. It is also evident in its new format and contents, expanded to include “Architectural Fundamentals.” Such dramatic changes respond to the substantial renewal of architectural knowledge and practice in the past decade. New materiasl and construction methods have replaced standard practices of even a dozen years ago. There is since then new information and recommended practices in architecture and new ways of communicating information throughout the architectural and building professions. Some of the topics in the present volume were not even identified much less considered as critical issues when the last edition of this volume was published. Updated design data and product details are increasingly available in electronic form from manufacturers, assisted by yearly updates in McGraw-Hill’s Sweet’s Catalog File. At the same time, the design fundamentals and selection guidelines by which to locate and evaluate such data become all the more critical. All of the articles in the present edition are written to assist the architect in the general principles of understanding, selecting and evaluating the professional information and knowledge needed for practice. Each article lists key references within each topic. Thus, at the beginning of its second half-century of publication, the purpose of the Seventh Edition of Time-Saver Standards can be summarized as a “knowledge guide”—a comprehensive overview of the fundamental knowledge and technology required for exemplary architectural practice. “Knowledge building” itself is an act of creation. How one understands and thinks about architecture and its process of construction is part of the creative design process. Understanding the knowledge base of architecture is a process that itself can “be built” upon a solid framework, constructed of understandable parts and in a manner that reveals insights and connections. The editors and authors of Time-Saver Standards hope to inform, and also to inspire, the reader in pursuit of that endeavor.


xiii

Preface Comments and submissions are welcomed Because the knowledge base of architecture is changing constantly as building practices change in response to new materials, processes and project types, the succeeding volumes of Time-Saver Standards Series will build upon both electronic access and a regular revision print schedule. For this reason, reader responses to the contents of the present Volume and proposals for the Eighth Edition are solicited in the note below and the Reader Response Form found at the end of this Volume. Any and all corrections, comments, critiques and suggestions regarding the contents and topics covered in this book are invited and will be gratefully received and acknowledged. A Reader Response Form is appended at the end of this volume, for your evaluation and comment. These and/or errors or omissions should be brought to the attention of the Editor-in-Chief. Submissions of manuscripts or proposals for articles are invited on any topics related to the contents of Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data, Eighth edition, now in preparation. Two print copies of proposed manuscripts and illustrations should be addressed to the Editor-in-Chief. Receipt of manuscripts will be acknowledged and, for those selected for consideration, author guidelines will be issued for final submission format. Donald Watson, FAIA, Editor-in-Chief Time-Saver Standards 54 Larkspur Drive Trumbull, CT 06611 USA [email protected] Editors of the Seventh Edition Donald Watson, FAIA is former Dean and currently Professor of Architecture at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York. He served as a U. S. Peace Corps Architect in Tunisia, North Africa from 1962-1965, becoming involved at the time in the research in indigenous architecture and its application to bioclimatic design. From 1970 to 1990, he was Visiting Professor at Yale School of Architecture and Chair of Yale’s Master of Environmental Design Program. His architectural work has received design awards from AIA New England Region, Owens Corning Prize, U. S. DoE Energy Innovations, New England Governor’s/Canadian Premiers, Energy Efficient Building Association, Compact House competition and Connecticut Society of Architects. He was founding principal and managing partner of ABODE, a design/ build firm from 1982-1990. His major books include Designing and Building a Solar House (Garden Way) 1977, Energy Conservation through Building Design (McGraw-Hill) 1979, and Climatic Building Design, co-authored with Kenneth Labs, (McGraw-Hill) 1983, recipient of the 1984 Best Book in Architecture and Planning Award from the American Publishers Association. Michael J. Crosbie, Ph.D., is active in architectural journalism, research, teaching, and practice. He received his doctorate in architecture from Catholic University. He has previously served as technical editor for Architecture and Progressive Architecture, magazines and is contributing editor to Construction Specifier. He is a senior architect at Steven Winter Associates, a building systems research and consulting firm in Norwalk, CT. Dr. Crosbie has won several journalism awards. He is the author of ten books on architectural subjects, and several hundred articles which have appeared in publications such as Architectural Record, Architecture, Collier’s Encyclopedia Yearbook, Construction Specifier, Fine Homebuilding, Historic Preservation, Landscape Architecture, Progressive Architecture, and Wiley’s Encyclopedia of Architecture, Design, Engineering & Construction. He has been a visiting lecturer/critic at University of Pennsylvania, Columbia University, University of California, Berkeley, University of Wisconsin/Milwaukee, Yale School of Architecture, and the Moscow Architectural Institute and is adjunct professor of architecture at the Roger Williams University School of Architecture.

In memorium John Hancock Callender was responsible for the editorial direction of Time-Saver Standards from 1966 to 1984. The present edition carries the name of John Hancock Callender in recognition of his lifelong editorial contributions to the knowledge and practice of architecture. John Hancock Callender, AIA (1908-1995) graduated from Yale College in 1928 and New York University School of Architecture 1939. He was researcher in low-cost housing materials at John B. Pierce Foundation from 1931 to 1943 and served with the Army Engineers 1943-45. He was consultant for the Revere Quality House Institute from 1948-1953, which became the Housing Research Foundation of Southwest Research Institute, San Antonio, Texas, pioneering in research in low cost housing innovations in the United States. He was a member of the faculties of Columbia University, Princeton University and Professor of Architecture at Pratt Institute, Brooklyn, New York, 1954 uÅ†1973. He authored Before You Buy a House (Crown Publishers) 1953. John Hancock Callender served as Editor-in-Chief of the Fourth, Fifth and Sixth editions of Time-Saver Standards and was founding editor of Time-Saver Standards for Building Types.

xiv


Time-Saver Standards Editors’ Selections

Exemplary professional and technical reference books First juried selection. 1997. Time Saver Standards Editors’ Exemplary Book selections is a newly created award program to recognize outstanding professional and technical books in architecture and construction. Professional and technical reference books for architecture are not easily composed. Information must be useful, authoritative and understandable, with a balance of visual representation and explanation for its integration in design. In the following selections, the jury lauds the accomplishments of the authors, editors and publishers of books that are technically relevant and also inspirational in promoting technical and professional excellence in architecture. 1997 Jury: Donald Baerman, Michael J. Crosbie, Martin Gehner, Richard Rittelmann, and Donald Watson. Allen, Edward and Joseph Iano. 1995. The Architect’s Studio Companion: Rules of Thumb for Preliminary Design Second Edition New York: John Wiley & Sons. Design data organized for preliminary design, especially helpful for students of architecture and construction. American Institute of Architects. 1996. Architect’s Handbook of Professional Practice Student Edition. David Haviland, Hon. AIA, Editor. Washington, DC: AIA Press. A comprehensive summary of information essential for professional practice. The student edition is in one volume and is especially helpful for both student and professional reference. American Institute of Architects. 1994. Architectural Graphic Standards. Ninth Edition John Ray Hoke, FAIA, Editor-in-Chief New York: John Wiley & Sons. A digest of design data and details organized for easy reference, on all topics related to architecture and construction, with emphasis on graphic and visual information. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. 1993. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Atlanta: GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers. An essential reference for designers of mechanical systems for buildings, the standard professional reference for the HVAC and building design community. Berger, Horst. 1996. Light Structures Structures of Light: The Art and Engineering of Tensile Structures. Basel-Boston-Berlin: Birkhauser Verlag. A record of the author’s career in development of inspired tensile structures integrating engineering and architecture. Brantley, L. Reed and Ruth T. Brantley. 1996. Building Materials Technology: Structural Performance and Environmental Impact. New York: McGraw-Hill. An authoritative review of building materials, explained in terms of their chemical and physical properties and the environmental implications of their use in buildings. Canadian Wood Council. 1991. Wood Reference Book. Ottawa: Canadian Wood Council. An excellent compilation of data for wood products, manufacturing processes, wood structural systems, connections and finishes, with excellent details and applications. Elliott, Cecil D. 1991. Technics and Architecture: The Development of Materials and Systems for Buildings. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. An insightful and well documented history of the development of architectural and building technologies.

Givoni, Baruch. 1987. Man, Climate and Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. First Edition (1969) published by Applied Science Publishers, Ltd., London. A classic work in the experimental tradition of building science, summarizing extensive monitoring and principles of building bioclimatology. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. 1993. Lighting Handbook: Reference & Application. 8th edition Mark S. Rea, Editor-in-Chief. The authoritative and comprehensive reference for lighting applications in architecture. Millet, Marietta S. 1996. Light Revealing Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. Lighting for architecture, with an emphasis upon daylighting, presented as a design inspiration for architects as a way to understand technique, from historical and contemporary exemplars. Orton, Andrew. 1988. The Way We Build Now: form, scale and technique. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. An introduction to materials, structures, building physics and fire safety with excellent illustrations and examples. Schodek, Daniel L. 1992. Structures. Second Edition. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. A basic text on structures, clearly written for the architect student and professional reference, with comprehensive illustrations and metric equivalency. Stein, Benjamin and John S. Reynolds. 1992. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment for Buildings. New York: John Wiley & Sons. The long established classic reference on the topic, with complete technical description of building service systems for architects. Tilley, Alvin R. and Henry Dreyfuss Associates. 1993 The Measure of Man and Woman: Human Factors in Design New York: The Whitney Library of Design. A documentation of human proportion and stature, including safety and accommodation for children and for differently abled. An essential reference for ergonomic design, by the founders of the field. Templer, John. 1994. The Staircase: History and Theory and Studies of Hazards, Falls and Safer Design. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. A comprehensive treatment of precedents in stair design and contemporary design criteria, equally diligent in both its historical and technical analysis, including extensive research related to stair use and safety. U. S. Department of Agriculture Forest Service. 1987. Wood Handbook. Forest Products Laboratory Agricultural Handbook No. 72. Springfield, VA: National Technical Information Service. Comprehensive reference for use of wood in construction. Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

xv

xvi


Introduction


xvii

xviii


Introduction

Summary: The Introduction provides an overview of the editorial organization of the Seventh Edition of Time-Saver Standards, including references to research on how architects utilize information, and a summary of its format and content.

I

Knowledge of building

The technological knowledge base of architecture “Information” is defined in communications theory as “that which resolves doubt.” Information, in this view, is dependent upon the act of questioning and curiosity in the mind of the seeker. Data, in and of itself, does not “make sense.” That depends upon a larger framework of knowledge, insight and reflection. In the profession of architecture, knowledge of building technique is an essential and motivating condition.

Kenneth Frampton in his history of architecture, Studies in Tectonic Culture, defines architecture as inseparable from construction technique and material culture. He cites Gottfried Semper’s 1851 definition of architecture in terms of its construction components: (1) hearth, (2) earthwork, (3) framework/roof, and (4) enclosing membrane. This definition anticipates the classification of architectural elements used in Part II of this volume, classifying architectural data in terms of their place in the process of construction and assembly.

Technique, derived from the Greek techne, is the shared root of both “Architecture” and “Technology.” Architecture is its root meaning is the “mastery of building.” Technology, from techne logos, means “knowledge of technique.” The term techne can be variously defined. It combines the sense of craft and knowledge learned through the act making, that is to say, through empirical experience. Craftspeople gain such knowledge in the skill of their hands and communicate it through the formal accomplishment of their art and craft.

This, however, gets us only part way. Describing architecture in terms of its physical and technological elements does not convey the reasoning and the evaluation needed to guide the designer, the why and how by which particular materials and systems are selected. If the elements of construction are the “nouns,” principles of design are still needed, “verbs” that give the connective logic. Also implicit in selecting one thing over another are qualifying “adjectives and adverbs,” that is, the sense of value and evaluation which is ultimately represented by an ethical position: that buildings should stand up, that they should keep the rain out, that they should accommodate human habitation, comfort and productivity, that they should be equally accessible and enabling to all people of all ages, that they should not create negative environmental impact, and so forth. Some of these “design values” are required by law; others are not, but are dependent upon the values and ethical decisions of the designer, as described by Frances Ventre in his Part I article, “Architecture and Regulation.”

Technological knowledge in architecture can thus be taken to mean knowledge gained in the making of buildings. The aspiration of the architect or master builder then, by definition, is to gain mastery of the knowledge of construction technology. This is a daunting aspiration, made continuously challenging by changes in construction technologies and in the values, economical, aesthetic and cultural, given to the task by architect and society. Vitruvius gave the classic terms to the definition of architecture in setting forth the three “conditions of building well, utilitas, firmitas and venustas,” or as translated by Henry Wolton, “commodity, firmness and delight.” Vitruvius’s de Architectura is the first compendium of architectural knowledge, at least the oldest of known and extent texts. It includes in its scope all aspects of design and construction, from details of construction and building to city planning and climatic responses. Geoffrey Scott, in The Architecture of Humanism, (1914), was not above offering pithy definitions of architecture, such as, “architecture is the art of organizing a mob of craftsmen.” Scott’s widely read treatise offers a view that emphasizes the importance of architectural style as a reflection of culture. Recalling Vitruvius, he defines architecture as “a humanized pattern of the world, a scheme of forms on which our life reflects its clarified image: this is its true aesthetic, and here should be sought the laws. . . of that third ‘condition of well-building, its delight.’”

How architects use information D. W. MacKinnon (1962) provides a frequently referenced study of the ways that architects work, including how they process information, biased either by habit of mind or talent or by education and training. The study analyzed the personality and work habits of approximately 100 architects, selected to represent both “most creative” and a “representative cross-section” of architectural practitioners. The findings of the study determined that architects, particularly those considered “most creative,” represent a set of personality traits and work habits that does distinguish the profession’s ways of creative learning and practicing, which MacKinnon described as, “openness to new experience, aesthetic sensibility, cognitive flexibility, impatience with petty restraint and impoverishing inhibitions, independence of thought and action, unquestioning commitment to creative endeavor.” This study was referred to by Charles Burnette and Associates (1979) in a investigation of how architects use information, sponsored by the AIA Research Corporation and the National Engineering Laboratory

Author: Donald Watson, FAIA Credits: The illustrations are from 1993 Sweet’s Catalog File Selection Data, by permission of McGraw-Hill. References: References are listed at the end of the first part of this article on the following page. Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

xix

Introduction and published in two reports entitled, “Architects Access to Information” and “Making Information Useful to Architects.” The reports also cite recommendations of Richard Kraus (1970) in formatting information for architects (Kraus’s interest was computer-based information systems, but the recommendations apply broadly). Krause suggests that to respond to ways of thinking that are uniquely “architectural,” an information system should: (1) focus on geometric form, permitting visual assimilation; (2) permit the designer to select the scale at which to operate, that is, in parts or wholes, or the broader context of the building; (3) enable simultaneous consideration of a number of variables; (4) help the designer to improve the creative insights during the design process. These reports provide guidelines for an information system for architectural practice, that, although perhaps obvious, are noteworthy. Burnette recommends that an information system for architect should be: (a) up-to-date, (b) presented in a form to be readily used, (c) appear consistently in the same format, (d) be stated in performance terms, that is, be operationally useful, (e) accurate and complete, with drawings precise and to scale, (f) have an evaluation and feedback system. Organization of Time Saver Standards These references proved helpful to the editors of Time-Saver Standards in reformatting the present Edition. The feedback system provided by the Reader Response Form at the end of this Volume will be especially helpful in improving its publication. The presentation of information in this edition of Time-Saver Standards is in two interrelated formats, first in Part I Architectural Fundamentals, which give the principles and cross-cutting discussion applicable to many topics and at many scales. In the terms suggested above, fundamentals provide the connecting verbs and qualifying adjectives and adverbs of the grammar of architectural knowledge. Part II Design Data are in these terms the “nouns,” that is, the knowledge and information placed in the sequence of construction, as suggested by the Uniformat classification system. The Uniformat system (the most recent version is called Uniformat II) is described in a Part I article by its authors, Robert Charette and Brian Bowen. It is a classification now widely adopted for buildingrelated design data, first developed as an industry-wide standard for economic analysis of building components. It defines categories of the elements of building in terms of their place in the construction sequence. This classification has several advantages. Firstly, it follows the sequence of construction, from site preparation, foundation, and so forth through to enclosure and interior constructions and services. Secondly, it defines design and construction data by system assemblies, creating an easily understood locus of information by its place as a building element, which is most easily visualized and understandable to architects while designing. The matrix of relationship between the Part I Architectural Fundamentals and the Part II Design Data, representing the Uniformat classification system, is indicated in Table 1. Uniformat II is compatible with the MasterFormat, the established classification system used in construction specifications, described in Donald Baerman’s Part I article, “Specifications.” Historically, MasterFormat developed a listing of construction materials out of convenience to the builder in organizing construction, including quantity

xx


takes-offs and purchase orders for materials from different suppliers. In short, MasterFormat is organized into distinct construction material categories as (they might be) ordered and delivered to a construction site before construction. Uniformat II organizes design, construction and materials data as components and assemblies after construction. The matrix of relationship between Part II Design Data, representing the Uniformat classification, and MasterFormat Divisions is indicated in Table 2. These data are formatted throughout this volume with key images and graphic icons to provide an easily grasped visual reference to the design and construction thought process. References Bowen, Brian, Robert P. Charette and Harold E. Marshall. 1992. “UNIFORMAT II—A Recommended Classification for Building Elements and Related Sitework.” Publication No. 841. Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology. Burnette, Charles and Associates. 1979. “The Architect’s Access to Information.” NTIS # PB 294855. and “Making Information Useful to Architects—An Analysis and Compendium of Practical Forms for the Delivery of Information.” NTIS # PB 292782. Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Commerce National Technical Information Service. Frampton, Kenneth. 1995. Studies in Tectonic Culture: the Poetics of Construction in Nineteen and Twentieth Century Architecture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. p. 85. Kraus, R. and J. Myer. 1970. “Design: A Case History and Specification for a Computer System. in Moore, G., editor. Emerging Methods in Environmental Design and Planning. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. MacKinnon, D. W. 1962. “The Personality Correlates of Creativity: A Study of American Architects,” Proceedings of the 14th Congress on Applied Psychology, Vol. 2. Munksgaard, pp. 11-39. Scott, Geoffrey. 1914. The Architecture of Humanism: A Study of the History of Taste. London: Constable and Company, Ltd. Second Edition 1924. p. 41; p. 240.

Introduction Table 1. Matrix of Part I Architectural Fundamentals and Part II Design Data

Part II Design data (after Uniformat II classification) A1 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2 C3 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Part I articles 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Universal design Regulation Bioclimatic design Solar control Daylighting design Natural ventilation Indoor air quality Acoustics History of technologies Construction technology Intelligent buildings Design of atriums Building economics Estimating Life cycle assessment Construction waste Specifications Design-Build Building commissioning: Building performance Monitoring

√ √ √

√

√ √ √ √

√ √

√ √ √

√

√ √ √ √

√ √

√ √ √ √

√ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √

√

√

√ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √

√

√ √

√ √ √ √

√

√

√ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √

√ √

√

√ √ √

√ √ √ √

√

√ √ √ √ √

√ √

√

√ √ √ √

√

√

√ √ √ √ √

√ √

√ √ √

√

√

√ √

√

√ √ √

√ √

LEGEND : Part II Design data A A1 B B1 B2 B3 C C1 C2 C3 D D1 D2 D3 D4 D5

SUBSTRUCTURE Foundations and basement construction SHELL Superstructure Exterior closure Roofing INTERIORS Interior constructions Staircases Interior finishes SERVICES Conveying Systems Plumbing HVAC Fire Protection Electrical


xxi

Introduction Table 2. Matrix of Part II Design Data and MasterFormat

Part II Design data (after Uniformat II classification) A1 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2 C3 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 MasterFormat Divisions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GENERAL CONDITIONS SITE CONSTRUCTION CONCRETE MASONRY METAL WOOD & PLASTICS THERMAL/MOISTURE DOORS & WINDOWS

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FINISHES SPECIALTIES EQUIPMENT FURNISHINGS SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION CONVEYING SYSTEMS MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL

√ √ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √ √

√ √ √ √ √

√ √

√

√

√ √ √ √

√ √

√

√ √ √ √

√

√

√

√ √

√

√

√

√ √

√

√

√

√ √ √

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√ √

√ √

LEGEND : Part II Design data A A1 B B1 B2 B3 C C1 C2 C3 D D1 D2 D3 D4 D5

xxii


SUBSTRUCTURE Foundations and basement construction SHELL Superstructure Exterior closure Roofing INTERIORS Interior constructions Staircases Interior finishes SERVICES Conveying Systems Plumbing HVAC Fire Protection Electrical

√ √ √ √

Introduction II Building of knowledge Part II of this volume follows an outline suggested by Uniformat, representing the general sequence of construction as summarized in the prior section. This section provides a brief overview of its constituent elements as a framework for building a knowledge of design data related to its locus in the process of construction (Fig. 1). A Substructure Substructure, or below-ground construction, highlights critical structural considerations, including the capacity of soil to withstand the loads of a building, and diversion of water courses away from the building. For design of spaces below ground, including basements or fully habitable spaces, provisions for moisture control and for thermal insulation are critical. In some locales, for example southern United States, provisions of termite control are critical. In locales subject to earthquakes, the substructure and the details of construction at the earth’s surface plate, are very critical. The point that demarks below-ground and above-ground construction is in almost all building a critical point of detail. B Shell The shell of building consists of the structure and the external enclosure or envelope that defines the internal environment and serves as barrier and/or selective filter to all environmental factors acting upon it. In general, the shell of a building is designed to last a long time, although components of the shell and enclosure assembly, such as roofing and sealants, require regular maintenance and cyclical replacement. The roof is the element of the shell most exposed to extreme climatic variation. Roofing systems protect the structure, but also may provide openings and access for daylighting, maintenance and fire protection. Walls are complex assemblies because they perform a wide range of often conflicting functions, including view, daylighting and sun tempering, protection of building systems, while presenting the predominant visible representation of the design within its natural and/ or civic context. C Interiors Interiors includes elements for defining interior partitions, walls, ceilings, floor finishes and stairwells, and may or may not be separate from the superstructure or shell. Their purpose is to define, complete and make useable the interior spaces of the building. Some elements of the interior such as flooring and doors must sustain heavy use. Both ceilings and some flooring systems are frequently accessed to interstitial services spaces above and below. In general, interior constructions are intended to be regularly maintained and possibly frequently moved or replaced, especially to accommodate changing uses. D Services Services are distinct subsystems that complete the interior spaces, making them comfortable, safe and effective for habitation. They include conveying systems, plumbing, heating and cooling, fire protection, electrical and communication systems, each subject to frequent inspection, maintenance, upgrading and replacement.

Fig. 1. Building elements


xxiii

Introduction Structural and environmental forces Building structures and shells are designed to withstand the structural loads and environmental forces generated from within and without, in regular use conditions, and also in the extremes of climate and of natural disaster (Figs. 2 and 3). To visualize the complex functioning of a building construction, its structure and systems, consider the loads and environmental forces imposed by: •

gravity loads

•

wind/seismic loads

•

expansion/contraction of materials

•

heat and cold

•

moisture and precipitation

•

sound

•

fire emergency

Gravity loads The building shell and structure will always be subject to the gravity load of its own weight, referred to as dead load. A building shell will also have to sustain superimposed gravity and wind loads of varying magnitude and/or duration. These are referred to as live loads. All gravity loads are transferred through the envelope or components to the ground via rigid elements. The exception is in air-supported structures, where such loads are resisted through internal air pressure, with the ground then acting as counterweight to uplift. Gravity loads will cause deformations in the envelope: -

in rigid envelopes due to dead loads only will be permanent but not necessarily unchanging: certain materials tend to continue to deform over time under sustained load even when there is no change in the magnitude of such load.

-

deformations will also be amplified by superimposed live loads, generally reverting to their previous position after removal of the live loads, as long as stresses do not exceed the elastic limit of the material.

Wind/seismic loads Wind forces—the flow of air against, around, and over a building shell or envelope—will affect the stability of the shell and structure: -

Vertical components facing the wind will be under positive pressure.

-

Vertical components parallel to or facing away from the wind will be subject to negative air pressure, as will all horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces.

-

Lateral deflection or deformation of the vertical frame of an envelope is resisted by horizontal components of the enclosure, roof and floor assemblies, acting as diaphragms.

-

The dead load of flat or nearly flat roof assemblies will counteract the negative wind pressure proportionately to the weight of each component: light horizontal envelopes may be deflected upwards.

-

In locales subject to earthquakes, the effects of seismic loads require safety provisions to resist and minimize earthquake damage and to protect human life.

Expansion/contraction Movement will occur in all components of the envelope due to variations in their internal temperature: -

Fig. 2. Structural forces

xxiv


Components of envelopes exposed to solar radiation gain heat and expand proportionately to their individual coefficients of expansion. Components adjacent to them but not thus exposed may re-

Introduction main at constant temperature and not expand at all: when such components are continuously attached to each other, they may fail due to differential movement. -

Components of an envelope may also swell and shrink due to changes in their internal moisture content.

-

All components of an enclosure are in almost constant movement, interacting between each other based on their physical state and properties.

Heat and cold Heat will flow through the envelope whenever a temperature differential exists between outside and inside surfaces. Such flow of heat must be controlled whenever the interior environment of an enclosure has to be maintained within limits of comfort: -

Flow of heat cannot be stopped entirely, but is impeded by insulation. Heat will also be gained by or lost by air leakage through the envelope whenever temperature and/or pressure differentials between interior and exterior environments exist.

-

Air leakage can be minimized by making the envelope airtight. Completely preventing air leakage can seldom, if ever, be achieved.

Moisture Air leaking through the envelope will transport water vapor. Water vapor condenses out of the air/vapor mixture when it drops below a specific temperature, called the dew point. Water vapor will also migrate from an area of higher vapor pressure to an area with lower vapor pressure, and will condense upon reaching the dew point. Condensation may occur within the envelope, which may lead to damage and possible failure of the envelope. Rain water may be drawn into or through an envelope by differences in air pressure across the skin. Wind pressures against the exterior surfaces will be greater than interior air pressures, and such difference then becomes the driving force for water and air penetration into the interior. Sound Transmission of external sound through an envelope may have to be controlled for the comfort of the occupants. Transmission of sound through a barrier is inversely proportional to the mass of the barrier; light envelopes will be less effective than heavy ones. Any opening in the envelope will effectively destroy it usefulness as a barrier to sound transmission. Interior components of an enclosure, such as floor assemblies, partitions, ceilings may also be required to control sound: -

air borne sound within a space by absorbing it to reduce its intensity; reflecting and/or scattering it.

-

air borne sound transmission from one space to adjacent ones.

-

structure-borne sound by damping it, or by isolating its source.

Fire emergency The envelope of a building shell or space enclosure and/or its components are required to resist the effects of fire for a specific minimum of time without a significant reduction of structural strength and/or stability to ensure the safety of the occupants. Generally, the interior structural assemblies of an enclosure are required by building codes to be fire-resistant rated for a specific time interval. -

walls to prevent the spread of interior fire, commonly referred to as fire walls, may be required to compartmentalize large spaces, or to separate different activities within a single enclosure.

-

exterior walls may have to be fire-resistant rated when separation from adjacent enclosures is less than a specific minimum. Fig. 3. Environmental forces


xxv

Introduction

The Shell B1 Elements of a building superstructure The forces upon all building superstructures are defined by design loads, predicted from gravity and environmental forces described above. The most common structural materials are wood, steel, concrete and masonry, each described in separate articles in Part II, Chapter B1. Modern construction materials and applications include tensioned fabric structures, used for large span assembly spaces, and air-supported structures for temporary and partial occupancy applications (Fig. 4). Columns and girders Means of structural support for the envelope and/or interior elements of an enclosure may consist of: •

Horizontal elements to safely resist:

-

gravity loads of a roof deck, or of floor deck or decks.

-

gravity loads of walls when supported on such horizontal elements.

-

lateral loads acting directly on such elements or transmitted through walls which they brace.

•

Vertical elements to transmit gravity and lateral loads imposed upon them by horizontal elements and/or walls to the foundation/ ground.

Columns and girders/bearing walls Horizontal elements may be classified as: -

Primary: when the deck assembly or the decking component of such assembly bears directly on them.

-

Secondary: when supporting the decking component of a deck assembly between widely spaced primary supports.

Primary horizontal elements are referred to as girders. Vertical elements which support them are columns. Secondary vertical elements are referred to as framing. A roof or floor assembly, whether alone or combined with framing to support it, is referred to as the deck or decking. Girders Girders may be:

Fig. 4. Elements of structure

xxvi


-

Solid web, also often referred to as beams of various materials, such as structural steel; solid or laminated wood; or reinforced concrete.

-

Open web, commonly referred to as trusses of various materials, such as structural steel; or wood.

-

Pitched or curved such as trusses with pitched or curved top chords supported on columns.

-

Curved in different configurations, with the girder and columns

Introduction

being combined into one element; generally referred to as arches. Primary horizontal supports may also be walls which combine girders and columns into one element called bearing walls, or portions of walls may function as columns commonly referred to as pilasters, to support point loads, such as by girders. Curved decks (arches, vaults, domes) Means of support for the envelope of an enclosure may consist of a curved monolithic deck only, commonly referred to as a structural shell which combines structural support and decking monolithically, usually capable of transmitting loads in more than two directions to foundation/ground. This type of structure, including arches, vaults and domes, are highly efficient for materials that have strength in compression, because it transmits gravity and lateral loads acting upon it essentially in compression, without bending or twisting. The curvature is principally influenced by requirements of load transfer; shapes may be barrel arches, domes, cones, hyperbolic paraboloids. Historical examples are of adobe and masonry. Reinforced concrete is most commonly used in modern building construction. Tensioned fabric structures Modern fabric materials and tensioned structures combine to offer a new technology for spanning and enclosing large volume spaces, with permanent, temporary and convertible variations. This class of structure, derivative of the traditional tent structure but utilizing the tensile strength of modern synthetic fabrics, has developed over the past thirty years and is made increasingly practical by improved analysis techniques and applications. Because they are lightweight, tensioned fabric structures are efficient in long span applications. Air-supported structures Air-supported structures are an alternative enclosure system, most commonly used for temporary or partial use. The means of support for an air-supported envelope consist of a flexible membrane, which generally functions as the complete enclosure, retained in position by a combination of anchored cable supports and/or air pressure only. There are two types, both of which have to be anchored to a foundation or directly to the ground against displacement by wind forces, and/or to resist uplift of pressurization: -

Air supported: when the interior is sufficiently pressurized to counteract the effects of gravity load of the membrane itself as well as all superimposed gravity and lateral loads. Interior is always under positive pressure and provisions to maintain such pressure are required at all penetrations through the membrane.

-

Air inflated: when completely supported by pressurized air entrapped within the membrane. Interior of air inflated enclosure is at atmospheric pressure.

Fig. 4. (Continued) Elements of structure


xxvii

Introduction

B2 Exterior enclosure The building enclosure is a continuous air and watertight barrier, maintained to separate the contained environment from that external to it. The barrier or envelope consists of a wall enclosure and roofing assembly covering the contained space (Figs. 5 and 6). Walls and roofs may be separate distinct elements, or essentially one, without any clear differentiation between them. Design of building enclosures includes considerations of: -

thermal insulation,

-

building movement,

-

moisture control,

-

corrosion of materials, especially metals.

Each of these design issues are discussed in detail in the Part II Chapter B2 on Exterior Closure. Complete exterior wall enclosures and assemblies include: -

wall systems.

-

exterior doors and entries.

-

windows.

The composition of a wall system and assembly commonly includes: -

Structural core: to resist gravity loads of the assembly itself, those that might be superimposed upon it, and lateral loads. The structural core may be a separate component such as framing or the core may function as the complete wall assembly.

-

Exterior facing: to resist the effects of environmental factors. Exterior facing may be a separate component attached to and supported by the structural core, or it may be an integral part of such core.

-

Interior facing, either as a required component to complete the wall assembly such as over framing or as an optional component added to satisfy functional and/or visual requirements.

-

Together or separately, the elements of the exterior wall assembly must provide means of support against lateral forces, either wind or seismic, by columns or pilasters when span of wall is horizontal, by floor and roof assemblies when loads are transferred vertically.

Wall assemblies may be variously described and classified by one or several of the following characteristics:

Fig. 5. Wall elements

xxviii


-

Bearing walls: carrying superimposed gravity loads in addition to their own weight.

-

Nonbearing walls: not carrying superimposed gravity loads in addition to their own weight, whether capable of carrying such loads or not, and supported directly on foundations/ground.

-

Curtain walls: nonbearing walls secured to and supported by the structural frame of an enclosure:

-

Grid type walls: vertical and horizontal framing members supported by floor or roof assemblies and supporting between them various in-fill panels.

-

Wall panels: prefabricated panels spanning between floor and roof or between floors and functioning as the complete wall assembly.

-

Faced walls functioning as facing and/or continuous backup and support for various types of facings. Backup walls may be bearing, nonbearing, or curtain. Facings may be: off-site fabricated panels or units such as metal; or faced composite panels, or ceramic tile units assembled on site or made on-site, such as stucco.

Introduction

-

Masonry walls may be described as: composite (when consisting of two or more wythes of masonry where at least one wythe is dissimilar to other wythes) or; cavity (of two wythes of masonry built to provide an air space within the wall).

-

Shear wall may be any of the above when the wall structure is designed to resist horizontal forces in the plane of the wall.

B3 Roofing Roof assemblies, described in Part II Chapter B3, commonly include: -

roofing or roofing membrane to resist the effects of environmental factors, especially water proofing.

-

substrate or decking for the roofing which not only carries the roofing but also resists the effects of all forces acting on the assembly.

-

means of support for the deck: such as girders, bearing walls, columns.

-

means of rainwater drainage, through gutter and downspout systems. openings, including skylights, hatchways, heat/smoke vents,

-

accessories, including curbs, walkways, cupolas, relief vents, and snow guards (on sloped roofs).

Roof decks may be: -

decking or substrate, only when such decking is capable of spanning between widely spaced primary supports without the need for any secondary framing:

Long-span decking may be considered as combining decking and framing in one when its span exceeds an arbitrary maximum of eight feet. -

decking and widely spaced framing, eight feet or less on centers, with the framing spanning between widely spaced primary supports:

-

decking and closely spaced framing, two feet or less on centers, with the framing spanning between primary supports.

-

decking such as rigid panels or flexible membrane supported by a cable network.

Fig. 6. Roofing elements

Rigid roof assemblies may be flat, pitched, curved; or in any combination.


xxix

Introduction Interiors C1 Interior construction Interior constructions include ceiling, partition and interior door and wall panel and flooring systems (Fig. 7). Due to the need for changes in internal space arrangements, especially in modern office buildings, all elements of interior construction need to be accessible and flexible in rearrangement, replacement and upgrading, such as through dropped ceiling and raised flooring systems. Ceilings systems Ceiling systems are nonstructural components of an enclosure. Depending on their support on floor or roof assemblies. ceilings may be: -

visual screens and/or functional separation between an inhabited space and the underside of a floor or roof assembly above.

-

integral components of floor or roof assemblies when such assemblies are required to be fire-resistant rated to protect the structural framing and/or decking from effects of fire.

Partitions The space within an envelope may be fully or partly divided by partitions to: -

control movement through enclosed space.

-

provide visual and/or speech privacy to the occupants.

-

enclose different environments within a single envelope.

-

separate or isolate different activities.

-

prevent the spread of fire within the enclosed space.

Partitions may be: - of different heights: below eye level, to above eye level, to ceiling, or to underside of floor or roof assembly above: -

fixed, relocatable, or operable; supported on, or suspended from floor or roof assemblies:

-

when supported, they are capable of carrying their own weight, but generally not superimposed loads.

Floors Floors are flat, commonly horizontal surfaces within the envelope of an enclosure. Flooring finishes and their substrates may be subject to heavy use. Floor assemblies include: -

flooring: to resist the effects of traffic over the surface of the floor deck.

-

deck: to support all loads imposed on the floor assembly.

-

means of support for the deck.

C2 Staircases Staircases are provided for convenience of access and communication between levels of a building, and are determined to meet standards of emergency egress and refuge areas, universal design and accessibility. Stairs are critical elements of a building, because of their heavy use and the resulting need for safety, given special emphasis in the Part II Chapter C2, “Stairwells.” Means of circulation between two or more floors or levels may include:

Fig. 7. Interior constructions. Note: Moving systems for circulation and conveyance are classified under Services

xxx


-

stairs for foot traffic.

-

ramps for foot traffic, universal design accessibility, and vehicular traffic.

-

ladders for limited access.

Introduction Services D1 Conveying systems Design criteria for design of escalators and elevators are described in the Part II Chapter D1, “Conveying systems.” Means of conveyance/ circulation between floors or levels may include: -

escalators for continuous movement of large number of persons.

-

elevators for intermittent movement of persons or goods.

-

dumbwaiters for continuous or intermittent movement of goods.

-

moving sidewalks.

D2 Plumbing All buildings housing human activity must be provided with portable water in quantities sufficient to meet the needs of the occupants and related activities. Plumbing system design is best conceived as part of a water conservation plan: fresh water is a critical health and environmental issue and can be aided by use of water conserving plumbing within buildings and design of landscaping features that retain and filter water in its path to the local aquifer. -

Water supply systems distribute water to fixtures or devices which serve as the terminals of such system.

-

Waste water systems removes used and polluted water, based on the anticipated quantities of water flow through all fixtures.

D3 Heating and air conditioning (HVAC) HVAC design consists of mechanically assisted systems to control of temperature, humidity and the quality of air within an enclosure, at comfort levels acceptable to the occupants. HVAC systems generally include: -

Heating plant to supply sufficient heat to replace that transmitted and lost to the exterior through the envelope.

-

Equipment to cool and dehumidify the air: chiller, condenser, fans, pumps.

-

Humidifier to maintain the air at desired level of relative humidity.

-

Distribution system: supply and return, and filters.

-

Fresh air supply.

-

Exhaust systems to rid the interior of polluted air.

D4 Fire protection Fire safety in buildings is a principal consideration and is greatly aided by proper design of building spaces, access and egress ways, materials and protection systems, described in the Part II Chapter D4, “Fire Protection.” Modern fire protection systems greatly improve fire safety through fire detection and suppression systems, including: -

sprinkler systems.

-

standpipe systems.

-

fire extinguishers and cabinets strategically placed throughout a building.

-

fire alarm systems.

D5 Electrical systems Electrical systems include electric power, telephone and communications, and electrical specialties, such as audio-visual and security systems. These systems have experienced rapid improvement and development, indicated in the articles in Part II Electrical systems. Design of lighting provides an opportunity for energy conservation and improved human comfort, productivity and amenity, especially when carefully integrated with daylighting. Fig. 8. Services Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

xxxi

xxxii


ARCHITECTURAL F U N D A M E N TA L S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Universal design and accessible design Architecture and regulation Bioclimatic design Solar control Daylighting design Natural ventilation Indoor air quality Acoustics: theory and applications History of building and urban technologies Construction materials technology Intelligent building systems Design of atriums for people and plants Building economics Estimating and design cost analysis Environmental life cycle assessment Construction and demolition waste management Construction specifications Design-Build delivery system Building commissioning: a guide for architects Building performance evaluation Monitoring building performance

I

1 9 21 35 63 75 85 101 117 125 139 151 157 169 183 193 199 209 215 231 239


xxxiii

xxxiv


Universal design and accessible design 1

1

Universal design and accessible design John P. S. Salmen Elaine Ostroff

Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

1

1 Universal design and accessible design

2


Universal design accessible design Universaland design and accessible design 1 1

Summary: Universal design is an approach to architectural design that considers the entire range of capacities and potentials of people and how they use buildings and products throughout their lives. The approach goes beyond technical standards that provide only minimal accessibility in compliance with regulations and extends design to increase the capacities of men, women and children of all ages and abilities.

Key words: accessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act, disability, ergonomics, human factors, universal design.

Fig. 1. Creating places for people. Public rest seats with differentiated heights. Davis, CA. Brian Donnelly Design.

What is universal design? The goal of universal design could be said is create buildings, places and details that provide a supportive environment to the largest number of individuals throughout life’s variety of changing circumstances. All people experience changes in mobility, agility, and perceptual acuity throughout their life spans, from childhood to adulthood. At any time in our lives, we may experience temporary or permanent physical or psychological impairments which may be disabling and which may increase our dependence upon certain aspects of the physical environment. In addition, people are diverse in size, preferences and abilities. Universal design responds to these conditions and potentials and seeks to extend the human capacity by accommodation supported by the designed environment.

Universal design also recognizes that within the long life span of a building-properly conceived as a fifty- to one hundred-year life cycle or longer, the average and standard norms of human dimensions and capacities are changing. In the U. S., for example, the height (and weight) of the average individual is increasing with each generation (see Appendix page AP-3). This suggests anticipation of changing dimensional and safety standards to respond to the demographics of our society. What passed as minimal height requirements fifty years ago accommodates a decreasing portion of the population. Accommodation to an older population requires increased design sensitivity to sensory and mobility impairments.

Universal design is an evolving design discipline that builds upon and attempts to go beyond the minimum standards for “accessible design,” to create designs that are sensitive to the needs and thus useable by the largest possible number of users. Unlike accessible design, there are no regulations which define or enforce universal design. Instead, architects and landscape architects sensitive to the issues of universal design recognize that everyone at some time in their life is likely to experience a disabling condition, thus requiring increased accommodation by design. Universal design involves both a design sensitivity and sensibility that seek to understand and support the full range of human capacities. Ergonomics and human factor analysis, an applied anthropometric approach to design pioneered beginning in the 1930s by Henry Dreyfuss and Alvin R. Tilley (Henry Dreyfuss Associates 1993) are part of the inherited discipline and ethic of universal design. Universal design goes beyond any static conception and seeks to enable and enhance the changing abilities of humans throughout their life span, and the changing demographics of our society as we move into the 21st Century.

-

The 21st century is going to see a tremendous growth in the numbers of people over the age of 65 (Fig. 2).

-

More than half the people over 65 have a physical disability.

-

By 2025, the average life span is expected to reach 100 years of age for people in developed countries (primarily due to advances in medical technology).

Universal design makes designer, user and building owner more sensitive to what can be done to improve the long-term quality of what we build. Design and long-term building quality is improved by designing for easier access, reduced accidents, easier wayfinding and transit of people and goods, and design details for people of all ages, sizes, and capacities.

Demographics The need and demand for universally designed spaces and products is much larger than the current population of 49 million people with disabilities in the U. S. Everyone over their lifetime will experience some temporary or permanent disability. The market includes children, people who must move around with luggage or other encumbrances, people with temporary disabilities and especially older people. The aging baby-boom generation is undoubtedly the true beneficiary of universal design for three reasons.

Mistaken myths of universal design •

Myth: Costs for universal design are higher. Fact: It costs no more to universally design a space or product. It does take more thinking and attention to the users. Such steps normally pay for themselves many times over in reduced design failure and reduced costs of changing environments after they are built. Through thinking through all uses, the long term durability and usefulness of a design is increased.

Authors: John P. S. Salmen, AIA and Elaine Ostroff Credits: Photographs are from Universal Designers and Consultants (1996). References: Barrier Free Environments. 1996. Fair Housing Design Manual. Publication B181. Washington, DC: HUD. Fair Housing Clearing House. (800) 343 2442. Henry Dreyfuss Associates. 1993. The Measure of Man and Woman: Human Factors in Design. New York: Whitney Library of Design. U. S. Department of Justice. 1994 revised. ADA Standards for Accessible Design. 28 CFR Part 36, Appendix A. Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Justice. Additional references and resources are listed at the end of this article. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

3

1 Universal design and accessible design •

Myth: Few people need universal design. Fact: The number of people who benefit from universal design is very great. All individuals have special conditions and requirements at different times of life. Universal design considers those needs and abilities recognizing people with disabilities, as well as young and aging individuals, plus those who associate with and assist them. Universal design addresses the users over their entire life span for the building or product over its entire life span.

•

Fig. 2. Population Age 65 and older

(Sources: U. S. Bureau of the Census: Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970, Series B107-115; Current Population Reports, Series P-23, No. 59; and Statistical Abstract of the United States. 1991 (111th edition), Tables No. 13, 18, 22, and 41; and James Pirkl 1994, Transgenerational Design. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold)

Myth: One size fits all. Fact: Universal design seeks to accommodate difference and variation, not minimally acceptable averages. Strategies may include adjustable or interchangeable elements, designing spaces so that they can be easily customized, and allowing flexibility of use, although sometimes a single solution may fit all.

Guidelines for universal design The following principles describe guidelines for universal design developed by the Center for Universal Design (1995), whose web page listed in the additional references illustrates applications. The guidelines offer criteria to use in design, or in evaluating designs: •

Simple and intuitive use: Use of the design is easy to understand, regardless of the user’s experience, knowledge, language skills, or current concentration level.

•

Equitable use: The design does not disadvantage or stigmatize any group of users.

•

Perceptible information: The design communicates necessary information effectively to the user, regardless of ambient conditions or the user’s sensory abilities.

•

Tolerance for error: The design minimizes hazards and the adverse consequences of accidental or unintended fatigue.

•

Flexibility in use: The design accommodates a wide range of individual preferences and abilities.

•

Low physical effort: The design can be used efficiently and comfortably and with a minimum of fatigue.

•

Size and space for approach and use: Appropriate size and space is provided for approach, reach, manipulation, and use, regardless of the user’s body size, posture, or mobility. Henry Dreyfuss Associates (1993) provides a number of templates for ergonomic analysis of hand and body for design of furniture and environmental settings.

What is accessible design? Accessible design is design that meets standards that allow people with disabilities to enjoy a minimum level of access to environments and products. Since 1988 with the passage of the Fair Housing Amendments Act, and in 1990 with the passage of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), accessibility standards now cover much of what is newly constructed or renovated.

Fig. 3. The “Enabler Model” (Steinfeld, et al. 1979)

4


Unlike earlier federal requirements that were restricted to facilities built with federal support, these far reaching new regulations cover privately owned as well as government supported facilities, programs and services. Accessibility criteria are found in building codes and accessibility criteria such as the Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, the Fair Housing Amendment Act Accessibility Guidelines or the American National Standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities CABO/ANSI A117.1 These prescribe a compliance approach to design, where the designer meets the minimum criteria to allow a specific class of people—those with disabilities—to use the environment without much difficulty. Accessible design is a more positive term for what was previously called “barrier free” or “handicap design,” both being examples of unfortunate terminology which focuses on the negative process of eliminating barriers that confront people with disabilities. These minimum requirements provide a baseline that universal designers can build upon.

Universal design and accessible design 1 People are so diverse and adaptable that design standards to quantify how people use objects and spaces must be general. In the late 1970’s Rolf Faste and Edward Steinfeld cataloged the major functional abilities that could be limited by disability. Their “Enabler Model” summarizes the environmental implications of limitations in the 17 major functional areas found in people with disabilities, often in combinations (Fig. 3). Accessibility standards have simplified this overwhelming diversity down to three main groups of conditions shown below with the related component of the environment. By understanding the physical implications of these broad groups of disabling conditions designers can understand the criteria in the building codes and standards. •

Sensory impairments: Design of information systems.

This includes vision, hearing and speech impairments including total and partial loss of function and leads us to the design recommendation for redundancy of communication media to insure that everyone can receive information and express themselves over communication systems. For example, reinforcing both lighting and circulation cues, wayfinding can be enhanced. Or by providing both audible and visual alarms, everyone will be able to know when an emergency occurs. •

Fig. 4. Renovated entry landscape with sloping walkway and outdoor seating platform to Hunnewell Visitors Center at the Arnold Arboretum. Jamaica Plain, MA. Carol R. Johnson Associates, Landscape Architects.

Dexterity impairments: Design of operating controls and hardware.

This includes people with limitations in the use of their hands and fingers and suggests the “closed fist rule,” testing selection of equipment controls and hardware by operating it with a closed fist. In addition, this addresses the location of equipment and controls so that they are within the range of reach of people who use wheelchairs and those who are of short stature. •

Mobility impairments: Space and circulation systems.

This includes people who use walkers, crutches, canes and wheelchairs plus those who have difficulty climbing stairs or going long distances. The T-turn and 5 ft. (1.52 m) diameter turning area provide key plan evaluation criteria here. These concepts and the accessible route of travel insure that all people have accessible and safe passage from the perimeter of a site to and through all areas of a facility. Conflicting Criteria Accessibility has overlapping regulations and civil rights implications as established by U. S. law. Designers face the challenge of sorting out the specific accessibility regulations that apply to their work as well as of understanding the purpose and the technical requirements. In addition to overarching federal standards required by the ADA, each state has its own access regulations. There is a concerted national effort to adopt more uniform, harmonious regulations, but designers must be aware that if elements of the state regulation are more stringent, they supersede the federal standard. In addition, the civil rights aspect of both the Fair Housing Amendments Act and the ADA establish requirements that go beyond the technical requirements. For example, the new requirement in the ADA to attempt barrier removal in existing buildings (even when no renovations are planned) is not detailed in the Standards but is discussed in the full ADA regulation (Department of Justice 1994). The professional responsibilities and liability of the designer are being redefined through these regulations. Applications of these regulations as defined by ADA language are interpreted by evolving legal case law and in resulting guidelines, such as those of U. S. HUD which establish public housing standards and of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission which establish U. S. workplace standards. The universal design process The issues raised by accessibility regulations are best addressed and combined in a commitment to universal design. The more one knows

Fig. 5. Entry terrace modifications, including ramp and handrails, blending with historic design. Hopedale Town Hall, Hopedale, MA. Nichols Design Associates, Architects.

Fig. 6. Multisensory signage, combining “full spatial” tactile and visual text and maps and infrared talking signs. The Lighthouse, New York, NY. Roger Whitehouse & Company, Graphics.


5

1 Universal design and accessible design as a designer, the better the resulting design. But universal design considerations are as complex and in a sense as unpredictable as the variety of human experience and capacities. No one knows it all. This simple fact demands that the approach to universal design involve many people representing a range of insights from the beginning of the programming and design process. Designers cannot get such information from books, databases or design criteria alone. Designers must involve the future users, the customers of the design, through universal design reviews. Universal design reviews undertaken at critical early and evolving phases of the design process are opportunities to improve any design, eliminate errors, improve its user friendliness and at the same time involve and thus satisfy the special needs of owners and occupants of the resulting building. Because no one person can anticipate all possible perceptions and needs, a design should be given broad discussion and review, with input from many points of view. Designers must listen to and hear from perceptive spokespeople who can articulate the needs and responses of:

Fig. 7. Signage with raised tactile and visual guide, including textures of water and trees as map to public park, which also includes wind chimes for aural orientation. Flood Park, San Mateo County, CA. Moore Iacofano Goltsman, Landscape Architects.

-

People of all stages of life, from the point of view of the youngster whose eye level is half that of adults to elders and others who have difficulty with mobility, lighting distractions and disorientation at transition points in a building.

-

Wheel-chair users and people with other physical differences, which can be a common as left- and right-handedness.

-

People with visual and aural impairments.

-

Persons who maintain and service our buildings, carrying heavy loads or other potential impediments to safe travel.

-

All people under conditions of emergency.

This requires that the process of universal design be broadly representative, user responsive and participatory. Because many lay persons cannot visualize actual conditions from plans or drawings, universal designing reviews may require alternative media including threedimensional models, virtual reality simulations, and, in some cases, full scale mock up prototypes, whereby all can experience, critically evaluate and offer ways to improve a design in process. The more diverse the group, the better. It is only in this way that designers can keep up with and come to understand how our changing culture will be using our environments and products in the 21st century. Examples of universal design In 1996, the National Endowment for the Arts and the National Building Museum sponsored a search for examples of universal design in the fields of architecture, interior design, landscape architecture, graphic design and industrial design. This juried selection features the work of designers who are reaching “beyond compliance” with the Americans with Disabilities Act to create products and environments that are useable by people with the broadest possible range of abilities throughout their life (Figs. 1 and 4-15).

Fig. 8. Public toilet accommodating all users including families. Automatic sensor controls of plumbing. Visual and tactile operating instructions in various languages. San Francisco, CA. J. C. Decaux International with Ron Mace and Barry Atwood.

6


The more that designers learns from the diverse users of the environment, the more sensitive and sophisticated our universal designs become. Some the best examples of special design are almost invisible to see because they blend in so well with their environmental context. Design inspirations such as those revealed in photographs that accompany this article are the best way to convey both the simplicity and complexity of universal design. They exemplify the principal message of universal design, to extend our design ethic and sensibilities in order to enhance the abilities of all people who will occupy our designs.

Universal design and accessible design 1 Additional references and resources U. S. Access Board. ADA Accessibility Guidelines. www.accessboard.gov. (800) USA-ABLE. ADA Regional Disability and Business Technical Assistance Centers. (800) 949 4 ADA. Barrier Free Environments. 1996. ADA Highlights Slide Show on the Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design. Raleigh, NC: Barrier Free Environments. CABO/ANSI. 1997. American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. CABO/ANSI A117.1. Falls Church, VA: Council of American Building Officials. www.cabo.org/a117.htm. Center for Universal Design. 1995. Principles of Universal Design. Raleigh, NC: North Carolina State University. (800) 647-6777. www.ncsu.edu/ncsu/design/cud/ Mueller, James P. 1992. Workplace Workbook 2.0: An Illustrated Guide to Workplace Accommodation and Technology. Amherst, MA: Human Resource Development Press. Pirkl, James. 1994. Transgenerational Design. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. (continued)

Fig. 10. Meandering Brook designed for active water play for children of all capacities. Children’s Museum, Boston, MA. Carol R. Johnson Associates, Landscape Architects.

Fig. 9. Talking sign system, providing a directionally-sensitive voice message, including bus schedule, transmitted by infrared light to a hand-held receiver. San Francisco, CA. Smith-Kettlewell/Talking Signs, Inc.

Fig. 11. Dual height viewports for children of all ages in doors, part of wayfinding system at the Lighthouse, New York City, NY. Steven M. Goldberg, FAIA and Jan Keane, FAIA, Mitchell/ Giurgola Architects. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

7

1 Universal design and accessible design Steinfeld, Edward, Steven Schroeder, James Duncan, Rolfe Faste, Deborah Chollet, Marylin Bishop, Peter Wirth and Paul Cardell. 1979, 1986. Access to the Built Environment: a review of literature. Prepared for U. S. HUD, Office of Policy Development and Research. Publication #660. Rockville, MD: HUD User. U. S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Forest Service, et al. 1993. Universal Access to Outdoor Recreation: A Design Guide. Berkeley, CA: MIG Communications. U. S. Department of Justice. 1994 revised. ADA Standards for Accessible Design. 28 CFR Part 36, App. A. Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Justice. Universal Designers and Consultants. 1996. Images of Excellence in Universal Design. Rockville, MD: Universal Designers & Consultants, Inc. Universal Design Newsletter. Rockville, MD: Universal Designers & Consultants, Inc. Welch, Polly. 1995. Strategies for Teaching Universal Design. Boston, MA: Adaptive Environments.

8

Fig. 12. Full length entry sidelight at doorways. Center for Universal Design, Raleigh, NC. Ronald Mace.

Fig. 14. Swing Clear Hinge, allowing a door to be fully opened for wider access. Gilreath and Associates, Interior Designers.

Fig. 13. G. E. Real Life Design Kitchen including adjustable height appliances and counters, natural light and high contract trim for users with low vision. Mary Jo Peterson, Interior Design.

Fig. 15. Window Lock/Latch, accommodating dexterity limitations and “aging in place.” Owens Residence, Chicago, IL. Design One, Industrial Design.


Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2

2

Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics Francis T. Ventre


9

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics

10


Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2 2

Summary: Citing Alvar Aalto’s ethical stance that architecture should “do no harm,” professional ethics are reviewed alongside developments in architectural theory, codes of conduct and building regulation.

Key words: code of professional conduct, design theory, professional ethics, regulation. Tuberculosis Sanatorium. Paimio, Finland. Alvar Aalto, Architect. 1928-33. Ethics and design are so densely intertwined, so intimately interactive, that ethical issues in architectural pedagogy are almost always arise in the context of a specific design situation. There is, of course, the obligatory acknowledgment of “professional ethics” in the equally obligatory “professional practice” course late in the undergraduate’s career. Thus sequestered, however, professional ethics is exposed to not nearly as much scrutiny as is the moral dimension of design work. Moral development, in other words, is—or should be—an important subsidiary outcome of an architectural education. Nor is this emergency of ethics out of design discourse surprising, when one considers that the first comprehensive theory of design (and most succinct and intellectually coherent) issued from Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics.1 Ethics and design share more than a common intellectual ancestor, for what I would like to call the “design attitude” appears in the works of the principal ethicists throughout the development of western philosophy. By design attitude I mean, following Aristotle and C. S. Pierce and scores of moral philosophers between them, the proposing, effectuating, and evaluating of any action in terms of its consequences.2 In other words, design is the forethought of purposive, intentional action, and the consequences of that action are evaluated against the purposes and intentions that precipitated the action in the first place. Not all design theorists subscribe to this definition of design. Nor, for that matter, are all ethicists consequentialists, believing that ethical matters are utterly contingent upon outcomes or results. 3 Consequestialism entails a position on social values analogous to the secular economic theories of the eighteenth century. Utilitarians and the more obscure seventeenth century Christian pacifists who proposed, in the words of Ralph Cutworth, that “the greatest benevolence of every rational agent towards all constitutes the happiest state of all, and therefore the common good of all is the supreme law.”4

While the teleologically disposed ethicists claim that things are right or moral if they have good consequences, ethicists of the obligationist or deontic persuasion take the view that there are absolutes in ethics, that some motives or attitudes—honesty, promise-keeping, respect for persons, and (an example from medical practice and research) “informed consent”—are in themselves morally right, and transcendently so, making of ethics an unflinching duty rather than an exercise of discriminating judgments about anticipated outcomes. The distinction, though, may be only momentary. For, as Dewey argues, when it is recognized that ‘motive’ is but an abbreviated name for the attitude and predisposition towards ends embodied in disposition, all ground for making a sharp separation between motive and intention falls away.”5 With these “metaethical” categories in mind, a rereading of the design-theoretical literature, both the abundant prescriptive exportations and explanatory treatises and the infrequent descriptive accounts, might be instructive. Such a review exceeds the scope of the present article. However, a consideration of the deliberations of one notable designer allows us to examine the stability of these metaethical categories for architecture. Alvar Aalto articulated his own design ethics in a 1940 article published in America, one that deserves more attention from Aalto’s acolytes the architectural academy. (Perhaps it was because Aalto’s completed works are so sensually gratifying, so compellingly beautiful, that we all slight him by not attending to what he wrote and said.) Aalto believed that the “only way to humanize architecture” was to use methods which always are a combination of technical, physical, and psychological phenomena, never any one of them alone.”6 Moreover, continued Aalto, “technical functionalism is correct only if enlarged to cover even the psychophysical field.” Aalto illustrated his

Author: Francis T. Ventre, Ph.D. Credits: First published in Via 10, Graduate School of Fine Arts, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA. 1990, and reproduced by permission of the publisher. The author thanks Professors Norman Grover, religion, and Scott Poole, architecture, both of Virginia Polytechnic Institute; and Ed Robbins, architecture, of Massachusetts Institute of Technology, who commended on an earlier draft of this essay. Photos, except as noted: Archives of the Society of Finnish Architects (SAFA). References and notes: [1] Aristotle. Nichomachean Ethics. trans. M. Ostwald. 1962. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill. [2] C. S. Pierce. 1905. “What Pragmatism Is.” The Monist 15:161-181. This article is reproduced in many of the anthologies on pragmatism. One is H. S. Thayer, ed. 1970. Pragmatism: The Classic Writings. New York: New American Library. [3] These metaethical categories are distinguished, often with slightly different terminology, in virtually every reference or text on ethics. A recent exposition close to the subject of this paper is T. L. Beauchamp and T. P. Pinkard, eds. 1983. Ethics and Public Policy: An Introduction to Ethics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. [4] E. Flower. “Ethics of Peace,” in Dictionary of the History of Ideas. ed. Philip P. Wiener. 1973. Vol. III. New York: Charles Scribners Sons. [5] J. Dewey. 1960. Theory of the Moral Life. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

11

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics argument with recollections, design sketches and photographs of the Paimio Tuberculosis Sanatorium (1929-33) and the Viipuri Municipal Library (1930- 35). With modesty emboldened by ethical belief, Aalto argued that the responsible designer must inflict no harm on building users, nor even provide environments unsuitable for their use. His specific example was the library’s “indirect daylighting” using conical concrete skylights. Aalto was drawn to this design to preempt an ethically unacceptable alternative: To provide [an unmodulated] natural or an artificial light which destroys the human eye or is unsuitable for its use means reactionary architecture even if the building should otherwise be of high constructive value.” Here Aalto appears, in ethical terms, to be a consequentialist.

Fig. 1. Municipal Library. Viipuri, Finland. Alvar Aalto, Architect. 1927-35.

Fig. 2. Modulated ceiling to direct sound to rear of auditorium. Viipuri Municipal Library.

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [6] Alvar Aalto. “The Humanizing of Architecture.” Technology Review 43, no. 1 (1940). All Aalto quotes are from his article. Aalto scholar Richard Peters of the University of California, Berkeley, told me, while discussing the Technology Review article, that Aalto had expressed himself much more vividly on these distinctions in several unpublished writings. [7] Internationale Kongresse fur Neues Bauen. 1930. Die Wobuung fur dos Existenzminimum. Frankfurt. This document provides comparative analyses of typical plans as well as articles and is reproduced with plan annotations in English, in O. M. Ungers and I. Ungers, eds. 1979. Documents of Modern Architecture. Nendeln Liechtenstein Kraus. [8] Alvar Aalto. “Rationalism and Man.” lecture to the Annual meeting of the Swedish Craft Society, 9 May 1935. Condensed in W. C. Miller. 1984. Alvar Aalto: An Annotated Bibliography. New York: Garland Press. [9] Pierce’s later, more mature articulation of his consequentialism as it relates specifically to ethics takes this view. See Charles Hartschorne and Paul Weiss, eds. 1960-66. C. S. Pierce Collected Papers. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press. 5:411-437.

12


Aalto exercised himself over the total effects of the library’s lighting scheme and the sanitorium’s patient rooms, and not on their visual appearance alone. Aalto acknowledged that “The examples mentioned here are very tiny problems. But they are very close to the human being and hence become more important than problems of much larger scope.” Coming “very close to the human being” signifies Aalto’s defection from the abstract utilitarianism promulgated by CIAM and which he had himself earlier proselytized among his fellow Finns. Aalto participated in the 1929 CIAM Conference on the Minimum Dwelling held in Frankfurt.7 Even the title of the conference suggests a utilitarian maximizing of total benefits (or goods) and minimizing of disbenefits (or harms), all at the level of total social aggregates. There was, moreover, in CIAM (and in die Neue Sachlichkeit —the “New Objectivity”—ideology of the time) the obligationist focus on a method that would override all other considerations, such as the evaluation of results. Returning from Frankfurt, Aalto conveyed these ideas in lectures, articles, and newspaper interviews as part of his early efforts to spur Finnish society toward its rendezvous with the modern sensibility. Within ten years, however, Aalto would shift his attention (and allegiance) from CIAM’s abstract statistical aggregates to specific users, seemingly one at a time.8 Is this moving from one extreme to the other simply apostasy? The latter would be an axiological counterpart to the eclecticism of Aalto’s architectural style, his coming to terms with the sense of place and tradition that the then-ascendant International Style aesthetic denied. I believe it is the latter because, as he did stylistically, Aalto in this case fused opposite tendencies into one. In metaethical terms, he adopted the consequentialist approach that renders evaluative choice or judgment according to results. Going beyond that, he appears to have said that even the least harm to the user should override any other consideration—for instance, “high constructive value,” as he put it—and rule out the design action entirely. That seems to be an absolute obligational ethic—a designer’s general duty, if you will—that overrides any specific consequentialist consideration.9 What concerned Aalto was the extent to which designers, whose professional acts bring consequences to others, should be accountable to those others (at Paimio, the patients and their technical agents, the acousticians; at Viipuri, the readers and their technical agents, the visual psychophysicists). This concern prescribed both a universalized obligation and a critical sense of consequences relevant to a specific situational context. Aalto’s ethical stance, however, runs counter to some strongly held and long-standing beliefs of practicing or aspiring design professionals. Designers become designers, in part, because it is a professional role that provides a vehicle for personal fulfillment in a time when the organization of economic life threatens to relegate individual self-actualization to the nighttime and weekend fringes of a world that Wordsworth complains is “too much with us.” If I read Aalto correctly, that fulfillment cannot come at the cost of harm to others. The proposition that the gifted and talented are exempt from such rules of proper conduct would have dismayed Aalto

Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2 as much as it energized Nietzsche and his present-day epigones. But professional designers do submit to such rules; it is part of what distinguishes professionals from amateurs. Professional ethics Universally accepted definitions of “the professions” all refer to the professional’s concern with the welfare of the wider society in which the professional operates. Personal, individual advantage—even in the sublimated forms of aesthetic gratification or technical mastery— is not to be gained at the expense of the welfare of the larger social unit. Aalto went farther: for him, no single user should suffer. These sentiments are what distinguish the professional practice of design from, say, the amateur’s pursuits in sculpture or woodworking (arts and crafts that have manifest similarities to the concerns of architectural designers). This might have been on Aalto’s mind in the passages cited earlier. Most systems of ethics propose or at least address the normative criteria for dealing with moral problems such as the one just suggested: to what extent does the moral person maximize his or her own good and to what extent does she or he maximize the good accruing to others, whether to Aalto’s users one at a time, or to the greatest number? Here, indeed, is a contrast with a healthy egoism, an issue we take up again at the close of this discussion.10 Most discussions of professional ethics, whether in the classroom or in the professional society, address what William F. May terms “quandaries of practice.” The utilitarian calculus may be applied toward the resolution of these quandaries. Its scope, however, would be much narrower than the “all towards all” referred to by Cudworth. It would be counting only the short- and long-term benefits or disbenefits to the professional transaction’s immediate participants. Moreover, May points out, “much [professional] behavior is far from exemplary, it is merely customary; ethics is not ethos; morals is [sic] not reducible to mores.”11 Codes of professional ethics offer guidance to the practitioner seeking to resolve the quandaries encountered in everyday work (for instance, candor in scheduling and cost-estimating or tersgiversating to accommodate client preferences) reducing the backsliding that Professor May warns against. A code of professional ethics renders at this microscale the same kind of inspiration, guidance, and blessing to the commercially advantageous marriage-of-convenience of professional and client that an ecclesiastical ceremony might bring to a marriage. And peccadilloes transpire in ethical firms even as they do in sanctified marriages. To be sure, these codes of practice are revised from time to time, but not because ethical principles have changed. Rather, expanding technology and evolving social expectations present new dilemmas to the conscientious professional in design and construction.12 And, it must be reported, many professional societies had changes in codes of ethics thrust upon them in the 1970s by a United States Department of Justice that had read into such codes a “subornation of collusion in restraint of trade” among the subscribing professionals. The American Institute of Architects’ code, for instance, was ruled to be in violation of the Sherman Act by a U. S. court in a 1979 civil antitrust suit brought by a member it had suspended for a year.13 In consequence, the AIA adopted in 1986 and promulgated to its members in 1987 a revised Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct. But within a year of its reissuance, the AIA president—no doubt feeling harassed—wrote a “Dear Colleague” letter advising that “the AIA is at present subject of an inquiry by the Antitrust Division of the Department of Justice.”14 Legislating a collective morality is, under the U. S. Constitution, a daunting challenge. These new situations are familiar to attentive readers of the professional and trade press that regularly offer continuing commentaries by lawyers and jurists in addition to the regular reporting of pivotal

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [10] W. F. May. “Professional Ethics: Setting, Terrain, and Teacher.” in D. Callahan and S. Bok, eds. 1980. Ethics Teaching in Higher Education. New York: Plenum. [11] W. F. May. op. cit. p. 238 [12] The February 1988 Progressive Architecture “Reader Poll Report” lists 25 specific actions that 1,300 respondents ranked from “unethical actions” to “normal practices” in architecture. An interesting outcome of this poll of readers was the listing of “several situations perceived as either unethical or as normal business practices by substantial portions of the respondents.” P/A termed these six actions “split decisions.” This reveals the ambiguity of moral issues and underscores the need for continued ethical vigilance. For a discussion of the emergence of novel issues in ethics, see G. Winter. 1966. Elements for a Social Ethic: Scientific and Ethical Perspectives on Social Process. New York: Macmillan. [13] “Ethics Code Walks Fine Line.” ENR (formerly Engineering News-Record), 19 June 1986, p. 27. [14] The cited version of the code is described in “Convention Approves ‘Code of Professional Responsibility.’” Architecture. July 1986, pp. 11-12. The letter appears in AIA Memo, 2 September 1987. The most recent revision of the Code of Ethics & Professional Conduct appears in AIArchitect, May 1997, the Institute’s monthly newsletter. Washington, DC: American Institute of Architects. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

13

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics court cases or arbitration decisions affecting professionals at work. Teachers of professional ethics courses in schools of planing, design, and construction or, more typically, teachers of the professional practice courses incorporating ethics education, make use of this case material also.15 The cases typically encountered in professional ethics discussions tend to focus on the private (in the sense of individual) success of morally responsible professionals. I believe there is a much stronger argument for moving ethical discussion away from the particularities of the individual resolving a moral dilemma. I would propose to move the discussion—and the search for May’s “inspiration of exemplary performance”—away from the isolated conscientious designer as an individual and toward the institutions within which all professionals—both the morally aware and the ethically obtuse—must operate.16

Fig. 3. Town Hall. Saynatsalo, Finland. Alvar Aalto, Architect. 1949-52.

This institutional approach would direct attention to the ethical values and power relations reflected in the very rule structures and modes of professional discourse within which individual decisions of conscience must work themselves out. All such cases occur and are resolved in a social reference larger and wider than even the most elaborate quandary that the private practitioner experiences. I propose that the morality of social as contrasted with individual ethics confronts the architectural designer (and indeed the entire building community) most vividly in the formation and execution of the public policies that frame and create the conditions for design and construction. Regulation: social ethics reified and objectified Societies, usually acting through governments, preempt entire classes of design decisions, restricting and sometimes totally removing areas of design freedom, reserving those decisions to society as a whole, acting through regulatory institutions.17 This is now done routinely, in all the world’s advanced economies. Less developed societies also regulate design and construction, but they tend to employ more diffuse, culture-wide mechanisms rather than special-purpose regulatory agencies.

Fig. 4. Expression of structural truss. Saynatsalo Town Hall.

Regulations, broadly considered, are the means by which societies, using the coercive powers of government, mediate the private actions of individuals. Of course, private actions know other limitations as well. Commercial transactions between informed individuals, for example, are limited by the mutualy-agreed-upon contract. And it is usually these latter quotidian transactions that are grist for the professional practice course’s “ethics case study” mill. But contrast those commercial transactions with regulation: the reach of public policy is broad where commercial law is limited; public regulations are coercive where commercial contracts are subject to mutual consent. Because they are intended to be universally and uniformly applied and coercively enforced, regulations must be carefully circumscribed either by stature, legal precedent, or (more significant for innovative designers) by technical knowledge. Design and construction are, in short, regulated industries. Building regulations reflect, however imperfectly, a society-wide understanding of what that society expects of its buildings and their environs. Only when that expectation is shared consensually does it become, at least in democratic states, a moral imperative enforced upon all.

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [15] M. Wachs. 1985. Ethics in Planning. New Brunswick, NJ: Center for Urban Policy Research, Rutgers University; A. E. Stamps. 1986. “Teaching Design Ethics.” Architectural Technology. May/June 1986; H. D. Robertson. 1987. “Developing Ethics Education in the Construction Education Program.” Proceedings of the 23rd Annual Conference of the Associated Schools of Construction. West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University. [16] W. F. May. op. cit. p. 238.

14


The operative term here is consensus, meaning more than a majority but less than unanimity. And here, exactly, is where postmodernism is most instructively contrasted with modernism. To a modernist (for example, the CIAM-era Aalto) a social ethic must be objectified. That is, it must “[attain] a reality that confronts its original producers as a facticity external to and other than themselves.”18 This modernist objectification renders ethical beliefs universal and accessible to rational method. Otherwise, the modernist argument continues, ethics would be merely a state of individual and subjective (and possibly solipsistic) consciousness.

Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2 Table 1. An approximate chronology of the widening of the building regulatory purview in the United States. Date

Objective

Method

Initiating Advocates

1880

Curtail typhoid and noisome nuisance Improve housing and health

Protected water supply; sewage treatment Indoor plumbing

Sanitary engineers, public health physicians Housing reformers, plumbers

1900

Prevent conflagration

Sprinkler protection of individual structures and fire service to multibuilding districts

Fire insurance underwriters

1920

Continue fire to building of origin

Fire endurance concept

Fire researchers, fire services, fire underwriters

1965

Continue fire to room and floor of origin

Fire zonation

Fire researchers, fire services, fire underwriters

1975

Energy conservation

Energy-use targets for overall building and/or components

Resource conservation groups

1978

Historic preservation

Alternative regulatory devices

Local and architectural history buffs (and professionals)

1980

Accessibility for handicapped

Performance requirements or perspecitve geometrics

Architects (led voluntary efforts in 1950s), paralyzed veterans, disabled citizens, gerontologists

1990

Indoor air quality

Air management, realtime monitoring

Office worker unions, health organizations

1890

Constructionists in philosophy and deconstructionists in literary studies, both of whom (but especially the latter) have influenced recent academic architectural discourse, have only recently separated fact from value and are dubious about separating knowledge from action.19 Aalto, in his mature years, adopted what we now recognize to be this postmodernist program. He seems to have abandoned the search for universal solutions and sought situationally or contextually relevant standards for his own work. In so doing, Aalto anticipated Michel Foucault’s arguments in The Birth of the Clinic.20 Instead of evaluating behavior (or, one could say, candidate designs) relative to idealized, universalistic norms, Foucault proposes that situationally relevant standards be employed. But what keeps situationally relevant standards from degenerating into solipsism? A partial response (to be amplified later in this essay) is that designers do not work in isolation and are enjoined from selfindulgence by governmental fiat, by economic imperatives (referring both to tighter building budgets and more knowledgeable clients), by constituent and adjacent technologies, and by social sanction. But who historically has assumed the task of inventing or interpreting what buildings and environments should do and be? Once that vision is articulated, who negotiates it through the wider public discourse that legitimizes emergent community values or public policies in democracies with representative governments? Table I shows a cursory chronology of nearly a century of community interventions into design and construction practice in the United States, providing some perspective. Regulations have evolved (primarily) to meet newly sanctioned social needs and (secondarily) to take advantage of new technological opportunities. From the initial retributory penalties of the Code of Hammurabi (1955–1912 BC) that exacted a sentence of death from any builder whose building’s failure resulted in the owner’s death21 through the Assizes of 1189 that proscribed the use of thatch in the densely populated portions of London,22 the regulatory climate changed slowly. But the explosive growth of cities in the nineteenth century forced both a broadening of societal ends and an institutionalization of regulatory means from the 1880s to the present. Table 1 reveals that the regulatory purview widened to embrace expanding notions of public health, safety, and welfare. These amplifications of the police powers of the state are traceable to both a deeper

understanding of phenomena linking environmental stressors of various kinds to health effects and to the effective publicizing employed by public interest advocates near the turn of the twentieth century. Although J. Archea and B. R. Connell have shown that the specific technical rationales for some of these Progressive-era reforms are erroneous in the light of current knowledge, the regulations promulgated at the time remain largely intact.23 Some continue to be enforced. What might account for this persistence in the absence of supporting evidence? Is it sheer bureaucratic inertia? I nominate instead the potency of the initial images used by the Progressive-era pamphleteers. Let me illustrate: at the same session of the Environmental Design Research Association’s 17th Annual Meeting that was addressed by Archea and Connell, David Hattis displayed Jacob Riis’s images, including “Bandits’ Roost” at 59 1/2 Mulberry Street, taken on February 12, 1888, that bestowed on these dwellings their notoriety! The effect on the EDRA audience of mature researchers was striking. After 90 years and more, those photographs still retained their shock value. So much so that it may be unlikely that the regulations the helped promulgate will soon be repealed. It is not bureaucratic inertia but persistence in the public that keeps these regulations intact. Are regulations reversible? In principle, they are; legislatures can formally repeal regulatory statutes and administrative agencies can _____________________(Notes contiued)______________________ [17] This section’s arguments, only outlined here, are amplified in F. T. Ventre. “The Policy Environment for Environment and Behavior Research.” in E. H. Zube and G. T. Moore. eds. 1989. Advances in Environment, Behavior, and Design. New York: Plenum Press. [18] P. L. Berger. 1969. The Sacred Canopy: Elements of a Sociological Theory of Religion. New York: Doubleday-Anchor. [19] J. Lave. 1988. Cognition in Practice. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press; J. Coulter. 1979. The Social Construction of Mind. London: Macmillan; A. R. Louch. 1966. Explanation and Human Action. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. [20] Michel Foucault 1973. The Birth of the Clinic: An Archaeology of Medical Perception. New York: Pantheon. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

15

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics achieve the same effect by selective enforcement.24 But in practice, regulations are all but irreversible. Allen Bloom’s reading of the history of liberal political through from Hobbes and Locke to John Stuard Mill and John Dewey concludes that: It was possible to expand the space exempt from legitimate social and political regulation only by contracting the claims to moral and political knowledge. . . . In the end it begins to appear that full freedom [to live as one pleases] can be attained only when there is no such knowledge at all.25 Regulation: professional values collectivized So it is the state of knowledge—moral and political knowledge according to Bloom; and practical knowledge, too, which according to Dewey has a moral force of its own—that drives regulation’s juggernaut. But whose knowledge? The regulatory expansion after the 1920s seems to owe more to a public will rallied and given form by the cultural preferences and superior technical knowledge of articulate minorities who could link that preference and knowledge to wide social concerns.

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [21] Code of Hammurabi. trans. R. F. Harper. 1903. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. [22] R. S. Ferguson. 1974. The Development of a Knowledge-Based Code. Ottawa: National Research Council Canada, Division of Building Research. 426:2, citing Corporation of London Records Office Liber de Antiquis Legibus, folios 45–58. [23] J. Archea and B. R. Connell. “Architecture as an Instrument of Public Health: Mandating Practice Prior to the Conduct of Systematic Inquiry.” in Proceedings of EDRA 17. Atlanta, GA, April, 1986. Oklahoma City, OK: Environmental Design Research Association. [24] D. J. Galligan. 1986. Discretionary Powers: A Legal Study of Official Discretion. New York: Oxford University Press. How regulations operate in Chicago is described in B. D. Jones. 1985. Governing Buildings and Building Government: A New Perspective on the Old Party. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. [25] Alan Bloom. 1987. The Closing of the American Mind. New York: Simon and Schuster. p. 28. [26] Sociologies of the professions convey this message. A review of the field is T. J. Johnson. 1972. Professions and Power. London: Macmillan. A sociological analysis emphasizing the primacy of autonomy in the architectural case is M. S. Larson. 1979. The Rise of Professionalism. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. [27] G. Gurvitch. 1971. The Social Frameworks of Knowledge. New York: Harper and Row; K. Mannheim. 1936. Ideology and Utopia. New York. Harcourt Brace; D. Bloor. 1976. Knowledge and Social Imagery. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul; W. J. Goode pointed out that no social mandate will be forthcoming if the profession’s values are too far removed from the community’s value consensus in “Community Within a Community: The Professions.” American Sociological Review 22 (1957): p. 197. [28] F. Sabatier. “Social Movements and Regulatory Agencies: Towards a More Adequate—and Less Pessimistic—Theory of Client Capture.” Policy Sciences 6 (1975): pp. 301–342.

16


Histories of the professions tell of their addressing the widely shared needs of the societies they have served.26 Shared needs often began as latent, unexpressed, perhaps even unconscious tendencies or longings that were given form, reinforcement, and articulation by the profession with cognizance over the particular domain of ideas.27 Rendering this service to society helps to reinforce the profession’s status by evoking a social warrant for its existence on terms highly favorable to the profession. This drawing out of a latent societal mandate is a realization of the sociopolitical realm of (Jean Baptiste) Say’s law that “supply creates its own demand,” originally formulated to explain the dynamics of economic markets. Modern-day occupations and professions express their specific concerns not only to their employers or clients but also to the social organizations or governmental agencies, usually regulatory agencies, that have cognizance over the activity in question. Working through the cognizant organization enables the prescribing profession to address all of society and not just those entities (either organizational or individual) with whom they are joined in a specific, contractually defined commercial relation. And the subject that each of the prescribing professions addresses is a core value of the initiating professional (for physicians, wellness; for accountants, fidelity and accuracy; for airline pilots, safety of passenger and crew). That core is then shown to be widely shared in the society at large. This enables the initiating profession to establish its hegemony over that aspect of social life: the entire society then becomes a collective client for the services of the collective profession. However, the tactic of gaining wider public support for architectural values through congenial regulation is not likely to work today for three reasons: the first having to do with the public’s skepticism of government; the second with the core values of the architectural culture; and the third, the widening gap between architecture and its public. A discussion of the first two reasons follows; the third recurs at the conclusion of this paper. Regarding the public’s skepticism of government: twenty years of Naderite public interest litigation has instructed consumers and even political liberals to an attitude once associated mainly with political conservatives: be more skeptical of regulatory agencies and, especially, the extent to which they may be “captured” by the very groups they were initially intended to regulate.28 The second reason that architects are unlikely to make strategic use of regulatory policies, even to advance their livelihoods, requires some elaboration. Architects are unlikely to employ this method is not because it is manipulative or that they are insufficiently cynical. Rather, a positive regulatory strategy to institutionalize the profession’s core

Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2 values would not be adopted because the furtherance of such an aggressive regulatory scheme (even it were to materially benefit the architectural profession) is in fundamental opposition to a devoutly held aspiration of the professional designer: to realize one’s own creative vision. Architecture is singular among the professions in its pursuit of this aspiration. This could explain why transactions over which the designers nominally preside, and from which they earn their livelihood, are regulated by agencies largely responsive to others, principally the special interest advocates of the building products vendors and of the building owning, -insuring, or -using groups in society.29 It is these non-designers who have established and now maintain the rule structures and modes of discourse within which design is done.30 Ironically, this situation, the circumscription of design freedom, has come about because of the higher value that designers place on the liberty to operate with less hindrance from socially imposed restraints, whether those restraints are in the form of codified knowledge of the world around us—which explains both the perennial deprecation of technical studies and its consequent, the only recent emergence of research activities in architecture schools—or the more obvious hindrance visited upon them by regulatory institutions. This reluctance to discipline talent or, if you like, creative expression, is an inherited trait, a part of the profession’s intellectual endowment, so to speak, and further conditioned by academic preparation and later professional socialization. Consider, for a start, the family tree. Architects are, in spite of themselves, siblings of Gadamerian aestheticism, children of Heideggerian existentialism, nieces and nephews of Nietzsche (an antiformal, anticlassicizing opponent of codified moral theories), and grandchildren of Schillerian Romanticism that sought through creative expression alone both truth itself and rescue from alienation. Little of our recent intellectual heritage is culturally conservative, and regulation is nothing if not culturally conservative. Given this heritage, it is little wonder that designers have ceded so utilitarian and rationalistic a thing as the building regulatory system to others, principally the agents of building products manufacturers and suppliers. Regulatory reform is a slow-moving, painstaking, cooperative endeavor performed anonymously and, consequently, is unlikely to attract the participation of those whose important secondary reference is to personal expression. Architects—who like to consider themselves artists but do not want to be paid like them—only reluctantly concede that they operate as a regulated industry within highly codified institutional structures and modes of discourse. In the architectural academy, the feeling is even stronger. There regulation is anathema, to be cursed, reviled, and shunned (except for that obligatory lecture in that same obligatory course in professional practice referred to in the first paragraph of this essay). This reluctance breeds alienation and withdrawal and designers, refraining from controlling the system, are instead controlled by it. There are exceptions. The late Fazlur Khan, a gifted structural designer at Skidmore Owings and Merrill in Chicago, was acutely perceptive about regulation and applied himself to regulatory reform efforts in that city.31 But our Romantic heritage brings us, at worst, into obdurate opposition to or, at best, ambivalence toward the aspect of regulation that is, ethically speaking, its sinister side: paternalism, the “imposing [of] constraints on an individual’s liberty for the purpose of promoting his or her own good.”32 Regulations are in every way paternalistic and not the least deferential: the verb forms they employ are in the imperative mood, leaving no doubt about who defers to whom. With an appropriate preamble prevening, building and development regulations really do tell one and all what is permitted in the built environment and, more emphatically, what is not. Moreover, these pronouncements are enforceable with the coercive power of the state. But because architects tend to

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [29] F. T. Ventre. 1973. “Social Control of Technological Innovation: The Regulation of Building Construction.” Ph.D. dissertation, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. [30] A. D. King, ed. 1980. Buildings and Society: Essays on the Social Development of the Built Environment. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul; P. L. Knox. “The Social Production of the Built Environment.” Ekistics 295 (July/August 1982): pp. 291–297. Also see P. L. Knox, ed. 1988. The Design Professions and the Built Environment. London: Croom Helm. [31] From personal communications during the years that Dr. Khan served on the National Academies of Science/Engineering-administered Technical Evaluation Panels that “peer reviewed” the programs of the National Bureau of Standards/Center for Building Technology. [32] D. F. Thompson. “Paternalism in Medicine, Law, and Public Policy” in D. Callahan and S. Bok, eds. 1980. Ethics Teaching in Higher Education. New York: Plenum. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

17

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics follow the egoist-libertarian rather than the utilitarian-collectivist conception of social ethics (remember Aalto’s warning), they are ambivalent about taking up anything like fundamental reform of an essentially imperative instrument. This means that regulatory matters— social ethics in action—are largely in the hands of others.

Fig. 5. Technical University, Otaniemi, Finland. Alvar Aalto, Architect. 1964. Photo: Marja Palmqvist Watson

It was not always this way. The chronology of Table 1 reveals that designers have brought important issues into the public consciousness and then helped organize society-wide support for public policies of sound moral principle. Earnest instruction on architecture, its pleasures and its effects, was successfully imparted to large publics in America several times in this century. Where these matters bore on public safety, health, and welfare, the technically informed discussion was energized with an unmistakable moral fervor. And the regulatory powers of the state were subsequently guided by a specific moral vision that had first been articulated by designers and other building professionals and later endorsed by a much wider public. Consider California and how Sym van der Ryn and Barry Wasserman, in their successive tenures (during the administration of Governor Jerry Brown) made the Office of the State Architect a “bully pulpit” for climate- and user-responsive design policies and regulations not only for California but for the nation. The obscuring of a profession’s core values Other professions have successfully proselytized their core values to the wider society. These engagements of the public have provided strong, if perhaps transient, boosts to each profession’s welfare. Why then has the public embraced so few architectural values as a basis for public policy? Martin Filler, reflecting on the one-hundred-year effort to enlist a public constituency for architectural values through criticism in the public as well as the professional press, could identify only three recent successes: “historic preservation, ecology, and zoning.”33 What accounts for this lapse and, more important, how can it be remedied? Filler says:

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [33] M. Filler. “American Architecture and Its Criticism: Reflections on the State of the Arts.” in T. A. Marder, ed. 1985. The Critical Edge: Controversy in Recent American Architecture. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. p. 31.

One essential approach is to attempt to break down the wall of professional hocus-pocus that surrounds both the profession of architecture and much of the writing about it. To a greater extent than pertains in media that produce works that can be kept behind closed doors but still be enjoyed by people, architecture virtually demands the kind of consensus that can emerge only if the public is constantly instructed in the concepts and concerns that ought to inform architectural initiative and decision making.34

[34] ibid. [35] For a sample of architecture interpreted in the manner of the literary art, see VIA 8. Architecture and Literature, published for the University of Pennsylvania’s Graduate School of Fine Arts by Rizzoli, New York, 1986. For an early view of architecture interpreted in the manner of semiotics, see G. Broadbent et al., eds. 1980. Meaning and Behavior in the Built Environment. New York: Wiley. [36] J. Derrida 1983. Margins of Philosophy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. In this work, Derrida says it is a “mistake to believe” that a text may be deciphered without a “prerequisite and highly complex elaboration.” For an elaboration on Derrida and his relation to antecedents and his contemporary Michel Foucault, see A. Megill. 1985. Prophets of Extremity: Nietzsche, Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. How Foucault’s structures and discourses play out in planning and design is discussed in S. T. Rowels, “Knowledge-Power and Professional Practice.” in P. L. Knox, ed. 1988. The Design Professions and the Built Environment. London: Croom Helm. pp. 175–207. I have found Foucault to be more provocative in his interviews. A good sampling of his ideas that illuminate regulation and regulatory institutions are interviews edited by Colin Gordon. 1980. Power/ Knowledge. New York: Pantheon. [37] D. H. Fisher. “Dealing with Derrida.” Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism 45 (Spring 1987): p. 298.

18


But the chief articulators and expositors of American architecture’s “concepts and concerns” seem to be withdrawing from the concerns of public life. This is indeed ironic for just when the principal professional society, the AIA, actively sought wider public participation by creating both a new category of membership and a publication to serve it, architecture’s wider conversation—as articulated by the profession’s academic wing and then promulgated by the writers and critics who retail that message to the nation’s cultural elite—has veered sharply away from the comprehensible ordering of the tangible, palpable, physical environment as its main topic and has turned instead into the forest of exotic conceits and arcana from such fields as literary criticism and, somewhat earlier, semiotics.35 Highbrow architectural criticism was, until just yesterday, an exegesis on “deconstructionist” critics, notably Jacques Derrida and Michel Foucault.36 Deconstructionism, by the way, does not mean tearing down or never erecting a building; it is a literary theory whose main message seems to be that literature can carry no message because the meaning of language is itself ultimately undecidable. Deconstructionism teaches that a: “secondary” or “supplemental” text is already implicit within a “primary” or “host” text, such that it becomes difficult to establish clear boundaries between the two texts so related.37

Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics 2 Under deconstructionism’s method, texts, and by extension, buildings and their environs, are to be assayed by eliminating any metaphysical or ethnocentric assumptions through an active role of defining meaning, sometimes by reliance on new word construction, etymology, puns and other word play.38 The deconstructionist critical movement curtails the centuries-long (at lease since Alberti) suzerainty of the creator, be it author or designer. Hermeneutics, the art and science of interpretation, of which deconstructionism is but a part, is now the locus of creative endeavor. Indeed, the “interpreter’s creative activity is more important than the text,” laments Allen Bloom in his thoroughly dyspeptic best-selling 1987 critique of American higher education, “there is no text, only interpretation.”39 James Marston Fitch, in an Architectural Record article, several years ago decried this flight from immediately-sensed environmental data among architectural writers and thinkers at its incipience. Michael Benedikt has recently argued for a “High Realism” that celebrates materiality over abstraction.40 Jacques Barzun has attacked increasingly opaque literary analysis that is as far removed from the cognitive experience of the reader as hermeneutics is from the perceptions of people living and working in the environments that the architectural intelligensia has so recently deconstructed.41 So arcane and remote from palpable experience have architectural theory, criticism, and method become that the once-salutary dissimilarity between architecture (the discipline) in the world of the academy and architecture (the profession) in the world of practice is widening to the point of total discordance.42 A signed editorial in Architecture, made this point vividly, citing a “wide diversity between schools and practitioners in the very ways they look at architecture. They differ in their perspectives, their agendas, their points of emphasis.” 43 Given the dynamic of university faculty recruitment, promotion, and retention and the search for academic and scholarly respectability on the one hand and the imperatives of commercial survival based on technical reliability, fiscal accountability, and clearheaded probity all wrapped in attractive packaging on the other, the divergence is likely to be greater in the future.44 This bifurcation is likely to induce an early cynicism among students, a truly regrettable outcome against which all teachers and practitioners must strive. Not only is architectural discourse growing remote from the general public’s experience of buildings and their environs. The turn toward the arcane has won neither adherents nor recognition from among those whom E. D. Hirsch, Jr. has called the “culturally literate.”45 John Morris Dixon analyzed Hirsch’s sixty-four-page list of terms that culturally competent Americans should know and was annoyed to find only three (none of them esoteric) from architecture’s vocabulary.46 Thomas Hines assayed over seventy articles in journals of opinion reacting either “positively” or “negatively” toward Tom Wolfe’s attack on the prevailing values of America’s architectural culture.47 Hines found the controversy salutary and himself right in the middle, chiding Wolfe for “thin research and . . . reckless writing” and scolding the architectural intelligentsia for “self-defeating arrogance . . . toward the public or publics they are committed to serve.”48 So the architectural profession may find itself thrice alienated: from the world of commerce, from its academic wing, and from its primary patrons, the core (and corps) of reflective, cultured Americans.49 If the core values of the profession are to inform, instruct, and thereby insinuate themselves as the core values of the society—the path taken by other expansionist professions stoutly assisted by their academic wings—then some important changes need to be made. Needed, that is, if architecture is to take the offensive, enlarging its constituency by realizing Hine’s hoped-for outcome of the From Bauhaus to Our House controversy; namely, a “greater public knowledge and aware-

Fig. 6. Skylighting of main auditorium. Otaniemi Technical University. Photo: Marja Palmqvist Watson

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [38] Random House Dictionary of the English Language. 2d Ed., unabridged. New York: Random House (1987): p. 519. [39] Bloom, Alan. op. cit. [Note 25] p. 379. [40] J. M. Fitch. “Physical and Metaphysical in Architectural Criticism.” Architectural Record, July 1982, pp. 114–119; M. Benedikt. 1987. For an Architecture of Reality. New York: Lumen Books. [41] J. Barzun. “A Little Matter of Sense.” New York Times Book Review. 21 June 1987. [42] Stanford Anderson elaborated the distinction between the profession and the discipline in “On Criticism.” Places 4, no. 1, (187): 7–8. [43] Donald Canty. Architecture. August 1987, p. 29. [44] Robert Gutman. “Educating Architects: Pedagogy and the Pendulum.” The Public Interest 80 (Summer 1985), pp. 67–91; L. Nesmith. “Economist Choate and Others Explore Economy and Market.” Architecture. August 1987. [45] E. D. Hirsch, Jr. 1987. Cultural Literacy: What Every American Needs to Know. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. “The list” runs from p. 152 to p. 215. [46] J. M. Dixon. signed editorial. Progressive Architecture. July 1987. p. 7. [47] T. Hines. “Conversing with the Compound.” Design Book Review. Fall 1987, pp. 13–19. [48] ibid, p. 19. [49] L. Nesmith, op. cit. [note 44] p. 14, describes the current symptoms. Underlying causes are suggested in F. T. Ventre. “Building in Eclipse, Architecture in Secession” in Progressive Architecture, December 1982, pp. 58–61.


19

2 Architecture and regulation: a realization of social ethics ness of architectural issues and a greater professional sense of responsibility to that public.”50 Is this a realistic expectation? Yes and no: the public is not so apathetic as before. But an apathetic public may be preferred to one aroused to hostility and cynicism; witness the reaction, both public and professional, to Prince Charles’s philippics on postwar architecture, urban design, and planning in Great Britain.51 If the prospects for a positive strategy of professional proselytizing are, at best, mixed, then what is the prognosis for a defensive strategy, for defending the profession’s values, status and, ultimately, markets from encroachment by others? Take the last issue: encroachment. Architects sense that the interior designers, facilities managers, and other technical specialists are intent on poaching on the profession’s

territory.52 A unified profession, of course, could muster a stouter defense. And, as the guilds of old assured themselves a monopoly of certain trades by presenting to the medieval burghers the promise of a guaranteed minimum level of competence, so do modern professions seek the same assurance by restricting (through licensing) access to the market for building design and consulting services. So, we are back now to regulation, the subject of this essay. A course of action We confront the issue of social ethics: how should a society, and specifically its governments, be organized and what specific policies should those organizations pursue in the matter of the design and construction of the built and induced environment? And which of those design and construction concerns are central enough to that society’s core beliefs and aspirations to be recast as moral imperatives and enforced upon all? Of course, the principal organizations representing the design and construction industries do address themselves to legislative bodies developing broad policies with respect to social practice of all kinds. To the point for the present discussion, however, is the extent to which designers and the organizations and the professional peers that speak for them will tackle policies that bear more directly on the central concerns and core values of the design community. What are today’s architectural core values, and what structures mediate the sustained relation between the profession and the laity? As for values, a new beginning may be at hand: in 1987 the AIA launched “The Search for Shelter . . . to confront the plight of America’s homeless and dispossessed.”53 But where may the mediating structures be found? I submit that they are among the institutions that regulate all the parties affected by architecture, not only those involved in it professionally or self-consciously. Economic relations of the latter type are generally regulated by the commercial law enforced by the threat of criminal prosecution and civil litigation and by the conventions of business practice enforced by custom; these relations apply to the specific architectural professional—whether an individual or a firm—and a specific, fee-paying client that has engaged that professional. But what I am addressing here is something larger: a “meta-narrative” within which the entire society acts as a collective client for the services of the collective profession.

_____________________(Notes continued)______________________ [50] T. Hines, op. cit. p. 13. [51] H. Raines. “Defying Tradition: Prince Charles Recasts His Role,” The New York Times Magazine. 21 February 1988, 23ff; P. Goldberger (“Architecture View” column), “Should the Prince Send Modernism to the Tower?” The New York Times. March 13, 1988, p. H33. [52] “P/A Reader Poll: Fees and Encroachment.” Progressive Architecture. November 1987, 15–19. Analyses fees and fears of U. S. architectural firms facing increasing competition from other providers of design services. The profession’s response is documented in “Licensing Interior Designers: tutorial on AIA position.” F. W. Dodge Construction News. July 1987. p. 35. [53] D. J. Hackl. “President’s Annual Report.” AIA Memo. January 1988. [54] J. F. Lyotard. 1984. The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. [55] “Prince Charles Criticizes City Planning ‘Disasters.’” Christian Science Monitor. 7 March 1988, p. 2. Said he, “Although there is no one who appreciates or values experts more than I do . . . it is important not to be intimidated by them.”

20


More extensive relations of this type have been successfully initiated and then managed by other occupations in the past but much less successfully by the profession of architecture today for the reasons already specified plus one more: the postmodern sensibility that dominates academic architectural discourse today manifests an “incredulity toward meta-narratives.”54 This incredulity may lie at the base of the public’s current skepticism—given voice by Prince Charles toward architecture and planning.55 The rules for tomorrow’s design and construction are yet to be written. But these rules most certainly will be written, whether by enlightened and sensitive designers intent on the creation of environments that enhance human potential for knowing a good life or by others who do not share that aspiration. Ought not the core values of architecture then serve as a basis for a social ethic for the built and induced environment? The true test of our commitment to those values is in our readiness to share them widely. How to turn a universalistic, largely negative and coercive authority—the regulatory system—into a positive stimulus for achieving highly differentiated environments that inform and liberate is no easy task. Nor is it ever completed. But it will be difficult for society to get what it needs and wants from its architecture and just as difficult for architects to provide what is needed and wanted without undertaking these enabling actions.

Bioclimatic design 3

3

Bioclimatic design Donald Watson Murray Milne


21

3 Bioclimatic design

22


Bioclimatic design Bioclimatic design 3 3

Summary: Bioclimatic design is based on analysis of the climate and ambient energy represented by sun, wind, temperature and humidity. Bioclimatic design that is responsive to specific regions and microclimates thus provides an enduring inspiration for architecture.

Key words: bioclimatic design, Building Bioclimatic Chart, meteorological data, psychrometric chart. 1 Introduction Timeless lessons of climate-responsive design are evident in indigenous and traditional architecture throughout the world. Bioclimatic design has developed out of a sensitivity to ecological and regional contexts and the need to conserve energy and environmental resources. Bioclimatic approaches to architecture offer a way to design for longterm and sustainable use of environmental and material resources. Bioclimatic design was promoted in a series of publications in the 1950s (Fitch and Siple 1952 and Olgyay and Olgyay 1957). In using the term “bioclimatic,” architectural design is linked to the biological, physiological and psychological need for health and comfort. Bioclimatic approaches to architecture attempt to create comfort conditions in buildings by understanding the microclimate and resulting design strategies that include natural ventilation, daylighting, and passive heating and cooling. The architecture of early modern architects—Walter Gropius, Marcel Breuer, Le Corbusier, and Antonin Raymond, among others—recognized the design inspiration offered by site-specific climatic variables and indigenous exemplars. When air-conditioning systems became widely available at the end of the 1950s, interest in bioclimatic design suddenly became less evident in professional and popular literature. The topic reemerged in response to energy shortages of the 1970s— when “passive solar design” became the popular term to described the approach, at first emphasizing solar heating but broadened to include passive cooling and daylighting. With the emergence of global environmental concerns of the 1990s—recognizing that reduced fossil fuel consumption has “cascading” effects in reducing pollution and global warming—bioclimatic design was enlarged to include landscape, water, and waste nutrient recovery. In these approaches, architecture and environmental systems are conceived as an integral part of sustaining the health and ecology of building, site and region. Some bioclimatic design techniques—earth-sheltering is an example— can contribute to comfort and reduce both heating and cooling loads year-round. Other techniques are useful only part of the year. The effectiveness of passive solar heating, for example, is very specific to the need for heating and otherwise needs to be tempered by sunshading

Lamasery. Himalayan Kingdom of Bhutan. Wind-protected, sun exposed courtyard creates a moderated microclimate.

and thermal mass. Natural ventilation can provide comfort in all seasons, especially in summer when it can reduce or eliminate the need for air conditioning in some climates. Costly mechanical (refrigerant) cooling is often required simply because a building’s unprotected window orientation or uninsulated roofs turn it into a “solar oven,” collecting more heat than is needed or tolerable. The effect is evident inside most any west-facing glass window-wall. Even when temperatures and local breezes create comfort conditions outside, design that ignores its climatic context will result in a building that is both uncomfortable and wastes energy. All buildings experience interruptions of conventional energy availability, often coincident with weather extremes and disasters. A prudent approach to design of all buildings would provide bioclimatic means to insure at least subsistence levels of heating, cooling, and daylighting for comfort, health and safety. For the long-term, in which conventional energy shortages and emergencies are unpredictable but perhaps inevitable, buildings without natural heating, cooling and lighting impose serious liabilities on occupants and owners. In July 1995, the city of Chicago experienced 700 heat-related deaths during five days of dangerously high temperatures and humidity and low wind speeds. A disproportionate number of these fatalities occurred among older, infirm and inner city residents on the top floors of apartments without mechanical or ventilative cooling (Center for Building Science 1996). The single-most available strategy to mitigate excessive overheating in such cases is ventilation, to prevent buildings from acting like solar ovens. Related bioclimatic techniques in roof design and surfacing could also greatly reduce such liabilities. 2

Characterization of regional climates

Characterization of different climatic zones are typically reported, for example, to indicate critical zones for landscape planting, agriculture and horticulture, based on the species-specific climatic requirements for germination and growth. It is possible to posit an equivalent characterization of “building bioclimatic regions,” based on the appropriateness and comparative effectiveness for various bioclimatic design techniques.

Authors: Donald Watson, FAIA and Murray Milne Credits: Baruch Givoni and Kenneth Labs contributed immeasurably to the development of the authors’ work described in this article. Figs. 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7a are reproduced by permission of Architectural Graphic Standards. Eighth Edition. John Ray Hoke, Jr. editor. New York: John Wiley & Sons. References: Milne, Murray. 1997. Energy Design Tools. Web Page, Department of Architecture and Urban Design. University of California Los Angeles (UCLA). http://www.aud.ucla.edu/energy-design-tools (If this web address changes, e-mail: [email protected]). Watson, Donald and Kenneth Labs. 1983, revised 1993. Climatic Building Design. New York: McGraw-Hill. Additional references follow at the end of this article. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

23

3 Bioclimatic design Fig. 1 indicates an approximate characterization of United States regions, within which similar bioclimatic design principles and practices predominate. While computer analysis and on-site monitoring now gives the designer the capacity to analyze each locale and microclimate, the regional characterization offers a way to understand macroclimatic factors, including continental and regional geography, proximity to mountain ranges and water bodies.

Fig. 1. U. S. regions based on bioclimatic design conditions.

Indicated in Fig. 1, regions exceeding 8,000 annual heating degree days (HDD) are defined as predominately “underheated,” that is, case the need for heating predominates, such as through direct solar gain and energy conservation. The large temperate area between 2,0008,000 HDD has both heating and cooling requirements that must be balanced to assure that design techniques favored for one condition are compatible with all others. Sun-tempering (that is, modest but careful use of south-facing windows) may provide a substantial portion of winter heating, but must also be dimensioned to provide summer shading. Regions with less than 2,000 HDD require little heating in comparison to cooling and are thus defined as “overheated.” The relative effectiveness of passive cooling strategies follows in part the climatic characterization from “arid” to “humid.” That is, the suitability of ventilation and evaporative cooling as cooling strategies are related to atmospheric humidity during summer (overheated) months. Those with dew points averaging less than 50F may be considered “arid.” Regions having a combined July and August average dew point temperature greater than 65F (18.3°C) may be considered “humid.” The entire southeast quadrant of the U. S. has mean daily humidity readings exceeding comfort limits under still air conditions. The main bioclimatic strategy of this region is thus to use shading and ventilation, to minimize if not to replace mechanical dehumidification and air conditioning, which may be required as a function of building type and climate.

Fig. 2. Passive solar heating potential of south-facing windows (Btu/SF/day). Source: Dr. Douglas Balcomb, National Renewable Energy Laboratory.

The 50F (10°C) dewpoint temperature is an arbitrary way of defining the upper limit of arid conditions, but is convenient since it produces an outdoor daily temperature range of roughly 30F (17°C) dry-bulb. Arid and semiarid conditions favor evaporative and radiative cooling and generally discourage summer daytime ventilation, since the air is both hot and dry. Thermal mass is especially effective in arid regions with extremely high daily maxima with nighttime lows that fall within the comfort range. 3

Principles of bioclimatic design

Bioclimatic design strategies are effective for “envelope-dominated” structures, to provide a large portion if not all of the energy required to maintain comfort conditions. “Internal load dominated” buildings— such as hospitals, offices, commercial kitchens, windowless stores— experience high internal gains imposed by the heat of occupancy, lights, and equipment. In such cases, the external climatic conditions may have a more complex influence on achieving comfort and low energy utilization. However, as internal loads are reduced through energyefficient design—that is, low-wattage equipment and lighting, occupancy scheduling and zoning—the effects of climate become more obvious and immediate. All buildings can benefit from available daylighting, so that its related heating and cooling impacts and means of control are essential for all buildings.

Fig. 3. Deep ground temperature (F) Source: National Well Water Association.

24


The “resources” of bioclimatic design are the natural flows of energy in and around a building—created by the interaction of sun, wind, precipitation, vegetation, temperature and humidity in the air and in the ground. In some instances, this “ambient energy” is useful immediately or stored for later use, and in other cases, it is best rejected or minimized. There is a limited number of “pathways” by which heat is gained or lost between the interior and the external climate (Fig. 4). These can be understood in terms of the classic definitions of heating energy transfer mechanics, and from these, the resulting bioclimatic design strategies can be defined (Fig. 5).

Bioclimatic design 3 -

Conduction—from hotter object to cooler object by direct contact.

-

Convection—from the air film next to a hotter object by exposure to cooler air currents.

-

Radiation—from hotter object to cooler object within the direct view of each other regardless of the temperature of air between.

-

Evaporation—the change of phase from liquid to gaseous state: The sensible heat (dry-bulb temperature) in the air is lowered by the latent heat absorbed from air when moisture is evaporated.

-

Thermal storage—from heat charge and discharge both diurnally and seasonally, a function of its specific heat, weight, and conductivity. Although not usually listed alongside the four classic means of heat transport, this role of thermal storage is helpful in understanding the heat transfer physics of building climatology.

Fig. 4. Paths of energy exchange at the building microclimate (Watson and Labs 1993)

Fig. 5. Strategies of bioclimatic design

Bioclimatic design strategy

Predominant season [1]

Process of heat transfer Conduction

Convection

Radiation

Minimize conductive heat flow.

winter and summer [2]

Delay periodic heat flow

winter and summer

Minimize infiltration

winter and summer [2]

Provide thermal storage [3]

winter and summer

Promote solar gain

winter

Minimize external air flow

winter

√

Promote ventilation

summer

√

Minimize solar gain

summer

√

Promote radiant cooling

summer

√

Promote evaporative cooling

summer

Evaporation

√ √

√ √

√

√

√ √

√

NOTES: [1] Properly described as “underheated and overheated.” [2] In overheated periods where air-conditioning is required. [3] Thermal storage may in very unusual cases utilize “phase change” materials and the latent heat capacities of chemicals such as eutectic salts.


25

3 Bioclimatic design 4

Bioclimatic design strategies

In winter (or underheated periods), the objectives of bioclimatic design are to resist loss of heat from the building envelope and to promote gain of solar heat. In summer (or overheated periods), these objectives are the reverse, to resist solar gain and to promote loss of heat from the building interior. The strategies can be set forth as: •

Minimize conductive heat flow. This strategy is achieved by using insulation. It is effective when the outdoor temperature is significantly different either lower or higher than the interior comfort range. In summer, this strategy should be considered whenever ambient temperatures are within or above the comfort range and where natural cooling strategies cannot be relied upon to achieve comfort (that is, mechanical air conditioning is necessary).

•

Delay periodic heat flow. While the insulation value of building materials is well understood, it is not as widely appreciated that building envelope materials also can delay heat flows that can be used to improve comfort and to lower energy costs. Time-lag through masonry walls, for example, can delay the day’s thermal impact until evening and is a particularly valuable technique in hot arid climates with wide day-night temperature variations. Techniques of earth-sheltering and berming also exploit the long-term heat flow effect of subsurface construction.

•

Minimize infiltration. “Infiltration” refers to uncontrolled air leakage through joints, cracks, and faulty seals in construction and around doors and windows. Infiltration (and the resulting “exfiltration” of heated or cooled air) is considered the largest and potentially the most intractable source of energy loss in a building, once other practical insulation measures have been taken.

•

Provide thermal storage. Thermal mass inside of the insulated envelope is critical to dampening the swings in air temperature and in storing heat in winter and “coolth” in summer. (The term “coolth,” coined by John Yellott, describes the heat storage capacity of a cooled thermal mass, that is, its capacity to serve as a heat sink for cooling).

•

Promote solar gain. The sun can provide a substantial portion of winter heating energy through elements such as equatorial-facing windows and greenhouses, and other passive solar techniques which utilize spaces to collect, store, and transfer solar heat.

•

Minimize external air flow. Winter winds increase the rate of heat loss from a building by “washing away” heat and thus accelerating the cooling of the exterior envelope and also by increasing infiltration (or more properly, exfiltration) losses. Siting and shaping a building to minimize wind exposure or providing wind-breaks can reduce the impact of such winds.

•

Promote ventilation. Cooling by air flow through an interior may be propelled by two natural processes, cross-ventilation (wind driven) and stack-effect ventilation (driven by the buoyancy of heated air even in the absence of external wind pressure). A fan can be used to augment natural ventilation cooling in the absence of sufficient wind or stack-pressure differential.

•

Minimize solar gain. The best means for ensuring comfort from the heat of summer is to minimize the effects of the direct sun, the primary source of overheating, by shading windows from the sun, or otherwise minimizing the building surfaces exposed to summer sun, by use of radiant barriers, and by insulation.

•

26

Promote radiant cooling. A building can lose heat effectively if the mean radiant temperature of the materials at its outer surface is greater than that of its surroundings, principally the night sky. The mean radiant temperature of the building surface is determined by the intensity of solar irradiation, the material surface


(film coefficient) and by the emissivity of its exterior surface (its ability to “emit” or re-radiate heat). This contributes little, however, if the building envelope is well insulated. •

Promote evaporative cooling. Sensible cooling of a building interior can be achieved by evaporating moisture into the incoming air stream (or, if an existing roof has little insulation, by evaporatively cooling the exterior envelope, such as by a roof spray.) These are simple and traditional techniques and most useful in hot-dry climates if water is available for controlled usage. Modern evaporative cooling is achieved with an economizer-cycle evaporative cooling system, instead of, or in conjunction with, refrigerant air conditioning.

5

Bioclimatic analysis

Analysis of climatic data is a first step in any bioclimatic design. While it is a simple matter to obtain local climatic data, some vigilance is required in applying it. Preliminary design direction and rules of thumb can be determined by graphing bioclimatic data. While the method can be done by hand, computer-assisted methods allow this approach to be increasingly accurate. This article describes this approach for preliminary analysis of local climate and for identifying effective design strategies. Humans are comfortable within a relatively small range of temperature and humidity conditions, roughly between 68-80F (20-26.7°C) and 20-80% relative humidity (RH), referred to on psychrometric charts as the “comfort zone.” These provide a partial description of conditions required for comfort. Other variables include environmental indices—radiant temperature and rate of air flow—as well as clothing and activity (metabolic rate). While such criteria describe relatively universal requirements in which all humans are “comfortable,” there are significant differences in and varying tolerance for discomfort and the conditions in which stress is felt, depending upon age, sex, state of health, cultural conditioning and expectations. Givoni (1976) and Milne and Givoni (1979) have proposed a design method using the Building Bioclimatic Chart (Fig. 6). It is based upon the psychometric format, overlaying it with zones defining parameters for the appropriate bioclimatic design techniques to create human comfort in a building interior. If local outdoor temperatures and humidity fall within specified zones, the designer is alerted to opportunities to use bioclimatic design strategies to create effective interior comfort. Example of pre-design bioclimatic analysis The method, appropriate as pre-design analysis, can be illustrated using Kansas City data (Figs. 7a and 7c). By charting annual weather data for Kansas City, bioclimatic design strategies and priorities are identified according to the percent of hours falling into the various “Building Bioclimatic Chart” zones. Fig. 7a plots seven months of the year in Kansas City with monthly maxima and minima. Fig. 7b indicates the “zones” of the Building Bioclimatic Chart in terms of their climatic paramenters, and also a numbering system, used for convenience in tabulation. Fig. 7c displays a tabulated summary for Kansas City, indicating percent hours per year that weather data falls within the various “zones” delineated in the Building Bioclimatic Chart (also indicated in Table 1). The data tabulated in Fig. 7c and Table 1 tell a story of the annual bioclimatic conditions for Kansas City: -

14% of annual hours fall within the comfort zone (line 1 in Table 1), in which one is comfortable under a shade tree.

-

Heating is required for 64% of the year (line 2).

-

Of the 64% hours that heating is required, one half (32%) are


Fig. 6. Building Bioclimatic Chart, indicating parameters for bioclimatic design strategies. Based on Givoni (1976) and Arens (1986).

Fig. 7a. Building Bioclimatic Chart with monthly Kansas City climate data. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

27

3 Bioclimatic design between 45F and 68F, indicating the potential for sun-tempering (that is to say, well placed south-facing windows can reduce the mechanical heating requirement by one-half.) To limit the design to sun-tempering underestimates the solar potential, but its great value is as an easily accomplished strategy in any and all cases. Reference to Fig. 2 indicates the relative passive solar heating potential. -

18% of annual hours require some form of cooling (line 3 in Table 1). However, by inspection of line 10, two-thirds of these cooling hours are within the effectiveness of passive cooling strategies.

-

Ventilation is effective for creating cooling for 14% of the year (line 7).

-

Evaporative cooling is effective for 8% of annual hours (line 8).

-

Utilization of thermal mass for “coolth,” is effective for 11% of hours (line 9). It is effective beyond this percent for both thermal heating storage (winter) and damping temperature fluctuations (year-round).

While the last three passive cooling percentages are not additive (that is, their hours of effectiveness overlap), the last two lines of Table 1 indicate that: Fig. 7b. Building Bioclimatic Chart indicated parameters of the “zones” used for tabulation (Watson and Labs 1993).

-

6% of the annual hours in Kansas City are beyond passive cooling strategies (line 10).

-

However about two-thirds of this time, or 4% annual hours (line 11), require dehumidification alone, not cooling. Typically, dehumidification is provided by mechanical (refrigerant) cooling as a means of lowering humidity by cooling and condensate removal. The potential for more energy-efficient mechanical dehumidication is apparent by comparing the last two lines of Table 1.

The pre-design guidelines of bioclimatic design for Kansas City are therefore to: -

Provide a well-insulated structure with solar heating capacity (helpful for 64% of the year).

-

Capitalize upon sun-tempering (effective more than 32% of the year).

-

Provide shading of windows in the overheated period (needed 36% of the year).

-

Design for controlled ventilation for cooling (14% of the year).

-

A minor portion of the year (6%) is beyond passive cooling effectiveness, but dehumidfication alone can possibly reduce this energy demand by two-thirds.

When climatic data indicated in Table 1 are read for representative climatic locations across the U. S., other conclusions become evident. The wide variation in climatic conditions require region and site-specific study of the relative effectiveness of bioclimatic strategies. Such data summaries and bioclimatic design guidelines for U. S. locations are provided for “long-hand” calculation in Watson and Labs (1993) and for computer simulation in Milne (1997), including calculation of internal gains and nighttime ventilation of thermal mass, both of which extend the effectiveness of specific strategies. Fig. 7c. Building Bioclimatic Chart summary for Kansas City (Watson and Labs 1993).

28


In regions of the world where extensive climatic data are not available and where, for example, data is limited only to monthly averages of temperature and humidity, available data may not be coincident and must be interpreted with caution and only for “rough-cut” analysis. However, as is increasingly available throughout the world as in the United States, coincident climatic data are compiled from longterm readings and available on computer files, so that designers can obtain quite complete reference data. (See “Computer-aided bioclimate analysis” below.)


Table 1. Bioclimatic design data for representative U. S. locations. Percentages indicate the yearly average that outside climatic conditions suggest specific design strategies (Watson and Labs 1993).

Seattle

Los Angeles

Phoenix

Salt Lake

Coastal

Arid

Semiarid

Arid

Temperate [2]

Temperate

6

15

13

11

14

11

13

9

18

93

80

45

76

64

79

59

80

16

1

2

36

10

18

7

17

7

50

93

80

45

76

64

79

59

80

16

59

79

37

34

32

32

41

36

15

7

20

56

21

36

21

41

21

84

1

2

14

5

14

6

14

5

35

1

2

30

12

8

4

7

4

7

1

2

28

8

11

5

9

4

9

0

1

3

0

6

3

13

6

31

0

1

1

0

4

3

2

5

16

Overheated Underheated

Kansas City

Minneapolis

Atlanta

Arid

Humid

Temperate Underheated

Temerate

Hartford

Miami Humid

Temperate Overheated

% Hours/Year bioclimatic conditions are: 1 Within comfort

zone 7 (68F-78ET*, 5mm Hg-80% RH) [1] 2 Heating is required (< 68F) zones 1-5 3 Cooling is required (> 78ET*) zones 9-17 4 Promote solar heating zones 1-5 5 Sun-tempering is very effective zones 2-5 6 Restrict solar gain (shading) zones 6-17 7 Promote ventilation zones 8, 9,10 8 Promote evaporative cooling zones 11, 13-14, and 6B 9 Utilize thermal mass for “coolth” zones 10, 11, 12, 13 10 Beyond passive cooling effectiveness zones 8, 15, 16, 17 11 Dehumification alone [3] will provide cooling zone 8 NOTES: [1] The area or “zone” of the psychrometric chart indicated by numerical designation in Fig. 7b. [2] Approximate climatic characterization indicated in the U. S. Regional map Fig. 1. [3] High percentage compare to “Beyond passive cooling effectiveness” indicates potential of demumidification without refrigerant cooling.


29

3 Bioclimatic design 6

Bioclimatic design techniques

Just as there are differences in the climatic conditions, so do their application in design. Each locale has its own bioclimatic profile, sometimes evident in indigenous and long-established building practices. Bioclimatic design techniques can be set forth as a set of design opportunities (as elaborated in Watson and Labs 1993):

30

patios, seasonal screened and glassed-in porches, greenhouses, atriums and sun spaces can be located in the building plan for summer cooling and winter heating benefits, as in these three techniques: -

Provide outdoor semi-protected areas for year-round climate moderation.

•

Wind breaks (winter): Two design techniques serve the function of minimizing winter wind exposure:

-

Provide solar-oriented interior zone for maximum solar heat gain.

-

Plan specific rooms or functions to coincide with solar orientation.

-

Use neighboring land forms, structures, or vegetation for winter wind protection.

•

-

Shape and orient the building shell to minimize winter wind turbulence.

•

Thermal envelope (winter): Isolating the interior space from the hot summer and cold winter climate, such as:

Earth-sheltering (winter and summer): Techniques such as covering earth against the walls of a building or on the roof, or building a concrete floor on the ground, have a number of climatic advantages for thermal storage and damping temperature fluctuations (daily and seasonally), providing wind protection and reducing envelope heat loss (winter and summer). These techniques are often referred to as earth-contact or earth-sheltering design:

-

Minimize the outside wall and roof areas (ratio of exterior surface to enclosed volume).

-

Recess structure below grade or raise existing grade for earthsheltering.

-

Use attic space as buffer zone between interior and outside climate.

-

Use slab-on-grade construction for ground temperature heat exchange.

-

Use basement or crawl space as buffer zone between interior and grounds.

-

Use earth-covered or sod roofs.

-

Centralize heat sources within building interior.

•

-

Use vestibule or exterior “wind-shield” at entryways.

-

Locate low-use spaces, storage, utility and garage areas to provide climatic buffers.

-

Subdivide interior to create separate heating and cooling zones.

-

Select insulating materials for resistance to heat flow through building envelope.

-

Thermally massive construction (summer and winter): Particularly effective in hot arid zones, or in more temperate zones with cold clear winters. Thermally massive construction provides a “thermal fly wheel.” absorbing heat during the day from solar radiation and convection from indoor air which can create comfort if it is cooled at night, if necessary through nighttime ventilative cooling (if air temperatures fall within the comfort zone). Use high mass construction with outside insulation and nighttime ventilation techniques in summers.

-

Apply vapor barriers to warm side to control moisture migration.

•

-

Develop construction details to minimize air infiltration and exfiltration.

-

Select high-capacitance materials to dampen heat flow through the building envelope.

Sun shading (summer): Because the sun angles are different in summer than in winter, it is possible to shade windows from the sun during the overheated summer period while allowing it to reach the window surfaces and spaces in winter. Thus the concept to provide sun shading does not need to conflict with winter solar design concepts.

-

Provide insulating controls at glazing.

-

-

Minimize window and door openings on north, east, and/or west walls.

Minimize reflectivity of ground and building surfaces outside windows facing the summer sun.

-

-

Detail window and door construction to prevent undesired air infiltration.

Use neighboring land forms, structures, or vegetation for summer sun.

-

-

Provide ventilation openings for air low to and from specific spaces and appliances.

Shape and orient the building shell to minimize exposure to summer sun.

-

Provide seasonally operable shading, including deciduous trees.

-

Use heat reflective (or radiant barriers) on (or below) surfaces oriented to summer sun.

•

•

Solar windows and walls (winter): Using the winter sun for heating a building through solar-oriented windows and walls is provided by a number of techniques:

Natural ventilation (summer and seasonal): Natural ventilation is a simple concept by which to cool a building.

-

Use neighboring land forms, structures, or vegetation to increase exposure to summer breezes.

-

Maximize reflectivity of ground and building surfaces outside windows facing the winter sun.

-

Shape and orient the building shell to maximize exposure to summer breezes.

-

Shape and orient the building shell to maximize exposure to winter sun.

-

Use “open plan” interior to promote air flow.

-

-

Use high-capacitance thermal mass materials in the interior to store solar heat gain.

Provide vertical air shafts to promote “thermal chimney” or stackeffect air flow.

-

-

Use solar wall and roof collectors on equatorial-oriented surfaces.

Use double roof construction for ventilation within the building shell.

-

Optimize the area of equatorial-facing glazing.

-

-

Use clerestory skylights for winter solar gain and natural illumination.

Orient door and window openings to facilitate natural ventilation from prevailing summer breezes.

-

•

Indoor/outdoor rooms (winter and summer): Courtyards, covered

Use wingwalls, overhangs, and louvers to direct summer wind flow into interior.


Bioclimatic design 3 -

Use louvered wall for maximum ventilation control.

-

Use roof monitors for “stack effect” ventilation.

•

Plants and water (summer): Several techniques provide cooling by the use of plants and water near building surfaces for shading and evaporative cooling.

-

Use ground cover and planting for site cooling.

-

Maximize on-site evaporative cooling. Use planting next to building skin.

-

Use roof spray or roof ponds for evaporative cooling.

7

Computer-aided bioclimate analysis

Recently developed energy design tools make it possible to utilize hourly weather data to accurately analyze climate. This enables the designer to apply sophisticated bioclimatic analysis to any location in the United States, thus providing a systematic basis to guide design judgment. Designers with access to an IBM-compatible micro-computer can apply the bioclimatic analysis and design approach presented in this article, using microcomputer design tools. Climate Consultant: This software that plots weather data, including temperatures, wind velocity, sky cover, percent sunshine, beam and horizontal irradiation. It uses these data to create psychometric charts, timetables of bioclimatic needs, sun charts and sun dials showing times of solar needs and shading requirements. It also displays 3-D plots of temperature, wind speed, and related climatic data and is cross-referenced to bioclimatic design practices presented in Watson and Labs (1993). It can be down-loaded at no cost from the World Wide Web (Milne 1997). Fig. 20 indicates a typical bioclimatic chart generated by Climate Consultant, indicating an annual summary for Minneapolis and in the upper left, the percent that bioclimatic strategies are effective, similar to data in Table 1.

Fig. 20. Computer display (in numerous colors) of the Building Bioclimatic Chart for Minneapolis, MN. Tabulation on left of screen is similar to data in Table 1 above. (Milne and Li 1997). Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

31

3 Bioclimatic design The Typical Meteorological Year (TMY) contains simultaneous climatic data for all 8,760 hours in a “typical” year. Available for 250 cities (airport data) locations, mostly in the United States, each file contains one complete year of hourly data, including direct (beam) solar radiation, total horizontal solar radiation, dry-bulb temperature, dew-point humidity, wind speed and cloud cover. Electronic files of climatic data for most U. S. locations (major airports) are available through various sources on the World-Wide Web, NREL (1996) and Rutgers University (1994). Bioclimatic design combines insight and knowledge by establishing climatic design data at the beginning of design and monitoring performance results. The designer can thereby gain an understanding of bioclimatic design strategies and techniques that are most effective in specific regions and microclimates as an enduring inspiration of architecture. (See examples in Figures 8-19) Definitions of temperature and humidity Fig. 8. Sea Ranch, CA. Windbreaks in site planning and building elements created wind-protected courtyards. Esherick, Homsey, Dodge and Davis, Architects and Planners.

Temperature is defined as the thermal state of matter with reference to its tendency to communicate heat to matter in contact with it. Temperature is an index of the thermal energy content of materials, disregarding energies stored in chemical bonds and in the atomic structure of matter. •

•

Fig. 9. Green Pre-Fab Homes, Rockford, IL. 1944. The first to be called “solar houses,”

Architects George and William Keck’s home designs, beginning in the mid-1930s, combined south-facing glass, sun shading and internal thermal mass.

Fahrenheit temperature (F) refers to temperature measured on a scale devised by G. D. Fahrenheit, the inventor of the alcohol and mercury thermometers, in the early 18th century. On the Fahrenheit scale, the freezing point of water is 32F and its boiling point is 212F at normal atmospheric pressure. It is said that Fahrenheit chose the gradations he used because it divides into 100 units the range of temperatures most commonly found in nature. The Fahrenheit scale, therefore, has a more humanistic basis than other temperature scales. Celsius temperature (°C) refers to temperatures measured on a scale devised in 1742 by Anders Celsius, a Swedish astronomer. The Celsius scale is graduated into 100 units between the freezing temperature of water (0°C) and its boiling point at normal atmospheric pressure (100°C) and is, consequently, commonly referred to as the Centigrade scale.

•

Dry-bulb temperature (DBT) is the temperature measured by an ordinary (dry-bulb) thermometer, and is independent of the moisture content of the air. It is also called “sensible temperature.”

•

Wet-bulb temperature (WBT) is an indicator of the total heat content (or enthalpy) of the air, that is, of its combined sensible and latent heats. It is the temperature measured by a thermometer having a wetted sleeve over the bulb from which water can evaporate freely.

•

Dew point temperature (DPT) is the temperature of a surface upon which moisture contained in the air will condense. Stated differently, it is the temperature at which a given quantity of air will become saturated (reach 100% relative humidity) if chilled at constant pressure. It is thus another indicator of the moisture content of the air. Dew point temperature is not easily measured directly; it is conveniently found on a psychrometric chart if dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures are known.

Humidity is a general term referring to the water vapor contained in the air. Like the word “temperature,” however, the type of “humidity” must be defined. •

Absolute humidity is defined as the weight of water vapor contained in a unit volume of air; typical units are pounds of water per pound of dry air or grains of water per cubic foot. Absolute humidity is also known as the water vapor density (Dv).

•

Relative humidity (RH) is defined as the (dimensionless) ratio of

Fig. 10. Elementary School. Athens, VT.

Translucent water columns placed in the south window absorbs solar heat while also transmitting daylight. An insulating curtain closes the units at night. John Rogers and George Heller, Architects.

32


Bioclimatic design 3 the amount of moisture contained in the air under specified conditions to the amount of moisture contained in the air at saturation at the same (dry bulb) temperature. Relative humidity can be computed as the ratio of existing vapor pressure to vapor pressure at saturation, or the ratio of absolute humidity to absolute humidity at saturation existing at the same temperature and barometric pressure. •

Water vapor pressure (Pv) is that part of the atmospheric pressure (“partial pressure”) which is exerted due to the amount of water vapor present in the air It is expressed in terms of absolute pressure as inches of mercury (in. Hg) or pounds per square inch (psi).

Additional references Arens, E., R. Gonzales, and L. Berglund. 1986. “Thermal Comfort Under an Extended Range of Environmental Conditions.” ASHRAE Transactions. Vol. 92. Part 1. Atlanta: ASHRAE Publications. Center for Building Science. 1996. “Urban Heat Catastrophes: The Summer 1995 Chicago Heat Wave.” Center for Building Science News. Fall 1996. Berkeley, CA: Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory.

Fig. 12. Adobe home. Papago Indian Nation, Arizona. A centuries-old building tradition evident in informal house construction provides thermal time delay in hot-arid climate. Overhangs provide shading and protect the adobe

Fitch, James Marston and Paul Siple, editors. 1952. AIA/House Beautiful Regional Climate Study. Originally published in AIA Bulletin 1949-1952. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfiche. Givoni, Baruch. 1976. Man, Climate and Architecture. London: Applied Science Publishers. 2nd Edition. Milne, Murray and Baruch Givoni. 1979. “Architectural Design Based on Climate” in Donald Watson, editor. Energy Conservation Through Building Design. New York: ARB/McGraw Hill Book Company. [out of print: archival copies available from the editor]. Milne, Murray and Yung-Hsin Li. 1994. “Climate Consultant 2.0: A New Design Tool for Visualizing Climate.” Proceedings of the 1994 ACSA Architectural Technology Conference. Washington, DC; Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture Publications. NREL. 1996. “TMY-2 Typical Meteorological Year Climate Data Files.” National Renewable Energy Laboratory. http:// rredc.nrel.gov:80/solar/old_data/nsrdb/tmy2/ (If this web address changes, e-mail: [email protected]). Olgyay, Aladar and Victor Olgyay. 1957. Design with Climate. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Fig. 13. Adobe home. Al Hudaydah, Yemen. Located in a hot humid area on the Red Sea, most summer hours are above the comfort zone. The sleeping cot in the courtyard provides some relief and radiant/ventilative cooling comfort at nighttime.

Rutgers University. 1994. Department of Engineering. “TMY Typical Meteorological Year Climate Data Files.” http://oipeawww.rutgers.edu/html_docs/TMY/tmy.html (If this web address changes, e-mail: [email protected]).

Fig. 11. Skytherm House. Atascadero, CA. 1973. Developed by Harold Hay

The Skytherm System includes a plastic enclosed roof pond thermally linked to the interior and covered on the outside by movable insulating panels. Alternate positioning of the panels either to cover or to expose the roof pond allows the system to operate in four modes: (1) winter day: to absorb winter daytime solar heat (panels open), (2) winter night: to radiate heat gain to the interior at night (panels closed). (3) summer day: to serve as heat sink for internal gain (panels closed) and (4) summer night: to radiate heat gain to the night sky (open). Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

33

3 Bioclimatic design

34

Fig. 14. Earth-covered Home. New Canaan, CT. Earth-sheltering and solar design. Donald Watson, FAIA, Architect and Builder.

Fig. 15. Scantion Student Housing near Aarhus, Denmark. Earth-sheltering and solar design. K. Friis and E. Moltke, Architects.

Fig. 16. Taliesin West. Scottsdale, AZ. Movable shading and subgrade thermally massive construction create a cooling microclimate. Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect.

Fig. 17. “San Francisco” a restored manor near New Orleans. Shading and ventilative cooling provided by porches, crossventilation, and double-roof “thermal chimney” construction. Photo: Robert Perron.

Fig. 18. Palace of the Alhambra, Granada, Spain. 14th Century. Combination of shading, thermal mass and evaporative cooling create a comfortable microclimate. Photo: Cesar Pelli.

Fig. 19. Paley Park. New York City. A shaded and cooled microclimate. Waterfall creates evaporative cooling and sets up local breezes, also creating acoustic masking of street traffic.


Solar control 4

4

Solar control Steven V. Szokolay

35 Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

35

4 Solar control

36


Solar control Solar control 4 4

Summary: Solar control utilizes beneficial sunshine for passive heating and for daylighting and minimizes liabilities of overheating through sunshading, orientation and related fenestration designs. The earth-sun geometrical relationship is descirbed, both in heliocentric and lococentric terms. Calculation methods for solar angles and graphic methods and applications of the equidistant solar charts are described, with emphasis on design of shading devices. A review is presented of various “sun-machines” or simulators used for model studies. Key words: altitude, azimuth, heliodons, overshadowing, shading devices, shadow angles, solar angles, sun penetration.

Solar and Astronomical Observatory. Jaipur, India. circa 1710.

Fundamentals In most industrialized countries, buildings are responsible for 40— 45% of the national total energy consumption. Much of this energy (up to 2/3) is used for thermal controls: heating and air conditioning (HVAC). The amount of energy needed for HVAC depends very much on the design of the building, its thermal performance, its climatic suitability. An additional portion is required for lighting. Much of this energy demand can be reduced by proper fenestration design, including solar control and shading devices.

The earth-sun relationship Heliocentric view: The earth is almost spherical in shape, some 7,900 miles (12,700 km) in diameter and it revolves around the sun in a slightly elliptical (almost circular) orbit (Fig. 1). The full revolution takes 365.26 days and as the calendar year is 365 days, some adjustments are necessary: one extra day every four years (the leap-year). This takes care of 0.25 days per year. The remaining 0.01 day per year is compensated by a one day adjustment at the turn of each century. The earth—sun distance is approximately 93 million miles (150 million km), varying between:

The two most important climatic factors that influence the thermal behavior of a building are air temperature and solar radiation (although winds and humidity also have an effect). Solar radiation can cause severe overheating in summer (in some cases even in winter), or it can increase the air conditioning load, whilst it can be beneficial in winter, reducing the heating requirement or perhaps even eliminate the need for heating by using conventional forms of energy. One of the first tasks of a designer is to determine when solar heat input is desirable and when solar radiation is to be excluded. The next step will then be to provide the appropriate solar control. A prerequisite of designing the solar control is to know the sun’s position at any time of the year and then to relate it to the building. There may be a number of non-geometrical controls available: for solid elements the color (reflectance/absorptance) of the surfaces or for windows the use of heat absorbing or heat rejecting glasses. These however rarely provide the desired control: always reducing the daylighting of the interior spaces (daylighting is one of the most effective ways of energy conservation) and always reducing the solar heat input, even when it would be desirable. There is no seasonal selectivity and no responsiveness. Some recently developed photochromatic or thermochromatic glasses may be responsive but not selective: when, in response to light or a thermal effect, they become dark, they will reduce daylight as well as solar heat transmission. The most efficacious method of solar control is the use of some form of external shading device, which provides a barrier to solar radiation before it would reach the window glass when solar gain is not desirable. It is easy to design a device which would block out all sun penetration. Such a device would unduly restrict daylighting. The task is to avoid overdesigning the device. Such shading devices can be designed, tailor-made for any situation, provided that the designer fully understands solar geometry.

(photo: Alec Purves).

95 million miles (152 million km) at aphelion, on July 1 and 92 million miles (147 million km) at perihelion, on January 1 The plane of the earth’s revolution is referred to as the ecliptic. The earth’s axis of rotation is tilted 23.45° from the normal to the plane of the ecliptic. The angle between the earth’s equator and the ecliptic (or the earth - sun line) is the declination (DEC) and it varies between +23.45° on June 22 (northern solstice) and -23.45° on December 22 (southern solstice), as shown in Fig. 2. (For practical purposes using ±23.5° gives an acceptable precision). On equinox days (approximately March 22 and September 22) the earth—sun line is within the plane of the equator, thus DEC = 0°. The variation of this declination is shown by a sinusoidal curve in Fig. 3. (Note that some sources nominate the equinox and solstice dates differently, e.g. as March 21, or June 21, or Sept. 23, etc.—this depends on the year within the leapyear cycle and the exact time of day when the event occurs.) Geographical latitude of a point on the earth’s surface is the angle subtended at the center of the earth between the plane of the equator and the line connecting the center with the surface point considered (the “vertical” line) as Fig. 4 indicates. Points having the same latitude form a latitude circle. The north pole is +90°, the south pole -90°, whilst the equator is 0° latitude. The extreme latitudes where the sun reaches the zenith at mid-summer are the tropics (Fig. 5): LAT = +23.45° is the tropic of Cancer and LAT = -23.45° is the tropic of Capricorn. The arctic circles (at LAT = ±66.55°) mark the extreme positions where at mid-summer the sun is above the horizon all day and at mid-winter the sun does not rise at all.

Author: Steven V. Szokolay References: Szokolay, S. V. 1980. Environmental Science Handbook for Architects. London: Longman (Construction Press) and New York: Wiley/Halsted Press. Szokolay, S. V. 1996. Solar Geometry. PLEA Note 1. Brisbane, Australia: PLEA/University of Queensland. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

37

4 Solar control

Fig. 1. The earth’s orbit

Fig. 2. Section of the earth’s orbit

Fig. 3. Annual variation of declination (mean of the leap-year cycle)

38


Solar control 4

Fig. 4. Definition of geographical latitude

Fig. 6. Definition of solar position angles

Lococentric view: In most practical work we go back to the view before the time of Copernicus (1543 AD) and consider our point of location (hence: loco-centric) as the center of the “celestial dome.” The ground is assumed to be flat and limited by the horizon circle. The sun’s apparent position on this celestial dome is defined by two angles (Fig. 6): •

altitude (ALT)—measured in the vertical plane, between the sun’s direction and the horizon plane; in some texts this is referred to as “elevation.”

•

azimuth (AZI)—the direction of the sun measured in the horizontal plane from north in a clockwise direction (thus east = 90°, south = 180°, west = 270°, whilst north can be 0° or 360°) also referred to by some as “bearing.” Many authors (in the northern hemisphere) use 0° for south and have -90° for east and +90° for west, north being ±180°. Some in the southern hemisphere use the converse: north = 0°, going through east (+90°) to +180° for south and through west (-90°)to -180°. The 0—360 convention here adopted is the only one valid for any location.

The zenith angle (ZEN) is measured between the sun’s direction and the vertical and it is the supplementary angle of the altitude: ZEN = 90° - ALT The hour angle (HRA) expresses the time of day with respect to the solar noon: it is the angular distance, measured within the plane of the sun’s apparent path (Fig. 7) between the sun’s position and its position at noon, i. e. the solar meridian (the plane of the local longitude which contains the zenith and the sun’s noon position). As the hourly rotation of the earth is 360°/24h = 15°/h, HRA is 15° for each hour from solar noon:

Fig. 5. Definition of the tropics

Fig. 7. Definition of hour angle (HRA)

HRA = 15 * (h - 12) where h = the hour considered (24-hour clock) so HRA is negative for the morning and positive for the afternoon hours e.g: for 9 am: HRA = 15 * (9 - 12) = -45° but: for 2 pm: HRA = 15 * (14 - 12) = +30° Solar time is measured from solar noon, i.e. noon is taken to be when the sun appears to cross the local meridian. This will be the same as the local (clock-) time only at the reference longitude of the local time zone. The time adjustment is normally one hour for each 15° of longitude from Greenwich, but the boundaries of the local time zone are subject to social convention (or official definitions). In most applications it makes no difference which time system is used: the duration of exposure is the same. All calculations and most graphs use solar time. Converting to local time is necessary only when time of day is critical. For example: Australian eastern time is based on the 150° longitude, i.e. Greenwich + 10 hours. However Queensland extends from 138° to 153° longitude, so in Brisbane (153°) solar noon will be earlier than clock noon. As 1 hour = 60 minutes, the sun’s apparent movement is 60/15 = 4 minutes of time per degree of longitude, in Brisbane the sun will cross the local meridian 4 * (150 - 153) = -12, i.e. .12 minutes before noon, at 11:48 local clock time. At the western boundary of the state solar noon will occur 4 * (150 - 138) = 48 minutes after solar noon, i.e. at 12:48 local clock time. Due to the variation of the earth’s speed in its revolution around the sun (faster at perihelion but slowing down at aphelion) and minor irregularities in its rotation, the time from noon-to-noon is not always exactly 24 hours. Clocks are set to the average length of the day, which


39

4 Solar control

Fig. 8. Annual variation of the ‘equation of time’ (EQT)

gives the mean time. The mean time at Greenwich is referred to as GMT, but recently also as UT (universal time). On any reference longitude, the local mean time deviates from solar time by up to -16 minutes in November and +14 minutes in February. The function expressing this variation is the equation of time (Fig. 8) and its graphic representation is the analemma (Fig. 9). Then solar time + EQT = local mean time Some texts show the same curve as Fig. 8 but with opposite signs. The values read from those would be used as local mean time + EQT = solar time. Calculation methods If the calendar date is expressed as the number of day of the year (NDY), i.e. starting with January 1, March 22 would be NDY = 31 + 28 + 22 = 81 and December 31: NDY = 365, then the declination can be estimated from the following simple expression. To synchronize the sine curve with the calendar, the distance from the March equinox to the end of year (284 days) is added to the NDY. As the year (365 days) corresponds to the full circle (360°), the ratio 360/365 = 0.986 must be applied as a multiplier, thus: DEC = 23. 45 * sin[0. 986 *(284+NDY)] If the DEC is known and the time of day is expressed by the hour angle, HRA, then altitude angle will be: ALT = arcsin(sinDEC*sinLAT+cosDEC*cosLAT*cosHRA) Two expressions are available for the azimuth: AZI = arccos[(cosLAT*sinDEC-cosDEC*sinLAT*cosHRA)/ cosALT] or AZI = arcsin[(cosDEC*sinHRA)/cosALT] The results will be between 0 and 180°, i.e. for a.m. only; for afternoon hours, take AZI = 360 - AZI. The sunrise hour angle is: Fig. 9. The analemma

40


SRH = arccos(-tanDEC*tanLAT)

Solar control 4

Fig.10. Horizontal shadow angle (HSA)

and the sunrise time is:

Fig.11. Some vertical shading devices giving the same HSA

SRT = 12 - [arccos(-tanDEC*tanLAT)/15] The azimuth angle at sunrise will be: SRA=arccos(cosLAT*sinDEC+tanLAT*tanDEC*sinLAT*cosDEC) Derivations of these equations are given in Szokolay (1996). The performance of vertical shading devices is measured by the horizontal shadow angle: HSA (Fig. 10). This is defined as the difference between the azimuth angle of the sun and the orientation azimuth (ORI) of the building face (sometimes referred to as the azimuth difference): HSA = AZI - ORI This will be positive if the sun is clockwise from the orientation, but negative when the sun is anticlockwise. For machine calculation the following checks must be included: if 90°< |HSA| < 270° then the sun is behind the facade, the elevation is in shade. If HSA > 270° then HSA = HSA - 360° if HSA < -270° then HSA = HSA + 360°

Fig.12. Vertical shadow angle (VSA)

Fig. 11 indicates that many different devices may have the same HSA. The performance of horizontal shading devices is measured by the vertical shadow angle (VSA), sometimes referred to as “profile angle.” Fig. 12 defines the VSA, which is measured as the sun’s position projected parallel with the building face onto a vertical plane normal to that building face, and it can be found from the expression: VSA = arctan(tanALT/cosHSA) Another definition of VSA is as the angle between two planes meeting along a horizontal line on the building face which contains the point considered, one being the horizontal plane and the other a tilted plane which contains the sun (Fig. 13). Both HSA and VSA can be used either to quantify the performance of a given shading device or to specify the required shading performance for a device yet to be

Fig.13. Relationship of VSA and ALT


41

4 Solar control

Fig.14. Angle of incidence

designed, to be effective at given times. If the angle of incidence (INC) is to be found, the following expressions can be useful. Referring to Fig. 14, first the general case: INC = arccos(sinALT*cosTIL+cosALT*sinTIL*cosHSA) where TIL = tilt angle of the receiving plane from the horizontal For a vertical surface, as TIL = 90°, cosTIL = 0, thus the first term becomes zero and sinTIL = 1, so it drops out and we are left with: INC = arccos(cosALT*cosHSA) and for a horizontal plane: INC = ZEN = 90° - ALT Graphic methods Fig. 15 shows the celestial domes for LAT = 28° north and south locations, as well as the north-south vertical sections of both (looking

Fig.15. The celestial dome or sky vault and its section looking west

42


Solar control 4

towards the west). In each case three sun-path lines are indicated: for the summer and winter solstices and the middle one for the equinoxes. All graphic methods employ some 2-D representation of the 3-D celestial dome. The sun’s paths for various dates can then be plotted on such a 2-D diagram. Fig. 16 explains three methods of constructing a 2-D diagram: all three giving horizontal circles. Altitudes (in these examples) are indicated on the section at 15° intervals. On the plan these are represented by concentric circles.

Fig.16. Construction of horizontal sunpath diagrams Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

43

4 Solar control

Fig.17. Three types of sun-path diagram, LAT = 38°

The orthographic (or parallel) projection can be likened to the spherical Chinese rice-paper lamp-shade with its wire rings. When laid flat on a table, it is the 2-D diagram; when the center is lifted until the largest ring remains on the table, it becomes the 3-D sky-vault, the wire rings being the various altitude circles. In this projection the altitude circles are at a very close spacing near the horizon, leading to loss of accuracy. It is sometimes used at low latitudes (tropical areas), but it is not acceptable at higher latitudes, low sun-angles. The stereographic (or radial) projection, originally developed by Phillips (1948), overcomes this problem. It uses the theoretical nadir point as the center for radial projection lines. An advantage of this projection is that all sun-path lines are circular arcs and can be constructed by a very simple method. This became the most widely used projection world-wide and is adopted in ISO/DIS 6399-1. The equidistant representation is the most widely used one in the U.S., as such charts are available from LOF (Libby-Owens-Ford). This is not a projection but a calculated construct, where the altitude circles are equally spaced and the calculated sun-path lines are plotted . Three sun-path lines are always shown for the four cardinal dates: summer and winter solstices and one line for the two equinoxes. Sunpaths for several intermediate dates can be shown, but their spacing varies with the particular publication. Short hour lines cross the sunpaths. These normally refer to mean solar time, thus noon is a short straight line at the center. Note that in all three forms of representation, the equinox sun-path starts exactly at east (sunrise) and terminates at west (sunset) at exactly 06:00 and 18:00 h respectively. Fig. 17 shows three charts for LAT = 38°. On the stereographic chart the way of reading the sun’s position is indicated. Find the sun position angle for March 21 at 14:00 h: locate the 14:00 h point along the equinox sun-path line (marked by a small circle) and project this point from the center to the perimeter, where the azimuth can be read as AZI = 216°. The altitude is found by interpolating the time-point between the adjacent altitude circles: in this case just above the 30° circle, approximately ALT = 32°.

Fig.18. The pattern of changing sun-paths from the equator towards the poles

44


Fig. 18 presents the pattern of shifting sun-path lines from the equator (LAT = 0°), where the paths are symmetrical, towards the poles, up to 60°. At the poles, the sun-paths would be concentric circles, or rather a spiral, up to 23.45° above the horizon for mid-summer, following the horizon circle at the equinoxes and not visible (below the horizon) for the winter half-year. The difference between equidistant and stereographic charts is not much, the methods of use are the same, but care must be taken not to use a stereographic protractor with an equidistant chart, or vice-verse, as this could lead to serious errors.

Solar control 4 Vertical diagrams A cylindrical projection is shown in Fig. 19: the hemisphere is radially (horizontally) projected onto the inside surface of a circumscribed cylinder. It is similar to the Mercator map-projection. The altitude circles are compressed towards the zenith and the horizontal dimensions, correct at the horizon, are stretched increasingly with the altitude: the zenith point becomes a line of the same length as the horizon circle. A version of this cylindrical projection is the Waldram diagram (Fig. 20), which uses the 45° altitude as the center-line, so both the very low and very high latitude lines are compressed. Fig. 21 gives an example of such a Waldram sun-path diagram. This compression is avoided by the projection method shown in Fig. 22, where the spacing of latitude lines is still decreasing, but not as drastically as above. Some authors go a step further and use an equidistant vertical chart, which is not a projection, but a calculated construct. An example of this is given in Fig. 23 for the same latitude as Fig. 21. This method has been adopted (amongst others) by Mazria (1979).

Fig.19. Cylindrical projection

Fig. 20. Waldram projection

Fig. 21. Waldram sun-path diagram for LAT = 52° Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

45

4 Solar control

Fig. 22. An improved projection of altitudes

Fig. 23. An equidistant vertical sun-path diagram, LAT = 52°

46


Solar control 4

Gnomonic projections Sun-clocks or sun-dials have been used for millennia. There are two basic types: horizontal and vertical (there are also numerous tilted varieties). With a horizontal sun-dial, the direction of the shadow cast by the gnomonic (a rod or pin) indicates the time of day. Conversely, if the direction of this shadow for a particular hour is known, then the direction of the sun (its AZI angle) can be predicted.

Fig. 24. Horizontal sun-dial

If the length of the gnomonic is known, then the length of the shadow cast will indicate the solar altitude (ALT) angle. During the day the tip of the shadow will describe a curved line, which can be adopted as the sun-path line for that day (Fig. 24). This way a set of sun-path lines can be constructed for various dates and thus a gnomonic horizontal sun-path diagram created. The principles of a vertical sundial are similar, except that the gnomonic is protruding horizontally from a vertical plane onto which the shadow is cast (Fig. 25). Fig. 26 presents a horizontal gnomonic (or perspective) sun-path diagram for an equatorial location and Fig. 27 for LAT = 32°. Vertical sun-path perspectives can be used for shading design, but for every latitude a different diagram would be required for every orientation. However, one set of horizontal diagrams is only necessary, as for any vertical plane there is a parallel plane somewhere on the earth’s surface. Fig. 28 explains this relationship for a north- (or south-) facing surface and Fig. 29 extends this for vertical surfaces of any orientation. A parallel horizontal surface is found along a great circle which lies in the direction of orientation of that vertical surface.

Fig. 25. Vertical sun-dial

The selected horizontal sun-path diagram can then be used vertically. Its equinox line will be horizontal for a north or south facing elevation, but will be tilted for other elevations. A full set of such horizontal gnomonic sun-path diagrams is presented in the supplement of Windows and environment, by W. Burt et al.(1969), where a method of selecting the appropriate horizontal chart, as well as tiling and calibrating it is given (also in Lynes 1968). The method is fully described and a reduced set of charts (8° latitude intervals) is presented in Szokolay (1980).

Fig. 26. Gnomonic sun-path diagram for LAT = 0°


47

4 Solar control

Fig. 27. Gnomonic sun-path diagram for LAT = 32°

Fig. 28. A north-facing vertical surface parallel with a horizontal

48


Fig. 29. A S/E facing vertical surface parallel with a horizontal, along a great circle

Solar control 4 Shadow cast These sun-path diagrams are practically the same as in Givoni (1969) the “flagpole shadow paths.” The “flagpole method” can be useful in constructing the shadow cast by a complex object at a specified time. The method is introduced by a simple example. Fig. 30 shows the plan and elevation of a small office block, located at LAT = 30°. Construct the shadow cast on November 3, at 08:00 h. The solar position angles have been read from the sun-path diagram: AZI = 140° and ALT = 40°. Imagine a flagpole located at each of points 1 and 2. Draw the direction of shadow cast at both points by the sun at 140° (towards 140 + 180 = 320°). Draw a line perpendicular to this direction at both flagpole points, to a length corresponding to the “flagpole” heights (6 m and 18 m respectively). From the tip of these draw a line to the ALT angle, and where this intersects the direction-line, it will mark the length of shadow. Given the two corners of the shadow cast, its outline can be completed by drawing parallel lines. APPLICATION Sketch design thinking Solar radiation falling on a window consists of three components: beam (direct) radiation, diffuse (sky) radiation and reflected radiation (from ground, other buildings, etc.). External shading devices can eliminate the beam component, which is normally the largest and also serve to reduce the diffuse component. As the sun’s (apparent) movement is unchangeable, solar orientation of the building is very important. This is paramount: whilst many other decisions in design are negotiable, orientation cannot be compromised. This is especially so if at some part of the year solar heat input is desirable. This period of desirable passive solar heating should be determined. Then the overheated period should also be determined, i. e. the dates when solar radiation should be excluded. At the sketch design stage this can be taken as the time when the mean temperature is higher than the lower comfort limit, as indicated by Fig. 31. The daily temperature profile can be considered at a later stage to ascertain the hours when shading is necessary. Keep in mind that an equatorial orientation (directly facing the equator) is the only one where a fixed horizontal shading device can give an automatic seasonal adjustment: exclude the summer

Fig. 30. The flagpole method used for shadow casting

Fig. 31. Temperature plot and comfort band for Phoenix, Arizona


49

4 Solar control

(high angle) sun, but allow sun penetration in winter, when the sun is at a low angle (Fig. 32). Another general principle is that for an equator-facing (or near equator facing) window a horizontal device would give a better performance, but for a window of east or west (or near east or west) orientation a vertical device may be more effective. A useful rule-of-thumb is that the solar altitude at equinox is 90°LAT, i.e. the latitude of the location (Fig. 33). From this the sun moves 23.5° up at mid-summer and 23.5° down at mid-winter. Comparing this with Fig. 15 shows that at equinox the noon altitude line coincides with the sectional view of the sun-path, indicating that the VSA (for an equator-facing window) will be constant for the whole day. If this is adopted initially as the VSA, then the sun would be fully excluded for the summer half-year and it would penetrate to an increasing extent after the autumn equinox, reaching its maximum at the winter solstice. It can be adjusted later when the design is being refined.

Fig. 32. Automatic seasonal adjustment: equator-facing window

A working method The performance of shading devices is indicated by their shading masks. These can be constructed with the aid of the shadow angle protractor (Fig. 34). This is a semicircular transparent sheet, of the same diameter as the sun-path diagram. It has a set of radial lines, marked from 0 at the center to -90° anticlockwise and +90° clockwise. This is the HSA scale. It also has a set of arc lines, converging to the left and right corners and spaced at the centerline the same as the corresponding altitude circles of the sun-path diagram. These indicate the VSA (both scales here are at 15° spacing). A vertical shading device will give a sectoral shaped shading mask. The pair of vertical fins shown in Fig. 35 will produce the shading mask shown in Fig. 36. Dotted lines drawn to the center point of the window indicate 50% shading, represented by the dotted lines drawn parallel with these on the shading mask. This shading mask can then be superimposed on the sun-path diagram, with its centerline corresponding to the orientation of the window, which will be shaded at the times covered by the shading mask Fig. 37). The base line of the protractor represents the line of building elevation examined. At any times below that, the sun would be behind the building, the elevation would be in shade. •

Fig. 33. Equinox sun position

Note that the sun-path lines (calendar dates) and the hour lines form a date x hour coordinate system, representing the year. The only unusual feature is that the lines are not straight, but curved.

The canopy above a window (one kind of horizontal shading device) shown in Fig. 38 gives a vertical shadow angle (VSA) of 60°. The shading mask of this will be segmental in shape, bounded by the 60° arc, as indicated by Fig. 39. The dotted line drawn to the mid-height point of the window and the corresponding dotted arc of the shading mask indicate 50% shading. Fig. 40 shows this shading mask superimposed on the sun-path diagram. The design process is best illustrated by an example. The overheated period has been defined (for Phoenix, Arizona) by Fig. 31: it extends over five months, from early May to mid-October. These dates are then marked on the sun-path diagram. From mid-October a gradually increasing amount of solar input is desirable to elevate the indoor mean: adequate building mass could ensure that (in winter) the daily maximum does not exceed the upper comfort limit. Fig. 34. The shadow angle protractor

50


Solar control 4

Fig. 35. HSA of a pair of vertical fins

Fig. 38. VSA of a horizontal shading device: a canopy

Fig. 36. Shading mask of the fins shown in Fig.35

Fig.39. Shading mask of the canopy shown in Fig.38

Fig. 37. Shading mask superimposed on the sun-path diagram for ORI = 210°

Fig. 40. Shading mask superimposed on the sunpath diagram


51

4 Solar control

Fig. 41. Working with the sun-path diagram

The (LAT = 30°) sun-path diagram (Fig. 41) shows that the early May sun-path line (interpolated between May 1 and 21) is quite different from the mid-October line (interpolated between October 6 and 20). This is an indication of the general phenomenon that changes of microclimatic temperature lag behind the sun’s movement by about a month. The latter is symmetrical about the solstices (June 22 and Dec. 22), whilst the peak temperature occurs at late July and the minimum in late January. The following requirements can be read for a south-facing window: May 7: Oct. 15:

VSA = 77° VSA = 53°

The compromise of VSA = 65° would give cut-off dates of about Apr. 3 and Sept. 10. If overheating is less tolerable than a slight underheating (which is generally the case) the compromise can be biased in the direction of more shading: say VSA = .60°. This would give cut-offs at the equinox dates.

Fig. 42. Combined fixed and retractable device

52


• Note that for equinox cut-off the VSA curve exactly matches the sun-path line, so there is no need to use the protractor: For the whole day VSA = HSA at noon.

Solar control 4

Fig. 43. As Fig.41, but ORI = 200°

For an exact solution, to avoid the above compromise, a fixed device could be provided for the higher VSA (77°), with a retractable extension down to the lower VSA (53°), as shown in Fig. 42. If the orientation of the window were other than due south, say 200° (west of south), then the protractor must be used. Fig. 43 shows that a horizontal device is ineffective for the late afternoon sun. A vertical device, e.g., a baffle at the western side of the window, should be used to assist. For full cut-off at the equinox dates, several combinations are possible, such as: (1) VSA = 50° with HSA = 40 - 90° (2) VSA = 60° with HSA = 10 - 90° If the first solution were adopted, the projection of the eaves (or some similar device) at the window head level would need to be: x = 1.2 / tan50 = 1.0 m with solution (2), this would be only: x = 1.2 / tan60 = 0.7 m

Fig. 44. The resulting shading mask

The latter may impose a need for a very obstructive vertical device (HSA = 10°) and as solution (1) is not excessive, it is adopted, producing the shading mask shown in Fig. 44. The final step is to translate this “performance specification” into an actual device.


53

4 Solar control

Fig. 45 shows the section and plan of the window. The west side baffle should project: y = 1.5 / tan40 = 1.78 m which is rather large, so perhaps two baffles of half the size (0.89 m) can be adopted to give the same HSA, shown in Fig. 45. Use of the protractor with the sun-path diagram allows viewing the overall pattern of shading effects and thus the making of informed decisions. The accuracy of the method is limited by the size of the diagram and even the eye-sight of the user. When a design has been adopted, it is fairly easy to do a few calculations (using the expressions given in the calculations above) to verify the graphic results and determine the final dimensions. It is essential that the intuitive and imaginative design of shading devices be based on such an analysis. Equally important, graphic and numerical results should be mitigated by intelligence and qualitative judgment. Shading devices There are three basic types of external shading devices: horizontal, vertical and egg-crate. A horizontal device will always give a segmental shaped shading mask, as shown in Figs. 38-39 and its performance is measured by the VSA. Some sub-types are: • • • • • • •

eaves overhang canopy at window head or higher a light-shelf designed to act also as a shade horizontal louvers (or brise-soleil = sun-breaks) with straight or tilted blades jalousie shutters awnings (canvas, plastic, etc.) combinations, e.g., a canopy with slats suspended at its edge

The last three may also be adjustable. A vertical device will always give a sectoral shaped shading mask, as shown in Fig. 35-36 and its performance is measured by the HSA. Some sub-types are: • • •

vertical fins or baffles vertical louvers, fixed. vertical louvers, adjustable.

Egg-crate (or combination) devices give a shading mask which is a composite of the above two. Some sub-types are:

Fig. 45. Section and plan of window with the device

54


• • • •

grille blocks, rectangular grille blocks, polygonal fins, both horizontal and vertical (equal or unequal) vertical fixed fins with horizontal (adjustable) louvers.

Solar control 4

Fig. 46. Mask of a rectangular grille block

Fig. 47. Mask of a hexagonal grille block

The shading mask of these must be constructed from its components, as shown in Fig. 46 for a rectangular grille block and in Fig. 47 for a hexagonal one. Shade cloths, timber lattices, the Arab mashrabyya (carved wooden screens), or the Persian and Indian perforated stone screens, are not considered to be “shading devices.” They are beautiful, allow ventilation whilst ensuring privacy, but they have no selectivity in time or in kind of radiation. They simply block out a certain percentage of all incoming radiation at all times of the year, including daylight.

Several books, such as Olgyay and Olgyay (1957), give a systematic review of shading devices and present a wide range of examples. Sun penetration The system of sun-path diagrams and protractor can be used to determine sun penetration through an opening at a given time or a sequence of time points. The method is best demonstrated through an example: Consider a 1 meter square window, with a sill height of 0.9 meters, facing 165° (S/SE). The location is LAT = 30° (say Houston, Texas). Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

55

4 Solar control

Fig. 48. Sunpath diagram, with protractor overlaid

Determine the sun penetration on January 21, at 10, 12 and 14 h. Take the 30° sun-path diagram and mark the three time-points on the Jan. 21 sun-path line. Superimpose the protractor with the appropriate orientation (Fig. 48). For HSA values use the radial lines to the perimeter and for VSA interpolate between the arc lines. The readings can be tabulated as follows: hour

HSA

10 12 14

-17 15 48

VSA 37 44 46

Draw a plan and section of the window. Plot the HSAs on the plan: draw two parallel lines for each time-point, tangential to the window jambs (Fig. 49). These will determine the direction of sun penetration. The VSA is actually the projection of the solar altitude angle onto a vertical plane normal to the window considered, which is the plane of our section. Therefore plot the VSAs on this section and draw two parallel lines for each-time point, touching the inside edge of the window sill and the outside edge of the head. These will mark on the floor the depth of sun penetration. Project these points up to the plan to define the edges parallel to the window of the rhomboidshaped sun-patches.

Fig. 49. Construction of sunlit patch

56


Sideways extent of canopy Fig. 50a is the plan and 50b the elevation of a 1 meter square, southfacing window, located at 30° latitude, with a canopy designed to give full shading at equinox dates. The required VSA has been established as 55°. To satisfy this, the projection of the canopy should be x = 1 / tan55 = 0.7 m.

Solar control 4 a) plan

This, with the same width as the window gives full shading at noon, when the sun is directly opposite the window, but not earlier and later. Assume that we want full shading between 10 and 14 h. With the protractor the required HSAs can be read: At 10 h: -45° and at 14 h: +45°. There are two simple ways to determine how far the canopy should extend sideways beyond the window jambs.

b) elevation, original

(1) On the plan of the window, indicate the edge of the canopy over with a dashed line. ; draw the HSA (-45 and +45°) outwards from the window edges. Point P, where this line intersects the edge-ofcanopy line will mark the necessary sideways extent of the canopy. This can also be confirmed by calculation: from the JPK triangle: x = tan 45 * 0.7 = 0. 7 (2) The construction can be performed on the elevation itself: we use the protractor to project the 10 and 14 h solar altitude points onto the plane of the wall, overlaying it on the sun-path diagram so that its centerline coincides with the wall (turning it 90° from the normally used position); placing the centerline to point towards the east (Fig. 51) we can read the VSA for 10 h as 55°. Reading for 14h would be the same, with the protractor pointing west.

c) elevation, canopy extended

Fig. 50b shows the shadow cast at 10 h by the original (1 m wide) canopy and Fig. 50c shows in elevation, to what extent the canopy should be lengthened to give full shading at the required times. Fig. 50. Sideways extension of canopy:

Fig. 51. Use of protractor to project solar altitude onto the wall surface


57

4 Solar control

Fig. 54. Overshadowing by two buildings

Fig. 52. Oversahdowing by a building: construction of shading mask

Fig. 55. Construction of shading mask

Overshadowing The concept of shading masks can be extended to evaluate the overshadowing effect of adjacent buildings or other obstructions. The technique is best explained by an example: • Question: For what period is point A of a proposed building overshadowed by the neighboring existing building?

Fig. 53. Shading mask laid over sunpath diagram

Assume that the building is located at LAT = 42° and it is facing 135° (S/E). Take a tracing of the shadow angle protractor and transfer onto it the angles subtended by the obstruction at point A, both in plan and in section, as shown on Fig. 52. This gives the shading mask of that building for the point considered. This can be placed over the appropriate sun-path diagram with the correct orientation (Fig. 53) and the period of overshadowing can be read. In this instance, look at the three cardinal dates: June 22: no overshadowing Equinoxes: shade from sunrise to 10:00 a.m. December 22: shade from sunrise to about 10:45 a.m.

58


Solar control 4

Fig. 56. Site survey: relevant angles

Fig. 57. Construction of shading mask

Fig. 58. Shading mask over sun-paths

Fig. 54 shows a more complex situation, where two existing buildings can cast a shadow over the point considered. To construct a shading mask: for horizontal angles draw radial lines parallel to those drawn on plan to the edges of the building. The altitudes measured from section are taken as the VSAs: use the shadow angle protractor so that its centerline is in the plane of the section, e.g.: direction X for section A-A (mark the 52° and 23° VSA arcs), for section BB: direction Y for the upper block and direction Z for the lower one. Fig. 55 shows the construction of the shading mask.

The technique can also be used for a site survey: to plot all obstructing objects that may overshadow a selected point of the site. Fig. 56 shows plan and sections of the site with the existing buildings and Fig. 57 explains the construction of the shading mask. This mask can then be laid over the appropriate sun-path diagram and the period of overshadowing can be read, as indicated by Fig. 58. If a full-field camera with a 180° fish-eye lens were to be placed at point A, pointing vertically upwards, the photo produced would be similar to this shading mask. A set of sun-path diagrams may be adapted for use as overlays to such photos. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

59

4 Solar control

SUN-SIMULATORS FOR MODEL STUDIES Many devices have been developed to simulate the solar geometry and allow the study of shading with the use of physical models. These devices are very useful teaching tools, but their value in design is limited. They are useful to check the behavior of a design hypothesis, to assist visualization and the examination of shading of buildings with complex geometries, to demonstrate the shading performance on a model, possibly by photographs of the model with shadows cast on different dates and times. Such photos can be useful in some controversial building permit applications, for presentation to clients or even in some court cases.

Fig. 59. The heliodon (UK)

All these devices employ a lamp to simulate the sun. A small light source gives a divergent beam at the model, resulting in shadows of parallel edges becoming divergent. This effect can be reduced by increasing the lamp-to-model distance or by using a large diameter light source. The device must allow three sets of adjustments: 1. for geographical latitude 2. for the calendar date 3. for the time of day. The oldest such device is the heliodon (Building Research Station UK 1932). The model must be fixed to a table, which tilts to simulate the latitude (horizontal for the poles, vertical for the equator), and rotates to give the time of day (Fig. 59). The sun-lamp is attached to a slider on a vertical rail at a known distance: the topmost position for summer solstice and the lowest position for mid-winter. The lamp level with the model simulates the equinoxes.

Fig. 60. The Australian solarscope

The solarscope, developed by the Commonwealth Experimental Building Station in Sydney (1946) is shown in Fig. 60. A spotlight is aimed at a mirror at the end of a long arm, which reflects the light down onto the model table (thus doubling the effective distance). This arm swings around a horizontal axis to represent the hour of day and tilts forward or up to give the calendar dates. The table can be lowered, which lifts the fulcrum of the arm and tips the mirror forward for high latitudes, or the table is lifted, lowering the fulcrum and raising the mirror for equatorial latitudes. The solarscope developed at the (then) Polytechnic of Central London in 1968 is perhaps the most convincing educational tool: the arc (3/4 circle) rail describes the sun’s path for the given day (Fig. 61). A motorized carriage travels on this rail from sunrise to sunset, on which a 26-inch (650 mm) diameter mirror is mounted, with a small high intensity lamp at its focal point. This gives a parallel beam for models up to 26 inches (650 mm) diameter. The rail itself slides sideways on two cross-bars, giving the calendar adjustment and these cross-bars tilt to provide the latitude adjustment. A rather similar device was constructed at the University of Southern California at about the same time (Fig. 62). The sun-lamp is mounted on a cross-bar, which allows the calendar adjustment and this bar travels along the arc rail to give the time of day. The tilting of the rail provides the latitude adjustment.

Fig. 61. A very realistic solarscope

60


A simplified version of this operates at the University of Buenos Aires (Fig. 63). This consists of three semi-circular arcs (corresponding to the equinox and two solstice sun-paths), fixed to two tiling crossbars, which give the latitude adjustment. A total of 39 small lamps are mounted on the rails (3 x 13) at 15° intervals, corresponding to the hours of the day. If this device is used only for one given location, then the tilting bars can be eliminated and the three arcs can be fixed to the table at the appropriate tilt.

Solar control 4

The SUNLIGHT heliodon (Fig. 64) is lightweight and manually operated. It is designed to simulate the illumination received on earth from the sun for latitudes 0-70 degrees, at any day of the year and any hour of the day. It is astronomically correct in demonstrating the motion of the sun in a physically realistic way. This heliodon is in use in the Architecture Schools of Yale University and Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute. SUNLIGHT, Madison, CT USA. (http://www. Printworks-Ltd.com/heliodon) The simplest method for shading studies is the use of some form of sun-dial, in conjunction with a model. This is to be fixed to the base of the model to be examined, with the north-points matching. The model is then tilted and turned, until the tip of the gnomon’s shadow points at the time point (date and hour) or interest. Fig. 65 is the ‘universal’ or ‘polar’ sun-dial. This is to be tilted from the model’s horizontal according to the location’s latitude, as indicated by the quandrant scales.

Fig. 62. A Californian heliodon

Additional references Burt, W. et al. 1969. Windows and environment (+ supplement) Newton-le-Willows, England: Pilkington Environmental Advisory Service / McCorquodale & Co., Ltd. Givoni, B. 1969. Man, Climate and Architecture. London: Applied Science Publishers. Libby-Owens-Ford (LOF) Glass Company. Sun angle calculator. 811 Madison Ave. Toledo, OH. 43695. Lynes, J. 1968. “Sunlight: Direct and diffused.” Section 2 of A J Handbook: Building Environment. 16 Oct. - 20 Nov. 1968. London: The Architects Journal. Mazria, E. 1979. The Passive Solar Energy Book. Emmaus, PA: Rodale Press. Olgyay, A. and Olgyay, V. 1957. Solar Control and Shading Devices. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Fig. 63. A simplified solarscope

Phillips, R. O. 1948. Sunshine and shade in Australasia. Technical Study No. 23. Sydney: Commonwealth Experimental Building Station. Smithsonian Institute. (undated) Smithsonian Meteorological Tables: Sun-path diagrams. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institute.

Fig. 64. SUNLIGHT heliodon Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

61

4 Solar control

Fig. 65. Universal Sundial (by permission of Pilkington Industries)

62


5

Daylighting design 5

Daylighting design Benjamin Evans


63

5 Daylighting design

64


Daylighting design Daylighting design 5 5

Summary: Principles of daylighting design combine aesthetic and psychological qualities of light, building orientation, cross-section, interior finishes, window design, and integration with electric lighting. Daylight is part of architecture, in both its historical, theoretical, and technical conception, with a unique capacity to inspire people and to illuminate the elements of its design.

Key words: contrast, daylighting, glare, lighting, light shelves, sky brightness, skylights, sunlighting, veiling reflections. People like daylight. We like interior spaces to have plenty of daylight. The variety and range of light and color that we experience in a forest grove engages all of our senses (Fig. 1). Daylighting design could aspire to the same inspirational effect. If people like something, it stands to reason they will consider it valuable and that when they have it they will be more satisfied and productive than when they don’t have it. This is all the justification architects need to introduce daylighting into building design. While daylighting can be employed to conserve energy and can enhance visibility, the principal values of daylighting are more intangible. Many factors are involved with the use of daylight in buildings: -

aesthetics: the play of light from windows on surfaces and textures casting interesting shadows; the endless variety of mood and appearances due to the movement of the sun;

-

psychological response: the sense of well-being associated with daylight and the sense of orientation that comes with being “connected” with the exterior;

-

health: improved resistance to infections, skin disorders, and cardiovascular impairment;

-

energy/cost: reduction in electric use and related air conditioning load from electric lighting.

Physiological benefits of daylighting A number of physiological benefits derive from lighting to humans, animals, and plants. Some types of growth, orientation, sexual stimulation, migration patterns, egg production, and other attributes are dependent on light content, duration, and intensity. •

Full-spectrum lighting. A trend in recent years has been to stimulate the use of so-called “full spectrum” electric lamps in buildings on the assumption that humans evolved in the natural envi-

Fig. 1. Woodland color and sunlighting

ronment and that, therefore, the sunlight’s total spectrum must be useful and valuable. It is a simple matter to accord with this assumption by using daylight whenever possible. Ultraviolet radiation, for instance, is essential to human health. It prevents rickets, helps keep the skin in a healthy condition, is responsible for the production of vitamin D in the body (thus reducing the incidence of broken bones in the elderly), and it destroys germs. Ultraviolet dilates the capillaries of the skin, reduces blood pressure, quickens the pulse rate and appetite, stimulates energetic activity, produces a feeling of well-being, reduces fatigue, and may even increase work output. There are dangers from overexposure to ultraviolet such as skin cancer, wrinkles, and possible eye damage, but most of the benefits and none of the liabilities have been directly associated with the use of daylight in buildings. •

Stimulus. The human organism is not adapted to unrelieved or steady stimuli or to the complete lack of stimuli. Uniformity in the environment produces monotony when humans are exposed to it for long periods. The constantly changing nature of daylight automatically and naturally responds to the need of the body and mind for a change of stimuli.

Although the body responds to steady-state conditions by changing itself, if the monotony is long continued, the body’s ability to respond to stimuli will gradually deteriorate. People require reasonable stimuli to remain sensitive and alert. On the other hand, overstimulation from lighting (such as direct bright light in the eye) can lead to emotional as well as physical fatigue. The goal in lighting design is to avoid excessive stimulation from direct light sources while providing some visual flexibility and stimuli. The proper introduction of daylight into the interior environment is the most effective way to provide such variation.

Author: Benjamin Evans, FAIA Credits: Portions of this article appeared in Architecture Magazine, February 1987 and are reproduced by permission of the publisher. References: Evans, Benjamin. 1987. “Basics of Daylight Design: Treating natural light as an architectural element.” February, 1987. Architecture. Washington, DC: Architecture Magazine. IESNA. 1993. The Lighting Handbook. Mark S. Rea, editor. New York: Illuminating Engineering Society of North American. Lam, William M. C. 1986. Sunlighting: Formgiver for Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. Millet, Marietta S. 1996. Light Revealing Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. Robbins, Claude L. and Kerri C. Hunter. 1982. “Daylight Availability Data for Selected Cities in the United States.” Golden, CO: Solar Energy Research Institute (SERI). Romm, Joseph J. 1994. Lean and Clean Management. New York: Kodansha America, Inc. Watson, Donald. 1996. Daylight model testing as a research/design assignment. Vital Signs Curriculum Materials Project. Troy, NY: Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute School of Architecture. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

65

5 Daylighting design •

Orientation. The human need for a recognizable relation to the outside environment is well known. Aviators who lose contact with the horizon are subject to vertigo. Passengers on a ship or airplane are more likely to experience seasickness if they are below decks with no visual contact with the horizon. People inside buildings who lose contact with the exterior may feel insecure about possible escape from fire. People are frustrated and distracted (perhaps subconsciously) when not able to sense what the weather is outside and to have some sense of nature’s time.

Psychological benefits of daylighting There are psychological benefits as well, not readily quantified, but evident in qualitative human responses: •

•

Sunshine. The presence of direct sunshine in the interior environment is one of the strongest psychological benefits. The evidence of a desire by most people for some direct sun is strong. Although direct sun on a visual task may produce excessive brightness differences, some direct sun in proper location and quantity is stimulating and desirable. Daylighting design can often include direct sun without destroying visual acuity. View. A view to the exterior is another psychological benefit to building occupants. While techniques for admitting daylight are not necessarily directly related to a window with a view, they most often are related. Windows, daylight, and a view go together. Numerous studies have established that people consider a view to be very important. Any leasing agent of building space will confirm the fact that tenants usually are willing to pay more for office space with windows than for windowless spaces.

What constitutes a valuable view is generally related to the information content in the view and the distance between occupant and window. The best views (and the most information content) are those that include some sky, horizon, and foreground. More important however, is a view containing a balance of synthetic and natural things with some element of movement, change, and surprise involved. The closer the occupant is to the window (and, hence, a total view) the more the satisfaction will be. Broad horizontal windows are more satisfying than narrow vertical windows, an optimal size being about 20 to 30 percent of the exterior (window) wall. •

Brightness gradients and color constancy. Daylight generally produces a gradation and color of light on surfaces and objects that biologically is “natural” for humans. Daylight is the “standard” against which the human mind measures all things seen, probably because of a lifetime association with daylight. A gradation of daylight on a wall surface from a window will seem natural, and the wall will look smooth. Uneven lighting from electric sources will likely make the walls appear uneven. Colors seen with daylight will appear real and appropriate through something called “color constancy,” even though the color produced by daylight will vary from dawn to noon to dusk, as well as by color reflection from adjacent surfaces. A shopper purchasing new clothing often knows to check the apparent color of the material next to the window where daylight is available.

Criteria for lighting design There are several ways to consider lighting. Some are essentially aesthetic. Satisfaction with the results of any aesthetically-based lighting design will depend on the skills of the designer and the perception of the viewer. Another way to consider lighting is in terms of how well it allows people to see what they want to see. This kind of lighting quality is easy to define, if not so easy to apply. Studies of industrial worksites have established that daylighting provides multidirectional lighting and directly contributes to error reduction (Romm 1994). When the ability to see and perceive fine detail in a surface or object is considered necessary or highly desirable (espe-

66


cially where not seeing the detail will cause undesirable results, such as accounting errors), then the object must be well lighted and the quality of the lighting can be judged through two primary characteristics: contrast and glare. Contrast is necessary for good visual perception, the result of luminous (or brightness) differences that, in turn, are dependent upon the illuminance falling on the task and the reflectivity (ability to reflect light) of the task. The printed words on an illuminated newspaper are of low reflectance, and hence, low luminance, while the white paper itself is of high luminance (or brightness). The contrast between the two is what allows them to be perceived by the human eye. There must first be sufficient light to invoke a visual response. Hence, the need for a certain quantity of illuminance (light). With a given quantity of lighting, there can be different contrast ratios in a task that produce different visual conditions. For this reason, illuminance levels are not a sufficient criteria for judging or specifying the quality of the lighting environment. Luminance differences are more important. On the other hand, it is possible to produce excessive contrast: contrast that impedes good visual response. A bright light in the field of view will detract from one’s ability to see other surrounding objects. An oncoming auto headlight in the dark of night will prevent a view of the dark roadway. A ceiling-mounted luminaire will detract from a person’s ability to see a nearby task when both are in the field of view. For this reason, luminaires need some type of shielding device to prevent a direct view of the lamps. Bright clouds seen through a window will also prevent or detract from the ability to see tasks in the same field of view, such as the interior of an outside wall or a book between clouds and the viewer. Glare is usually associated with brightness differences (too much light in the field of view) or with reflected light. Light reflecting off a task or its visual surround, even one with a low reflectance (for example, printing on a page), can reduce or eliminate our ability to see the task. This kind of glare is called a “veiling reflection,” so named because it “veils” (reduces or eliminates) our ability to see the task by reducing the contrast. Such glare is the result of a bright light shining off a task at the “mirror angle” (as a light on the ceiling might be reflected in a mirror placed on the task). It is for this reason that the ceiling is generally a poor place for locating luminaires (unless properly located and/or shielded with respect to the occupant’s task) and that windows, generally located to the viewer’s side, produce good quality task light without veiling reflections. Veiling reflections cause loss of contrast. It takes 10 to 15 percent more illumination to make up for each one percent loss in contrast due to veiling reflections. Most tasks thus require two to three times as much illumination from overhead sources as from sidewall lighting. Good quality lighting for visual tasks, then, is a matter of bringing in sufficient light of the direction and quality to produce clarity without excessive contrast or glare. Programming for daylight The decision to include strategies and elements of daylighting in a design is generally left to the architect. Clients are not usually aware that this issue requires special attention. Making extensive use of daylight often calls for significant trade-offs, as well as decisions of design and building operation—lighting controls and switches that will be used—so it is important that the client and facilities manager be made aware of the choices. In early programming, objectives should be set for the visual environment and the types of lighting to be employed. Daylighting is not an afterthought or a simple matter of applying some shading controls to the windows any more than one can just “stick” luminaires in the ceiling (as often the apparent case). The quality of illumination, how

Daylighting design 5 well people wish to see inside a building is a key factor in the design, occupant productivity and satisfaction, operation, energy consumption, and long-term costs. Use of a building under emergency conditions (that is, with temporary loss of power) may also suggest daylighting approaches in areas related to life safety such as exitways. In the context of energy, building energy performance standards adopted by states and municipalities provide targeted building energy use for specific types of buildings and site conditions, in which case lighting quantities may be proscribed. These must be evaluated in terms of the resulting lighting quality.

•

Clear sky, which provides a relatively steady source of low-intensity light with direct sun of high intensity. For buildings designed for climates with prevailing clear skies, solar control (sun-shading) is generally required and can be reliably dimensioned, depending on the requisites of underheated versus overheated conditions. In hot arid climates (such as a desert location), window apertures can be very small and utilize reflected light to protect the interior against direct sun and glare, and yet provide high levels of illumination.

•

Overcast sky, which may be a very dark under dark clouds, or which may be very bright and “hazy,” low level lighting, but diffusely cast from the entire sky dome (that is, nearly omnidirectional). An overcast sky can be excessively bright when viewed from inside the building, or it may be quite dark. In climates with prevailing cloudy skies, fixed exterior sun control is generally not advisable since it increases darkness and shading under overcast conditions. Interior shades for glare control from all directions may be needed.

•

Partly cloudy sky can be considered a third type of sky from the standpoint of daylighting design, characterized by partial or intermittent clouds and by a blue background with bright, white clouds (oftentimes passing and changing rapidly), with direct sunshine penetrating off and on. Intensities on the ground can change rapidly. Passing clouds viewed from the interior can be exceedingly bright, causing glare and visual discomfort. In climates with such intermittent conditions, a combination of fixed and movable sun and light controls is recommended.

Specific goals related to daylighting of buildings may be stated in simple terms: •

Design to achieve daylight in all feasible areas in significant, useful quantities,

•

Distribute daylight reasonably uniformly, with no significant dark spots, (although variation within the visible range is acceptable and can provide desirable relief).

•

Avoid allowing direct sunshine into the building interior in such a way that it may cause visual discomfort (excessive brightness differences) or visual disability (glare). Assess the design for all possible sun penetration angles.

•

Provide daylight sensitive controls for the electric lighting so that it will be dimmed or turned off when not needed.

Each of these goals must be evaluated against prevailing standards. Recommended light levels for various visual tasks as well as criteria for judging other goals related to good visual acuity and quality lighting are given in IESNA (1993). The visual process includes too many other variables to permit illumination quantity levels to be the ultimate criteria. Brightness patterns and sunlight and shadow need to be thoughtfully considered under all of the changing conditions that might prevail throughout the year. Climate and building type (occupancy) will be a factor for the amount of glass that can be optimally used for thermal as well as daylighting control. The sculpturing process The design of architecture for daylighting begins with consideration of site, climate, and the neighborhood and extends to building geometry, surface materials and finish treatments, apertures and glazing. During the principal hours of daylight, there is almost always enough light available from the sun and sky to provide illumination for most human visual tasks. Consider that on an average clear day there is typically 5,000-8,000 (or more) footcandles (fc) outside and that reading legibility is provided by illumination 50 to 80 fc, one can roughly generalize that there is 100 times the level of daylight illumination available than is needed. Design for daylighting involves the art of making such daylight-source illumination both tolerable and useable by reflection, diffusion and redirection. This is much like the design of a lighting fixture or luminaire, only in the case of a daylit building, the (solar) light source changes in location and intensity throughout the day and year. It is not necessary that daylighting conditions be precisely predictable. The designer can establish a set of goals to be achieved within a reasonable range of expected exterior daylight conditions and then set forth to make the most of available daylight, while providing a supplemental or alternative electric lighting system to contribute additional light when conditions require. Sky conditions There are three types of sky conditions generally considered in daylighting design:

Data are available based on calculations of anticipated daylight at particular locations based on the month, day, time of day, and building orientation (Robbins and Hunter 1982). Calculated data are reasonably accurate and empirically quantified. However, these do not include allowances for cloud cover conditions and, therefore, must be modified by data on localized cloud cover, represented in typical airport data. Site and building orientation Selection of the building site or of the building location within a site might be influenced by daylighting considerations. While none need prohibit the use of daylight, several site features to be considered include: •

Location of the building on the site so that daylight can reach the apertures without significant interference from nearby obstacles (such as tall buildings, mountains, or trees).

•

Highly reflective surfaces near the site, such as glass-covered buildings that could cause excessive glare.

•

Trees and shrubs on the site that might give shade and reduce sky glare from the interior.

•

Bright ground surfaces that can be used to reflect daylight into the interior (as much as 40 percent of interior daylight can come reflected from ground surfaces). Glare from reflecting ground or window sill surfaces needs to be avoided.

Most any building orientation can effectively make use of daylighting, although the amount and type of daylight available will vary with each wall surface. The essential difference in the quantity and quality of daylight received from different orientations has to do with the location of the direct sun. Direct sun may have to be shaded and the intensity of the daylight will vary in the northern hemisphere from south (“equatorial facing”, east-west, and north (“polar orientation”). In the southern hemisphere, of course the equatorial and polar orientations are the obverse. There is some difference in the brightness and color of the sky in different quadrants, but this is of only minor importance to the designer. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

67

5 Daylighting design Openings to the polar orientation will probably require larger glass areas than other orientations to achieve similar results. There can be certain advantages to the polar orientation (that is, little or no sun control is necessary and illumination tends to be soft and diffuse), but sky glare control may still be necessary. East and west fenestration must deal with the early morning and late afternoon low-altitude sun, which tends to move up and across the sky in relatively rapid fashion causing excessive brightness and potential overheating. Some type of vertical shielding is generally most effective (such as vertical louvers or zig-zag walls) on east and west facades, with the nagging problem that each orientation experiences extreme conditions of sun for one-half of the daylight hours and complete shade for the other half. Fixed louvers tend to interface with a view out but can be quite effective in letting daylight in and in reflecting and diffusing its effect.

Fig. 2. Carpenter Center for the Visual Arts. Harvard University, Cambridge, MA. Architect: Le Corbusier.

The equatorial-facing facade provides the best opportunity for daylighting and utilization of the “solar resource.” This orientation receives direct sun throughout the day and is most easily controlled by short horizontal sun shades and light shelves (horizontally placed light reflectors), keeping the high sun out in the summer but allowing winter low-altitude sun penetration if desirable. Sky brightness will still be a factor to be dealt with. Shape guides daylight Perhaps the most significant design determinant in the use of daylight is the geometry of the building—walls, ceilings, floors, windows, and how they relate to each other. Architecture has always been shaped by considerations for sunlight and daylight—ancient Greek and Roman villas and baths, Gothic cathedrals of the 13th and 14th centuries, nineteenth century industrial buildings, masterworks of Frank Lloyd Wright, Alvar Aalto, and Louis Kahn, and school buildings of the 1950s by William Caudill, among others. •

Fig. 3. Lighting model. Tennessee Valley Authority Headquarters (TVA). Chattanooga, TN. Architects Collaborative and CRS, in joint venture. Van der Ryn/Calthorpe, Partners and William Lam, consultants. Photo: courtesy of Sarah Harkness, FAIA.

Building configuration. Daylighting of multistory buildings will be most effective if long and narrow so that daylight can penetrate from both sides. A rule-of-thumb is that with reasonably sized fenestration, daylighting can be quite easily achieved to a depth of about 15 ft. (4.5 m) inward from the aperture; with windows open to a high ceiling, about 20 ft. (6 m) inward from the aperture. These values can be increased with designs that extend the illumination by reflection (from light-shelves) and by light-colored surfaces, in documented examples from 30 to 40 ft. (9 to 12 m) (Lam 1986). In single-story buildings, skylights or clerestories can be used, thus permitting the building to assume a more square shape.

Often the footprint (or floor plan) of the building can be sculptured to achieve shading from the direct sun and/or to control the view from the interior. Carpenter Center at Harvard (Fig. 2) is an example of breaking up the exterior wall surface to prevent direct sun penetration while still allowing daylight reflection and view. Atria, light wells, and courtyards can be used to effectively admit daylight, not only into the well openings, but into adjacent interior spaces as well, as in the TVA Headquarters Building, Chattanooga, TN (Figs. 3 and 4). In reviewing geometric and design options, it is useful for the designer to understand some of the quantitative relationships that go with various geometric forms. A review of measured illumination levels for various types of building designs can be helpful as can simple calculations, but experience is also a good teacher. Designers should manipulate the forms and measure the results before they can understand the quantitative relationships. Such experience can be acquired through model studies, as indicated in the accompanying illustrations. Fig. 4. Light reflectors along the interior of TVA Headquarters atrium

68


•

Window Height. The window size and height above the workplane are among the most important geometric factors in daylighting

Daylighting design 5 design. The higher the space, the farther will be the daylight penetration. Naturally, bigger windows admit more daylight. But the height of the windows is the more significant factor in getting the daylight deep into the interior. The height of the ceiling above the floor has little effect on the daylight if windows are not placed high in the exterior wall. •

Room Depth. Tests by the author have shown that as the depth of the room becomes greater, everything else remaining the same, the level of daylight intensity throughout becomes less—a simple matter of spreading the same quantity of incoming light over a larger area. A 28-ft. (8.5 m) deep room has 18 percent less light at a point near the back wall than at the same relative position in a 24 ft. (7.3 m) room; a 32 ft. (9.8 m) room, 28 percent less.

The traditional rule-of-thumb (in some cases a state code stipulation) that recommends that the depth of the room should not be more than two and one-half times the height of the window is somewhat applicable, but it assumes that the window is continuous from one side wall to the other. •

Surface Reflectance. The effects of various wall surfaces can be seen from the following example: Consider a simple rectangular room with windows on one end, with all interior surfaces painted white. Consider that the measured illumination on a fixed desk is assumed to be 100 percent, as a base reference (all white room). When the back wall (away from the window) is painted flat black, the illumination on the desk is reduced to 50 percent of the original intensity; with the side walls only painted black the intensity is reduced to 62 percent; with the floor only painted black the illumination is reduced to 68 percent; and with the ceiling painted black, to 39 percent.

When the top surface of the light shelf is exposed to direct sun, it reflects daylight to the interior ceiling and thus extends light farther into the room. When compared to a fenestration of the same dimension without the light shelf, the interior illumination with a light shelf will be less, because the light shelf blocks out some of the light, most noticeably near the window plane. (Sometimes window sills may be extended as with a thick wall section or with a bay-window configuration to act as a light shelf, in which case it does increase the amount of illumination that is reflected to the interior, although this may be a source of undesirable glare if it is within the vision cone of the occupant.) While the contribution of light shelves and light reflecting surfaces within the window may no add to the quantity of interior daylighting, the quality of the result is improved. Its effect is to distribute light more evenly and more deeply into the interior. The light shelf may be white or highly reflective (as with polished metal) to increase the daylight reflectance. As with any lighting scheme that uses the ceiling as a reflective surface, ceiling finishes and materials have to be carefully selected and installed, since any flaws and/or joints are revealed and made sharper by horizontal or grazing light. Light shelves are ineffective when exposed to diffuse skylight only, since they are designed to reflect “beam” radiation. Thus their use anywhere but on equatorial-facing fenestration will not be productive. •

Skylights. The illumination falling on the horizontal plane of the roof may be many times that which strikes the vertical plane of a window even under an overcast sky. To allow the eye to adjust to the bright skylighting source, some shadowing and reflecting surfaces are needed (Fig. 5).

Such figures, the results of tests by the author, show the ceiling to be the most important surface in reflecting daylight coming into the room and reaching the task. Next in importance is the back wall, then the side walls, and finally, the floor. This indicates at least two design guidelines: keep the ceiling as light in color as possible and use the floor surface for deep colors. Dark colors on the floor will have the least negative effect on the daylighting of tasks. •

Overhangs. Building overhangs can be very useful for sun and rain control. Although they do reduce the quantity of daylight within the building, particularly next to the window wall, they are especially effective in reflecting light from outside ground planes back into the interior of the building. The result is a more even distribution of light in the space. Test results indicate a 39 percent drop in illumination near the window of a unilaterally lighted room with the addition of a six-foot overhang, but only a 22 percent drop near the interior wall. Overhangs are also helpful in reducing the area of bright sky that can be seen from within the interior, although the effect is usually minimal.

Apertures are critical The amount of daylight that enters any opening (aperture) is proportional to the size of the opening, the transmissivity of the glazing, and, of course, the daylight available to enter. The amount of daylight that reaches any point in the interior is related to the area and brightness of both the exterior sources of daylight and interior daylit surfaces that are “seen” from that particular point. Thus, a point close to the aperture “sees” a larger portion of the sky and has a higher illumination level than a point farther away from the aperture. Interior surfaces also contribute daylight to the task and are influenced by light reflected from other surfaces. •

Light shelves. A light shelf is a horizontal plane placed below the top of a window, usually just above door height allowing light to be reflected from its upper surface to the ceiling level. The light shelf can be placed entirely outside, or in combination of outside-inside.

Fig. 5. Corcoran Gallery, Washington, skylight modeled after the dome of the Pantheon. Shadowing provided by the coffers allows the eye to adjust to its lighting intensity. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

69

5 Daylighting design In environments where visual acuity is critical, such as classrooms, libraries and offices, the diffuse skylight, directly viewable from below, may produce excessive brightness and to cause disabling veiling reflections on tasks below, just as electric luminaires can. However, daylight from skylights can be controlled through the use of splayed wells and louvers, to minimize veiling reflections. Diffuse plastic or opaque glass in skylights tend to diminish the biological benefits of daylight by modifying visual contact with the weather. There seems little logic in using diffuse glazing. Skylights reduce energy consumption by reducing the need for electric lighting, and they admit heat from the sun in winter, reducing the need for other internal heating, which can be significant. However, skylights lose some interior heat and electric light to the cooler outside air and admit heat from the outside during the air-conditioning season. The determination of whether or not skylights will be economically viable in a particular situation must include a year-round analysis of both positive and negative aspects based on local climatic conditions. A properly designed skylight system with daylight and heat transfer controls for both day and night operation will prove viable on a year-round basis in almost all localities. Much like a lighting fixture, the conical skylights familiar in work by Alvar Aalto spread daylighting from small apertures (Fig. 6). •

Fig. 6. Baker House Student Lounge, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, MA. Alvar Aalto. 1947. Splayed conical skylights provide substantial daylighting.

Clerestories. Clerestories have many of the attributes of skylights except that they occur in the vertical rather than the horizontal plane and, therefore, are exposed to less quantity of direct daylight than are skylights. They can however gain illumination by reflection from adjacent roof surfaces and can be oriented to prevent penetration of direct sun. When built in combination with an interior reflector or light shelf, a clerestory can bounce great quantities of direct sun against the ceiling providing significant levels of illumination on the tasks below, and at the same time blocking the view from below of the bright sky (Fig. 7). The penetration of direct sun through clerestories can be eliminated with proper orientation or with the addition of overhangs and/or horizontal louvers, on the interior or exterior. Light colored roof surfaces adjacent to the clerestories can increase the reflection of daylight to the interior.

Documented examples, such as Johnson Controls Office Building in Salt Lake (Fig. 8), have demonstrated that an equatorial-facing clerestory can provide sufficient illumination to eliminate the use of electric light under year-round daylight conditions (Lam 1986).

Fig. 7. South-facing clerestories with louvers. Public Library, Mt. Airy, NC. Mazria/Schiff, Architects. 1982. Louver baffles provide shading and light diffusion.

70


Fig. 8. South-facing clerestory. Johnson Controls Office Building. Salt Lake City, UT. Douglas Drake, Architect, Donald Watson, FAIA and William Lam, consultants. 1982.

Daylighting design 5 Devices that control daylight A variety of daylight controlling devices may be helpful in getting the daylight to where it is needed and for eliminating excessively bright areas from view. Some of these controls are dynamic (they can be moved) and some are static (they remain in place permanently). Dynamic controls have the advantage of allowing for change in response to changing sky conditions, thereby improving the efficiency of the design, but have the disadvantage of requiring either an operator (usually the occupants, an unreliable source in general) or an expensive automatic device, which can be difficult to maintain. Static controls are less troublesome but also less responsive and efficient. •

Louvers. There are a variety of types of louvers for daylight control. They may be small, movable, and on the interior (such as venetian blinds), or they may be large and fixed on the exterior as were commonly found on buildings of the 1940s. Regardless of type, they perform basically the same way. One of the most effective is the venetian blind. Venetian blinds can be adjusted to exclude direct sun but reflect its light to the ceiling where it will bounce into the interior areas, while still allowing a view to the exterior, or they can be tilted to the closed position to block light and view. They can be adjusted to all lighting conditions and thus have great versatility, if actually used! Light colored blinds are far more effective for lighting and also more conducive to thermal comfort: under direct sun and in the closed position, dark venetian blinds will heat up more readily than light colored, and radiate that heat to the interior.

Horizontal louvers and overhangs are most effective for high altitude sun such as on the south fenestration. Vertical louvers are most effective for low altitude sun such as on the east and west facades. For situations where both high and low sun must be considered (southwest facade), “egg crate” louvers are often the most effective control. •

Glazing. The most popular types of glazing materials include clear glass, tinted glass, and other glasses referred to as “selectively transmitting” glasses. All glazing materials are somewhat selectively transmitting, that is, they permit the passage of some parts of the radiant energy spectrum (light), while reflecting or absorbing other parts (heat producing). For instance, 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) clean, clear glass transmits about 90 percent of the visible energy which strikes it, while allowing only about 79 percent of the infrared (heat producing) radiant energy to pass through.

Manufacturers of glass are developing glasses that are more selective in transmitting beneficial light. Some glazing materials, for instance, reflect (rather than transmit or absorb) a higher percent of the sun’s heat-producing energy while allowing a greater percent of visible light transmission. Such glasses offer some advantage in the light-heat tradeoff process, but manufacturer literature can sometimes be misleading through the use of claims not substantiated by their own technical data. Caution should be exercised in the selection of the most cost effective glazing materials. Special systems With lighting as both an aesthetic and technical impetus, there are numerous developments that extend daylight applications. With a “light pipe,” using variations of fiber optics, or even a water-filled plastic tube, it is possible to configure the pipe so that sunlight is transported through the tube and around bends and corners with very little absorption and loss of light. This is done via various devices such as mirrors, heliostats, lenses, light pipes, and other light reflecting and transporting devices. One approach, referred to as active solar optics, includes powered heliostats which track the sun and reflect direct sunlight into a building. The success of transporting direct sunlight effectively and economically is still dependent on refinement and/or development of more efficient and cheaper heliostats, mirrors, lenses, and other equipment. Related systems include methods of reflecting sunlight into buildings via mirrors and light wells, sometimes with lenses, as well as methods which employ reflective louvers or light shelves in the fenestration. For Morgan Hall, Harvard Business School, William Lam designed a large horizontal reflector that moves to follow the monthly solar altitude and to reflect sunlight down a relatively narrow fourstoried lightwell. The University of Michigan Law Library skylight incorporate mirrored surfaces mounted vertically within its mullion structure that reflect and diffuse daylight down a multi-storied underground atrium (Figs. 9 and 10). The dramatic effect of sunlight reflection and refraction is captured within the skylights of the Chapel at Harvard Business School (Fig. 11). Transparent and translucent building materials are being developed that increase the effect of daylighting. Glass balconies, walkways and stairways at Hartford Atheneum diffuse and transmit sunlight within its remodeled entry gallery (Fig. 12).

The tinted, transparent glasses (and plastics) have been popular because of their ability to reduce the apparent brightness of exterior surfaces when seen from the interior. These glasses are produced principally in gray or bronze, or variations thereof. The use of tinted glasses that change the color of the daylight should be avoided because of the color distortion which results. Transmissivity values of these tinted materials range from the very dark (10-15 percent), to the very light (70-80 percent) and their transmittance of the infrared spectrum (heat) is only slightly more restricted—usually 10-15 percent below that of the visible transmittance.

Energy and cost issues In the school buildings of the 1950s, daylighting was justified because of its contributions to good visual conditions. In buildings of the 1970s, the justification was based primarily upon the energy savings possible with daylighting. For energy conservation to be justified from the standpoint of using daylighting, there must be a reduction from the norm in energy use for electric lighting and/or for cooling/ heating. Thus, energy conservation is related not only to the introduction of daylight but to the proper use and control of electric lighting.

While tinted glazing can be a useful tool in creating a lighting environment, its use in a building to be daylighted is self defeating since it prevents the penetration of the useful daylight. Tinted glazing is recommended for use only when the primary source of interior light is from other locations (that is, skylights or electric lights) and the tinted glazing is used only for viewing out.

The design of daylighting and electric lighting are best undertaken collaboratively and sensitively from the earliest design schematic. The Ritz Hotel Tea Room, London, provides an example of integrating daylight and electric light (Fig. 13). Its low-level electric lighting is augmented by highly reflective surfaces. Located on the west side, afternoon sunlight enters late afternoon, when tea is served. Other nineteenth century examples, configured when daylight was the primary source of lighting, illustrate the point. The Boston Public Library Reading Room by McKim, Mead and White is illuminated by the combination of table lamps (task lighting) and high windows (Fig. 14).

If the transmissivity of tinted glass is around 60 percent or above, most occupants of a building will not be aware of the situation when they are inside, unless they can also see to the exterior through some clear glass or an opening at the same time. Once people become aware of the tinted glass, they tend to find it a little frustrating because of its unnaturalness. Tinted glass below about 50 percent transmissivity may be noticeable and invoke a feeling of impending rain.

Cost-effective use of daylighting is linked to the reduction in energy use for electric lighting and for air conditioning. If the consumption of energy from electric lights can be reduced, the energy needed for Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

71

5 Daylighting design

72

Fig. 9. Lightwell of Michigan Law Library. Gunnar Birkerts, Architect. 1974.

Fig. 10. Lightmodel of Michigan Law Library. Daylight model study by Genevieve Black and Kirsten Youngren. Equinox 12 noon. Daylight factor = 5%. (Watson 1996)

Fig. 11. Skylights of the Chapel at Harvard Business School, Cambridge, MA. Architect: Moshe Safdie; Sculptor: Charles Ross; Prism steering design and installation: Thomas Hopper. 1990. Oil-filled prisms are computer-controlled to track the sun and create a continuously refracted sunbeam.

Fig. 12. Atheneum Museum, Hartford, CT. Remodeling of Entryway. 1996. Glass walkways (seen above at right of photo) diffuse daylight throughout the entry gallery. Ta-Soo Kim, Architect.


Daylighting design 5 dumping the heat from those lights to the outside can also be reduced. These savings must be balanced against the heat gains and losses associated with the daylighting system through windows and skylights. The assumption is often made that good daylighting design will increase the capital cost in a building. If the design concept is confined to a rectangular space with windows on one wall, there is little that can be done to make daylighting effective without adding to the building’s first cost. However, if daylighting is a prime consideration in the total design—allowed to influence spatial relationships, form, and detail from the very beginning of the design process—the first-cost investments attributable to daylight may be small or nonexistent. Daylighting is part of the total building cost-benefit and should not be treated as an “add-on.” The cost benefit of design for daylighting must be considered in conjunction with other lighting costs and benefits, with solar heat gains and losses, with energy uses and saving and so forth. There is no simple conclusion about the cost of daylighting that can be applied to all building designs. Presently available daylighting analysis methods range from the use of simple graphic tools to sophisticated mainframe computers and physical scale-model studies. Daylighting analysis All analysis methods, whether graphic, mathematical, or physical, are attempts to simulate a full-scale condition. The difference in the various analytical tools available is in the parameters that can be included

Fig. 13. Ritz Hotel Tea Room, London. Skylighting admits afternoon sunlight around tea time. Example suggested by King Lui Wu.

Fig. 14. Boston Public Library Reading Room, illuminated by combination of reading lights and high windows.

Fig. 15. Riola Church, Bologna, Italy. Alvar Aalto, Architect. 1966. Daylight model study by Jay Adams and Jon Vandervelde. Summer solstice 9 am. Daylight factor = 12%

Fig. 16. Church of the Light. Osaka Prefecture. Japan. Tadao Ando, Architect. 1989. Daylight model study Hiro Ogino and Peter Sprouse. Winter solstice 9 am. Daylight factor = 2% Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

73

5 Daylighting design and the accuracy the results. A simple graphic overlay can be used to size a window under overcast sky conditions, but the result will be far from a reproduction of reality. A small programmable calculator can provide comparison of two design alternatives under certain limited conditions. Personal computer programs allow more complex analysis, but a still limited to parameters that must be understood for useful results. A mainframe computer analysis can provide fairly accurate results within certain important limits, but it can also couple daylighting concerns with the thermal, energy, and cost concerns involved. A physical scale model can produce quite accurate results if constructed and tested under appropriate conditions. In the design of Shell Oil Headquarters, a series of lighting models from small-scale to fullscale provided for its systematic development, modeled under actual sky conditions at the site (Figs. 17a-17d). Perhaps because of its visually apparent results and the fact that scale modeling is part of the architect’s stock in trade, the most useful daylighting analysis for the designer can come from the use of scale models. Scale models can provide an indication of approximate illu-

mination to be expected under various types of skies and allow comparison of various design alternatives. They also allow an architect and lighting designer to accurate simulate the year-round lighting conditions that are obtained by the building design, with its range of results shown in accompanying illustrations (Watson 1996). Daylight has been around for a long time, but is often talked about as if it were mysterious, to be handled by experts only. Daylight is part of architecture, in both its historical, theoretical, and technical conception, with a unique capacity to inspire people and to illuminate the elements of its design. NOTE: Figs. 10, 15 and 16 are examples of daylighting models by students of architecture at the University of Oregon and at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute (Watson 1996). Date and time indicates the daylighting at the hour simulated in the photo. The daylight factors equals exterior illumination divided by interior illumination and are measured at the center of the space under standardized “universal sky” conditions (1000 fc). These indicate the percentage of daylight illumination against a universal measure.

Fig. 17. Shell Oil Headquarters Building. Houston, TX. CRS Architects. Lighting consultant: Benjamin Evans, 1983.

(a) Initial lighting model of office module; (b) mock-ups of small-scale and full-scale models, movable to various orientations; (c) Inside the full scale mock-up; (d) Built office, featuring light reflectors and diffusers, with ceiling used as light reflector for daylight and for electric light. (Photos courtesy of CRS).

74

a

c

b

d


Natural ventilation 6

6

Natural ventilation Benjamin Evans

75 Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

75

6 Natural ventilation

76


Natural ventilation Natural ventilation 6 6

Summary: “Ventilation,” deriving from the Latin ventus and meaning the movement of air, is used to define air change in buildings from fan-driven mechanical systems or from natural air flow through ventilating openings. This article discusses natural (wind-pressure driven) air flow principles and design techniques for ventilation to satisfy human comfort.

Key words: air flow, bioclimatic design, natural venitilation, stack effect, turbulence, Venturi effect, wind shadow.

Natural ventilation with porches, extended wings, adjustable louvers and shutters, attic ventilators (under eaves) and roof monitors.

Natural ventilation in buildings is intended to cool the body directly by convection across the skin and body, and absorption of perspiration. The air flow must be directed towards the “living” or occupied zones of a building. Air exchange may be done with some air velocity, but generally, low-velocity mechanical system designs have little direct effect on the human physiological cooling system to transpperspiration). Openings in a building can be manipulated to increase or decrease the speed of the air movement.

allergy and the air outside is hot and humid, you’ll want cool, filtered air instead of an outdoor breeze. In instances of extremely hot and humid air, natural ventilation only increases moisture laden perspiration. Still, almost everywhere, there are times of the day and year when a natural breeze in the shade is more than sufficient for comfort.

Often considered part of “bioclimatic design,” natural ventilation is effective for cooling buildings that are properly shaded and otherwise designed to suit local climatic conditions, such as air- and earth temperatures, relative humidity, daily and seasonal wind and breeze direction. In many locations and building types, these climatic design elements can provide the principal source of cooling comfort in buildings (Watson and Labs 1993). Going into a non-air conditioned building during hot weather is like going from the frying pan into the oven, where the air is hot and stagnant. This is a waste because, at a surprising number of places and times, the interior would be a lot more comfortable if a breeze could get inside. Our buildings tend to hold heat when we least want it. Buildings are too often designed so that the outside air can’t get inside to cool the occupants or the building. It doesn’t have to be that way. Before mechanical air conditioning systems became widely available in the late 1950s and throughout the history of architecture, all sorts of techniques used to take advantage of natural air currents. Ancient Greeks and Romans provided porticos around their temples for shade and breeze. Ancient Egyptians and other desert peoples put scoops on their roofs to funnel air through their homes, cooled by evaporating water jars. The frontier Americans built dog-trots plans (breezeways across the building core) and porches so they could sit in their rocking chairs and enjoy the cool breeze. Such techniques are not lost to us. Air conditioning and mechanical cooling has to us seemed easier than paying attention to design with climate. There are of course times and places when natural airflow isn’t appropriate or won’t help much. If your nose is stuffy from an

The physics of natural ventilation Breezes act according to the laws of nature. The designer must understand certain scientific principles before deciding with accuracy how to control air movement. For thousands of years, people managed to capitalize on air movement in building design based largely on intuition alone. It wasn’t until the middle of the 18th century that scientists began to experiment with air and to try to explain what it is and how it works. An early theory was that air pressure had something to do with electricity (which people didn’t understand either). Some thought that the clouds were held up by electricity and that electricity caused smoke to rise. In 1783, a French couple tried to catch smoke (and electricity) in a paper bag and accidentally invented the hot-air balloon. Around the turn of the century, a French physicist substituted helium for hot air in a balloon and discovered the principle of air pressure, which is fundamental to understanding air movement: a body of higher-pressure air will move (expand) toward a body of lower-pressure air. Put simply, as the pressure of air (or gas) increases, it expands and becomes lighter, thereby tending to rise, or move, until it finds a place in the atmosphere where the surrounding pressure is the same (Fig. 1). Global air pressure differences are caused principally by the sun warming some parts of the earth, with the earth, in turn, warming the air, while other parts of the earth and air are not warmed as much, such as polar ice caps and forests (Fig. 2). The result is that the warmed air (higher pressure) tries to move toward the cooler air (lower pressure). The rotating motion of the earth also has an influence on geographic air movements. As the earth spins, it pulls the air around with it, but the air doesn’t entirely keep up. There is slippage. At about this point, those studying air mechanics realized that air has mass and therefore is affected by gravity and follows the law of inertia—mass once set in motion tends to continue straight until its direction and speed are changed by some outside force.

Author: Benjamin Evans, FAIA Credits: An earlier version of this article appeared as “Letting Fresh Air Back into Buildings: The evolving state of natural ventilation,” in Architecture. March, 1989 and is reproduced by permission of the publisher. Illustrations are by the author. References: Evans, Benjamin. 1957. Natural Air Flow In and Around Buildings. College Station, TX: Texas Engineering Research Station. Chandra, Subrato, Philip W. Fairey and Robert S. Spain. 1982. Handbook for Designing Naturally Ventilated Buildings. Publication FSECCR-60-82. Cocoa, FL: Florida Solar Energy Center. Watson, Donald and Kenneth Labs. 1983. Revised 1993. Climatic Building Design. New York: McGraw-Hill. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

77

6 Natural ventilation At the global scale, some of the outside forces are mountains, forests, land masses ice caps, and geographic formations. Geographic features affect the origins and movement of the wind because the wind moving over the ground and other objects causes friction, slowing some parts of the air. All three phenomena—pressure difference, inertia, and friction—produce turbulence, so that air doesn’t often move smoothly along a straight path. It takes short darts here and there, speeds up, and slows down. When two currents of air are traveling in opposite directions, they always will be separated by a series of eddies because adjacent particles of air always move in the same direction. Laboratory studies have shown that these eddies range from the very large through a series of adjacent eddies to the microscopic, which cannot be seen with the naked eye (Fig. 3). But at the scale of a single building, for purposes of preliminary understanding and calculation in building design, we presume that air moves in fairly well-defined paths. Fig. 1. The buoyancy of heated air rising to equal pressure

Fig. 2. The stratospheric wind machine

This assumption that air behaves roughly as a laminar (layered) air flow in well-defined paths is sufficient for an initial understanding of how air may move around and through a building. Such assumptions must be further refined to anticipate the effects of the turbulence that is a result of real wind conditions. This second level or advance analysis often requires careful wind-tunnel or full scale air flow model testing. An important set of air movement phenomena is explained by the Bernoulli theorem of fluid behavior (which considers air to be a fluid). Defined by the 18th-century Swiss mathematician, the Bernoulli theorem includes the observation that fluid pressure decreases as the rate of fluid movement increases. For example, an airfoil, which is what allows aircraft to fly, is flat on the bottom and humped on the top. The hump makes air flow faster over the top of the wing, which means— as we know from Bernoulli—air pressure over the wings goes down and the airplane goes up. Another fluid property of air is that, when flow is temporarily constricted, as when the air enters an hourglass-shaped funnel, its speed increases inside the constriction (accompanied by pressure decrease). The phenomenon was observed and recorded by Giovanni Venturi, the 19th-century Italian physicist for whom the effect is named. To see how the Venturi effect occurs at building scale, envision the windward (high-pressure) wall as a flat funnel and a windward inlet, such as an open window or door, as the constriction. As long as an outlet is sufficiently sized, air flowing through the inlet will move faster than the outside breeze.

Fig. 3. The microdynamics of wind eddies

Fig. 4. Wind shadows on the leeward side of a building or object

78


Assume that a gentle breeze is blowing along the earth’s surface, coming from a high-pressure air mass over in the next county to a lower-pressure air mass somewhere down the road. On striking a solid object—a simple cube-shaped building, for instance—air movement is interrupted. As air piles up in front (upwind) of the object, its pressure increases until forced over and around the solid object, creating a lower-pressure area behind the object (downwind). Air in this lower-pressure area on the downwind side is eddying and moving slowly back upwind toward the solid object. This protected area is called the “wind shadow” (Fig. 4). Designing for natural ventilation The greatest pressure differential around a building occurs when the wind strikes it perpendicularly. This creates the largest wind shadow and, thus, the lowest downwind pressure. If we could move the building around until its smallest dimension faced into the wind, we would see that this would produce the smallest wind shadow and least pressure downwind. If we put a number of buildings together on a site, we will get a variety of wind shadows and patterns, and each building will get hit by less wind than if it were all by itself. Each building affects the others. Often, the designer will be looking for patterns that will allow the maximum amount of wind to hit each building.

Natural ventilation 6 Since air moves from higher pressure to lower pressure, it makes sense to put a building’s breeze inlets adjacent to the higher-pressure areas and breeze outlets adjacent to the lower-pressure areas. To determine the best places for inlets and outlets, therefore, the designer needs to have some idea of where high and low pressures will occur on the building surfaces. On a simple cube shape, the windward face of the cube is under positive pressure, relative to ambient air pressure. The top, back, and sides are under negative pressure. An inlet on the windward face and an outlet on any of the other surfaces will produce cross ventilation. If the wind approaches the cube from a 45-degree angle, there is a variety of pressures on the surfaces. Pressure areas are less distinct, making it more difficult for us to find the best high-pressure area for the inlet (Fig. 5). Fig. 6 shows relative air speeds above a simple block-shaped building. The contour line marked 1.0 represents wind movement at the prevailing wind speed, or 100 percent. The .4 line represents the area of speed that is 40 percent of that of the prevailing breeze. Looking at these wind pressures in terms of the building structure, once can see that the roof and the downwind walls are all in negative pressure areas and tend to he pulled away by the wind. Everyone knows that hot air rises. This is not a contradiction to the statement that air is moved by pressure differences. As the temperature of a body of air rises, the air pressure differences cause it to flow toward a lower- pressure area, usually higher up. These “stack effect” currents are useful in exhausting unwanted air from a building, such as the air that might collect under a skylight or next to the ceiling, but they are of little benefit in directly cooling people through evaporation, simply because the currents are not moving fast enough and usually do not pass through the living zone (the areas where people are). The stack effect, however, creates air exchange in the absence of outside wind pressure, familiar in a “tee-pee” design where the opening at the top allows heated air to escape and cooler replacement air enters under the bottom flaps or lower openings. In low-rise buildings, stack-effect currents are particularly effective at night when the cooler night air can be brought in to carry to the outside the heat that has been absorbed by building materials during the day.

Fig. 6. Cross-section of wind pressure effects

Fig. 5. Differential pressures as a function of geometry and wind exposure

What isn’t commonly recognized is that prevailing breezes may almost always overcome or offset the effects of upward air movement driven by thermal differences. In the worst case, an opening at the top of a space intended to exhaust air by stack effect might be result a “short circuit” in which case outside breezes push the warm air back down into the occupied zone of the interior. This can be addressed by offering choices in manipulating the upper level exhaust. The “roof monitor” placed at the top of a stair well in traditional 19th century houses provides an example. If the opening to leeward is opened large and with a small crack to windward, mild cross ventilation will overcome the stack effect and carry the heat out via the breeze. A stack effect can work in conjunction with cross ventilation. Like a sailboat, ventilation controls often have to be set for prevailing breeze conditions. In some Middle East countries, “windscoops” have been used for hundreds of years to induce natural interior ventilation (Fig. 7). These windscoops rise above the roofs of houses to create pressure areas that pull the air into downstairs rooms, either down the scoop when the wind blows from one direction, or into windows and out of the windscoop when the prevailing wind is from the opposite direction. Windscoops do not push or force the air down the tower. Acting as Bernoulli’s theorem describes, air movement into the interior is created by pressure differences that result from wind blowing over the windscoops and the building. A similar construction also used in the Middle East to induce natural airflow is the “venting tower” (Fig. 8). Here, the tower rises above the

Fig. 7. Windscoop, literally, scoops a portion of the prevailing wind, but its effect is reversed when wind is from the opposite direction, in which case it operates like a venting tower (small-scale section) Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

79

6 Natural ventilation building roof to interrupt the wind and create a low-pressure area, regardless of the direction of the prevailing winds. The low pressure over this venting tower pulls air into the building from higher pressures below. This system may require opening of the lower windows toward a high-pressure area. The principle is evident in the Pantheon of Rome (Fig. 9). The round opening at the crown of the dome allows the low pressure created above the dome by prevailing breezes, regardless of direction, to draw or suck fresh air out of the top, forcing replacement air to enter the interior through the lower exterior doors.

Fig. 8. A venting tower, with its upper portion designed for exhaust by wind-induced suction

However achieved, cross ventilation is not a matter of “filling a building with air,” as much as moving air through the building. For cross ventilation, air needs a way in and a way out. The designer must provide for judicious use of outlets as well as inlets. A simple way to conceive of a building designed for natural ventilation is to view it in silhouette from the direction of the prevailing breeze, just as the wind “sees it.” The building surfaces, the combination of solids and voids (ventilating openings) are in a sense an “air blockage” (in no air passes through the building) or an “air filter and funnel” (in which case, air is slowed in some instances, speeded up in others by perturbations and the Venturi effect). The effectiveness of the ventilation design can be considered by how well the building acts as filter and funnel, directing air flow to where people might be occupying the building and made comfortable by the cooling breeze.

Fig. 9. The Pantheon’s oculus (open to outdoor air) also functions as an exhaust vent, due to the glancing effect of wind currents

If we punch a hole through the building from the windward side to the downwind side, it is easy to see that some of the air would move through from the high pressure upwind to the lower pressure downwind rather than going all the way around the building. This is commonly called “cross ventilation.” It is the fundamental process by which air is moved through the inside of a building. The principle that air flows from high pressure to low pressure helps us analyze airflow patterns. Fig. 10 depicts a building oriented so that the wind approaches from a side with no windward inlets. Obviously, there will not be much air movement inside the building even when the windows on the ends of the building are wide open. There will be high pressure on the upwind side, low pressure on the downwind side, and low-pressure areas at both ends.

Fig. 10. A plan with little cross ventilation, given no openings to provide for cross-ventilation of prevailing breezes

Fig. 11. A modest correction of the Fig. 10 plan, created by extending a wall to capture some breeze

To get the air to move through the windows from one end of the building to the other, we need to create a new high-pressure area on one end (the inlet) and a lower-pressure area on the other end (the outlet). The solution is to attach a windbreak (Fig. 11) that will create a high-pressure area immediately in front of the windbreak (at one end of the building). Another windbreak on the opposite end of the building toward the downwind side will tend to further reduce the low-pressure area there and so draw the air from one end of the building to the other, or crossways to the prevailing breeze. This solution will probably not create an ideal interior environment, but it will be better than before. “Windscreens” designed aspermeable screens to let some wind leak through work better than “windbreaks” designed as non-permeable barriers, although this at first may seem a counterintuitive result. A solid fence doesn’t provide as much protection to its lee as a screen or fence that has some holes in it (Fig. 12). Wind speed in the wind shadow is slower behind a screen with the perforations than behind a solid fence. (In Fig. 12, the air flow effect is expressed as a percent reduction of uninterrupted wind speed.) Trees and shrubs also can be used as windscreens, and they are full of ‘holes,’ but they can also be used to direct the air so that people can take advantage of the cool breeze in otherwise protected areas. The designer has to consider whether the intent is to channel breezes for

80


Natural ventilation 6 cooling or whether to provide a windbreak protection and be careful to plant trees accordingly (Fig. 13). What happens to the breeze once it gets into the building? As mentioned, air has mass and inertia. Like a ball, once it starts rolling, it will keep rolling until it hits something or eventually slows down and stops due to friction with the ground. At those times when increased air speed contributes to cooling comfort, one will be more comfortable inside such a constricting opening than outside it. The Venturi effect will increase the wind speed to our convenience. Once directed by the inlet into the building, the breeze will tend to keep going straight until it hits something. It’s easy to see how walls and doors will force the air in one direction and then another. Also note that a breeze does not move directly from the inlet to the outlet, except in special cases. The pattern of an incoming breeze is not affected by the location of the outlet.

Fig. 12. Comparison of a solid windbreak and a windscreen

The size of the outlet does have an effect, though. As was mentioned in the discussion of the Venturi effect, in a simple building, if the inlet-to-outlet ratio is exaggerated, the result will be a very fast movement of air through the inlet (the speed of the air at the inlet may exceed the exterior air speed considerably). The effect also occurs around buildings, such as where the bulk of a building is raised above the lower level (open plaza) or where two buildings are placed close together. Air speed is important in cooling people. The faster the air moves, the more moisture and heat it will take away from our bodies by evaporation. We can get maximum air speed just inside an inlet by having a small inlet and a very large opposite outlet (Fig. 14). The common and intuitive idea of placing windows to face the breeze doesn’t work best. The ratio of the inlet to outlet determines the speed of the airflow. If we have a small inlet opening, say 1 sq. ft. (.09 sq. m) and a large outlet, say l2 ft. sq. (1.1 sq. m), we could generate a pretty fast breeze. And if we put our rocking chair up next to the smaller hole, we would get a good cooling breeze right on our nose. Of course, back in the rear of the building near the outlet, the breeze would be pretty slow and we wouldn’t want to put our rocking chair there. The best compromise for good air speed throughout the interior is to have the outlet about 10 percent larger than the size of the inlet.

Fig. 13. Various microclimatic wind effects as a result of landscape plantings

Air speed may also be important in cooling the building itself when the outside air is cooler than the inside surfaces of the building. By convection, the moving air picks up the heat from the walls, floors, ceilings, furniture, etc., and carries it on to the outside (Fig. 15). If we let the cool night air into our usually hot buildings, the cool air will reduce the heat stored in the building materials and leave that space with a “heat sink” to help provide a cooling effect for the next day. (In this case, nighttime ventilation cools the thermal mass of the building. The effect is most noticeable in hot dry climates with large day to night temperature swings). While air speed is important, the quantity of air moved through the interior (air change) is the most important factor, and that is accomplished with inlets and outlets about the same size. We shouldn’t confuse air speed for cooling people with air changes for cooling buildings. Obviously, for cooling people, we must get the breeze to them. If a breeze doesn’t blow through the occupied living zone, then it can’t be very helpful in cooling by evaporation. Likewise, if the moving air doesn’t get to all the building surfaces, it won’t cool them either. In a school in Oklahoma, an architect designed big windows and openings over the corridor for a through breeze (Fig. 16). Early studies in the Texas Engineering Experiment Station wind tunnel showed a shadow in the leeward classroom, so the architect added louvers in the plenum over the corridor. The louvers not only direct the breeze

Fig. 14. A ventilation diagram intended to cool people, by direct exposure to increased air flow, created by the Venturi effect

Fig. 15. A ventilation diagram intended to cool building surfaces Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

81

6 Natural ventilation down into the occupied zone of the classroom but also shield the brightness of the skylights from direct view below. Another factor that may be used to control the path that breezes takes when moving through a building is the location of the inlet in the face of the building surface (windward face). In a rectangular building with the inlet in the center of the windward fenestration, the air will tend to move straight through the opening. If the inlet is off-center, the breeze will tend to enter the opening and move off to one side. This happens because the air pressure on the exterior fenestration will be greater over the larger wall surface and smaller over the smaller wall surface, relative to the location of the opening. The pressure differences on exterior fenestration cause “surface vectors,” or currents that move along the surface of the building, seeking a way around or through. Projections on the fenestration—overhangs, louvers, and columns—can alter these pressure differences further and change the way the breeze is forced into the inlet. As the breeze starts to flow into the inlet, the way the inlet is designed will also affect the pattern the air takes. Fig. 16. Comparison of air flow across a classroom building created by modifications of ceiling geometry

Most conventional windows provide some control of breeze. This is the simple opening that lets air come in but doesn’t give it direction. With a simple opening, the direction of the incoming breeze is determined by the location of the inlet (window) in the windward fenestration. With a horizontal vane window, the air will follow the direction of the window vane—up or down. The sideways direction of the breeze is still a function of the location of the inlet in the windward wall. With a vertical vane window, the air can be directed right or left. Again, the up or down pattern will be determined by the location of the inlet in the windward wall. To allow the occupant to direct the incoming breeze, the designer should provide for the appropriate choices in the aperture type (Fig. 17). Examples The following case studies of air patterns around typical groups of buildings illustrate the application of air-movement principles to ventilation problems. Window selection and placement. In the design for a bedroom in Texas (Fig. 18), the casement windows (a) direct the incoming breeze into the room near the ceiling. Venetian blinds (b) direct the breeze down into the living zone of the room. Locating the casement windows nearer the floor (c) would also allow the breeze to flow through the living zone. But, if awning windows (d) had been used instead of the casements, they would have thrown the air up to the ceiling and over the living zone. Selecting the proper location for the window, as well as the proper window type, is important to produce the desired airflow.

Fig. 17. The effect of a direction vane at the window opening

A sunshade. In a classroom design (Fig. 19), the breeze comes in downward and through the occupied zone where it can cool the students (a). But, when the sunshade was added to the windows, it caused the windward surface, pressure patterns to change and the breeze coming in through the windows to be directed upward, above the occupied zone. The unintended effect was solved via wind modeling studies by a simple slot in the sunshade (b) which allowed the surface pressure difference to return to normal and the breeze to be directed down into the occupied zone again. Controlling the flow. In this case (Fig. 20), the flow patterns and speeds for a double-loaded corridor building are manipulated, offering ways to get the breeze into the occupied zone and indicating some relative air speeds while the inlets and outlets remain constant in size. In the top diagram (a), the windows are simple openings and the corridor walls are pierced with large openings near the floor. The scheme provides a flow of air

82


Natural ventilation 6

Fig. 18. Ventilating a single room

Fig. 19. Sunshading windows

Fig. 20. Various cross-section manipulations of a doubleloaded corridor classroom building. (Interior air speeds are given as a percent of the outdoor uninterrupted wind speed.)


83

6 Natural ventilation throughout the living zone of the cross section. In the second diagram (b), high corridor openings provide little breeze in the downwind living zone. The third diagram (c) suggests one way to redirect the downwind breeze. A low opening in the downwind corridor wall is another way. Note in Fig. 21 that, with a two-foot inlet and four- or six-foot high corridor opening, created by varying the wall height, the incoming breeze is made faster than the prevailing outside wind, by the familiar Venturi effect. Interior windbreak. The site for this school in Elk City, OK by CRS Architects (Fig. 22) and its programming requirements, dictated that the long dimension of the building be parallel to prevailing breezes. As a result, there wasn’t much opportunity to get breezes into the building except through the narrow end and into the wide corridor, which was to double as a gathering place or “commons.” Since the school was designed in the days before air-conditioned schools were widespread, natural airflow was considered an essential design issue. (a) The first wind tunnel tests at the Texas Engineering Experiment Station showed that breezes that came into the building were funneled down the corridor and out the windows of the furthermost classrooms.

Fig. 21. Varying the height of a corridor wall significantly alters the wind cooling effect

(b) A little creative study in the wind tunnel indicated that, if some sort of solid object were placed in the corridor, or commons, and if its location were judiciously selected, it would cause the incoming air to build up pressure and flow more or less uniformly out the windows of all classrooms. The need for extra space suggested that this “solid object” could be a small office. (c) In the first schemes, open classroom doors provided the principal inlets for the breeze, but finally the designers opted to put “slot ventilators” along the corridor walls and provide opportunity for the incoming breeze to spread throughout the classroom areas. Cooling through the core. A school in Laredo, TX designed by CRS (Fig. 23), also was built before air-conditioned schools became common. Although summers in Laredo are quite hot and dry, for most of the school year the weather is moderately warm.

Fig. 22. Plan studies of a classroom wing, with ventilation provided longitudinally

Fig. 23. Longitudinal cross-section of an air flow design through a classroom building core

84


The basic concept of the school envisioned a central core between the back-to-back classrooms, to provide some mechanical, electrical, and plumbing services to the classroom areas and also to encourage crossventilation. The breeze moves into the upwind classroom and is directed into the living zone. It then moves into the central core chamber and hence down into the downwind classroom through a grill in the wall, and finally out the downwind windows. Wind tunnel tests in Texas Engineering Research Station showed that the scheme was feasible. The building is oriented to catch the prevailing breeze, when there is one, and the school certainly more comfortable than most of the non-air conditioned buildings in that climate. The architect designing a naturally ventilated building can be guided by the principles outlined here. When complex building forms are developed, the resulting pressure differences and air flow patterns will be difficult if not impossible to predict. The best approach is to test the proposed design with a scale model, introduced into a steady wind stream and analyzed with smoke tracers or other tell-tales. Best modeling results are achieved in a boundary-layer steady-flow wind tunnel as may be available at research laboratories and universities . Research citations and design application guidelines can be found in the references.

Indoor air quality 7

7

Indoor air quality Hal Levin


85

7 Indoor air quality

86


Indoor air air quality Indoor quality 7 7

Summary: Indoor air quality (IAQ) has become an increasingly important building design consideration due to growth in occupant health and comfort problems attributed to poor IAQ. Designers can greatly improve indoor air quality by considering it throughout the design process.

Key words: air quality, contaminants, indoor pollution, occupant health, pollutant sources, ventilation. What is Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)? Indoor air pollution is not new. As long as 30,000 years ago, when cave people took fire into caves, they became polluters as well as victims of indoor air pollution. This remained the case for those living in dwellings heated by wood-burning, still evident in indigenous traditions today. As land-based, agricultural communities evolved into urban, industrial societies, pollution both indoors and out increased significantly, in the latter case produced by industrial sources. Awareness of indoor pollution is also not new. Benjamin Franklin in his development of wood stove designs and his contemporary Count Rumford who developed the smoke shelf sought to mitigate the indoor air pollution created by wood-burning devices. But significant attention to indoor pollution only began in the early 1970s in northern Europe and Japan. In the late 1970s, awareness of high formaldehyde concentrations in mobile homes and manufactured housing brought about increased awareness in North America. Problems related to asbestos, radon, lead, Legionnaires’ Disease, solvents, pesticides, and many other contaminants have brought about far greater awareness of indoor air quality. Much of what we know today about indoor pollution is the result of research done in the last twenty five years. Indoor air quality can defined by the presence or absence of pollutants—unwanted odorous, irritating, and toxic gases, particles, and microbes. Good indoor air quality is achieved, therefore, by providing air that is reasonably free of contaminants that are odorous, toxic, or irritating. Uncontaminated air is almost 80 percent nitrogen and 20% oxygen, with other components being present only at trace concentrations. Air (indoors or outdoors) typically contains scores or even hundreds of contaminants at trace concentrations. Fortunately, this air does not generally have noticeable deleterious effects on materials, people, or other living things. But some contaminants at concentrations even as low as one part per billion (ppb) or less can cause adverse reactions. A few, extremely toxic gases (dioxins, for example) are thought harmful at parts per trillion (ppt) concentrations. Table 2 shows the concentrations of the most common gases in typical indoor and outdoor air and of a few other constituents of interest for IAQ. As can be seen in the table, concentrations of many gases are one or two orders of magnitude (ten or a hundred times) higher indoors than outdoors. This is the result of the presence and strength of sources of these gases indoors, the limited mixing volume in enclosed

Fig. 1. Time spent indoors, outdoors and in-vehicles

spaces, and the low ventilation rate (air change rate) of outdoor air to dilute and replace the contaminated air. Of course, for most contaminants, indoor air cannot be much cleaner than outdoor air. It can be seen in Table 2 that the composition of relatively pure air is dominated by the common gases Nitrogen and Oxygen, with only trace concentrations of other components. The moisture content of air is highly variable, ranging from almost no moisture in the desert or high mountains to saturated air (100% relative humidity) in very humid climates or during rainstorms. Note that contaminant levels indoors are generally higher than outdoors, sometimes by a factor of 10 or even 100. This is one reason IAQ is so important. There are two fundamental reasons IAQ is so important: •

Contaminant concentrations are generally higher than outdoors

•

Most people spend most of their time indoors.

Table 2 indicates that contaminant levels measured indoors are generally higher than outdoors, sometimes by a factor of 10 or even 100. This is one reason IAQ is so important. The other reason is because the majority of people in industrialized countries spend more than 90% of their time indoors. Fig. 1 indicates comparable results from both California (CARB) and national studies. So, exposure to air pollution (defined as concentration times time spent) appears to be far more significant indoors than outdoors. 1 Determinants of Indoor Air Quality IAQ is constantly changing within and between spaces in a building. The overall quality of the air can be determined by a mass-balance model accounting for all sources and sinks. This relationship is presented by the oversimplified equation: Concentration = sources - sinks Thus, the steady state concentration of contaminants is the sum of all the source generation rates minus the sum of all the contaminant removal process rates. There are a multitude of sources and sinks, as described below. Each of these is subject to large variation over time, often on the order of a factor of two, ten, or even one hundred. Thus, the composition of indoor air is dynamic; it is constantly changing. Usually, the characteristics of a few dominant sources and the ventilation rate will be adequate to estimate (to a first order approximation) the concentrations of concern.

Author: Hal Levin References: ASHRAE. 1989. Standard 62-1989 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.” Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers. Additional references are listed at the end of this article. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

87

7 Indoor air quality Table 1. Evolution in awareness of building environmental problems

1960s • Commercial buildings more isolated from outdoor environment - sealed windows, deeper profiles, widespread reliance on mechanical systems for ventilation and increasing use of air-conditioning. • Built and filled increasingly with synthetic materials. 1970s • Energy conservation drove ventilation rates down • Indoor air quality and climate problems proliferated. • 1976 - Legionnaire’s Disease outbreak at Philadelphia hotel, 171 people affected, 29 died. • Formaldehyde levels high, especially in mobile homes and manufactured housing using pressed wood products made with formaldehyde-based binders. 1980s • Awareness of Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) and Building Related Illness (BRI) grows. • Problem buildings taught the we must integrate approaches to thermal comfort, indoor air quality, and energy management. • Law suits and workers compensation cases for SBS problems proliferate, increase building owner, occupant, and designer awareness and concern. 1990s • Indoor air quality science advances. • Increased attention to water intrusion, microbial problems in buildings • Tobacco smoking banned on airline flights and in many public access buildings throughout the United States. • Scientists confirm appearance of ozone hole over Antarctic, • It is even more evident that, as ecologists have said for years, ‘everything is connected to everything.’

Table 2. Typical concentrations and ranges of selected components of indoor and outdoor air.

(ranges shown in parentheses) * Outdoor air concentrations

Constituent name

Indoor air concentrations

780,840 ppm (78%) 209,460 ppm (20.9%) 332 ppm (275-450 ppm) 7 ppb (5-30 ppb) 50 µg/m3 (10 - 250 µg/m3) ~15 ppb (5-250 ppb) 15 µg/m3 (10 - 100 µg/m3) 10 - 100 cfu/m3

Nitrogen Oxygen Carbon dioxide Formaldehyde VOCs Ozone (O3) Particles < 10 µm dia Fungi

na na 325 ppm (300-2500 ppm) 30 ppb (15-300 ppb) 200 µg/m3 (75 - 20,000 µg/m3) 15 ppb (3-80 ppb) 25 µg/m3 (10 - 200 µg/m3) 30 cfu/m3 (10-5000 cfu/m3)

*ppm - parts per million ppb = parts per billion µg/m3 = microgram per cubic meter of air cfu/m3 = colony forming units per cubic meter of air

Table 3. Determinants of Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

88

POLLUTANT SOURCES

POLLUTANT REMOVAL MECHANISMS and SINKS)

• • • • • • • •

• • • •

Outdoor Air, Soil, Water Building Envelope Building Equipment Finishes and Furnishings Machines and Appliances Occupants Occupant Activities Maintenance and Cleaning


Sinks (Deposition and Sorption) Ventilation Air Cleaning and Filtration Chemical Transformation

Indoor air quality 7 Virtually all of the terms of the equation are dynamic, so that while the steady state concept may be useful for analysis, steady state conditions do not actually occur in normal buildings. Air pollution sources The most effective way to control indoor air quality is to eliminate or control the sources. Where they cannot be controlled, they should be addressed by design. There are so many sources of indoor air pollutants, that it is impossible to control them all; however, by identifying them early in the design process, they can be controlled. The designer has a great deal of control over some important sources of indoor air pollutants, particularly the chemicals emitted from building materials and furnishings. Furthermore, the chemicals required to clean, maintain, refurnish, and replace finish materials should be known when selecting and specifying the materials. Early in their product lives, building materials generally tend to be fairly strong emitters of pollutants, particularly of volatile organic chemicals. After they have been exposed to the environment, their emissions decay considerably. As a general rule, contaminant concentrations due to emissions from many new “dry” materials decrease by about a factor of two to five in the first week and by another factor of two to five in the next one to three months. Thus, in general, there is a decrease in source strength of a factor of ten in the first few months after construction.

Fig. 2. SumVOC Concentrations from the EPA Public Buildings Study

(Note: x-axis, building age in weeks, is shown in logarithmic scale).

An important exception applies to wet products (such as adhesives, paints, caulks, and sealants) whose emissions decay much more rapidly as a result of the drying or curing process. The reduction in emissions from these products is a matter of hours and days rather than weeks and months. Of course any covering (such as wall-covering, carpet, paneling, and so forth) applied over a wet-applied product will affect (inhibit) emissions once installed, extending considerably the time required for emissions to reach very low rates. Another important type of exception includes solid products (such as composite wood products) that generally have fairly stable, long term emissions. Formaldehyde emissions from particle board tend to be almost as strong a year or two after installation as they are when the products are new. For all materials, cleaning, maintenance, refinishing, and replacement materials and products can involve introduction of new, strong sources of contaminants over the life of the product. Additional chemicals may be required to remove old products, and emissions may be increased by disturbing many products. Therefore, the total life cycle of materials should be considered when selecting and specifying for good IAQ.

Fig. 3. VOC concentrations as a function of building age in three new buildings

Fig. 2 shows the sum of the measured concentrations of selected volatile organic compounds—known as SumVOC—measured in ten buildings as early as one week after construction until almost three years after construction. As might be expected, the highest concentrations clearly occur in newly-constructed buildings, and the aged buildings generally have low concentrations. (Cleaning and maintenance as well as occupant activities and equipment can confuse the analysis of the concentration patterns in buildings that are in use.) The pattern of concentrations in Fig. 2 indicates that emissions are strong from building materials, and, also, that emissions decay significantly in the early life of a building. Even the concentrations measured at one week are considerably below those that would have been found just a few days earlier. Fig. 3 presents VOC measurements from three buildings clearly illustrating the rapid decay pattern in VOC concentrations early in the lives of newly-constructed buildings. The general pattern shown by the three buildings is that concentrations fall rather rapidly after the completion of construction. The reduced concentrations may result in Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

89

7 Indoor air quality significant part from the start-up and regular operation of the ventilation system. Thus, it is important to ensure that materials have cured and aged sufficiently and that ventilation systems are properly operating before occupancy of newly-constructed or renovated buildings. Construction in a portion of an occupied building should be well contained and isolated from occupied areas to prevent occupant exposure to elevated contaminant concentrations. In general, emission rates decay exponentially after reaching an initial peak. (The exception is materials that are created to be sources of emissions such as air fresheners—actually, odor-masking devices— or “pest strips.”) Emission rates decay exponentially whether emissions are high or low, and whether emissions decay rapidly, as in wet products, or slowly, as in most sheet materials, textiles, and other “solid” dry products. That is, the decay will be sharp at first and steadily decline until the slope of the decay curve is almost parallel to the x (time) axis. For wet products (tested without a material applied over them as is the case for adhesives), the decay will typically be on the order of a factor of ten in about ten hours. For a dry product, such as carpets, it may take 100 hours or more for this large a reduction in emissions.

Fig. 4. TVOC emission factor decays over one week from various carpet assemblies (Source: Hodgson et al. 1992)

Fig. 4. shows emission rates during one week from each of five carpet assemblies. While each of these is at a different original and final source strength, they all show significant decreases in emission rates from hour 24 to hour 168. In these tests, material and product samples are normally collected at the manufacturing site immediately after they are produced and they are packaged in air tight containers. The samples are kept in the containers during transport to the laboratory and until the time of the test, at which time the samples are removed from the containers just before being placed in the test chamber. Emission decay rates following the pattern shown in Fig. 4 are typical of many types of building materials. Wet-applied products (paints, adhesives, caulks) have even more rapid decays, but, of course, they tend to have very much stronger initial emissions - sometimes by a factor of 100 higher than carpet emissions. Fig. 4 also shows that there are significant differences both at 24 hours and at 168 hours among the five products. This illustrates the importance of carefully selecting products based on emissions data. Tests following standard procedures established by ASTM are now available for many products of interest for indoor air quality, and more industries are testing their products all the time. In general, lower emissions can be assumed to be better. However, the exact chemical composition of the emissions is important since chemicals different greatly in their toxicity and irritation potency. Designers should require emissions data for all major finish materials and the should require chemical composition data on all wet-applied products. these data can usefully inform product selection choices.

Fig. 5. Contaminant concentration as a function of source strength and air exchange rate.

(Note: EF = emission factor typically reported in milligrams per square meter per hour - mg/m3 - h)

90


Fig. 4 shows tests of five different carpets samples from four different types of carpet. Clearly the various types of carpets have very different initial and final emissions. Tests of most materials conducted for longer periods of time show that emissions decay very rapidly at first and then slow to much lower, almost steady, long-term rates. The magnitude of these long-term emissions also varies greatly from product to product and should be assessed before selecting products. The most fundamental relationship in indoor air quality is that between contaminant sources, removal mechanisms, and concentrations. Fig. 5 shows that the emission rate (source strength) is an extremely important determinant of contaminant concentrations. This relationship holds for virtually any type of contaminant. By reducing source strengths, less ventilation will be required to maintain the same air quality. Note that below 0.5 air changes per hour (ach), concentrations tend to climb rather steeply. Above 2 ach, concentrations decrease rather slowly. Thus, in the critical zone where most buildings operate most of the time, it is extremely important to minimize source

Indoor air quality 7 strengths by design. This will reduce the capacity of the ventilation system required and the cost to operate and maintain it.

enough) can fall out to the floor by gravity or stick to surfaces (including both horizontal and vertical surfaces) by deposition.

Fig. 5 shows this relationship for various source strengths and air exchange rates. Most public access buildings have air exchange rates between 0.5 and 5 ach most of the time. Typical office buildings that meet the ASHRAE Standard 62 minimum ventilation rate of 15 cubic feet per minute per person (cfm/p) will have a minimum design ventilation rate of about 0.9 ach. Research shows that their actual ventilation rates tend to be between 0.5 ach and 1.5 ach most of the time. Very tight houses or very poorly ventilated offices or retail spaces might have ventilation rates of 0.4 or 0.5 ach. Air leakage through a typical office building’s exterior envelope will usually be between 0.2 and 0.4 ach, depending on indoor/ outdoor temperature differences and on outdoor wind velocity. Schools, at typical occupant densities and meeting the ASHRAE ventilation standard requirement of 15 cfm/p, will have about 3 ach.

Dust on floors or wall surfaces can be re-suspended in the air when the surface is disturbed by people walking on or near it, by the vibration caused by many ordinary human activities, or even by cleaning and vacuuming activities. Nearly everyone is familiar with the smell of dust in the air after vacuuming with ordinary household vacuum cleaners. Studies have shown that airborne dust levels are actually higher after vacuuming with most typical equipment.

Emission rates vary greatly from one product to another and over time for a given product. Even small differences in the production process can significantly impact emissions. Thus, it is important for designers to carefully select and specify the building materials and products for which they are responsible. An example of emissions variation among products and within products over time is carpet. While most carpets emit 0.3 mg/m2·hr (or less) total volatile organic chemicals (TVOC) when new and less than 0.020 mg/m2·hr TVOC when a week old, some types of carpets can emit 1 mg/m2·hr or more when new. Carpet cushions can be much stronger emitters than carpets, and carpet adhesive can be even stronger sources still. Carpets and carpet cushions will tend to emit weakly but over a very long period of time while adhesives will have very strong initial emissions and then rapidly decrease to much lower rates. The nature of the material covering the adhesive will have an important impact on how rapidly the emissions from the adhesive can reach the air. A dense backing on a carpet can suppress emissions from an adhesive and result in low level emissions for years after installation. Paints, caulks, sealants, and adhesives can emit several or even tens of mg/m2·hr when first applied, but then decay rapidly to hundreds or even only tens of µg/m2·h. All of these sources continue to emit for a very long time, often for years after they are initially installed. Pollution sinks Deposition and sorption Gases and vapors can adsorb, and particles can deposit, on surfaces. These gases and vapors are in constant flux, moving from the surfaces to the air and back again. Some of the larger particles (> 1 µm diameter) can also be dislodged from surfaces and redeposit elsewhere, while smaller particles (< 1 µm diameter) tend to remain on surfaces until dislodged by deliberate cleaning. Particles (that are heavy enough) can fall to horizontal surfaces due to gravity, or stick to both vertical and horizontal surfaces due to implication or (in the case of lighter particles) diffusion, electrostatic forces, and thermophoresis. (When a temperature gradient is established in a gas, the aerosol particles in that gas experience a force in the direction of decreasing temperature. The motion of the aerosol particle that results from this force is called thermophoresis. This is why there often are dark stains on ceilings and walls above light bulbs and other concentrated heat sources.) Gases attach to surfaces by a process known as sorption and they reenter the air from the surfaces by desorption. They can be removed from the indoor environment either by dilution ventilation or filtration while they are airborne or by cleaning while they are on surfaces. Gases can also adsorb onto particles in the air. Particles (that are heavy

The rate of removal of dust from the air by gravity and by deposition on surfaces is dependent on the size of the particles involved. A particle’s size determines whether it can be inhaled by humans and how far into the respiratory tract it will lodge. The most important characteristics of aerosols are “mean diameter” and the distribution of particle diameters. The “aerodynamic diameter” is the product of the physical diameter multiplied by the square root of the density. Deposition of particles in the respiratory tract is a function of the aerodynamic diameter. Typically in indoor air, the majority of the mass is in coarse particles but the largest number of particles is in the fine fraction. Large (coarse) particles settle out of the air by gravity. But most particles are small (fine), and tend to stay in suspension until the collide with another particle and the two particles stick together or until they collide with a surface and stick to the surface. Fine particles attach equally to vertical and to horizontal surfaces. This is important for cleaning, since substantial amounts of dust accumulate on vertical surfaces which are infrequently cleaned. Yet, when people walk past dusty surfaces, the air turbulence can result in re-suspension of the dust particles. Vibration of surfaces can also cause deposited dust to be re-suspended in the air. Contaminants clearly can be re-emitted from surfaces where they have adsorbed or deposited. These surfaces then are considered “secondary” sources. There is an on-going exchange of gases and particles between surfaces and the air. There is also the possibility that occupants will be exposed to contaminants that are on surfaces, even if only temporarily. (See routes of exposure below.) Ventilation Ventilation is an important removal mechanism (or sink) for contaminants. By replacing the air in a space periodically, the contaminants generated in the space are kept to lower concentrations. One air exchange - the supply of a volume of air equal to the volume of the space - will generally result in the removal of about two-thirds of the concentrations of the air contaminants. Thus, more than a single air exchange is needed to reduce concentrations to near zero. Therefore, whenever contaminants are generated at a point source, such as an appliance or an activity of an occupant, it is most effective to apply exhaust ventilation at that point. This prevents the contaminant from mixing in the air generally in the space. Filtration and air cleaning An important method of controlled pollutant removal is filtration and air cleaning. Air cleaning refers to the removal of both particulate matter and gaseous contaminants. Filtration generally refers to the use of media filters, although electrostatic precipitation is also used to remove particulate matter. Various media including charcoal and potassium permanganate are used to remove gaseous contaminants. These media for gaseous removal are not widely used in non-industrial or specialized settings, although their use is becoming more common as the quality of air gains more importance in the public mind. Filters remove particulate matter from the air by various means including interception, impaction, and electrostatic deposition. The choice of filters depends largely on the size and type of particles that must be removed as well as the velocity of the air stream through the Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

91

7 Indoor air quality filter medium. Various media are available with glass fibers being the most commonly used. Typical residential “throwaway” filters are extremely inefficient, removing only very large objects. They do not effectively remove particles of concern for health or comfort. Modern media and filter design can produce highly efficient filters without creating significant pressure drop across the filter. Removal of fine particles, particles less than 2.5 µm diameter, requires efficient filters. These are the particles of greatest concern for health, since they penetrate into the respiratory tract. Effective removal of particles less than 1 µm diameter requires filters even more efficient—usually referred to as HEPA, high efficiency particle arrestance. Such filters specifically are 99.97% efficient at removing particles in the 0.3 µm diameter range, the size that penetrates deepest into the respiratory tract and ends up on the lung surfaces. The HEPA filters are rather expensive and they cause a fairly large drop in static pressure (large resistance to air moving through). Thus, they require more powerful fans and the use of more energy for the same flow rate of air to be moved across a given cross-sectional area of filter. The general solution for HEPA and other high performance filters is to increase the cross-sectional area of the filter exposed to the air stream, thus allowing a lower velocity and less pressure drop. Chemical transformation Recent research shows that chemical transformation occurs commonly in indoor air. The reaction products may be more irritating compounds than the chemicals creating the reaction. For example, ozone (from outdoors, or generated by appliances such as photocopiers and laser printers) reacts with chemicals released from SBR latex-backed carpets to create highly irritating aldehydes. So, when a new carpet is installed in an office with lots of office machines, and people complain of eye, skin, or respiratory tract irritation, the cause may be the result of this chemical reaction. There are numerous, almost limitless other such chemical reactions possible in indoor air. 2 Pollutants of concern Because indoor air contains numerous constituents, it is impossible to consider all of them thoroughly. Therefore, it is important to identify the most important contaminants in any situation. This is usually done on the basis of the sources that are known or expected to appear. •

Chemicals:

-

Organic chemicals (solvents, binders, pesticides, fire retardants) e.g., Formaldehyde

-

Inorganic chemicals: (combustion by-products such as NOx, SOx, CO, CO2)

•

Particulate matter (respirable, coarse vs. fine).

•

Microbial contaminants: fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

Concern in non-residential buildings is toward organic gases, microbes, and, occasionally, particulate matter. Many organic gases, perhaps as many as two or three hundred, could be found in the air of a typical building, although mostly at extremely low concentrations. These gases have many sources, but the most common are occupants and their clothing, building materials, building housekeeping and maintenance products, building equipment, consumer products, and appliances. Solvents commonly used in various products are ubiquitous. Chlorinated compounds found in cleaning, sanitizing, and pest control products are also common. In non-residential environments, exposure to combustion by-products is limited, usually coming either from tobacco smoking or from intrusion of motor vehicle exhaust gases. Attached garages are often implicated in elevated concentrations of carbon monoxide or nitrogen oxides both in residential and non-residential buildings. Poor location of building air intakes results in entrainment of motor vehicle exhausts from adjacent roadways, driveways, and loading docks.

92


Inadequate separation of air intakes from combustion device exhausts can also be the source of combustion gases and particles found indoors. In residences, combustion by-products from gas-fired appliances, especially cooking and water heating, can be a concern. Wood burning stoves and fireplaces can also be sources of both gaseous and particulate matter contaminants, some of which are very toxic. In both residential and non-residential buildings, environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) is a concern. The preferred method of reducing the concentration of many indoor contaminants is through control of strong sources. Dwelling units require ventilation to exhaust local sources of moisture and odors as well as distributed sources of moisture, bioeffluents (CO2, pathogens, odors), and VOCs. However, indoor air quality can be enhanced through an awareness of source management on the part of the designer, the builder, the owner and the occupants. The role of mite allergens is of particular interest to residential indoor air quality. Allergy and asthma may result from exposure to mite fecal material which is commonly found in residential environments due to the availability of habitat (carpet, bedding and upholstery) as well as an ample food supply - human skin flakes. A relative humidity of 70 to 90% is optimal for mite growth, but mites can survive when the relative humidity is as low as 45 to 50%. Reducing the relative humidity to levels at which they do not grow is the primary engineering means of controlling the growth and reproduction of mites. Although not itself a pollutant, water (or water vapor) can cause indoor air to deteriorate by its effects on materials and its contribution to microbial growth. Water intrusion, accidental spills, leaks, condensation on cool surfaces, and indoor water sources (including human respiration) can lead to IAQ problems. When humidities are high, microbial growth is more likely and more vigorous. When carboncontaining materials get wet, they can support mold growth. Dust mites thrive in moist environments. Dust mite feces cause allergic reactions and are believed responsible for a recent and rapid increase in asthma cases both in the U. S. and in northern Europe. As a result, water intrusion, spills, and high humidities are all of concern. Microbial growth requires nutrients and moisture. Viruses require moisture to survive. Since fungi and bacteria are ubiquitous, it is the presence or absence of conditions for growth that determines whether their numbers reach hazardous levels. Human exposure occurs when microbes accumulate and there is a mechanism for dissemination of the microbes, usually by disturbance of the substrate or matrix where they are growing. Bacteria such as Legionella pneumophila, the organism that causes Legionnaires’ Disease, grows in water and is usually aerosolized, either by spas, water features, therapeutic water baths, or cooling towers. Once airborne, these organisms must be inhaled for them to colonize the human respiratory tract and cause disease. Even non-viable organisms (dead spores, bacteria parts) are important because they can cause allergic or asthmatic reactions. 3

Health effects

Exposure and human daily intake Adults breath about 10 cubic meters or more of air (equivalent to the air volume in a small bathroom or kitchen) each day. The air volume actually inspired depends on body size, activity level, and other factors. The air is taken into the lung where the oxygen is transferred to the bloodstream. The expired air contains much less oxygen, and much more carbon dioxide (roughly 40,000 ppm). Even if a gas is present in air at a concentration as high as 1 mg/m3, it only results in an intake between 10 to 20 milligrams (or 1 to 2 percent of a gram, or 0.035 to 0.07 ounces per day). In fact as seen above, most individual contaminants are present only at concentration of 0.01

Indoor air quality 7 mg/m3, 0.001 mg/m3, or even less. And the total intake amount is not absorbed by the body. This later quantity is defined as the delivered dose. Routes of exposure for air contaminants There are three major routes of exposure, ways by which contaminants in the air (or on surfaces) can enter the body. These routes are through: •

lungs (inhalation).

•

skin (absorption).

•

inadvertent ingestion (ingestion).

Contaminants reach the lungs not only by inhalation but also by skin absorption or by inadvertent ingestion. The later routes of exposure are generally much larger for children than for adults based on normal behavior, clothing habits, and tendency to put their hands in their mouths often. Since air contaminants may also be found on surfaces, the hands of children become important means of increasing exposure to air pollutants. For example, children living in homes contaminated with Pentachlorophenol (a formerly widely-used wood preservative, now with severely restricted indoor use) were reported to have 5 to 7 times the body burdens (blood serum and urine PCP metabolite concentrations) that adults living in the same homes had. Pentachlorophenol is not very volatile, so much of it stays on surfaces rather than getting into the air, resulting in exposure for decades after its initial application. Comparing intake of air, water and food A comparison of daily intakes of water, food, and air shows the importance of air relative to other media (food and water) in terms of contaminant exposures. Adult females and males inhale about 7.7 and 10 kg respectively of air daily (average adult lifetime). Children inhale from about 3.6 to 10 kg of air daily (depending on age or size and activity). In contrast, adults drink only about 2.1 kg/day and children drink about 1.1 kg/day of liquids. So, our exposure is far greater to air than to water (and other liquids). Measurements have shown that exposure to chlorine from showering is greater than from drinking and eating foods prepared with water. Chlorine in water evaporates more rapidly when it is heated, accounting for elevated concentrations in shower air during showering. Chlorine exposure in the shower is through both inhalation and skin absorption. Exposure to inhaled indoor air pollutants The fate of inhaled contaminants is important both in terms of the health effects and in terms of the need and means to control them. Gases or vapors that are water soluble or highly reactive will deposit predominately in the upper respiratory tract. While these can cause irritation, they are less likely to cause significant health harm. Exceptions might be gases like formaldehyde which is highly water soluble and is a carcinogen. Less water soluble or reactive gases and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) continue down the respiratory tract. The uptake of these gases and VOCs into the blood depends upon the blood/ air partition coefficient. Peak uptake of inhaled contaminants is around 80% of the inhaled mass and lowest uptake is only a few percent. Metabolism of a VOC increases its uptake. The deposition of particles in the respiratory tract is size dependent. The smallest particles - from 0.05 µm median diameter deposit by diffusion primarily in the pulmonary region (50% - 65%) and also in the tracheo-bronchial region (25%-40%). As particle sizes increase above 0.3 µm, a growing fraction of deposition occurs in the nasopharynx region by sedimentation up to about 5 µm diameter and then by impaction up to 100 µm diameter. Typical building air filters do not effectively remove particles smaller than 1 µm diameter, and the smaller the particle, the less effectively common filters perform.

Health effects of concern There are numerous health effects attributed to exposure to indoor air pollutants. They include a broad range from minor to life-threatening and from rare to common. Of greatest interest, perhaps, are common respiratory illnesses. Absence from work and impaired performance related to acute respiratory infections cost as much as $60 billion annually in the United States in lost productivity. Since many respiratory ailments begin with the growth of a micro-organism in the respiratory tract, the organism must be inhaled. Thus, it must be airborne, or, in most cases is thought to be airborne. Infectious agents include viruses and bacteria. The most common are the rhinovirus and the adenovirus, believed responsible for the vast majority of such illnesses. Fungi can also cause acute illness including pneumonia. Two important diseases that have received much attention lately are Legionnaires’ Disease and Tuberculosis. Building Related Illness (BRI) An illness or disease known to be caused by exposures in buildings is classified as a building-related illness. Generally, avoidance of further exposure is recommended or prescribed. Some well-known building-related illnesses include the following: -

Legionnaire’s Disease

-

Pontiac Fever

-

Hypersensitivity pneumonititis

-

Humidifier fever

-

Lung cancer from radon or environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) exposure.

While tuberculosis, influenza, or even a common-cold that occurs as a result of exposure in a building are classified as BRI, it may not be possible to know exactly where such exposures occur in individual cases. Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) Office, school, and other building occupants generally report one or more of several common health and comfort problems when investigators conduct surveys. Usually occupants are asked whether they had experienced any of a number of specific symptoms during the past week or month, how frequently, and whether the symptoms abate when the occupants leave the building. Surveys show that between 15 - 45% of building occupants typically say they experienced one or more of the several symptoms considered part of the sick building syndrome (SBS).

Table 4. Health effects of indoor pollutants

•

Infectious disease: flu, cold, pneumonia (Legionnaires’ Disease, Pontiac fever)

•

Cancer, other genetic toxicity, teratogenicity - (Ecotoxicity)

•

Asthma and allergy

•

CNS, skin, GI, respiratory, circulatory, musculoskeletal, and other systemic effects

•

SBS (Sick Building Syndrome)

•

Irritation

•

Comfort


93

7 Indoor air quality Sick building syndrome is not a disease itself. Like the flu, it refers to certain types of symptoms or sets of symptoms. Elevated prevalence of the symptoms in a building is considered evidence that the building is causing the problems. Researchers usually consider only symptoms that abate when occupants leave the building to be SBS symptoms. SBS symptoms include the following: •

General symptoms including fatigue, headache, nausea, dizziness, and difficulties in concentrating.

•

Mucous membrane symptoms such as itching, burning, or irritation of the eyes; irritated, stuffy, or runny nose, hoarse or dry throat; and cough.

•

Skin symptoms such as dryness, itching, burning, tightness, or stinging of facial skin, erythema (reddening of the skin); scaling, itching scalp or ears; or, dryness or itching of the hands.

Studies are done to determine what building, environmental, and personal factors are associated with elevated rates of SBS symptoms. The studies do not determine whether the symptoms are, in fact, caused by the building, or whether they are simply present in the general population. Prudence suggests that where strong associations exist between risk factors and SBS symptom prevalence, these factors should be addressed. Problems frequently associated with elevated SBS prevalence include the following: Table 5. Types of predominant environmental stressors for Indoor Air Quality problems

Type of Environmental Stressor

Building factors -

Low ventilation rates (< 20 cfm/p)

-

Ventilation operations (70%documented energy savings by metering or monitoring

Note that N = Q/V, where V = chamber volume, m^3. An emission rate would involve multiplying the area of source material times the emission factor, and would be stated in units of mass per unit time. Construction procedures Many preventive measures can be employed during construction to avoid the generation, spread, and accumulation of VOCs in buildings under construction or renovation. The most important is the use of adequate ventilation during installation of strong emission sources. The most important steps are: -

Require thermal, moisture control, protection for installation of all sensitive materials.

-

Require HVAC operational (or temporary) when building is closedin.

-

Operate HVAC on maximum outside air during installation of wet products, finishes, and furnishings.

-

Temporary filters during dusty operations.

-

Clean and flush building thoroughly prior to initial occupancy.

Some keys to effective commissioning include: -

Specify full HVAC commissioning process.

-

Assemble all requisite documentation.

-

Demonstrate performance in all critical modes under full and part loads.

-

Specify warranty protection period commencing after completed commissioning.

-

Ensure that building operational personnel receive adequate training.

-

Provide completed documentation including design assumptions for each major air handler, zone, and space.

Building operation and maintenance While designers cannot be responsible for effective building operation and maintenance, they can enable and facilitate it by considering it thoroughly during design. Involvement of building operational personnel during design can further improve the ability of designers to Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

99

7 Indoor air quality anticipate actually building use requirements. The following are key design considerations related to operation and maintenance: -

Design must consider maintenance and operational requirements of all specified materials and equipment.

-

All equipment must be fully accessible for inspection, maintenance, replacement.

Banham, Reyner. 1984. The Architecture of the Well-Tempered Environment. Second Edition. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

-

Tie warranties to proper maintenance fully specified by manufacturers, installers, or other appropriate parties.

-

Review manufacturer’s maintenance requirements prior to specifying any product.

Berglund, Birgitta, and Thomas Lindvall. 1990. “Sensory Criteria for Healthy Buildings” in Proceedings of the Fifth International Conference on Indoor Air Quality and Climate, Indoor Air ’90. 5: 65-79.

-

Consider IAQ impacts of all maintenance, re-finishing, and replacement procedures.

Building renovation and adaptive re-use Since most buildings are constantly being changed and remodelling during occupancy can pose significant compromises of IAQ and related problems, it is important for designers to anticipate the changes likely to occur. This is difficult since the initial use is always most easily defined, but the future use is not. Built-in flexibility based on an assumption of multiple changes over a building’s life will enhance the ability of the building to respond to the actual demands placed on it. Following are some key considerations related to building renovation and adaptive re-use with significant indoor air implications: -

Obtain design assumptions regarding thermal and contaminant loads for HVAC systems in-place.

-

Consider contamination control during construction with partial occupancy.

-

Isolate occupied areas from construction fumes and dusts.

-

Provide temporary ventilation, if necessary, to construction zone.

-

Provide for full HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing after all changes.

-

Provide for full re-commissioning.

Good indoor air quality is not an accident. It occurs by design. Considering IAQ throughout a building’s entire life is an important element of achieving good IAQ. Designers have enormous influence over IAQ even though they cannot control all the important factors. By taking advantage of the enormous increase in understanding of the factors that determine IAQ, designers can create healthy, productive buildings. Additional references Alevantis, Leon. 1996. “Reducing occupant exposure to volatile organic compounds (VOCs) from office building construction materials: non-binding guidelines.” Berkeley: California Department of Health Services. Available at no cost: Indoor Air Quality Section, Dept. of Health Services, 2151 Berkeley Way, Berkeley, CA 94704-1011. (510) 540 2132. Email: . ASHRAE. 1996. Guideline 1-96. “Guideline for Commissioning of HVAC Systems” Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE. 1996. Standard 55-1996. “Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy” Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers.

100

Indoor Materials/Products” in Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Volume 11.03, Atmospheric Analysis; Occupational Health and Safety; Protective Clothing. West Conshocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials. pp. 467-478.

Berglund, L. G. and W. S. Cain, 1989. “Perceived air quality and the thermal environment” in IAQ 89, The Human Equation: Health and Comfort. Atlanta, GA: American Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers and the Society for Occupational and Environmental Health. pp. 93-99. Cone, J., and M. Hodgson, editors. Problem Buildings: Building Associated Illness and the Sick Building Syndrome. Philadelphia, PA: Hanley & Belfus. (215) 546-7293. EPA. 1991. “Indoor Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers.” EPA/400/1-91/033. December 1991. U. S. EPA Indoor Air Division. Washington, DC: Superintendent of Documents. EPA and the National Environmental Health Association. 1991. Introduction to Indoor Air Quality: A Self-Paced Learning Module. (EPA/ 400/3-91/002) and Introduction to Indoor Air Quality: A Reference Manual. (EPA/400/3-91/003) July 1991. Available from the National Environmental Health Association, 720 South Colorado Boulevard, South Tower, Suite 970, Denver, CO 80222. (303) 756-9090. Godish, Thad. 1989. Indoor Air Pollution Control. Chelsea, MI: Lewis Publishers. Hinkle, L. E. and W. C. Loring. 1977. The Effect of the Man-Made Environment on Health and Behavior. (DHEW Publication no. CDC 77-8318). Atlanta, GA: U. S. Public Health Service Center for Disease Control. Hodgson, A. T., J. D. Wooley, and J. M Daisey. 1992. “Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Carpets.” Final Report April 1992. (LBL-31916, UC 600). Washington, DC: Directorate of Health Sciences. U. S. Consumer Products Safety Commission. Levin H. 1989. “Building materials and indoor air quality.” in J. E. Cone and M. J. Hodgson, editors. Occupational Medicine: State of the Art Reviews. Vol. 4, No. 4, Oct.-Dec, 1989. Philadelphia, PA: Hanley & Belfus. pp. 667-694. Levin, H. 1991. “Critical Building Design Factors for Indoor Air Quality and Climate: Current Status and Predicted Trends.” Indoor Air, Vol. 1, no. 1. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Levin, H. 1991. “Controlling Sources of Indoor Air Pollution.” Indoor Air Bulletin, Vol. 1, no. 6. Santa Cruz, CA: Indoor Air Information Service. (408) 426-6624). Levin, H. 1995. “Emissions Testing and Indoor Air Quality,” in Proceedings of Indoor Air Quality, Ventilation, and Energy Conservation in Buildings.” Montreal, Canada, May 9-12, 1995. Montreal: Concordia University.

ASHRAE. 1996. Standard 62-1989R “Public Review Draft, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.” July 1996. Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers. URL: www.ashrae.org (then enter “Standards”)

Levin, H. and Hodgson, A. T. 1996. “Screening and Selecting Building Materials and Products Based on Their Emissions of VOCs” in B. Tichenor, editor. Methods for Characterizing Indoor Sources and Sinks (STP 1287). West Conshocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials.

ASTM. 1990. Standard D5116-90. Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from

PECI. 1997. Proceedings of the 5th National building Commissioning Conference. Portland, OR: Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.


8 Acoustics: theory and applications Accoustics: theory and applications 8

M. David Egan Steven Hass Christopher Jaffe


101

8 Acoustics: theory and applications

102


Acoustics: theory theory and applications Acoustics: and applications 8 8

Summary: Part I presents a brief summary of key acoustical definitions and concepts. Part II presents application and examples for specific types of spaces, including performance halls, offices and lecture halls.

Key words: acoustics, ambient noise, decibel, frequency, masking, noise exposure limits, reverberation, vibration.

Greek amphitheatre at Epidaurus circa 350 BC.

Part I Acoustics: theory and definitions Sound and vibrations Sound is a vibration in an elastic medium such as air, water, most building materials, and the earth. (Noise can be defined as unwanted sound, that is, annoying sound made by others or very loud sound which may cause hearing loss.) An elastic medium returns to its normal state after a force is removed. Pressure is a force per unit area. Sound energy progresses rapidly, producing extremely small changes in atmospheric pressure, and can travel great distances. However, each vibrating particle moves only an infinitesimal amount to either side of its normal position. It “bumps’’ adjacent particles and imparts most of its motion and energy to them. A full circuit by a displaced particle is called a cycle. The time required for one complete cycle is called the period and the number of complete cycles per second is the frequency of vibration. Consequently, the reciprocal of frequency is the period. Frequency is measured in cycles per second, the unit for which is called the hertz (abbreviated Hz). A pure tone is vibration produced at a single frequency. Fig. 1 depicts the variation in pressure caused by striking a tuning fork, which produces an almost pure tone by vibrating adjacent air molecules. Symphonic music consists of numerous tones at different frequencies and pressures (that is, a tone is composed of a fundamental frequency with multiples of the fundamental, called harmonics). In Fig. 1, the prongs of the tuning fork alternately compress and rarefy adjacent air particles. This cyclical motion causes a chain reaction between adjacent air particles so that the waves (but not the air particles) propagate away from the tuning fork. Frequency of sound Frequency is the rate of repetition of a periodic event. Sound in air consists of a series of compressions and rarefactions due to air particles set into motion by a vibrating source. The frequency of a sound wave is determined by the number of times per second a given molecule of air vibrates about its neutral position. The greater the number of complete vibrations (called cycles), the higher the frequency. The unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz). Pitch is the subjective response of human hearing to frequency. Low frequencies generally are considered “boomy,” and high frequencies “screechy” or “hissy.” Most sound sources, except for pure tones, contain energy over a wide range of frequencies. For measurement, analysis, and specification of

sound, the frequency range is divided into sections (called bands). One common standard division is into 10 octave bands identified by their center frequencies: 31.5, 63, 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, and 16,000 Hz. Sound level meters can measure energy within octave bands by using electronic filters to eliminate the energy in the frequency regions outside the band of interest. The sound level covering the entire frequency range of octave bands is referred to as the overall level. Wavelength As sound passes through air, the to-and-fro motion of the particles alternately pushes together and draws apart adjacent air particles, forming regions of rarefaction and compression. Wavelength is the distance a sound wave travels during one cycle of vibration. It also is the distance between adjacent regions where identical conditions of particle displacement occur, as shown below by the wire spring (called a “slinky” toy). When shaken at one end, the wave moves along the slinky, but the particles only move back and forth about their normal positions. Sound waves in air also are analogous to the ripples (or waves) caused by a stone dropped into still water. The concentric ripples vividly show patterns of molecules transferring energy to adjacent molecules along the surface of the water. In air, however, sound spreads in all directions. Velocity of sound Sound travels at a velocity that depends primarily on the elasticity and density of the medium. In air, at normal temperature and atmospheric pressure, the velocity of sound is approximately 1,130 feet per second (ft/s), or almost 800 mi./h. This is extremely slow when compared to the velocity of light, which is about 186,000 mi./s, but much faster than even hurricane winds. In building air distribution systems, the air velocity at registers, diffusers, and in ducts is so much slower than the velocity of sound that its effect can be neglected. For example, an extremely high air velocity of 2000 ft/min (about 33 ft/s) in a duct is less than 3 percent of the velocity of sound in air. Consequently, airborne sound travels with equal ease upstream and downstream within most air ducts!

Authors: Part I: M. David Egan, P. E.; Part II: Steven Haas and Christopher Jaffe, Ph.D. References for Part I: ASHRAE. 1993. ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals. Chapter 7 “Sound and Vibration.” Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. Egan, M. David. 1988. Architectural Acoustics. New York: McGraw-Hill. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

103

8 Acoustics: theory and applications However, sound may travel at a very fast 16,000 ft/s along steel pipes and duct walls. It is therefore important to block or isolate paths where sound energy can travel through building materials (called structure-bome sound) to sensitive areas great distances away where it may be regenerated as airborne sound. In buildings, the effect of temperature on sound also is negligible. For example, a 20F rise or drop in room air temperature is significant in temperature range, but would cause only a 2 percent change in the velocity of sound in air. Frequency ranges of audible sounds Hearing ranges for both young and older persons (> 20 years old) are shown in Fig. 2. A healthy young person is capable of hearing sound energy from about 20 to 20,000 Hz. Hearing sensitivity, especially the upper frequency limit, diminishes with increasing age even without adverse effects from diseases and noise—a condition called “presbycusis.” Fig. 1. Wavelength in air from a vibrating tuning fork. (Egan 1988)

Long-term and repeated exposure to intense sounds and noises of everyday living can cause permanent hearing damage (called “sociocusis”), and short-term exposure can cause temporary loss. Consequently, the extent of the hearing sensitivity for an individual depends on many factors, including age, sex, ethnicity, previous exposure to high noise levels from the workplace, gunfire, power tools, or loud music. All other hearing losses (that is, caused by mumps, drugs, accidents) are called “nosocusis.” An audiologist should be consulted if a “ringing” sensation occurs in ears after exposure to moderately loud noise or if sounds seem muffled or dull. Also indicated in Fig. 2 are frequency ranges for human speech (divided into consonants, which contain most of the information for articulation, and vowels!, piano music, stereo sounds, and acoustical laboratory tests (that is, tests used to determine absorption and isolation properties of building materials). Human speech contains energy from about 125 to 8000 Hz. Women’s vocal cords are generally thinner and shorter than men’s, so the wavelengths produced are smaller. This is the reason the female frequency of vibration for speech is normally higher. Wavelengths in S.I. and English units are indicated by the scales at the top of the graph above the corresponding frequency.

Fig. 2. Wavelength scales. Vibrations below 20 Hz. are not audible by humans, but can be felt. (Egan 1988)

104


Sensitivity of hearing The graph in Fig. 3 shows the tremendous range of sound levels in decibels (abbreviated dB). and frequency in hertz over which healthy young persons can hear. Also shown on the graph is the frequency range for “conversational” speech, which occurs in the region where the ear is most sensitive. For comparison, the region where symphonic music occurs is indicated on the graph by the large shaded area extending at mid-frequencies from below 25 dB to over 100 dB (called dynamic range). The dynamic range for individual instruments can vary from 30 dB (woodwinds) to 50 dB (strings). The lowest level of musical sound energy that can be detected by the audience largely depends on the background noise in the music hall, and the upper level depends on the acoustical characteristics of the hall. Electronically amplified rock music in arenas and coliseums far exceeds the maximum sound levels for a large symphonic orchestra. Rock music, purposefully amplified to be at the threshold of feeling (“tingling” in the ear), is considered to be a significant cause of sociocusis.

Acoustics: theory and applications 8 Inverse-square law Sound waves from a point source outdoors with no obstructions (called free-field conditions) are virtually spherical and expand outward from the source as shown in Fig. 4. A point source has physical dimensions of size that are far less than the distance an observer is away from the source. Power is a basic quantity of energy flow. Although both acoustical and electric energies are measured in Watts, they are different forms of energy and cause different responses. For instance, 10 Watts (abbreviated W) of electric energy at an incandescent lamp produces a very dim light, whereas 10 W of acoustical energy at a loudspeaker can produce an extremely loud sound. Peak power for musical instruments can range from 0.05 W for a clarinet to 25 W for a bass drum. Decibels Ernst Weber and Gustav Fechner (nineteenth-century German scientists) discovered that nearly all human sensations are proportional to the logarithm of the intensity of the stimulus. In acoustics, the bel unit (named in honor of Alexander Graham Bell ) was first used to relate the intensity of sound to an intensity level corresponding to the human hearing sensation. Some common, easily recognized sounds are listed below in order of increasing sound levels in decibels. The sound levels shown for occupied rooms are only representative activity levels and do not represent criteria for design. Note also that thresholds vary among individuals. The human hearing range from the threshold of audibility at 0 dB to the threshold of pain at 130 dB represents a tremendous intensity ratio of 1 to 10 trillion (10,000,000,000,000). This is such a wide range of hearing sensitivity that it may be hard to imagine at first. For example, if a bathroom scale had a sensitivity range comparable to that of the human ear, it would have to be sensitive enough to weigh both a human hair and a 30-story building! Logarithms allow the huge range of human hearing sensitivity to be conveniently represented by smaller numbers.

Fig. 3. Human audible sound level and frequency (Egan 1988)

It is difficult to measure sound intensity directly. However, sound intensity is proportional to the square of sound pressure, which can more easily be measured by sound level meters. In air under normal atmospheric conditions, sound intensity level and sound pressure level are nearly identical. Noise exposure limits In 1971, the U. S. Department of Labor established the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and adopted regulations to protect against hearing loss caused by exposure to noise in the workplace. The permissible daily upper limit of noise exposure in A-weighted decibels (abbreviated dBA ) for continuous noise is shown on in the graph of Fig. 6 for 1983 rules and regulations. Single-number decibels in dBA units are measured by sound level meters with internal electronic networks that tend to discriminate with frequency like the human ear does at low sound levels. Amplified rock music at 120 dBA and higher would exceed even the shortest permissible noise exposure. Exposure to impulsive noise such as gunfire or impact noise from heavy machinery should not exceed 140 dBA peak sound level.

Fig. 4. Inverse-square law (Egan 1988)


105


Fig. 5. Common sounds in decibels (Egan 1988)

[1] Decibels (dBA) are weighted values measured by a sound level meter. [2] 150 ft. from a motorcycle can equal the noise level at less than 2000 ft. from a jet aircraft. [3] Continuous exposure to sound energy above 80 dBA can be hazardous to health and can cause hearing loss for some persons.

Although exposure limits are given in dBA, only octave-band (or narrower) analysis of noise will give a more complete picture of how severe the problems are at specific frequencies. This kind of detailed information (called frequency analysis) is also needed to determine the corrective measures because solutions for high-frequency noise problems may differ considerably from those for low- frequency. Corrective measures can involve reducing noise levels at the source (that is, by redesign of noisy equipment or industrial processes), interrupting the path, protecting the receiver (by using individual hearing protection devices), or combinations of all these measures.

Fig. 6. Noise exposure limits. Upper limit (not design value) for exposure to continuous noise in the workplace without hearing testing program or use of hearing-protection devices. (Egan 1988).

106


Acoustics: theory and applications 8 Part II Applications Part II provides an overview of acoustic issues encountered in building design with emphasis upon practical application of acoustic concepts. Acoustical terms are defined and common misconceptions about acoustics in building design are discussed in terms of acoustical materials, sound attenuation techniques, and special requirements for performance spaces, office spaces, and educational facilities. 2 The discipline of architectural acoustics involves primarily three areas: •

Room acoustics.

•

Sound isolation.

•

Building services noise and vibration control.

Room acoustics design begins with establishing basic size, shape and finish materials of a given space to achieve a certain room sound. These criteria are based largely upon the intended function and occupancy of the room. Specific criteria to be determined include: -

Cubic volume and reverberation time. RT60 is a recommended standard and indicates a time (RT) in a room that a sound takes to decay 60 decibels from its original level when abruptly terminated.

-

Room dimensional proportions (length-to-width and height-to-width ratios) and shaping.

-

Type, location, orientation, and shaping of sound reflecting, absorbing and diffusing surfaces.

Fig. 1. Possible direct and flanking paths for sound transmission

•

HVAC systems:

-

Air-handling units

-

Variable-air volume and fan-powered terminal units Ductwork

-

Diffusers, registers, and grilles

Specific criteria to be established include:

•

Plumbing systems:

-

-

Chillers

-

Cooling towers

Sound isolation involves the prevention of airborne and structure-borne noise and vibration generated in one space from entering an adjacent space and having an adverse affect on the occupants or the function of the room (Fig. 1).

Identification and quantification of all potential noise sources— interior and exterior—that would influence the function of an occupied space within a building.

-

Boilers

-

Pumps

Calculation and selection, based on laboratory and field sound isolation test results, of partition constructions that will meet the necessary acoustic attenuation.

-

Piping & valves

-

Restroom, laundry, and other fixtures

•

Electrical Systems:

Requirements for structural decoupling techniques through the use of resilient or “floating” connections between acoustical partitions and building structure.

-

Transformers

-

Generators

Identification and treatment of potential sound leaks at intersections and penetrations of sound-critical partitions.

-

Dimmers

-

Lighting fixtures

-

Sound attenuation required for all boundary surfaces—i.e., walls, floors, ceilings, doors, and windows—at all frequencies of interest.

-

-

-

Building services noise and vibration control ensures that mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and transportation equipment contained within the building do not contribute to an excessive amount of noise and vibration in any occupied space. Sources of noise and vibration include:

Common acoustical terminology Absorption coefficient: Integer number between 0.00 and 1.00 representing the total percentage of sound energy absorbed by a material at a specific frequency. A sound absorption coefficient of 0.00 indicates complete reflection of sound; a sound absorption coefficient of 1.00

References for Part II: Acoustical Society of America, Woodbury, NY (800-344-6901). Beranek, L. 1996. Concert and Opera Halls: How They Sound. New York: Acoustical Society of America. Burris-Meyer, H. and L. S. Goodfriend. 1957. Acoustics for the Architect. New York: Reinhold Publishing Corporation. Egan, M. David. 1988. Architectural Acoustics. New York: McGraw-Hill. Harris, C. M. 1994. Noise Control in Buildings: A Guide for Architects and Engineers. New York: McGraw-Hill. Knudsen, V. O. and C. M. Harris. 1978. Acoustical Designing in Architecture. New York: Acoustical Society of America. National Council of Acoustical Consultants, Springfield, NJ (201-564-5859). Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

107

8 Acoustics: theory and applications indicates complete absorption of sound. Concrete and painted masonry, having absorption coefficients between 0.01 and 0.02 at most frequencies, are considered to be very sound-reflective materials. Materials exhibiting a high degree of sound absorption with coefficients above 0.90 include thick—4 in. (10 cm) or greater—fiberglass insulation panels and certain suspended acoustical ceiling tiles. Data published for some acoustical materials may show absorption coefficients greater than 1.00 at one or more frequencies. This is because the effective absorbing surface area in a thick or shaped material is greater than the material’s face area used to determine the absorption coefficient. Ambient noise: Average level of sound energy occurring within an architectural environment at a specified time due to various noise sources in and around the space. Also referred to as “background noise,” the ambient sound level in most cases is determined by the output of the mechanical system serving the room along with any other equipment (copy machines, computers, etc.) that might be in operation. See also NC Curves below. Break-in/break-out noise: Transfer of acoustic energy between the interior of a duct or pipe and the surrounding space. Dead room: Room containing a large amount of sound-absorbing material. Diffuse sound field: Room in which sound waves travel equally in all directions and the sound energy level is approximately constant throughout the entire room volume – except close to the boundaries of the room. In such a room, it is difficult to identify the direction from which a sound originates unless one is very close to the source. Diffusive material: Material in a room that causes sound waves hitting its surface to be scattered in multiple directions. Examples of diffusive shapes include convex or splayed walls and ceilings, coffers, columns, pilasters, and very ornate architectural surfaces. Hard furniture and sound-absorbing panels spaced at intervals along a reflective boundary surface will also add diffusion to a room. Flanking path: Path between adjacent spaces other than through a common partition through which sound or vibration is transferred (See Fig. 1 on previous page). Flutter echo: Rapid series of reflections usually created when a sound is played between two hard and parallel room surfaces. Flutter echo is often perceived as a “buzzing” or “ringing” sound and can be detrimental to the clarity or intelligibility of a sound. Simple solutions for eliminating this occurrence include: creating an offsetting angle of at least 5° between the two surfaces, adding sound absorptive materials to one or both surfaces, or adding diffusive shaping to the surfaces. Live room: Room containing very little sound absorbing materials. Masking: Acoustic condition in which the energy level of one sound source is sufficiently greater than another and impairs one’s ability to hear the lower level sound. Masking noise is often related to the ambient noise level from the HVAC systems or other continuously operating equipment in the space. The presence of audible masking noise can be a positive attribute, such as in an open-plan office where the noise might improve speech privacy by preventing nearby conversations from being intelligibly heard. Where mechanical and other existing systems are too quiet to provide sound privacy, distributed loudspeaker systems may be integrated into the ceilings of the spaces to artificially generate the necessary noise to create “positive masking.” Masking noise, however, can also create a negative condition in a symphony concert hall where low-level instrumental or vocal passages might not be clearly heard over the ambient noise of the hall. For this reason, acoustic designers of performance spaces strive to achieve very low (inaudible) ambient sound levels for performance and other sound-critical spaces.

108


Reverberation time: Amount of time at a specific frequency that a sound in an enclosed space takes to decrease 60 decibels in level after the source sound has stopped. The reverberation time gives a listener the sense of the size, liveness and warmth of a room. Reverberation time increases proportionally with the cubic volume of the room and decreases proportionally with the quantity of sound-absorbing surfaces in the room. Sound-critical: Term used to describe a room in which the programmed usage requires specific attention to room acoustic, sound isolation or building systems noise control design. Architects, engineers and acoustical consultants should define with the owners and occupants of a building the list of sound-critical—sometimes referred to as “sound-sensitive” or “acoustically-critical”—spaces very early in the design process. Source and receiving room: Terms used in sound and vibration isolation analysis to designate the room containing the sound or vibration producing source (source room) and an adjacent (receiving) room requiring that the source noise be attenuated by the intervening partitions to a specified noise level. Space layout considerations When designing a plan based on a programmed number and type of spaces, consider the relationship between noise-producing spaces and sound-critical spaces sensitive to intruding sound. Two spaces—one noisy and one quiet—located immediately adjacent to each other will require thick, massive, and costly intervening partitions, upgraded sound absorbing treatments, and special noise control measures with the HVAC system. These requirements can be reduced by separating the two spaces with acoustical buffer spaces. These include: -

buffer spaces

-

corridors

-

lobbies

-

storage rooms

-

stairwells

-

electrical/janitorial closets

-

offices not requiring sound privacy

This listing includes some of the most commonly used acoustical buffer zones in buildings. Depending on individual circumstances, any one of the above listed spaces may contain activity or equipment that generates enough noise to no longer allow the space to be effectively used as a buffer zone. An authority in the acoustic layout of building spaces should be consulted for all projects containing soundsensitive spaces. Fig. 2 illustrates the effect of locating a mechanical equipment room adjacent to several private offices and the positive benefits of rearranging the spaces to include a buffer zone between the offices and equipment room. Acoustical materials Architectural surfaces need to be designed to either reflect sound, absorb sound, or diffuse sound. Each type of surface has its own specific criteria and applications for being incorporated into a space. •

Reflective surfaces are considered to be essentially flat or slightly shaped planes of hard building materials including gypsum board, wood, plywood, plaster, heavy metal, glass, masonry, and concrete.

-

Should be of sufficient mass, thickness, and stiffness to avoid becoming absorbers of low-frequency sound energy where this is not desired (see discussion of Absorptive Surfaces below).

-

Should be of sufficient dimension to reflect all frequencies of interest. An 8-foot (2.4-m) surface width will reflect energy above

Acoustics: theory and applications 8 500 Hz, which is sufficient for most speech and music applications since frequencies below 500 Hz are more omnidirectional in nature and not easily directed towards a specific location. -

Can create problems by being located and oriented such that sound generated a certain distance away can reflect back to its point of origin delayed in time and thus cause a discernible and troublesome echo.

•

Absorptive surfaces are primarily used for the following applications: Reverberation Control: reduction of reverberant sound energy to improve speech intelligibility and source localization.

-

Sound Level Control: reduction of sound or noise buildup in a room to maintain appropriate listening levels and improve sound isolation to nearby spaces.

-

Echo and Reflection Control: elimination of perceived single echoes, multiple flutter echoes, or unwanted sound reflections from room surfaces.

-

Diffusion Enhancement: mixing of sound in a room by alternating sound absorptive and sound reflective materials.

Absorptive surfaces be any of three basic types of materials: - Porous materials include fibrous materials, foam, carpet, acoustic ceiling tile, and draperies that convert sound energy into heat by friction. Example: fabric-covered 1 in. (2.5 cm) thick fiberglass insulation panels mounted on a wall or ceiling. -

Vibrating panels thin sound-reflective materials rigidly or resiliently mounted over an airspace that dissipate sound energy by converting it first to vibrational energy. Example: a 1/4 in. (6 mm) plywood sheet over an airspace (with or without fibrous materials in the airspace).

-

Volume resonators - materials containing openings leading to a hollow cavity in which sound energy is dissipated. Example: slotted concrete blocks (with or without fibrous materials in the cores).

Fig. 2. Using buffer zones for acoustic isolation.


109

8 Acoustics: theory and applications Fig. 3 shows a graphical representation of the above types of sound absorbing materials along with typical levels of absorption versus frequency. Absorbtive surfaces exhibit improved low-frequency absorption with increasing airspace behind the materials. They are most efficient when applied in smaller panels distributed evenly on a room’s boundary surfaces versus large panel areas concentrated on one or two surfaces. Diffusive Surfaces are materials having a non-planer shaping or random articulation that result in the redirection and redistribution of sound energy impacting their surfaces. -

Promote diffusion, or even distribution, of sound in a room which creates in a listener the sense of being enveloped in a sound generated within the room.

-

Are typically sound-reflective surfaces formed into convex, splayed or randomly articulated shapes.

-

Are not concave surfaces which can cause uneven focusing of sound energy.

See Fig. 4 for the most common diffusive surface shapes. General issues related to mechanical noise and vibration control Mechanical rooms, especially those containing large high pressure fans, chillers, boilers, pumps, etc., should be located remotely from important listening spaces. The closer the mechanical equipment to the sound-critical spaces, the more massive and complex the required intervening construction. In some cases, double wall constructions, grade location of the equipment, and structural joints around the mechanical room may be necessary. Mechanical rooms containing only small to medium horsepower, low-pressure fans and perhaps a few small pumps also are best located remotely from sound-critical spaces. If this cannot be done, the mechanical room should be located on grade or on an upper floor with a dense concrete slab at least 6-in. (15-cm) thick with a 4-in, (10cm) housekeeping pad under the equipment. The slabs should be supported by stiff structural members spanning no more than 30 feet (9 m). The worst possible situation is to locate mechanical equipment on the sound-critical space’s roof. Too much noise is almost assured in this case. Avoid locating major mechanical equipment directly above or beside the sound-critical space. Buffer zones such as corridors, storage areas, etc., should be located between a mechanical room and the sound-critical space. If this can not be done, a full acoustic separation joint with double column structure will be required between the mechanical room and the critical spaces. A lightweight roof deck should not span continuously between a mechanical room and a sound-critical space. Sound or vibration will travel along the lightweight construction (flank the intervening wall or slab) and radiate into the space. Additional design checklist items include: • Mechanical room doors should lead to non-critical building areas only. These doors may require acoustical seals or, in very critical cases, sound-rated acoustical doors. Similarly, fresh-air intake and exhaust-air discharge openings should not lead to critical outdoor areas or to locations where noise can re-enter the building through windows, doors, or vents.

Fig. 3. Basic types and relative efficiencies of sound-absorbing materials.

110


Acoustics: theory and applications 8 •

Shafts leaving mechanical rooms and passing by sound-critical spaces should be sealed to the ductwork so that no direct openings exist to the mechanical rooms.

•

Shaft walls adjacent to quiet areas generally should be of medium to heavy weight masonry.

Generally:

•

On its way to the sound-critical space, a duct often passes different spaces which may or may not be sound critical. The sound transmission loss properties of rectangular duct is low and noise can break in or break out.

Main ducts from sound-critical spaces:

700 FPM or less

Ducts approaching diffusers, grilles:

400 FPM or less

Close to the fan, noise levels in ductwork are usually high. A duct that enters sound-critical spaces immediately after leaving the mechanical room should be avoided. After the duct noise has been attenuated, the duct should not re-enter noisy areas.

Acoustics of performance spaces

•

•

If situations described above cannot be avoided, using double-wall insulated round or multiple round ductwork is the best solution. Wrapping or enclosing rectangular ducts with sound isolation materials will be necessary if round duct cannot be used.

•

Only ducts serving sound-critical spaces should be run over the ceilings of these spaces.

•

•

•

Locate floor-mounted major equipment on grade, or position it near supporting columns or major beams. Mid-span locations are least desirable. Locate suspended equipment so it can be supported from beams, joists, or other relatively heavy structural members. Avoid direct support from lightweight slabs or roof decks wherever possible. Frame between major beams for support, if necessary. Keep machinery room spans to a minimum and make supporting structure as stiff as possible, since structural deflections will have to be compensated for by increased equipment spring isolator static deflections, which is not always possible or practical. Sound-critical space air delivery and return systems must be low velocity in order to avoid producing turbulent air noise that would enter the space. Since ductwork in critical systems is lined internally with glass fiber sound-absorbing material, noise will be attenuated along the duct. Therefore, the lowest

velocities must exist at supply and return openings. Air velocities may gradually increase along the duct back towards the supply or return fan.

Trunk duct velocity:

1000 FPM or less

Applications to specific types of spaces

Room acoustic issues: The cubic volume of the performance space needs to be appropriate to the designated program in order to provide for the proper loudness level and amount of reverberation for each program type. Volume is usually determined as a ratio of the number of seats in the hall including performers on stage if the stage and house volumes are coupled with each other. Hall Program Theatrical and amplified events only

Range of acoustical volume 200-300 ft3/seat

Unamplified music (excluding pipe organ) 300-450 ft3/seat Organ music

450-600 ft3/seat

•

A balance of sound reflecting, absorbing, and diffusing sounds must be designed to achieve reflection patterns and reverberation time appropriate to the given program in the space (speech, music, amplified events, etc.).

•

Different programs have different acoustic requirements: Speech, drama and amplified music require shorter reverberation times typically less than 1.2 seconds. Symphonic, opera and organ music all require longer reverberation times typically greater than 1.6 seconds.

• To achieve an acoustic variation in a performance hall that must accommodate a wide range of programs, one or a combination of both of the following devices are used:

Fig. 4. Common shapes that promote sound diffusion.


111

8 Acoustics: theory and applications -

Modulation of effective room acoustic volume through the use of hard, reflective “chambers” in the upper stage or audience seating areas.

-

Increasing/decreasing the amount of sound absorbing materials through the use of draperies, banners, panels that can be either fully exposed, partially exposed, or concealed depending on the requirements of the event.

•

For optimal intelligibility of music and speech, ensure that wall and ceiling surfaces in the stage or “sending” end of the room are sound-reflective and somewhat diffusive to both project sound out to an audience and to enhance performers’ abilities to hear themselves and blend with one another.

•

•

•

Room shape is very important for providing the necessary side wall reflections that contribute to an accurate sense of spaciousness and fullness of sound in the space. Rooms based on the rectangular form (with added wall shaping) often provide the strongest coverage of side wall, or lateral, reflections. Wide fan shapes and semicircular floor plans focus sound very unevenly causing “hot spots” and “dead zones” of sound. In addition to lateral reflections, sound reflections arriving from the ceiling and stage area (orchestra shell or other acoustical enclosures) shortly after the arrival of the direct sound contribute to presence, spaciousness and intelligibility. Fig. 5 depicts the most common paths of early sound reflections to a listener. The width of a performance hall should be as narrow as possible to avoid delayed reflections from the side walls being perceived as echoes, especially to those in the center seating sections.

•

To accommodate the maximum number of audience seats while avoiding delayed reflections and poor sightlines, it is often necessary for the width of the side walls to be very narrow (not much wider than the proscenium opening or stage platform width) in the front of the room and gradually increase to a wider rectangular form one-third to one-half of the distance toward the rear of the audience seating area.

•

Balcony fascia and under-balcony ceilings need to be shaped like a sound diffuser or treated with limited amounts of sound absorption to avoid long, delayed reflections and echoes.

•

Balcony depth for halls with unamplified music and speech should be a maximum of 1.5 times and preferably equal to the height of the opening at the front of the balcony to assure good overhead reflection coverage to all seats under the balcony.

Sound and vibration isolation issues. Sound and vibration isolation requirements are primarily dependent on: -

Desired ambient noise level in the room

-

Level of noise and vibration sources in adjacent or nearby spaces

-

Level of exterior sound and vibration from traffic, aircraft, or other noise sources outside the exposed envelope of the space

It is critical during the early design phases of a project that the design team come to an agreement with the client and owner on the degree of sound isolation required from intermittent noise events. For example, the requirement to completely isolate the sound of a fire engine or ambulance that may pass by the performance hall once or twice a week would have a major impact on the performance space’s con-

Fig. 5. Possible paths for early sound reflection.

112


Acoustics: theory and applications 8 struction complexity and cost, and may result in programmatic cutbacks in other areas of the building. Figure 6 illustrates the relationship between increased sound isolation requirements and budget costs. •

The walls of a performance space must be a minimum of one course of masonry or a multi-layer/multi-stud drywall construction depending on surrounding conditions. This construction may or may not incorporate the interior finish materials and wall shaping required for appropriate room acoustics.

•

It is rarely the case where a performance space is located completely remote from other noise and vibration producing rooms such as mechanical equipment rooms, loading and receiving areas, public lobbies, and other performance and rehearsal spaces. For this reason, it is often advisable to structurally separate the performance space from these other areas through the use of an acoustical isolation joint. Fig. 6. Relationship between construction cost and level of sound isolation.

Acoustical Isolation Joint (AIJ). The purpose of an AIJ is to create a complete structural break between two or more parts of a building with vibration producing equipment housed on one side only. -

An AIJ is formed by double lines of offset columns separated by a minimum of a 2 in. (5 cm) airspace extending all the way from the footings through the roof with nothing rigid bridging the two structures. The double set of columns may also be separated by a corridor with the corridor slab on each level cantilevered from one of the column lines.

-

In general, an AIJ must begin and end at an exterior wall so that structure-borne vibration can not flank around the AIJ at an interior partition.

-

Ductwork, piping, and other services crossing the AIJ must not make rigid contact with either structure by the use of neoprene compression seals at the point of penetration.

-

Steel reinforcement must not cross the AIJ.

-

Under certain specified conditions, it is possible for the AIJ to also serve as a building expansion joint.

-

It is advisable to use the services of an experienced acoustical consultant to develop the details of the AIJ with the architect and structural engineer.

•

Roofs of performance spaces must be concrete slabs or concrete on decking even if outside noise conditions are relatively quiet. The reasons are:

-

Rain, hail, and sleet hitting a lightweight metal roof, even with a built-up insulated roofing system, will transmit significant noise into the performance space and be quite distracting, if not unbearable, for listeners and performers alike.

-

A lightweight roof acts as a vibrating panel absorber (see Fig. 3) and absorbs excessive low-frequency energy causing the space to severely lack low-end room response, or warmth, for music.

•

Sound and light locks should be used for all entrances into a performance hall, including onto stage. These are basically two doors or two sets of doors in tandem separated by a vestibule containing sound absorbing materials (carpeted floor, acoustic ceiling tile, absorptive wall panels, etc.). Each door should either be a standard solid-core wood or hollow metal door with specially chosen acoustic seals applied around its perimeter, or a factory manufactured acoustical door guaranteed by laboratory testing to meet a certain sound-isolation rating. These doors are usually designated by their single number STC rating. When determining the sound isolation rating of an acoustic door, however, the one-third octave band transmission loss values should be provided by the door manufacturer for a direct comparison of performance.

Mechanical system noise control issues. The following issues are specific to performance spaces and supplement the earlier section on mechanical systems noise and vibration control: •

Performance spaces are usually rated with a noise criterion around NC (or PNC) 15-20. Under special circumstances, the noise criterion rating will be higher or lower than this range. Under no conditions should the noise rating be designed to higher than NC 25, for this will significantly degrade the intelligibility and dynamic range of the hall.

•

Supply and return ductwork serving a performance space must be kept at low velocities and, therefore, will be quite large if the quantity of airflow (cfm) is substantial. As an example, the maximum velocity in a main supply duct located over a performance space should be about 700 fpm. With an airflow of 20,000 cfm, the equivalent duct diameter would be 6 feet (1.8 m)! Coordination of these large ducts with structure, catwalks, lighting, and acoustical reflecting surfaces should occur throughout the entire design period.

•

Spiral-round ductwork is recommended within the ceiling volume of a performance hall because large, rectangular ductwork acts as a low-frequency sound absorbing material.

•

The most effective method of air distribution in a performance hall combines a low-velocity overhead supply “dump” and a distributed return air system under the audience seating (or on the lower side walls for a smaller room). Because of the low velocities required, diffusers on supply openings do not function effectively and are best omitted, relying on the return air system to pull the supply air over the audience.

Acoustics of office buildings The basic acoustical and speech-privacy requirements of enclosed and open-plan offices are: -

To talk without having conversations understood by neighboring workers.

-

To not be distracted from nearby conversations and other intruding noises.

-

To allow face-to-face 6 feet (1.8 m) apart conversations to be clearly heard and comprehended.

•

Sound absorbing surfaces in each office and throughout the open-plan areas reduces the ability for sound to travel long distances. Carpeted floors and acoustic ceiling tile with an NRC ratTime-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

113


•

ing of 0.70 and higher are the most effective means of providing sound absorption in an office.

•

Carpet on floors will absorb some sound, but should mainly be considered for control of footfall noise.

A noise criterion rating of NC 35 - 40 will provide enough noise to help mask the transfer of conversational sounds, yet will not be so noisy that the intelligibility of local conversations will be impaired. A rating of NC 30 - 35 is also acceptable for private offices with higher quality construction and good physical distance between employees.

•

Walls typically should be a hard, sound-reflective material, such as gypsum board or masonry, Shaping and diffusion on walls in larger rooms should be considered to improve speech reflection patterns and eliminate flutter echoes.

•

Corridors should have the same requirements for the ceiling tile. Carpet is a very effective means of reducing footfall noise in the corridors, and should be considered when possible. High-traffic corridors built completely with hard materials (e.g., gypsum walls and ceilings, VCT floor) will almost certainly result in a build up of sound that could be intrusive on adjacent critical rooms.

•

Acoustically-sensitive spaces such as auditoriums, music rooms, and lecture halls will require special consideration for room finishes and shaping of walls and ceilings in order to achieve good projection and balance of sound energy. A specialist in acoustics should be advised for these areas whenever possible.

•

In enclosed offices where a high degree of speech privacy is required, standard construction (including single-layer drywall partitions that do or do not extend up to the deck) and unsealed hollow doors typically do not provide enough sound isolation.

•

To improve sound isolation and speech privacy in enclosed offices:

-

Add an extra layer of gypsum board on one or both sides of the separating walls.

-

Extend walls up to the deck and seal around the top and bottom of the walls with a non-hardening airtight acoustical caulking.

-

Ensure that the office door is at least solid-core wood or hollow metal construction and add specialized acoustic seals around the perimeter of the door.

-

Ensure that ductwork does not pass directly between adjacent offices, which will allow conversational sound to cross between two or more rooms through the duct. This is known as crosstalk noise.

-

Run main supply and return ductwork in corridors and branch into each office separately. Add internal acoustic duct lining to some or all of the ductwork for an even greater crosstalk noise reduction.

-

Refer to comments above for sound absorptive treatments and establishment of ambient noise levels.

•

To improve sound isolation and speech privacy in open-plan office areas:

-

Maximize distance between noise sources and listeners (i.e., between adjacent employees and between noisy office equipment and the nearest employee). Where practical, offset workstations so that employees do not have a direct line of sight (or sound) to one another.

-

Construct partial-height free-standing walls between employee stations having solid-core construction with applied sound absorbing panels on both sides. The walls should be at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high and 10 feet (3 m) wide (centered in plan on the worker location). These will serve as both sound isolation barriers and reducers of sound reflections.

-

Refer to comments above for other sound absorptive treatments and establishment of ambient noise levels.

Acoustics of educational facilities Proper control of sound in a learning and teaching facility is of critical importance for allowing good aural communication between teachers and students. The following guidelines should be used: Room acoustic issues. When selecting finishes for teaching spaces, a proper balance between sound-absorptive and sound-reflective materials is necessary to produce an environment that is not overly reverberant (reducing intelligibility of speech) nor excessively “dry” (results in an unnatural, uncomfortable feeling for most occupants). •

114

Typical classrooms and meeting rooms should have a lay-in acoustic tile ceiling with the specified tile having a minimum Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) rating of 0.65.


Sound isolation issues. Walls separating classrooms, laboratories, and meeting rooms should be a minimum construction of two layers of 5/ 8 in. (1.6 cm) gypsum board on one side of a metal stud and one layer of 5/8 in. (1.6 cm) gypsum board on the other. Batt insulation should be placed in the stud cavities. Joints on the two layer side should be staggered, and the perimeter of the walls at the top and bottom should be caulked on both sides with a non-hardening acoustical sealant. These walls should also extend all the way up to the underside of the slab or deck of the floor above. •

For improved sound isolation between rooms that produce sound louder than average speech levels, the above construction should be supplemented with an additional layer of 5/8 in. (1.6 cm) gypsum board on the single layer side, and changing the metal studs from a single to a double staggered or separated configuration.

•

Corridor walls from classrooms, laboratories, and meeting rooms should be a minimum of a single layer of 5/8 in. (1.6 cm) gypsum board on each side of a metal stud, with batt insulation placed in the stud cavities. The comments listed above for the walls between adjacent rooms also apply for these walls. For further improvements in sound isolation (e.g., for rooms located off of high-traffic corridors), the construction listed for walls separating adjacent classrooms may be used.

•

Doors should typically not be located between two classrooms or other sound-critical spaces. Also avoid facing two doors directly across from each other in a corridor. Where noise from a corridor is a concern, doors should be a minimum construction of solid-core wood or hollow metal with applied acoustical door seals and sweeps to control sound leakage around the perimeter of the doors. Ideally, the seals and sweeps should be manufactured specifically for control of sound.

•

Where exterior noise exists outside of a classroom or other sound-critical space, the windows should be specified as an insulating assembly with different pane thicknesses, e.g.: 1/4 in. pane– 1/2 in. airspace–3/8 in. pane. (0.64 cm–1.3 cm–.95 cm). Laminated glass may be used for either or both panes to further improve sound isolation.

•

Again, acoustically sensitive spaces for speech and music require specialized partition constructions and selection of doors and windows.

Mechanical noise control issues. Achieving the proper level of ambient noise in an academic space is critical. If the level is too high, communication between teachers and students will be partially or fully masked. If too low, the slightest noises (pencils dropping, rustling of

Acoustics: theory and applications 8 papers, etc..) will appear to be intensified in their level of disturbance. Below is a table of ambient noise criteria based on the single number “RC” (Room Criteria) curves. The values and ranges are based on judgment and experience, not on quantitative evaluations of human reactions. They represent general limits of acceptability for typical building occupancies. Higher or lower values may be appropriate and should be based on a careful analysis of economics, space usage, and user needs. They are not intended to serve by themselves as a basis for a contractual requirement. Table 1. Common acoustical acronyms and their definitions

Acronym Term

Definition

Acoustical Category

NC

Noise Criteria The NC level of a room is a rating of the noise level of an interior space. The NC number is associated with a series of sound energy level-versus-frequency curves known as Noise Criterion curves. For new construction, an NC level is established based on the room type and its intended function, and is used as a goal in the design of sound isolation construction and the attenuation of mechanical systems noise. To determine the NC rating of an existing space, octave-band noise level measurements are taken and plotted against the series of NC curve spectra. The NC value is set by the lowest curve that lies completely above the measured spectrum values.

Ambient Noise

RC

Room Criteria Alternate rating system to the Noise Criteria system preferred by many because it designates the tonal quality of a spectrum as well as its level. Terms such as Neutral (N), Rumbly(R), Hissy(H) and Perceptible Vibration (RV) are added to the single RC number to rate an existing space. For a full description of the method of achieving an RC rating, refer to the references at the end of this chapter.

Ambient Noise

STC

Sound Transmission Class

A single number method of rating the sound isolation performance of a partition, door or window. The STC number is associated with a series of sound attenuationversus-frequency curves. The higher the STC number, the better a partition isolates sound overall. A partition is assigned an STC rating in an acoustical test laboratory by placing the test partition between two rooms, generating a loud noise source on one side and measuring the difference in level between the two rooms. This difference, along with the total absorption of the receiving room and the common area of the partition, are used to calculate a series of one-third octave band decibel reductions known as Transmission Loss values. STC numbers should be used only as a broad comparison between two or more partitions. For a thorough sound isolation design, the Transmission Loss values should be evaluated based on the frequency content of the source noise and the specific NC level required in an adjacent space.

Sound Isolation

TL

Transmission Loss

See description of STC above.

Sound Isolation

NIC

Noise Isolation Class

Similar to an STC rating, but is a result of a field measurement of an existing partition. The NIC value does not include the receiving room absorption and the area of the common partition in its calculation.

Sound Isolation

IIC

Impact Insulation Class

Like the STC value, the IIC is a single number rating of a composite floor and ceiling construction’s effectiveness in reducing the level of sound created by an object impacting on its surface above. To measure IIC, an impacting source is activated in an upper room and the resulting sound levels are measured in the room below. These levels are then compared to a series of IIC curves to establish the actual rating of the assembly.

NRC

Noise Reduction Coefficient

The NRC value is a single number method of rating the sound absorbing effectiveness of an acoustical material. It is defined as the arithmetic average of the material’s measured sound absorption coefficients at the 250Hz, 500Hz, 1000Hz and 2000Hz octave bands. These frequency bands represent the range of sound most associated with speech. If the material is required to absorb very low or high frequencies of sound, the individual sound absorption coefficients should be used for comparison,rather than the NRC value.

Sound Absorption


115

8 Acoustics: theory and applications Table 2. Top Ten Acoustical Myths/Misconceptions

Myth/Misconception

Reality

10. Fiberglass or foam placed on a wall will prevent sound from going through the wall. 9. Carpet on a floor will reduce sound transmission to a room below. 8. 7.

Carpet on a floor will reduce the amount of street noise coming through a window. Paint on the walls affects the acoustics of a room.

6.

Egg cartons on the wall improve the sound of the space.

5.

Adding insulation to a sheetrock wall will keep all sound from going through it.

4.

3. 2.

1.

These materials only absorb sound and do not provide a barrier to it. Heavier building materials and resilient attachments to structure are the best methods for isolating sound. Carpet is a sound absorbing material mainly at high frequencies, and has very little airborne sound isolation properties. Carpet does, however, reduce the amount of impact sound from footfall or things dropped transmitting to the space below. Once again, because carpet absorbs mainly high frequency sounds, it has negligible effect at the mid-and low-frequencies which constitute the vast majority of exterior sounds. Paint has no effect on the acoustics of a room, except, perhaps, a psycho-acoustical effect (e.g., a brightly-colored room often makes people perceive the room as more acoustically live). While egg cartons do have some sound-absorbing and diffusing properties, they are con centrated in a relatively narrow frequency band and do not effect the quality of speech or music to any significant degree. They also have negligible sound isolation properties.

Insulation between stud cavities in a sheetrock partition does improve the sound isolation value of a partition and should be used whenever possible. The improvement, however, is too small to bring about an appreciable difference in the degree of isolation, and the insulation should only be thought of as a partial solution to upgrading the isolation of a partition. A sound attenuator in an air duct will Sound attenuators (also known as “duct silencers” or “sound-traps”) are one of a number of eliminate all noise from the HVAC system. tools used for noise reduction in an HVAC system. Depending on the distance of the air-handling unit to the diffuser or grille in the occupied space, the ductwork distribution and the sound levels produced by the equipment, additional noise control measures, includ ing internal duct lining and acoustic plenums, may be required. The colors in a room (walls, furniture, etc.) Once again, the only effect a color in a room may have is a psycho-acoustical perceived affect the acoustics of the space. difference in the sound quality. Wood is good. Wood is often considered the best material to use in a music performance space. This is only true depending on the application of the wood. It must be of enough thickness to not absorb low-frequency sound where this is not desirable. It must also be appropriately oriented and shaped to provide reflection and diffusion to the right locations and to not create late-arriving echoes back to the stage and front-of-house areas. See the discussion on Acoustics of Per formance Spaces later in this Section for more information. Soundproofing This word is the catch-all phrase used by many for improving anything that has to do with acoustics. “Soundproofing” implies building a room that will keep all possible sounds outside the space from transferring in, and all sounds generated in the space from transferring out. Building construction can be designed to attenuate a fixed degree of sound, but cannot theoretically prevent all possible sounds from passing through the boundaries of the room, except in extremely rare (and expensive) situations. Better terminology to use when describing a client’s acoustical needs may perhaps be “Noise Reduction” (for sound isolation) and “Sound Enhancement” (for room acoustics).

Table 3. Design Guidelines for HVAC System Noise in Educational Spaces

116

Space

RC Level

Classrooms

30-35 (max)

Lecture Halls/Large Classrooms for more than 50 (unamplified speech)

30-35 (max)

Lecture Halls/Large Classrooms for more than 50 (amplified speech)

35-40 (max)

Libraries

30-40

Gymnasiums/Natatoriums

40-50

Laboratories (minimal speech communication)

45-55

Laboratories (extensive telephone use, speech communication)

40-50

Laboratories (group teaching)

35-45


History of building and urban technologies 9

9

History of building and urban technologies John P. Eberhard


117

9 History of building and urban technologies

118


History of building urban technologies History of and building and urban technologies 9 9

Summary: Seven inventions, all developed in the closing decades of the 19th century, transformed the nature of building technologies and in turn the design of cities and regional landscapes: steel structures, elevators, electric lighting, central heating, indoor plumbing, the telephone and the automobile. They still define the nature of building and urban technologies today. These systems are being brought into question by their environmental impacts, possibly setting the stage for another equally inventive era of technological innovation. Key words: automobile, building technology, elevators, heating, lighting, plumbing, steel structural systems, telephone Architects who practice at the end of the 20th century face a proliferation of new materials and substantial changes in their methods of practice introduced by electronics. However, those who practiced at the beginning of the 20th century faced even larger challenges. The Columbian Exposition of 1893 was the last major architectural design effort to be based on systems of building which had changed little “since the age of the pyramids.” The basic systems of buildings and the urban context into which buildings were inserted were changing dramatically as the result of inventions introduced in the last 25 years of the 19th century. These inventions not only changed what a building could be, but altered in a fundamental way how the architecture of cities could be imagined (Fig. 1). A remarkable set of seven inventions were developed towards the end of the 19th century to change the design and operation of cities. Each of these inventions were to have a profound impact on the design of buildings and cities. Each still forms the technological basis for cities at the end of the 20th century. These inventions were: •

steel structural systems

•

elevators

•

the electric light

•

central heating

•

indoor plumbing

•

telephones

•

automobiles.

With the possible exception of the telephone, no major invention introduced into the fabric of 19th century cities was without its antecedents. And no invention, including the telephone, was capable of being utilized in urban areas without the support of a large array of public and private investments in the infrastructure of the city. For example, the electric light (a primary invention) was of no use without the generating stations for electricity, distribution systems for electrical power, wiring systems within buildings, and fixtures to receive the bulbs. The organization of architectural specifications, building codes, reference works for architects and engineers tend to have chapters devoted to each of the supporting systems for these seven inventions. The structure of local city and county government regulatory bodies and national licensing examinations are dictated by these seven systems. Even university education tends to be organized around structural engineering, electrical engineering, mechanical engineering, com-

Bradbury Building, Los Angeles, CA. 1890

munications engineering, transportation engineering, etc. to prepare each new generation to deal with the development, design and maintenance of these systems. Structural framing systems From before the era of pyramid construction, masonry was used to construct buildings. From small bricks to the giant stones of the pyramids, architects created buildings whose configuration was limited by how high masonry could be stacked and how far apart supporting masonry units could be spaced. If the enclosure at the top of a structure was of flat masonry (Greek and Roman temples), their supports could not be very far apart. If timber was used for the roof, then the distance between supports could be greater. With the development of the arch and the dome, the span became greater and grander. With the introduction of iron and steel structural systems in the 19th century, all of these limitations changed. There is no fixed time in history, or any single building, that can be said to represent the first use of a structural steel, although the Home Insurance Building in Chicago is generally given that credit. Architect William Le Baron Jenny could not have designed the Home Insurance Building if Bessemer had not first invented a process of making steel, if Andrew Carnegie and others had not invested in the great steel mills of Pittsburgh, and if earlier uses of cast iron and wrought iron had not lead the way. By the end of the century architects would be indebted to an engineer, Charles Louis Strobel, who designed the wide-flange steel beam which became the structural system of choice from 1895 onward. Even with the introduction of reinforced concrete structures during the 20th century, many tall building designers still prefer to use structural steel (Fig. 2). Vertical movement (conveying) systems There is a chicken-and-egg question associated with the elevator: It would not have been practical to design buildings more than five or six floors in height if people were going to be required to use stairs, the historical method of vertical movement in building. Although Otis is credited with the invention of the elevator and was the founder of the company that still carries his name, his revolutionary invention was the safety latch which made the modern passenger elevator practical. None of the buildings in the 1893 Chicago Exposition had elevators, even though it was becoming common to design them into the office buildings that filled the voids left in the Chicago landscape by the great fire of 1871 (Fig. 3). The components of an elevator system are more than the cab, which is all that most people see in their daily rides. The most common

Author: John P. Eberhard, FAIA References: Elliott, Cecil D. 1991. Technics and Architecture: The Development of Materials and Systems for Buildings. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

119

9 History of building and urban technologies

Table 1. Historical overview

120

Historical examples of Urban Systems

Discovery or Primary Invention

Precursors to 2nd Generation

Second Generation of Urban Systems

masonry walls timber roofs arches & domes

smelting iron ore Bessemer Process for steel

cast iron (1813) wrought iron (1855) Eiffel Tower (1889)

STEEL STRUCTURES for buildings (1883) Home Insurance Bldg.

stairways ramps & pulleys

Safety latch for elevators/hoist (1853)

mechanical lifts hydraulic lifts Elisha Graves Otis

ELEVATOR Equitable Bldg. (1870)

daylight candles oil lamps

light bulb (1880) Thomas Edison electrical power

gas lights with piping from central station (1882)

ELECTRIC LIGHTS generators, transmission wiring and fixtures source

fire in the hearth fireplaces shady places

oil-burner (1868) gas burner (1902) air-conditioner (1932)

steam engine coal furnace ventilating fans

CENTRAL HEATING burners/ducts/controls refrigerants/condensers

privies and night soil scavengers slop jars

flushing valve and water closet (1778 to 1878)

water piping (1872) storm sewers (1875)

INDOOR PLUMBING toilet/water/sewer

messengers town crier mail

telephonics Alexander G. Bell basic patent (1876)

telegraph (1850) (Morse Code)

TELEPHONE switching centers phones and wires

oxen horseback horse & carriage

internal combustion Gottlieb Daimler patented (1885)

steam buggy (1865) electric car oil wells

AUTOMOBILE Benz (1893) Ford (1896)



Fig. 1. Building activity in the United States 1875-1932. (Journal, American Statistical Association. Elliott, 1991)

elevator installations of today are not much changed from the original Otis installations. Today there more sophisticated electronic controls are used, especially in very tall buildings, to provide more effective scheduling and maintenance information. Escalators (introduced in 1900) are used for moving large volumes of passengers up and down in the major entrances to large buildings. New concepts of vertical movement combined with horizontal movement will likely emerge in the 21st century, requiring architects to rethink the integration of vertical/horizontal movement systems into high-rise buildings.

Fig. 2. Steel skeleton separated from building skin in 1881

Fig. 3. Hydrolic elevator (Scientific American, 1899. Elliott. 1991) Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

121

9 History of building and urban technologies Lighting systems Daylight has always been the fundamental source of light for interior use in buildings, especially after glass for windows became common in the 17th century. (“Artificial lighting” or alternatives to daylighting techniques for seeing is technically known as a lamp). The earliest lamps were burning sticks or glowing coals held in braziers. Candles made of beeswax were used by the Romans. Candles made from animal fat have been used in Europe since the Middle Ages. By the 4th century BC in Greece, oil lamps were in general use. These were usually simple vessels made of stone, clay, bone, or shell in which a wick of flax or cotton was set. In the 18th century a Swiss chemist, Aime Argand, invented a lamp that used a tubular wick enclosed between two cylinders of metal (later replaced with a glass cylinder). As early as colonial times in America, wick lamps were fitted with screws for adjusting the flame.

Fig.4. Electric lights

With the introduction of illuminating gas early in the 19th century, a method of distribution of the gas within cities as well as a gas lamp became the dominant lighting system. With a feverish burst of inventions, including many electric light bulbs, the last years of the 19th century saw Edison’s lighting devices come to dominate how buildings would be lighted for all of the 20th century (Fig 4). The design of buildings with dense floor plans deemed practical for human activities—but which thus minimized or prohibited any use of natural daylight— began to emerge. The combination of steel structures, elevators, and electrical power linked to electrical lighting made tall buildings a possibility. Only towards the end of the 20th century have questions been widely recognized about depriving office workers of natural daylight (and ventilation), forcing a reconsideration of the dense office blocks of earlier years. Once introduced into the building, electrical systems made a range of other devices possible, including the late 20th century set of inventions utilizing electronics. Heating and cooling systems Perhaps the first form of shelter for humans was a cave with an open fire in the center for protection against the cold and from wild animals. One of the earliest devices for heating houses was the fireplace and/or a stove in which wood or coal could be burned. Many modern houses still have fireplaces valued for their psychological and esthetic satisfaction more than for their heating capacity. In warm climates, or at those times of the years when the weather is warm, buildings have historically been cooled with natural ventilation and various shading devices. During the 1970’s, when a major concern with energy conservation was in evidence, architects turned to historical models for natural ways of ventilation and shading to help avoid the large use of energy associated with modern cooling systems. Towards the latter part of the 20th century as oil and gas motors became replacements for earlier steam engines, these energy sources and their associated technologies began to find their way into heating

Fig. 5. Central heating system

122



systems for buildings. At the turn of the century, because it was plentiful and cheap and because air pollution was not yet a concern of urban dwellers, coal was the primary source of heat for central furnaces for warm air heating and boilers for hot water or steam distribution (Fig. 5). The logistics of mining and distributing coal has by the end of the 20th century largely been replaced by gas, oil and electrical sources of energy. The rise in electrical heating systems occurred at a time when natural gas was in short supply and when cooling systems seemed more easily designed around electrical methods. Plumbing systems Obtaining fresh water for drinking purposes is as old as human existence. Evidence of urban water supply systems can still be seen in ancient Knossos, Petra and Hydrabad. In Roman times an aqueduct, named El Puente, carried water from Spain’s Frio River to the city of Segovia. Built in the 1st century AD, the aqueduct runs both above and below ground and stretches for a total of 10 miles (16 km). These two tiers of arches reach a height of 93.5 feet (28.5 m). It was not until near the end of the 19th century that water for use in disposing of human wastes was seriously developed (Fig 6). As with other urban systems, there was no one invention nor a single event in history when the total system came into existence. The key invention was a flushing valve for the water closet (toilet) which worked well enough to allow city water authorities to allow them to be attached to water systems. Once this gap was bridged, the introduction of “indoor plumbing” into the house and commercial buildings spread at a reasonable rate. As late as 1940, however, cities the size of St. Louis, Missouri still had less than 50% of the housing units equipped with indoor toilets. A primary reason for this relatively slow utilization rate is the larger urban system of water supply and waste disposal associated with providing indoor plumbing. One hundred years after development of the water-flush toilet, concerns about water consumption, water body and aquifer pollution suggests the need for new technologies for water conservation and waste nutrient recovery.

Fig. 6. Indoor plumbing system

Communication systems The early telephones (shown in Fig. 7 with original Bell phone in the center) were derived from the basic patent Alexander Graham Bell obtained in 1876. While working on sound transmission for the deaf, he discovered that steady electric current can be altered to resemble the vibrations made by the human voice. Once the instrument was invented, an urban system of telephone switching centers, wires (originally strung along poles), relays, etc. had to be put in place. International calls became possible once a cable was laid along the ocean floor (about 1912). It can be argued that the modern office building was made possible by the telephone, connecting thousands of workers at their desks directly to other workers in all parts of the building, city, the country, and the world

Fig. 7. Telephone


123

9 History of building and urban technologies With the advent of the electronic era towards the end of the 20th century, a greatly expanded communications network was introduced by linking computer-based systems to phone systems and satellite transmission. While these advanced systems have done little to change the architectural shape of the city (in Western society), they have created new challenges for the design of office buildings and other facilities tied to electronic networks. Local area networks (LANS) have become so much in demand by modern organizations that buildings which cannot provide for them, either by access, clearances, increases in power capacity and similar opportunities for upgrading, are doomed to be abandoned or replaced. Personal transportation systems The internal combustion engine by Daimler is the primary invention leading to the automobile. Ford and Benz applied Daimler’s invention to a horseless carriage, and then went on to organize automobile production companies. They relied on others to find oil wells, develop petroleum products and distribute them as fuel and lubricants for the automobile.

Fig. 8. Freeway in the city

124


Designing and building roads (Fig 8) along which to operate the automobiles was also an important step in creating a personal means of transportation. In large cities the network of roads, parking spaces, service stations, and repair garages become complex systems. This single invention could be said to have for better or worse transformed the landscape of cities, regions and, in the case of the United States, an entire continent with the development of Interstate Highway system beginning in the late 1940s. The architectural design issues of large scale cities and the buildings which are central to their commercial and institutional facilities, are dependent on effective interfacing with the car and related personal transportation networks, as well as with the public transportation systems.

10

Construction materials technology 10

Construction materials technology L. Reed Brantley Ruth T. Brantley


125

10 Construction materials technology

126


Construction materials technology Construction materials technology 10 10

Summary: The principle materials of building technology are reviewed, with emphasis upon their chemical and physical properties and contemporary applications in modern construction. Definitions are provided along with important considerations of environmental health and safety.

Key words: building construction, concrete, glass, masonry, metals, plastics, polymers, sealants, wood. 1 Cement and concrete (See examples of materials in Figs 1-13) Concrete, used extensively in buildings, is one of the most complicated chemical and physical materials of construction, combining cement, water, and aggregates. A substance that forms a plastic paste when mixed with water, bonds to aggregates, and sets to form a solid material is known as a cementitious material. Common examples are slaked lime and portland cement, from which concrete is made.

proportions of the four main cementitious compounds in the various kinds of portland cement. When the cement particles are mixed with water, a series of changes occur. -

Water reacts with the surface of the cement particle, and the product forms a supersaturated solution from which a gel-like mass of fibrous crystals precipitates. This gelatinous coating around the particle acts like a barrier to seal off the particle from further reaction. However, “free” water slowly diffuses into the gel by osmosis (spontaneous dilution of the gel solution). This water reaches the unreacted surface of the particle and forms more hydrates. The gel swells as this process continues. Finally, the swollen gel ruptures and fills in the spaces between cement particles and aggregates to form a semisolid gel. This network of tiny crystals produces the initial set. The process takes about an hour for standard cement.

-

The crystals slowly interact and recrystalize into larger fibers to form a strong network that characterizes the hardened cement. This “final set” marking the beginning of the hardening process, usually starts about 10 hours after mixing with water.

-

The rate of hydration of cement is dependent upon the fineness of the clinker. The finer the cement particles, the more surface area there is for reaction with water. Therefore, the finer the cement is ground, the quicker the setting and stiffening occur. In practice, the hydration of the cement particle only penetrates about a fraction of the way into the surface. Experiments have shown that hardened concrete can be reground and used in place of fresh concrete a second time, and even a third time before the interior of the cement particle becomes completely hydrated. Could reusing old concrete be a solution to the enormous amounts destined for our overflowing municipal dumps?

Portland cement A patent for making portland cement from limestone was issued in 1824. It received its name from its resemblance to a building stone found on a small island off the coast of England. In preparation of portland cement, raw materials are crushed, mixed, and ground to prepare the desired proportion of lime, silica, alumina, and iron. There are four main chemical components of cement which are combined in different proportions to make up the five main types of portland cement. Normal portland cement, or type I. is still the standard cement in use. More specialized portland cements include type II, characterized by a more moderate heat of hydration during setting; type III, a high early-strength cement; type IV, low heat of hydration during setting; and type V, a sulfate-resisting cement for use in areas where high sulfate concentrations occur in soil or water. Specifications for these five portland cements are given by the American Society for Testing and Materials in standard ASTM C 150. Hydration, setting, and hardening: The action of water on cement can be better understood by starting with the action of water on plaster of paris, and on slaked lime as used in mortar and in whitewash. -

Setting of gypsum plaster: Setting of partially dehydrated calcium sulfate (plaster of paris) illustrates the setting and hardening by recrystallization.

-

Setting of lime: Lime is a general term used in industry to indicate either quicklime (calcium oxide) or slaked (hydrated) lime (calcium hydroxide). Slaked lime is used in stucco, mortar, and whitewash.

Setting and hardening of portland cement: The setting and hardening of portland cement is much more complicated, due to the different

Concrete Concrete consists of cement, water, sand, rock, and sand aggregates and admixtures. Admixtures are added during the mixing of the concrete to produce special properties. They can alter the setting, hardening, strength, and durability of the concrete. Some of the common admixtures provide water reduction and air entrainment.

Authors: L. Reed Brantley and Ruth T. Brantley Credits: This article is excerpted from Brantley and Brantley (1996) by permission of the publisher. The authors are indebted to the encouragement and guidance of Elmer E. Botsai, Professor and former Dean of the School of Architecture, University of Hawaii at Manoa. References: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103. Brantley, L. Reed and Ruth T. Brantley. 1996. Building Materials Technology: Structural Performance & Environmental Impact. New York: McGraw-Hill. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

127

10 Construction materials technology Curing the freshly placed concrete is an important factor in its strength and durability. Setting, hydration, and crystal-growth sequence should not be interrupted, particularly during the first 48 hours for type III early-setting portland cement. This is twice as long as required for general-purpose type I. The surface of the cement should never be allowed to dry, for this indicates a scarcity of water for the hydration process. If the surface becomes dry, water for the hydration process is insufficient and a serious decrease in the quality of the concrete will result. Frequent sprinkling may be needed. In hot, dry weather it may be necessary to leave the forms in place and cover exposed surfaces with a sheet of polyethylene or other suitable material. The smaller the water/cement ratio (increased cement) the higher the compressive strength of the concrete. Impurities in water can affect the strength of the concrete and its setting time, cause sulfate deterioration and efflorescence, and promote corrosion of reinforcing steel. A simple rule is that if the water is potable (drinkable), it is suitable for concrete. Fig. 1. Brick wall construction with terra cotta tilework. Troy, NY.

Porosity of concrete leads to both physical and chemical deterioration. Some porosity can be expected. Aggregates can be a major source of porosity if their size distribution is not uniform. If the aggregates are not distributed uniformly in size, the spaces between them leave voids that will fill with water and air. This will require excess cement paste to fill the voids in order to cement the particles together and maintain the strength of the concrete. For a better fit and optimum concrete strength, the ideal shape of the aggregates is cubical, flat, or elongated with a rough surface for good adhesion. They should not be rounded or smooth. Aggregates make up about 75 percent of concrete. Although thought of as an inexpensive filler, aggregates provide strength to the concrete since they are usually stronger than the cement holding them together. For best results, particles should be graded in size so the aggregates can fit closely together to form a strong, tightly packed structure. Admixtures are chemicals added to concrete to modify the physical properties. An admixture often affects more than one property, so side effects must be considered if they are used. For example, water-reducing agents increase workability and can act as set retarders. Water reducers can also increase the early strength of concrete.

Fig. 2. Adobe block and brick construction. Spanish Mission, Capistrano, CA.

High-range superplasticizer water reducers: The superplasticizer admixtures are also known as superfluidizers, super water reducers, and high-range water reducers. Their action is that of a surface-tension reducing agent (surfactant) that breaks up cement aggregates into smaller groups of suspended cement particles to make the cement mixture more fluid. This class of admixtures has been called superplasticizers because they increase the plasticity and workability of concrete mixes. Accelerators: In cold weather, accelerating admixtures help to restore more normal setting and early strength times. Accelerators compensate for the reduction in ambient temperature and the resulting slower rate of reaction. Early strength and set development do not ensure greater final strength. Other desirable properties may be reduced. A set retarder is an admixture that extends the workability and setting period of concrete. When working in hot climates, set retarders can compensate for the rapid setting due to the increase in temperature, but they are effective only during the first week of setting. Accelerators provide early strength for concrete. Water reducers and retarders contain similar ingredients and produce similar results. Air-entrainment agents: Entrainment agents, such as the surfactants, act as emulsifiers and foaming agents to improve the plasticity and workability of the water paste. They also reduce bleeding by stabilizing the gelatinous mixture.

128


Construction materials technology 10 Reinforced concrete Concrete can be reinforced with steel bars (re-bars) and with steel cables in prestressed concrete. Re-bars have lugs (deformations) at regular intervals to increase mechanical adhesion. It was once believed that concrete could protect steel from corrosion by keeping out moisture and oxygen. Instead, corrosion is retarded by the passivity of steel due to the alkalinity of the concrete. Prestressing concrete is a way to compensate for concrete’s low tensile strength. A beam is prestressed by stretching a high-tensile-strength cable down the length of a concrete form. Then the cable is put under tension and stretched by using jacks at either end. High-strength concrete is poured into the form around the cable. The concrete bonds to the cable as it hardens. When the jacks are removed, both the cable and the concrete beam remain under the amount of tension desired. Another method of forming prestressed concrete is to post-tension the cable. This requires the cable to be encased in a thin steel or paper tube (within the form) and anchored at the ends before the concrete fills the form. After the concrete has hardened, the cable can be more easily put under tension with jacks at the ends of the beam or structure. This can be done after the beam is in place on the work site. Finally the tube is filled with grout to complete the prestressed concrete beam.

Fig. 3. Serpentine brick wall. University of Virginia, Charlottesville, VA. Thomas Jefferson, Architect.

Polymer concrete Polymer concrete (portland cement replaced by a polymer) has a lower rate of water absorption, higher resistance to cycles of freezing and thawing, better resistance to chemicals, greater strength, and excellent adhesion qualities compared to most other building materials. The most commonly used resins (polyesters and acrylics) are mixed with the aggregate as a monomer with a cross-linking agent (a hardener) and a catalyst to reach full polymerization. Polymer concrete is usually reinforced with metal fibers, glass fibers, or mats of glass fiber. The use of polymer fibers (such as polypropylene) as a replacement for asbestos in cement has received much attention. Concrete: common problems and corrections Some of the common building problems related to concrete as listed here with their causes and suggestions for correction. •

Sulfate deterioration of concrete is caused by moisture and sulfate salts in the soil that is in contact with concrete foundations, floor slabs, and walls. Type V sulfate-resisting cement is made for this purpose. To correct the problem (if the soil cannot be kept away from the concrete), better drainage might keep the soil dry and the salts in solid, not solution, form.

•

Efflorescence is the appearance of an unsightly fluffy white crust on the surface of walls. It is caused by salts in solution (in the concrete, the stone, or the bricks) moving to the surface of an interior or exterior wall. As the water evaporates from the salt solution in dry weather, a loose mass of white, powdery salts remains. Some relief from efflorescence can be gained by treating the surface of the wall with a water repellent and sealing all cracks and joints to keep out rain.

•

Freeze-thaw cracks (forming in concrete in subfreezing weather) can be caused by concrete with a water/cement ratio that is too large. This can produce tiny crevices and voids around the aggregates, allowing penet≤ation of water into the concrete by winddriven rain. Tremendous forces, produced by the expansion of water as it freezes to form ice, cause spalls (flakes or chips) and cracks in the concrete. Correction requires waterproofing the surface of the concrete with a polymer-modified cement-based surface coating. Further protection could be gained by applying a protective coat of paint.

Fig. 4. Split oak rail fence. Smoky Mountains, TN.


129

10 Construction materials technology •

Corrosion of steel re-bars can cause cracks and rust stains to appear in the concrete.

•

Leaks in concrete roofs or parking decks are due to water penetrating the surface. A waterproof coating alone rarely works because the cracks continue to grow. A solution is to use epoxy in the clean cracks and to fill them with a flexible sealant material.

2 Masonry Historic cathedrals, stone bridges, and walls testify to the early development of stone masonry. The Romans are credited with perfecting the design of the large cathedral arches and domes. Wattle and daub walls of homes in Britain have been standing for centuries. Walls are constructed of interwoven willow wands filled with dung and mud and packed between timbers. Brick, also developed and used centuries ago, is one of our oldest human-made building materials. Modern masonry units may be defined as any type of small, solid, or hollow units of building material that are held together with mortar. These units usually include stone, cast stone, cement brick and concrete block, clay brick and tile, and glass blocks. Vital to the successful performance of each of these masonry unit systems is the selection of the proper mortar to hold the units together and keep out the weather. Since no machine has yet been invented to assemble the masonry units in place, the performance of the masonry structure depends on the quality of the mortar, the skill of the mason, and exposure to the environment. Severe environmental conditions, such as torrential rains and intense sunshine, require more careful design and higher-quality ingredients than do the more protected environments. This is especially true if these masonry structures are to withstand earthquakes or hurricanes.

Structural masonry Structural masonry is divided into load-bearing, non-load-bearing, and decorative veneers used on walls of buildings. Concrete masonry includes the assembly of walls of solid or hollow units. They may be reinforced or nonreinforced and interior or exterior walls. The walls may contain clay, tile, or glass units. -

Masonry units: Masonry units are composed of stone, cement, clay, or glass and are made in hollow or solid blocks. Clay bricks can be either load-bearing or non-load-bearing.

-

Concrete blocks: Concrete blocks can be solid or hollow, but the hollow 8- by 8- by 16- in. (20- by 20- by 40-cm) blocks are the most common. They can be load-bearing or non-load-bearing. The three types of blocks are classified as being of normal weight, medium weight, and lightweight, depending on the weight of the aggregate contained.

Clay masonry units Some of the most durable building materials are made of clay: bricks, ceramic tile, and terra cotta. In contrast to the concrete masonry units, which depend on the ingredients reacting with water, clay masonry units are heated until the clay melts and flows over the surface of the aggregates. This bonds the aggregates together and forms an impervious, vitreous ceramic material with good compressive strength. -

Clay bricks: The type of clay selected and its processing determine the structure and characteristics of clay units in building structures. Most bricks and structural tiles are made by the stiff-mud process with 12 to 15 percent moisture content providing the needed plasticity. Clay bricks must be laid in place with care to obtain a secure bond with the mortar. These bricks, unlike concrete masonry units, are not delivered at the job site conditioned to the humidity of the surroundings. They absorb water from the mortar by capillary attraction and, thus, dehydrate the mortar. To avoid this problem, the bricks are soaked with water and left to dry to the ambient humidity conditions.

-

Clay tile: Clay tiles are often used as facing that is anchored to the structural steel framing of the building. Although its popularity has diminished, the use of clay tile for restoration purposes continues. In addition to its use for load-bearing and non-load-bearing wall structures, it is used for floors and interior walls.

-

Terra cotta tile: The term terra cotta stands for “fired earth.” Although terra cotta tile has been used for centuries, dating back to the days of the Romans, it is no longer popular and is used mainly in restorations.

Masonry mortar Less than 1 percent of the weight of masonry structures consists of the mortar holding them together. Cement, hydrated lime, aggregates, and water are the necessary ingredients that make this feat possible. Four ingredients are essential to the satisfactory performance of mortar. Cement provides mortar with the necessary strength; hydrated lime provides the elasticity and water retention so necessary for workability; sand provides durability and strength in addition to acting as a filler; and an optimum amount of water is necessary for good bonding, plasticity, and workability. Selecting the correct ingredients is important for the optimum performance of the mortar. Physical properties of mortar: In some ways the properties of mortar are more critical than those for concrete. Compressive strength is one of the main assets of cured concrete. In addition to compressive strength, mortar must have adequate bond strength, shear strength, and durability. Successful performance depends on its workability and its skillful application. Workability, one of the most essential properties of mortar, determines the success of its application. Mortar must have a strong bonding strength, which requires that the mortar be able to flow into crevices and small voids. Thickness for optimum bond strength: A general rule for an adhesive is: the thinner the layer of the bonding mixture, the stronger the bond. It is best to use only enough mortar to fill the irregularities in the surface of the materials being held together. Most adhesive failures are due to flaws or imperfections in the adhesive layer itself. Grout masonry: After a masonry structure is completed, grout is used to fill in the remaining crevices and joints. Grout differs from masonry mortar in its fluidity since it is poured and not spread into place with a trowel. Masonry grout is essentially composed of portland or blended cement, fine or coarse sand, water, and a small amount (if any) of calcium hydroxide.

130


Stone masonry Stones that qualify as building materials can be classified as granite, limestone, coral, sandstone, slate, marble, and lava. These can vary greatly in compressive strength—between varieties of stones and between stones from the same source. This is due to the complexity of their compositions and wide variations in the percentage of mineral components. -

Granite, used as a building material since the beginning of civilization, is a visibly crystalline igneous rock with granular texture and composed of quartz, feldspar, mica, and hornblende.

-

Limestone, a sedimentary rock composed mainly of calcium carbonate or magnesium carbonate, is durable, workable, and distributed throughout the earth’s crust. Fossilized remains of animals (fish, shells, coral) and plants are evident in most limestone.

-

Travertine, a form of limestone found in deposits at the mouth of a hot spring, can be polished and often resembles marble.

-

Coral limestone, composed of reef-forming coral often of great extent, consists chiefly of calcareous skeletons of corals, coral

Construction materials technology 10 sands, and the solid limestone resulting from their compaction. This coral limestone forms on the ocean floor bordering the shores of islands and lagoons. Plentiful, inexpensive, and used often in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries in the Hawaiian Islands, coral is now quarried very carefully due to ecological concerns and has become expensive. -

Sandstone, a sedimentary rock composed of individual sand or quartz grains held together by cementitious material, contains a high degree of iron oxide which gives it a red or brown color.

-

Slate, a group name for various fine-grained rocks derived from mudstone, siltstone, and high-silica clays and shale sedimentary deposits, is characterized by planes which easily split into thin sheets and lines. Slate roofing tiles are used extensively in Europe.

-

Marble, a metamorphic crystalline limestone composed of calcite or dolomite, is highly polished for commercial uses. Marble has been used for structural purposes throughout the centuries. In modern practice, marble is used as a beautiful interior and exterior veneer over a structural framework.

-

3 Metals It is not surprising that metals are widely used in all types of construction. Aluminum, the most abundant metallic element, makes up an estimated 8 percent of the earth’s crust. Iron is in second place with about 5 percent. Metallic iron, alloyed with a small amount of nickel, is found in meteorites that strike the earth. This natural source of iron, when fashioned into tools and weapons, influenced the development of early civilizations. Iron continues to play a vital part in our lives. Metals can be divided into two types: ferrous and nonferrous. Iron and its many steel alloys are ferrous metals; aluminum, copper, and zinc are some of the common nonferrous metals. Metals are typically so malleable that they can be hammered into thin sheets and are so ductile that they can be drawn into thin wires. Iron and its alloys The two carbon steels austenite and ferrite have quite different physical properties, such as ductility, strength, and corrosion resistance. -

Austenite formation temperature: Austenite, an alloy of carbon in iron, is a solid solution of carbon in gamma iron facecentered cubic crystals (fcc). The maximum solubility of carbon in this fcc iron structure is 2 percent. Austenite, ductile enough to be cold-worked to increase its hardness, is nonmagnetic and has a larger electrical resistance and thermal expansion coefficient than ferrite.

-

Ferrite formation temperature: Ferrite is a solid solution of carbon in the bcc (body-centered cubic crystal) structure of alpha iron. Ferrite is more ductile than austenite and is easily coldworked. Chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, and silicon, by substitution, form alloys that are much used in the building industry.

Lava is a crystalline or glassy igneous rock formed by the cooling of molten rock from volcanic vents and fissures. This rock can be very dense and heavy, or light in weight and bubbly.

Glass blocks Produced in a variety of sizes, colors, and surface textures, glass blocks may be solid or hollow. In addition to their aesthetic appearance, their high transition of light somewhat reduces the need for interior illumination during daylight hours. The strength of glass blocks is much lower than that of most masonry units. Glass blocks are not intended to be used as load-bearing units. Hollow glass blocks can be used as thermal and sound barriers. Plaster Applied by hand or by machinery, plaster refers to the finished cementitious coating used on the exterior and interior walls of buildings to provide a smooth, finished appearance. Composed of cement and a plaster-grade aggregate—and, as an option, slaked lime—plaster should have a consistency appropriate to its method of application, have good durability, and withstand most kinds of weather. As in mortar, the slaked lime provides plasticity and the needed workability. An external cement plaster, called stucco, is much used in mild climates. Plaster is as strong and durable as concrete and can be considered a modified form of concrete mortar. To avoid the need for papering or painting, the plaster may contain a mineral pigment or have a textured surface. Masonry: common problems and their prevention Structural failure does not always mean that the cement must have greater strength; more often failure occurs in the mortar. Failures occur when stresses converging on a weak point in the structure exceed the strength of the material in a flawed region. In other words, structural failures usually occur at a much lower stress than the ultimate strength of the material. Thus correction would require that the excess mortar be reduced. This principle applies to all types of cementitious adhesives. Environmental hazards: Although stone, baked clay products, and cement are some of the most durable building materials, even they can deteriorate in contact with the chemicals in the soil or desert sand and moisture. The oxides of nitrogen from automobile exhaust, smog, and “vog” (volcanic emissions) and the industrial smokestack emissions of oxides of sulfur carried on the smoke particulates all become acids. In the presence of moisture in the clouds, acid rain results. This acid rain not only kills trees, it also reacts with and slowly destroys the surfaces of our buildings.

Stainless-steel alloys There are three main classes of stainless steels: austenite, ferrite, and martensite. The stainless-steel alloys differ in composition, metallurgical structure, workability, magnetic nature, and corrosion resistance. Austenitic stainless steels of the 18-8 type are most often used when highly corrosion-resistant decorative and nonmagnetic properties are required. They are the most ductile of the stainless steels and are used to form tubes and sheets. Ferritic stainless steels contain chromium but no nickel. Their excellent corrosion resistance explains their use in chemical plants. Martensitic stainless steels are formed by the addition of chromium and can have up to 1 percent carbon. Common nonferrous alloys - Aluminum metal does not occur in nature. It is made by the electrolysis of a molten mixture of bauxite (aluminum oxide ore) and cryolite (sodium aluminum fluoride). In addition to its light weight, it has moderate resistance to corrosion due to the rapid formation of a thin, transparent, tightly adherent aluminum oxide coating. Thicker oxide coatings are produced by an electrolytic process known as anodizing. The large amount of electric energy required for the production of aluminum makes it a prime candidate for recycling. -

Copper and its alloys: Copper is used extensively in the pure state and in alloys. In its purest form it is used as a conductor of electricity in the electric wiring of homes and buildings. As an alloy, copper is often used for roof gutters and water pipes because of its excellent resistance to corrosion. Copper is very ductile and can be drawn into wires and extruded into tubing. It can be cold-worked to increase its strength. However, as in the practice with aluminum, it is usually alloyed with numerous other elements if more strength is needed.

-

Copper alloys: Copper-zinc alloys are known as brasses. Coppertin, or true bronzes, are another well-known class of copper alloys. The presence of tin contributes more corrosion resistance, Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

131

10 Construction materials technology hardness, and abrasion (wear) resistance than the softer brass alloys of copper-zinc. There are a variety of copper-nickel alloys that include Monel, a highly corrosion-resistant alloy. -

Fig. 5. Taliesen West. Scottsdale, AZ. Masonry construction. Frank Lloyd Wright, Architect.

High-performance metal composites: Additional strength can be obtained in an alloy by forming a high-performance fiber-reinforced composite. Fibers such as graphite, silicon carbide, silicon nitride, boron nitride, and alumina are common. The need of the aerospace industry to find lighter and stronger metallic systems has spurred research and produced exciting results in advanced materials engineering for potential building applications.

Metals: building problems and amelioration Metallic corrosion can be kept to a minimum by using certain precautions. Cavities, crevices, surface irregularities, and contact between dissimilar metals are to be avoided in the design of exposed surfaces. Metallic surfaces must be accessible for inspection and treatment. To make full use of corrosion technology, preventive measures should be incorporated at the design stage. This is vitally important if there is exposure to a marine environment, high humidity, or corrosive chemical emissions. When using corrosion-resistant materials, allowance should be made for the synergistic effects of unusual metal stress, flexure, and fatigue on corrosion. Avoiding the expense of specialty materials by designing to the maximum stress level is a dangerous temptation. Adequate drainage is essential in the design of flat roofs, around metal joints, or in other areas that can collect water and dirt which will cause early corrosion or related failure. Poor welding practices can destroy the corrosion resistance of specialty alloys. Methods of corrosion protection can be grouped under chemical treatment, electrochemical prevention, and environmental protection. The choice of method must be made on an individual basis, depending on the situations encountered. (See Brantley and Brantley 1996 for a complete discussion of corrosion and its mitigation and “Corrosion of Metals” in Chapter B3 of this Volume).

Fig. 6. Hartford Seminary. Ironwork and enamel panel construction. West Hartford, CT. Richard Meier, Architect.

4 Wood Wood is one of the oldest building materials. In dry climates it is extremely durable. However, in humid environments wood is attacked by bacteria, fungi, and insects as part of nature’s essential recycling process. Wood for industrial use, including building applications, falls into two classes: softwoods and hardwoods. Softwoods are from coniferous trees, namely, pine, spruce, fir, hemlock, cedar, redwood, and cypress. Hardwoods are dense, close-grained, and from deciduous trees, such as oak, walnut, cherry, maple, teak, and mahogany. Hardwoods have many slender elongated cells and grain irregularities that make them harder to work or split. The difference between softwood and hardwood is not so much in the hardness as in the degree of difficulty of working. (See Brantley and Brantley 1996 for a discussion of causes and prevention measures of wood destruction and deterioration due to moisture and insects damage and “Termite Control” in Chapter B1 of this Volume.) The chemical composition of wood is complex, but the most important ingredients are cellulose, pentosan, and lignin. Cellulose, obtained from wood and cotton, is a high-molecular-weight carbohydrate. Pentosan, a complex carbohydrate by-product of wood, is used as an animal food. It is a natural polymer of pentose, which is a five-carbon atom sugar. Lignin makes up about one-fourth of the composition of wood. A by-product of the papermaking industry, it is a phenylpropane polymer and serves as a binder to hold the cellulose fibers together. Structural panel composites In an effort to conserve and use the limited supply of timber more efficiently, plywood, hardboard, and particleboard panels have be-

132


Construction materials technology 10 come well established in their use in the building industry. Plywood fills a need for thin wood panels with more structural strength and less warping than a solid sheet of lumber of similar thickness. Hardboard and particleboard panels are scrap lumber, shavings, and fibers recycled into composite panels. -

-

5

Plywood: When hardwood is soaked with water or steamed, it can be cut into thin sheets called veneer facing. After drying and pressing flat, the sheets of hardwood veneer can be glued to enclose sheets of softwood cores. Hardwood veneer plywood is suitable for use as paneling and as furniture. Softwood, cut into thin veneer sheets and glued together as three or more sheets make an economical plywood with improved dimensional stability, stiffness, and strength. The strength of the composite, with the grain of each ply alternating at right angles to the ply above and below, makes high-grade plywood superior to most metals in strengthto-weight ratio. Some of the advantages of plywood, compared to the wood it came from, are that it has a lower expansion coefficient and less tendency to warp, is stiffer and stronger, and does not split easily. Particleboard: The properties and performance of particleboard depend on the orientation of the particles, their nature, the kind of resin, and the amount of adhesive used to bond the particles together. Particleboard is known by many other names, such as composition board, chipboard, flakeboard, waferboard, and oriented standard board (OSB). This economical product, made by sealing a core of shredded wood chips, fibers, or particles between veneer facings, uses waste wood and small scraps of low-grade lumber. Some of the names more accurately describe the composition of the board.

compromise of fibrous and elastomeric properties. To be flexible instead of brittle like glass, the polymer must be used above its glasstransition temperature. This temperature is more dependent on chain structure, freedom of chain movement, stiffness, and interchain bonding than it is on molecular weight. For example, polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, and poly (vinyl chloride) are brittle and have a low impact strength at ambient temperatures. Plastics are an important part of our lives, replacing metals, glass, ceramics, and other common building materials. Indeed, the volume used notably exceeds that of metals (Table 1). Sheet plastic is an important illustration of the replacement of glass where a nearly unbreakable, shatterproof, transparent light-weight material is needed. Such uses include glazing of windows and skylights with optional features of solar and glare control. Exterior uses include enclosures of elevated walkways between buildings. Interior uses include display windows, curtain walls, and space dividers. Sheets of acrylic or polycarbonate plastic are made by cell casting or by a continuous process. Tinted, mirrorized, and hollow-core acrylic sheets are also made in limited sizes and thicknesses. Continuous castsheet plastic is made by pouring a catalyzed liquid monomer onto a continuously moving stainless-steel sheet belt and polymerizing the plastic as it passes through an oven. This continuous sheet is rolled up around a reel. Acrylics and polycarbonates are unique building materials because of their long-term resistance to weather without a significant deterioration in appearance or properties. Polycarbonate has phenomenal impact resistance, which remains higher than that of many other transparent plastics such as poly (vinyl chloride), cellulose acetate butyrate, and polystyrene.

Polymers and plastics

Polymers Polymers with different structures and properties exist even though they share the same chemical elements in the same proportions by weight. Rubber occurs as a natural polymer. Cellulose nitrate (celluloid), one of the first synthetic plastics, was made by treating cellulose fibers (from cotton or wood) with nitric acid. Polymers are of interest in construction materials technology because of the unique chemical and physical properties. Physical properties of polymers: Polymers can be made easily to have unique physical properties. These properties include a characteristic glasstransition temperature, plasticity when warmed, a large thermal expansion compared to metals, visoelasticity, and high permeability to some vapors and gases. These properties provide special roles for polymers for filling and joining building materials, such as structural dampers. Coefficient of expansion: Organic polymers have larger thermal expansion coefficients than metals or other building materials. The thermal expansion coefficients of linear polymers are about twice those of cross-linked polymers, which in turn are about twice those of aluminum or glass. To better match the expansion of polymers as they warm, inorganic fillers are used. Most common fillers are powdered silica, aluminum, and aluminum oxide. Besides providing a better match of expansion coefficients, fillers can provide corrosion resistance, shear and tensile strength, and reduction in gas and vapor permeability.

Table 1. Plastic as a building material

Type of plastic

Applications

Acrylic Acrylonitrile Polybutylene terephthalate Polycarbonate

Glazing, lighting fixtures Window frames Countertops, sinks Flat sheets, windows, skylights Piping Roofing panels Insulation, sheathing Insulation, roofing systems Molding, siding, window frames Countertops

Polyethylene Polyphenylene oxide Polystyrene Polyurethane Poly (vinyl chloride) Urea formaldehyde

Plastics Some selected monomer combinations produce polymers with the physical properties needed for elastomers, fibers, or plastics more easily than others. Such properties can be built into almost any polymer. Plastics are organic compounds that, in some stage of formation, can be shaped by flow and can be molded. Their structure and high molecular weight give them unusual properties. Plastics need to have a Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

133


Table 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

Chemical manufacturers and distributors are required to provide material safety data sheets (MSDS) to consumers and to put warning labels on their products. The MSDS on a product should provide information on the chemical and physical hazards of the material. However, many MSDSs are incomplete and lack accurate information. Trace amounts of chemicals are not required to be reported. The MSDS should be used as a guide only, and if more detailed information is needed, the manufacturer can be contacted directly. Compare several products before making a decision. Sections of the MSDS and the information they should provide include:

Natural and synthetic rubber Natural and synthetic rubbers are examples of elastomeric substances that recover fully when stretched to twice their length. Examples are butyl, neoprene, nitrile, and polysulfide rubbers. They are used to modify thermosetting polymers, improving their resistance to peel and fatigue. Natural rubber is a linear polymer of isoprene obtained as latex from the rubber tree. Synthetic rubbers include polybutadiene, made from the monomer butadiene, and a chlorinated derivative of butadiene, called chloroprene, which is used to make neoprene rubber. Adhesives The development of synthetic resins with superior properties has resulted in the increased use of adhesives in the construction industry. Adhesives have an advantage over rivets and bolt fasteners by distributing stress over larger areas of a joint. The important physical properties of adhesives are cohesive strength, adherence, fluidity, and wettability of the substrate.

1.

Chemical identity and manufacture information

2.

Hazardous ingredients and identity information

3.

Physical and chemical characteristics

4.

Fire and explosion hazard data

5.

Reactivity data

6.

Health hazard and medical treatment information

Health hazards Before using any product, ask for the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and read it (Table 2). You should know the chemicals you are using and what precautions to take to prevent health and environmental problems connected with the product.

7.

Precautions for safe handling and use

-

8.

Control measures to avoid overexposure

Sulfuryl fluoride, used in termite fumigation, is toxic by inhalation with a very low threshold limit value (TLV).

-

Most polymers are made from toxic monomers. When polymers are heated, especially linear polymers, they decompose to release their toxic monomers. If polymeric materials are disposed of by incineration, the noxious gases are lung and eye irritants and are toxic if inhaled over extended periods of time.

-

Polyurethane foam burns readily to produce hydrogen cyanide (a toxic gas) along with a dense, black smoke. Some polymers, such as phenol formaldehyde resins used in wallboards and carpets, are suspected of releasing formaldehyde by slow decomposition at room temperature. Over an extended period of time, formaldehyde can be a serious health hazard. When considering toxic substances, the length of time exposed as well as the concentration of the gas are both of vital importance.

-

Urea, melamine, and phenol formaldehyde resins are much used in industrial adhesives. Their slow decomposition at ambient temperature releases formaldehyde gas into the air. Formaldehyde, toxic by inhalation with a 1-part-per-million threshold limit value, is an irritant and a carcinogen. Epoxy resins are much used in the building industry because of their outstanding bond strength and durability. Epoxy adhesives have such a short shelf life (must be used a few minutes after mixing the ingredients) that most of them are marketed in two parts and are mixed just before using. Vapors in the uncured state are a strong irritant and cause severe dermatitis.

-

Most solvents are highly flammable and have a low flash point (ignition temperature). Long-time exposure to low concentrations of toxic vapors and carcinogens is of increasing concern to the public.

-

A good rule to remember: if you can smell a chemical, you should avoid exposure to it.

Table 3. Plastic recycling information

Number/Symbol 1 PET

Name

Polyethylene teraphthalate

Soft-drink bottles, microwave foodbags and trays, packing film.

2 HDPE High-density polyethylene

Trash bags, milk cartons, soap and bleach bottles, pipes and molded fittings.

3V

Poly (vinyl chloride)

4 LDPE Low-density polyethylene

5 PP

6 PS

134

Common use

Polypropylene

Polystyrene

Plastic wrap for meats, cookingoil bottles, conduits, plumbing pipes, siding, gutters. Grocery store vegetable and food-wrap. Wire and cable coatings, insulation. Packaging film, housewares, auto parts, air filters. Foamed packaging and insulation, refrigerator doors, air-conditioner cases, radio / TV cabinets.


Recycling of plastics A commendable step in the sorting of plastics has been the general acceptance of a code for plastics manufacturers. The code is embossed on each plastic article sold. Two groups that have pioneered this system of labeling plastics are the Society of Plastics Industry and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM D 1971). Table 3 provides a summary of the common types of plastics, their identification numbers, and their symbols.

Construction materials technology 10 6

Sealants

Adhesives and sealants are usually discussed together, but there are differences. Adhesives are intended to hold surfaces together; sealants are intended to exclude or contain substances. In surface preparation, formulation, and application, adhesives and sealants have much in common with one another and with paints. Sealants must have low viscosity so that they can be extruded or poured, yet they must harden to form a bond with the substrate, not flow under stress, and not crack or leak. The purpose of a sealant is to prevent the passage of air, water, and heat through the joints and seams on the exterior of buildings. The movement capability of a sealant in a joint is one of the most important properties to evaluate when determining expected performance. This capability is the maximum extension or compression (compared to its original dimension when installed) that a sealant can make without experiencing bond failure. The movement capability is a unique parameter of the sealant that involves many of its physical properties. Movement capability is rated as + - 5 percent, + - 12.5 percent, + - 25 percent, or + - 50 percent. The plus indicates the maximum extension; the maximum compression is indicated by the minus sign.

Fig. 7. Free University of Berlin. Demountable concrete and steel panel construction. Shadrach Woods of Candilis, Josic, Woods, Architects.

Sealant types Introduced as the first elastomeric sealant for use in modern curtainwall construction, polysulfides easily replaced oil-based caulks and were an immediate success. However, with the discovery of even higher-performance sealants, the popularity and use of polysulfides has declined. -

Oil-based caulks: Oil-based caulking compounds are prepared from a variety of natural oils, such as linseed oil. They may contain fillers, catalysts, solvents, and plasticizers.

-

Polysulfide sealants: Polysulfide sealants, based on a form of rubber, are prepared by pouring dichloroethylformal into sodium polysulfide (a solution of sulfur in sodium sulfide) in the presence of an emulsifying agent. They are purchased in two parts and cure when mixed because of the lead-dioxide catalyst in one of the separate containers.

-

Butyl sealants: Because of their movement capability, butyl sealants rapidly replaced the polysulfide sealants when butyl rubber became available in the 1950s. Low-cost butyl sealants have good stability and are resistant to water and organic solvents. One of the properties of butyl sealants that makes them superior to the polysulfides and competitive with the acrylic sealants is their + 12.5 percent movement capability. These butyl sealants have good water resistance and good adhesion formulation. Their stickiness, until they skin over, causes them to pick up dust from the air. They become stiff in cold weather and soft in hot weather.

-

Acrylic sealants: The acrylics are water emulsions of a formulated acrylic in a small amount of water with detergent and an emulsifying agent. Acrylics have good bonding ability and adhere to a wide variety of surfaces. The maximum movement capability of acrylic sealants is + 12.5 percent of the joint width. However, loss of water over a period of time causes these sealants to harden and lose some of their moderate movement capability. They are somewhat flexible, but have poor elastic recovery.

-

Urethane sealants: Urethane sealants rank second among the sealants used in industry. A chief component is a polyurethane. Twocomponent urethane sealants require the thorough mixing of two packages.

-

Silicone sealants: Silicone sealants rank first among the sealants used in industry and are most used in high-rise buildings. Their high performance, resistance to low temperatures, high ozone re-

Fig. 8. House. Amazon rain forest tradition (reconstructed at Fairchild Gardens, Coral Gables, FL). Demountable hardwood, bamboo, and reed construction.

Fig. 9. Crystal Palace. Demountable glass, wood and cast iron structure.


135

10 Construction materials technology sistance, good adhesion to surfaces, and very high movement capability continue to make them the favorite product, regardless of high cost. Silicone sealants cure by reacting on contact with the moisture in the air to form acetic acid, which provides their characteristic odor. The usual formulations of silicone sealants provide long service in exposure to harsh environments, good stability, high peel and tear resistance, and low shrinkage and weight loss. Silicones have a natural resistance to weathering due to the stability of the silicone polymer. They have set another record with the maximum movement capability increased to + 100 percent extension and - 50 percent compression. Health hazards of sealants The solvents used in sealants may include chlorinated hydrocarbons (toxic to the liver) and aromatic solvents (such as benzene and toluene) that are carcinogenic. The amines used as curing agents for the epoxides may cause dermatitis of the hands and face and, if inhaled, serious respiratory problems.

Fig. 10. Interior detailing of concrete form joints. Salk Institute, La Jolla, CA. Office of Jonas Salk. Louis Kahn, Architect.

Most polymers are made from toxic monomers. When polymers are heated in a fire, especially linear polymers, they decompose to release their monomers. Polyurethane foam burns readily to produce hydrogen cyanide (a toxic gas) along with a dense, black smoke. Some polymers such as phenol formaldehyde, which is used in wallboard and carpets, are suspected of releasing formaldehyde by slowly decomposing at room temperature. Over an extended period, formaldehyde may be a serious health hazard. If polymeric materials are disposed of by incineration, the noxious gases are respiratory irritants and are toxic if inhaled over extended periods. Because burning materials often emit caustic and deadly gases, more deaths from fires are caused by smoke inhalation than by burns. 7 Glass One of the oldest building materials, glass dates back 5000 years to our earliest recorded history. The first known producers of glass were the Egyptians; then production moved to Venice. The invention of the glass blower’s pipe in the first century BC allowed glass to be heated to a higher temperature and then blown and shaped. Glass formation The conventional method of making glass is to cool a molten mixture of silicates so rapidly that it does not have time to crystallize. This method of formation is the reason why glass is known as an undercooled liquid. By using modern techniques, glass can be formed by a wide variety of methods, such as vapor condensation, precipitation from solution, cooling molten mixtures under high pressure, and highenergy radiation of crystals. Consequently, the definition of a glass has been modified by some scientists to describe its characteristic properties rather than its method of formation. In addition to the usual properties of solids, such as rigidity, hardness, and brittleness, these properties include transparency, high viscosity, and lack of an ordered large-scale crystalline structure.

Fig. 11. Interior detailing of wood joinery. Hiroshi Ohi, Architect.

Thus, the ASTM definition of glass is, “An inorganic mixture that has been melted and cooled to a rigid condition without crystallizing.” Sheet glass is prepared by molten glass passing between water-cooled rollers as it cools. The surface roughness can be removed by grinding and polishing to make plate glass. However, this process has largely been replaced by the float glass process, in which the molten glass flows from the furnace so that it floats along the surface of molten tin. Kinds of glass The most common commercial use of glass is the manufacture of glass containers. Next in importance is glass used in windows for buildings and automobiles. The two main types of industrial glass in common use are soda-lime (soft) glass and borosilicate glass. These are clear, hard, brittle amor-

136


Construction materials technology 10 phous solids. Soda-lime glass, the most common, consists of a basic mixture of sand, soda ash, and lime. The addition of small amounts of magnesium oxide reduces its tendency to crystallize, whereas a small amount of alumina increases its durability. -

Plate glass: Plate glass has the same composition as window glass (soda-lime silica) and differs from it only in the method of manufacture. The differences are first, the longer time of annealing (3 or 4 days), which eliminates the distortion and strain effects of rapid cooling, and second, the intensive grinding and polishing, which remove local imperfections and produce a bright, highly reflective finish.

-

Photosensitive glass: By incorporating tiny crystals of chlorides of copper, silver, or gold into a molten glass, brief exposure to sunlight produces a temporarily darkened glass as the chloride is decomposed to form the metal and chlorine. However, unlike the latent image formed by light on silver halides suspended in gelatin in a photographic film, the chlorine atom has nothing to combine with chemically inside the glass. Therefore, the metal and the chlorine reform as a colorless halide when the glass is no longer exposed to light, making it suitable for indoor-outdoor dark glasses. Safety glass: When broken, glass has a tendency to form long cracks and large fragments with razor like edges, even when annealed (heat-treated to remove internal strains). Specially manufactured to avoid flying fragments, safety glass is made by introducing a wire or plastic composite or by tempering, thereby greatly reducing the size of the glass fragments.

-

-

Wired glass: Wired glass is a type of safety glass with a wire framework designed to reduce the danger of flying glass. Although this glass is no stronger than the same glass without a wire mesh, the wire not only retards the extension of cracks but holds the fragments together to keep them from flying into long, jagged slivers.

-

Tempered glass: Glass is tempered (toughened) by reheating it in its finished shape at 1202F (650˚C) until it becomes soft. By cooling rapidly both sides of the glass at the same time with jets of air or by immersion (quenching) in a bath of oil, both sides of the glass are given a permanent compressive stress without stressing the still fluid interior of the glass. Tempered glass is reported to shatter spontaneously, but this is rare. Extensive research has provided only speculation as to the cause. Some of the more plausible reasons are the presence of impurities such as nickel sulfide “stones,” faulty tempering, faulty glazing installations, accumulation of scratches, and excessive solar radiation stress. The safety features of tempered glass easily outweigh any problems. Since a mass of tempered glass chips falling from a height could be dangerous, precautions should be considered. For example, if used above ground level in double-glazed (insulating glass) windows, tempered glass might be limited to use as the inside panel. Or the windows could be recessed to provide a ledge to catch any falling glass. Or the ground directly below could be a landscaped area rather than a busy passageway.

-

Laminated glass: Laminated glass is a type of safety glass. It consists of a thin sheet of plastic between two sheets of thin glass. The sheet of plastic needs to be a clear and tear-resistant film, such as polyvinyl butyral, which is then heat-sealed under pressure between the glass sheets to form a unit.

-

Insulated glass: An insulated-glass window assembly consists of two sheets of glass separated by an air space and sealed together into a unit. The air between the two is confined in place by a sealant. The purpose of this air space is to reduce the flow of heat energy entering or leaving the building through the glass. By insulating the inner sheet of glass, this glass is kept from being chilled below the dew point of the air inside the building, thus preventing it from fogging over.

Fig. 12. Coral limestone steps, Viscaya, Miami.

Fig. 13. Marble wall, Vietnam Memorial, Washington, DC. Maya Lin, Architect.


137


138


-

Solar-control glass: Solar radiation passes through glass easily. Coming through windows, it overheats the interiors of buildings during the hot season of the year, causing an energy load on an air-conditioning system. During its multiple reflections around the interior of the building, this radiant energy is converted into thermal (heat) energy. This process is the familiar greenhouse effect. These are several methods being used to prevent this heat buildup and glare.

-

Tinted glass: Tinting window glass is another way to insulate the interior of a building from solar radiation and glare. Glass can be body-tinted or surface-tinted. Gray and bronze body-tinted glass 1/4 in. (6 mm) thick lets through about half the incident solar energy, including the same fraction of the visible light. By contrast, the same thickness of body-tinted green glass lets through only about half the solar energy and about three-fourths of the visible light. There is little difference in the absorption of solar energy. The amount of visible light absorbed depends on the color.

-

Coated glass: Another way to keep solar radiation from passing through the glass into the building is to use glass that is coated on one side with a film of indium tin oxide (ITO). The coatings are available as films deposited directly on the glass or as a plastic film which can be laminated to glass.

-

Structural glazing: The concept of using adhesives in structural glazing originated when accelerated weatherometer tests of silicone sealants exposed to water and ultraviolet light predicted their long-term performance. These results encouraged some leading engineers and architects to look on silicone sealants as glazing adhesives that could tolerate full exposure to the environment. After using silicone adhesives successfully to cement glass store fronts and first-floor windows in place, its use was expanded to windows in high-rise buildings.

Intelligent building systems 11

1

Intelligent building systems 11 Jong-Jin Kim


139

11 Intelligent building systems

140


Intelligent building systems Intelligent building systems 11 11

Summary: Intelligent building systems define an approach to building design emphasizing integration of electronic innovations and related technologies, including structure, systems, services and management. Design considerations include building infrastructure to accommodate telecommunication, daylighting, lighting, HVAC systems, conveying systems, and numerous options for security, fire safety, operations controls and monitoring.

Key words: Intelligent building, lighting, office automation, telecommunication infrastructure, workstation. The concept of intelligent buildings has emerged from the increasing utilization of electronic technologies in building systems controls and operations. Advancing computer and electronic technologies have opened the way for innovations in a variety of building systems. A number of building products with automatic features have been developed. Electronic building systems and automated building components have been installed in recently constructed buildings. All buildings constructed today are likely to be equipped with some degree of advanced technologies that were not available in the past. The spread of electronic telecommunication and office technologies has changed work-patterns in buildings. Modern work environments require diverse information services and accommodate emerging office technologies, including access to telecommunication networks and electronic office equipment, necessitating a new design approach that integrates electronic controls and capabilities and also provides flexibility in accommodating future expansion and office equipment. Although technology is a primary agent for these changes, the capacity for automation and intelligence system responses in buildings cannot be achieved solely by the application of technologies. Technology in the end is only as useful as the choices it provides for people, either to be free of mundane operational tasks or to offer options to adapt the built environment to changing needs. Other factors that play key roles including futures-oriented programming, options in functional space organization, and the integration of building and environmental control technologies that can either be automated and/or, equally important, controlled by occupants. Designers need to rethink the way buildings are programmed and designed with a clearly defined options for the long-term adaptations, changes in technology, and changes in use patterns that will result. Technological improvements thus complement attention to ergonomic workstations, and individual control of thermal, luminous and acoustic qualities. According to the definition proposed by the former Intelligent Building Institute, an “intelligent building” is: • one that provides a productive and cost-effective environment through optimization of its four basic elements—structure, systems, services and management—and the interrelationships between them. Intelligent buildings help business owners, property managers and

occupants realize their goals in the areas of cost, comfort, convenience, safety, long-term flexibility and marketability. This performance-based definition does not specify or characterize the technical and design features that qualify buildings as intelligent buildings. No threshold between ‘intelligent buildings’ and ‘conventional buildings’ is defined. This article is based on the premise that intelligence in buildings is achieved through the rational design of both a building and its constituent systems to meet its life cycle missions. An intelligent building is designed to be compatible with its particular cultural, climatic, and technological contexts. Building users in different regions or cultures will require different work environments. Design solutions suitable in one region may not be directly applicable to other regions or countries. While designing for future expansion and flexibility is important, the over-design of the building infrastructure or systems for all conceivable options is in most cases not economically feasible. Sophisticated and technically complex building systems are not necessarily effective in increasing occupant productivity or well-being, per se. Overly complex systems not fully tried and tested are more likely to experience system breakdowns and maintenance concerns. In addition, highly automated systems may be inconvenient for building users and operators not familiar with these systems. For these reasons, automation and the application of electronic technologies do not necessarily equate to intelligence in buildings. The principal goals of intelligent building systems are to: • • •

Increase occupant well-being and productivity. Achieve cost-efficiency by optimizing initial construction costs and long-term operation and maintenance costs. Provide flexibility for accommodating future technological changes.

To achieve these goals, the design of intelligent buildings systems requires a high degree of coordination between project team members from the early stages of the design process. The building owner, the architect, and the technical experts should have a common understanding of the building’s immediate and long-term missions (National Research Council 1988). Technical expertise include structure, HVAC, lighting, interior design, controls engineering, office automa-

Author: Jong-Jin Kim, Ph.D. References: BICSI. 1995. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, Vols. 1 and 2. Tampa, FL: Building Industry Consulting Services International. Electronic Industries Association. 1990. EIA/TIA Standard-569: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. Washington, DC: Electronic Industry Association. National Research Council. 1988. Electronically Enhanced Office Buildings. Publication PB98107320. Washington DC: National Technical Information Service, U.S. Department of Commerce. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

141

11 Intelligent building systems tion, building commissioning and telecommunication specialists. In particular, telecommunication system experts play a central role in architectural and system design decision making processes. Technical team integration at the early stages of the design process is thus essential to coordinate whole system design, construction and building management approaches that meet the needs of owners, operators and occupants during the building’s life cycle. In addition to the generic human, physical, and external factors that encompass all building design, intelligent systems design requires consideration of the following aspects: • • • • • •

future-oriented telecommunication infrastructure office automation intelligent card systems energy efficient thermal systems facilities to improve occupant amenity building commissioning, operation and management systems

Telecommunication systems Prior to the emergence of electronic communication technologies, the primary means of communication was through telephones. Because wiring required to transmit voice signals was relatively simple, building facilities and communication infrastructure necessary to accommodate communication equipment and cables were relatively insignificant in terms of building design and construction. As inter- and intra-building communications have become significant activities for all building types, but especially in offices, schools, and even residential buildings, the volume and the types of communication signals have increased. In addition to voice signals, telecommunication systems now transmit a variety of digital data and building control signals. Computers are replacing telephones as the primary mode of communication. With the expanding use of multimedia technologies and the Internet, data communications containing digital texts and images are becoming the dominant component of information communications. Telecommunication networks are the neurological system of intelligent buildings. They serve as channels for transporting voice and data, as well as for controlling environmental, security, audio-visual, sensing, alarms, and paging systems. These functions can be easily expanded to monitor and detect air-quality, structural and related building failure indices. Transmitting a large volume of multimedia digital data or signals necessitates a high transmission speed, protection from external signal noises, and security in telecommunication systems. From the design standpoint, flexibility for future expansion and spatial arrangements, fire safety, water protection, and signal noise reduction are important factors in the design of the building telecommunication infrastructure. Flexibility for Future Expansion: As the use of telecommunication systems expands, the number of cables, the volume of equipment, and the pathway spaces necessary to accommodate these systems will increase. Providing additional spaces at the initial design stages to install future wiring or equipment will reduce the time and cost of expanding the telecommunication infrastructure in the future. When frequent changes in space use and workstation layouts are expected, it is economical in terms of life cycle costs to provide horizontal pathways that allow flexible access to telecommunication networks. Although the functional necessity and the economic feasibility of access floors are still in debate, several alternative methods for providing universal telecommunication access are available. Judicious decisions should be made with respect to the telecommunication pathways at the early stages of building design, taking into account shortterm and long-term space use and occupancy patterns, initial building budgets, and durability and maintenance of telecommunication cables. Fire Safety: It is important to consider prevention, detection, suppression, and containment strategies in the design of fire protection for

142


telecommunication systems. Telecommunication cables coated with fire protective chemical materials have a high flash point temperature. However, once ignited, they produce extremely toxic gases. Therefore, telecommunication equipment rooms must be equipped with fire protection systems. When telecommunication pathways penetrate the fire-zone perimeter, the integrity of a fire-rated barrier is disrupted. Any holes created by penetrations of telecommunication pathways through fire barriers must be sealed by fire-stops. A variety of fire-stop materials are available, such as putty, caulk, fiber wool, and fire-stop pillows to seal irregular openings. For standard modular openings, pre-manufactured elastomeric components shaped to fit around standard cables, conduits, and tubes are also available. Elastomeric fire-stops are more durable than irregular fire-stops. They provide reliable pressure and environmental sealing, resistance to shock and vibration, and flexibility for reconfiguration. Water Protection: In order to prevent damage to network connections, telecommunication cables and equipment should be protected from water. To ensure adequate protection, several factors should be considered with respect to the water-proofing of telecommunication spaces and pathways. Cables and other connection devices in horizontal pathways should be raised above the floor surface using cable trays or shelves. The doors to telecommunication equipment rooms and closets should have sills to prevent the possible infiltration of water from adjacent floors. The fire-stops or other materials for fixing cable to floors should be splayed so that they do not collect water. Signal Noise Reduction: A major contributors of noise in telecommunication wiring systems is electromagnetic interference from electrical power lines. To reduce this interference, it is necessary to separate telecommunication cables and equipment from electrical power lines. The minimum separation distance depends on the type of cable shielding and the voltage of electrical power lines. The dimensions of electrical equipment and pathways should conform to the separation distances recommended by the telecommunication industry (Electronic Industry Association 1990). Telecommunication spaces and pathways The spaces and pathways for housing telecommunication equipment and cables constitute the telecommunication infrastructure. This infrastructure encompasses a number of components required for networking telecommunication cables between buildings, floors, and telecommunication closets and work areas, and generally consists of the following facilities (BICSI 1995): • • • • •

entrance facilities equipment rooms telecommunication closets backbone pathways horizontal pathways

Entrance Facilities: The entrance facilities refer to the link between building interior and exterior telecommunication networks that occurs through the exterior building envelope, and continues to the entrance room or space. Telecommunication signals typically enter a building through the wall below grade from an underground tunnel. However, airborne signals enter the building through antennae installed on top of the building. In positioning these antennae, line-of-sight and signal interference should be taken into account. Equipment Room: The equipment room provides a space for the termination of the telecommunication network entrance from a building exterior to interior, cross-connections between inter-building and intrabuilding backbone cables, and private board exchange (PBX) equipment. The dimensions and the minimum space requirements for the equipment room are generally proportional to the gross floor area of the building. The recommended equipment room floor area is shown in Table 1.

Intelligent building systems 11 Table 1. Equipment room floor area

Workstations

Area ft2

(m2)

Up to 100 101 – 400 401 – 800 801 – 1200

150 400 800 1200

(13.9) (37.1) (79.2) (111.3)

Telecommunication Closets: Telecommunication closets are located on each floor, providing cross-connections between vertical and horizontal distribution pathways. A minimum of one closet is required for every 10,000 square feet (929 sq. meters) of floor area. The maximum length of the horizontal distribution pathways, the distance between the closet and a workstation, should not exceed 300 feet (91.4 meters). This facilitates higher communication speeds and reduces cable maintenance concerns. For a building with a large floor area, it is advantageous to distribute the closets in several zones, with a closet being located centrally within the zone it serves. To shorten the vertical distance between the closets, it is preferable to stack the closets one above another. The recommended closet size is shown in Table 2. Table 2. Telecommunication closet size

Serving Area ft2 m2 10,000 8,000 5,000

Closet Dimensions ft 10 x 11 10 x 9 10 x 7

(m)

(3.04 x 3.35) (3.04 x 2.74) (3.04 x 2.13)

Backbone Pathways: Backbone pathways provide the main telecommunication links between buildings (inter-building pathways) or within buildings (intra-building pathways), and the connections between telecommunication closets. When telecommunication closets are stacked one above another, the intra-building backbone pathways are vertical. However, in most buildings, some portions of the backbone pathway are horizontal, especially those between the telecommunication equipment room and closets. Vertical backbone pathways pass through floor openings within the telecommunication closets. These openings are generally rectangular or circular, and are surrounded by slot or sleeve walls. After the cables are installed, the floor openings must be sealed with fire-stops. When 4 inch (10.2 cm.) conduits are used, one sleeve or conduit for every 50,000 square feet (4,645 square meters) of usable floor area is recommended. In addition, two spares should be provided for a minimum total of three sleeves or conduits. For a building where a high level of telecommunication is expected, additional sleeves or slots are necessary. Backbone pathway slots and

sleeves are inexpensive to install, and providing additional ones during the initial construction phase will avoid costly installations in the future. Horizontal Pathways: Horizontal pathways refer to the pathways that house the cables between telecommunication closets and work area outlets. Because of their close relationships to the building structure and space organization, the design of horizontal pathways are the single most important aspect of telecommunication infrastructure design. The type of horizontal pathways selected has a significant impact on the floor-to-floor height of the building. The layout of the horizontal pathways determines user accessibility to the telecommunication networks, which in turn affects the workstation layout. Horizontal pathways should be designed considering the following factors: • • • • •

workstation layouts floor-to-floor heights floor and ceiling structural systems HVAC air-supply systems construction and maintenance costs

In conventional buildings, horizontal pathways have been typically provided in the ceiling plenums, and the final cable links to the workstations occur through walls. Locating telecommunication outlets on walls surfaces limits their accessibility and the options for workstation layouts. In large open floor plans, utility columns or partitions can provide pathways from the ceiling to the workstations. Although economical, the ceiling-based horizontal pathways have limitations in meeting the needs of flexible telecommunication access. In addition, utility columns are often visually undesirable in large open office plans. The recent trend is to provide horizontal pathways under the floor. In selecting a horizontal pathway system, a variety of factors should be considered, including initial cost, maintenance, floor structure, work patterns, and aesthetic compatibility. Several methods of installing under-floor horizontal pathways are available. • • • • • •

conduits poke-throughs under-carpet units under-floor ducts cellular floors access floors

Access floors Access floors are the most costly but allow most flexibility. They also provide a space in which various building services can be placed, including electrical wiring, LANs, and air supply (Fig. 1). The height

Fig. 1. Access floors in the Panasonic Building. Tokyo. 1992. Nikken Sekkei.


143


Fig. 2. Structural details of an access floor

Fig. 3. A schematic diagram a local area network

144


Intelligent building systems 11 of access floors varies from 2 to 24 inches (5.1 cm to 61 cm) depending on the functions they serve. When they are designed mainly for housing electrical wires, telephone lines, and local area networks, a minimal height of 2 inches is required. When conditioned air is supplied through an access floor, a height of up to 12 inches (30.5 cm) or more is necessary to reduce friction between air and floor surfaces. The height of an access floor can vary within its span. This can occur when the concrete slab between major structural beams (girders) is lowered to create a higher space for the access floor (Fig. 2). This type of structural design reduces the building height and thus construction costs. Access floors are typically laid out in a grid of 18 inch (47.7 cm) square floor panels, four of which compose a 3 foot (91.4 cm) service module. This module (in customary U.S. units) is common in intelligent buildings, and contains a floor-mounted air supply unit, an under-floor receptacle for electrical wiring, and local area networks. Local area networks Local Area Networks (LANs) based on fiber-optic cables are the backbone of intelligent buildings. These networks allow for the transfer of electronic signals/data between a variety of building subsystems, including computer, telecommunication, environmental control, accounting, disaster prevention, and security systems (Fig. 3). More than one local area network is installed in a building, each dedicated to a particular type of signal. Audiovisual systems Large screen television and audiovisual systems are common features in the lecture halls, large conference rooms, and meeting rooms of intelligent buildings. To receive radio and TV signals from outside, office buildings are frequently equipped with rooftop aerial antennae and satellite communication equipment. When a building is under the electronic shadow of adjacent obstructions, devices for relaying electronic signals are installed. Teleconferencing systems are not yet widely used in office buildings. However, with cost reductions and mass pro-

duction, their installation will increase exponentially in the near future. The rapid advance of technologies that support teleconferencing (audio conferencing) systems will further increase the use of these systems. Teleconferencing systems typically consist of several individual speakers for participants, pencil pad digitizers, two video cameras, and TV monitors. The cameras move automatically, and are directed to a person who speaks by voice recognition technology. One TV monitor displays a speaker and the other displays input signals written or drawn on a key pad, allowing the participants to communicate graphically. Intelligent cards Intelligent cards (ICs) carried by each individual visiting and/or occupying a building play a major role in building security systems. With intelligent cards, all occupant movements within a building can be traced from the initial entry to the building in the morning to the final exit in the evening. In addition to the security function, these cards serve multiple purposes, such as access keys, environmental control devices, cash and credit cards, banking cards, and employee identification cards. Intelligent cards of various types are being used in many office buildings, and their use for all purposes will obviously be extended to multiple applications in the future. As a function of building design and operation, intelligent cards are integrated with other building subsystems, such as vertical transportation, lighting, environmental control and computing systems. Thus, when an employee enters a main entrance lobby using an intelligent card, the central building administration system sends an elevator to the lobby. In times or building areas of low occupancy, the intelligent card sends instructions to turn on the lights and the air distribution unit. In the evening, intelligent cards help to determine whether a space is occupied, and if it is unoccupied, the environmental systems are turned off automatically. In addition, intelligent cards are used in cash-free buildings for purchases within the building’s shops and cafeterias, deposits and withdrawals of money, and automatic payroll deposits.

Fig. 4. Building management network based on intelligent cards


145


Fig. 5. Office automation network

Office automation Office automation is geared towards improving operational efficiency and employee productivity by utilizing LANs and computers in information processing, databases, and communications. Office automation systems can be categorized into two groups: general office automation systems designed for the typical business operations of office buildings, and applied office automation systems customized for the specific demands of any trade or business building, such as schools, shops, hotels, and government buildings. Key features of office automation systems include: •

Communications: electronic mail, electronic bulletin boards, electronic newspapers, audiovisual conferencing;

•

Databases: telephone directories, information libraries;

•

Office Administration: room reservation, schedule management, attendance management, healthcare information management, employee information retrieval, divisional data processing, cashless systems;

•

Office Production: document processing and transfer, personnel file cabinets, appointments.

Physical integration of office automation systems is accomplished via local area networks. The types and features of office automation systems depend on the intended use of the building. Owner-occupied buildings require highly customized office automation systems that meet current and future office requirements. For tenant office buildings, providing an infrastructure that can meet basic needs is a first priority. Office automation systems should be designed considering the spatial and temporal office use patterns. When a workstation is shared by many persons, automation systems allow for the secure and private access of a particular user’s personal electronic documents and computing environment.

146


Intelligent building systems 11

Fig. 6. Floor supply and ceiling return supply system

Thermal comfort systems Intelligent office buildings generally are more energy intensive than office buildings constructed in the past, the primary reason being that they are equipped with more electronic appliances, including computers, fax machines, televisions, and other building automation facilities. Electrical equipment for office automation not only consumes electric energy, but also increases the cooling load on HVAC equipment, although improvements in technology improve on this with successive models. In any case, the energy intensiveness of intelligent buildings presents a challenge to building designers. Existing buildings that are upgraded with highly intensive modern telecommunications may also require increased mechanical system and cooling capacity. The energy implications of various components of intelligent buildings must thus be critically reviewed to find design and technological solutions that make them more energy efficient. Intelligent HVAC controls, able to anticipate and rapidly respond to changes in occupancy and weather conditions, provide the means to reduce the energy requirements while increasing the electronic capacity of the modern workplace. Floor-Mounted Air Supply Units: Air supply through access floors is typically accomplished without ducts. In such cases, the entire access floor chamber functions as the supply ducts of a conventional HVAC system. Pressurizing the entire access floor requires a great deal of fan power, and therefore significantly increases energy consumption. In order to make supply air flow efficiently without pressurizing the entire access floor chamber, floor-mounted air supply units are installed beneath the floor surfaces. A floor-mounted air supply unit is basically a variable speed fan housed in a can. The top cover of the unit is the air diffuser grill. The direction and volume of supply air can be varied by either changing the fan speed or adjusting the grill opening size (Fig. 6).


147

End symbol

11 Intelligent building systems Floor Supply and Ceiling Return Systems: Floor air supply systems have advantages over the ceiling air supply systems of conventional HVAC distribution systems for both heating and cooling modes. For the winter heating mode, warm air can be directly supplied to human bodies before being exhausted to return ducts in the ceiling. This avoids the short-circuiting of warm supply air directly to return ducts that occurs in many conventional air distribution systems. It has the further advantage of supplying fresh air at the occupant zone rather than at the ceiling where likelihood of accumulated dust and pollutants is higher. For the summer cooling mode, cool heavier air stays in the lower portion of an interior space, creating a cool air zone near occupants while pushing warm air upward toward the ceiling. This again avoids the short-circuiting of supply air. A disadvantage of floor air supply systems is the increased possibility of exposing occupants to temperatures that are cooler in summer or warmer in the winter (depending on set-point temperatures of the delivery air supply). Occupants are also subject to higher speeds of air movement creating potential draught concerns. Therefore, it is important to locate the floormounted air supply units at a sufficient distance away from occupants. Allowing occupants to modify the speed and the direction of supply air is beneficial in increasing individual thermal comfort. Decentralized Environmental Control Systems: A general trend is the decentralization of environmental systems, with many smaller equipment units dispersed in strategic locations throughout the building. Decentralized environmental systems have many advantages over centralized systems. In case of a breakdown, decentralized systems affect only a small area of the building. Because breakdowns affect smaller areas and equipment, the replacement cost is less. By distributing mechanical equipment in many locations, the length of horizontal services (e.g. ducts and electrical wiring) can be shortened and duct sizes reduced, thus saving required clearance dimensions. Decentralized systems allow for greater flexibility of response to varying loads during the course of a day and a year. In order to fully utilize a decentralized control system, the control zone should be further individualized so that one occupant can feel free to adjust air temperature, lighting levels, and volume of ventilation without being concerned about affecting other occupants’ thermal well-being. Furniture-Integrated Control Systems: Furniture-integrated environmental control systems allow for highly individualized environmental control. They provide occupants with full control of the ventilation, air temperature and lighting level within their individual task areas. The supply air is typically brought up through access floors and supplied to two outlets on the partition wall, one under the desk and the other above. The volume of the air supply can be adjusted by an electronic controller to a particular setting. Thermostats can be integrated with a telephone on a user’s desk. These thermostats measure air temperature within each workstation. The conditioned air supply to each workstation can be controlled by the telephone. In addition, the speed of ventilation from the supply outlets in furniture-integrated systems can be made variable to mimic natural wind cycles. Building Energy Management: In addition to local control systems, a centralized energy and building management system is typically installed in large modern buildings. A computerized building management system monitors and controls security, fire safety, lighting, HVAC systems, room temperatures, vertical transportation, and other building operations. A centralized energy management system plays a major role in monitoring energy consumption patterns and provides various data useful to facility managers in making operational decisions. Because office buildings are subject to peak load charges in determining their electricity rates, building owners must carefully control

148


and manipulation electric energy consumption. This is required so that the peak load permissible by the contract with the utility company is not exceeded and penalty charges avoided. Typical strategies for controlling electricity consumption include switching the cooling equipment from electric chillers to gas-powered absorption ones, turning off non-essential operations (that is, lighting and air distributions), and changing thermostat set points. Thermal Storages: As a way of reducing peak loads, more buildings are being equipped with thermal storage for both heating and cooling efficiency. Many new office buildings utilize ice-source thermal storage, refrigerated during off-peak and typically evening hours and available for cooling in the following days. Ice storage systems have the advantage of being able to store more energy per unit of volume than water-source storage systems, utilizing the energy represented in the latent heat of fusion (heat represented in the change of phase of water to ice). While storage systems are most often located in below ground containers due to weight, by locating the thermal storage on the mechanical floor at the top of the building, the natural circulation of refrigerants to space air-conditioning systems can be utilized. The thermal storage tanks can also function as counter weights in the earthquake resistance system. In this case, the flexible connections supporting the storage tanks dampen the sway of the building when horizontal forces are applied during earthquakes. Lighting systems Innovations in lighting systems is moving towards the use of variable lighting level and occupancy zone options with individual controls adjustable to the specific needs of a work environment. conventional buildings, small individual offices typically have an individual control switch. Lighting systems of large open offices shared by many employees are controlled by a centralized switch that covers a large floor area, with the capability to adjust to variations in daylighting and occupancy. Automatic Control: The control hardware of lighting systems is increasingly automated. Magnetic ballasts are being replaced by electronic ballasts, which allow for fluorescent lamps to be dimmed. Remote light controllers are being developed to take the place of manual switches. In these cases, each lighting zone of a large office building has a sensor mounted on the ceiling, and by using a remote controller, a lighting system can be turned on and off. The automatic control of lighting systems is also being accomplished by infrared human occupancy sensors, and by door locks that function as switches for lighting systems. Door lock switches are presently used in airplane restrooms. The incorporation of intelligent cards allows for the automatic control of the lighting system of a space or a group of spaces. Lighting System Design: In many cases, the electric lighting systems of office buildings consist of florescent lamps arranged in a 5 foot (1.5 meter) square grid module. Within this module, other building services, such as supply air diffusers, return air inlets, sprinklers, smoke detectors, and other ceiling-mounted sensors are integrated. In addition, the use of electronically controlled lighting systems is increasing. Many buildings have ceiling-mounted sensors that control lighting systems. In these systems, each lighting zone has a sensor that detects control signals from a remote control. Uniform lighting systems are commonly used in office buildings, and the importance of non-uniform lighting design is not widely recognized. Along with the trend of individualized partitioned offices and increased design for low-reflective CRT environments, low-level ambient indirect lighting systems augmented by task lighting are increasingly applied in office buildings.

Intelligent building systems 11 Daylighting systems Along with the development of electronic ballasts, the daylighting has been explored to reduce electric energy consumption. Advances have been made in control sensors, automatic shading devices, and glazing materials for windows and skylights. Building typological studies have been conducted to find building forms and elements that most effectively bring daylight into building interiors. Some of these elements include atria, courtyards, light-shelves, and light-pipes. In the Panasonic Building, the entire building volume is organized on two sides around a large atrium at the center (Fig. 7). In many buildings, automated interior shading devices (venetian blinds) controlled by outdoor sensors or interior remote controllers are being installed. Some buildings have automated shading devices, with or without daylight sensors, installed only in special rooms. The automatic adjustment of shading positions can be provided in two directions: vertical (up and down) movement, and rotation of blind angles. Although the shading device movements of some buildings are programmed to respond to outdoor climatic conditions using daylight sensors, the method for controlling shading devices needs to take into account window locations, window orientation, outdoor temperature, and solar radiation levels.

Fiber-Optic Application in Daylighting: The daylighting of the perimeter zones of office buildings can be achieved with windows. However, without special reflecting devices, such as venetian blinds and light shelves, only a limited depth of the perimeter zones can be illuminated by daylight which may also be considered excessive without light contöol options. New technologies are being developed, including fiber-optic techniques. Light pipes finished with highly reflective surfaces are also being explored. Occupant amenity Increasing occupant well-being and productivity is the most important objective of intelligent buildings. In buildings that incorporate occupant amenity as a design concept, all aspects of the building design and operation are affected, and may range from outdoor landscaping to building environmental systems to interior furniture design. Resulting spaces and facilities for increasing occupant comfort include outdoor gardens, employee lounges, refreshment rooms, guest rooms, sporting rooms and facilities, hygienic restrooms and ergonomic furniture systems. Air quality enhancements are being researched. Low levels of aroma are believed to enhance occupants sense of well being and worker productivity. Most critical in the increasing

Fig. 7. A cross-section of the Panasonic Building. Tokyo. 1992. Nikken Sekkei.


149

11 Intelligent building systems technologically driven environment are individual choices and options that can be made available to affect the conditions in which occupants feel most comfortable and in effective control of their environmental conditions. Environmental conservation A variety of environmental conservation strategies are being implemented in new buildings that include water conservation through the recycling of domestic gray water, the collection of rainwater, the integration of smaller toilet tanks with a sink, and the utilization of infrared sensing devices in plumbing fixtures. In many buildings, these systems are made part of “indoor wetlands” or nearby bioswales that incorporate water cleaning in outdoor gardens that serve as community facilities for residents and as sanctuaries for wildlife. The creation of natural settings within the building through elements such as atria increases the psychological well-being of occupants, the luminous quality of interior spaces, and the energy efficiency of the building. In addition to vegetation, other elements used to create natural indoor settings in public buildings include water fountains, creeks, natural stone finishes, and small aquariums, typically illuminated by daylight to enhance their natural features and aesthetic quality. Recycling systems are incorporated into buildings to make it easy and obvious for building occupants to recycle waste products, including source separation on each floor of a building, vertical collection chutes and a clear and functional process of waste reduction and recovery. Recycled building materials are used in both residential and commercial buildings. Such features can be made obvious as part of environmental education. End note Since the early 1980s, significant technological advances have been made in intelligent buildings rapidly being developed and implemented in building design and construction. The increased sophistication of electronic controls offers new opportunities by which buildings can perform better. At the same time, the increasing technological complexity requires greater integration in design and greater vigilance in building commissioning and monitoring to assure that buildings are actually performing and maintained as designed. Issues pertaining to intelligent building technologies need continued research and devel-

150


opment. These include studies of the relationship between occupant choice and well-being, air-quality provided by natural ventilation and mechanical systems, and the interaction between the technological workplace environment and the physical environment. New office planning prototypes need to be developed so as to reflect changing office technologies, work patterns, and work environments expected in the future. In recent years, the demand for new office buildings has shrunk in the U.S. and other advanced countries. Under these circumstances, there is increasing pressure to make intelligent buildings more economically viable. In addition, the impact of the environmental movement is evident in the entire building sector. An increasingly important attribute of intelligent building systems design will thus be environmental conservation. Organizations involved with Intelligent Building Systems Building Industry Consulting Services International 10500 University Center Drive, Suite 100 Tampa, FL 33612-6415 Telecommunications Industry Association 2500 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22201 Standards Processing Coordinators Federal Information Processing Standards National Institute of Standards and Technology Gaithersburg, MD 20899 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 National Research Council 2102 Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20418 Smart House 400 Prince George’s Boulevard Upper Marlboro, MD 20772-8731

Design of atriums for people and plants 12

12 Design of atriums for people and plants Donald Watson


151

12 Design of atriums for people and plants

152


Design of atriums people andand plants Design of for atriums for people plants 12 12

Summary: Atriums offer many energy design opportunities, depending upon climatic resources, to provide natural heating, cooling, lighting and plants. It is necessary to establish a clear design goals, outlined in this article by an overview of solar heating, natural cooling and daylighting choices. Provisions for healthy planting and indoor gardens can also be combined with atrium design to benefit both plants and people.

Key words: atrium, daylighting, designing for plants, horticulture, microclimate, natural cooling, solar heating.

New Canaan Nature Center Solar Wintergarden, New Canaan, CT Buchanan/Watson Architects 1984

The atrium concept of climate-control has been used throughout the history of architecture and in indigenous building in all climates of the globe. Suggested by its Latin meaning as “heart” or an open courtyard of a Roman house, the term atrium as used today is a protected courtyard or glazed wintergarden placed within a building. Modern atrium design incorporates many architectural elements—wall enclosures, sun-oriented openings, shading and ventilation devices, and subtle means of modifying temperature and humidity—suggested by examples that derive from the courtyard designs of Roman, early Christian, and Islamic building and 19th-Century greenhouses and glass-covered arcades of Great Britain and France.

H4.To recover the heat that rises by natural convection to the top of the atrium, place a return air duct high in the space, possibly augmenting its temperature by placing it directly in the sun. Heat recovery can be accomplished if the warm air is redistributed either to the lower area of the atrium (a ceiling fan) or redirected (and cleaned) to the mechanical system, or through a heat exchanger if the air must be exhausted for health and air-quality reasons.

Atriums offer many energy design opportunities: first, comfort is achieved by gradual transition from outside climate to building interior; second, designed properly, protected spaces and buffer zones create natural and free flowing energy by reducing or by eliminating the need to otherwise heat, cool, or light building interiors. Depending on climatic resources and building use, the emphasis in atrium design has to be balanced between occupancy and comfort criteria and the relative need for heating, cooling, and/or lighting. How the atrium can work as an energy-efficient modifier of climate is best seen by examining separately its potential for natural heating, cooling, and lighting. The first and most important step is to establish a clear set of energy design goals appropriate to the specific atrium design. The resulting solution will depend upon its program (whether for circulation only or for longer term and sedentary human comfort and/or for plant propagation and horticultural display) and the resulting environmental control requirements. Solar heating If heating efficiency alone is the primary energy design goal of the atrium, the following design principles should be paramount: H1.To maximize winter solar heat gain, orient the atrium aperture (openings and glazing) to the equator. If possible, the glazing should be vertical or sloped not lower than a tilt angle equal to the local latitude. H2.For heat storage and radiant distribution, place interior masonry directly in the path of the winter sun. This is most useful if the heated wall or floor surface will in turn directly radiate to building occupants. H3.To prevent excessive nighttime heat loss, consider an insulatingsystem for the glazing, such as insulating curtains or high performance multi-layered window systems.

Because a large air volume must be heated, an atrium is not an efficient solar collector per se. But the high volume helps to make an overheated space acceptable, especially if the warmest air rises to the top. If the atrium is surrounded by building on all sides, direct winter sun is difficult if not impossible to capture except at the top of the skylight enclosure. However, by facing a large skylight and/or window opening towards the equator, direct winter solar heating becomes entirely feasible. In cool climates, an atrium used as a solar heat collector would require as much winter sunlight as possible. In overbright conditions, dark finishes on surfaces where the sun strikes will help reduce glare and also to store heat. On surfaces not in direct sun, light finishes may be best to reflect light, especially welcomed under cloudy conditions. In most locations and uses, glass should be completely shaded from the summer sun. Although not practical for large atriums, in some applications greenhouse-type movable insulation might be considered to reduce nighttime heat loss. Natural cooling Several guidelines related to the use of an atrium design as an intermediary or buffer zone apply to both heating and cooling. If an unconditioned atrium is located in a building interior, the heat loss is from the warmer surrounding spaces into the atrium. In buildings with large internal gains due to occupants, lighting, and machines, the atrium may require cooling throughout the year. If one were to design exclusively for cooling, the following principles would predominate: C1. To minimize solar gain, provide shade for the summer sun. According to the particular building-use, the local climate and the resulting balance point (the outside temperature below which heating is required), the “overheated” season when sun shading is needed may extend well into the autumn months. While fixed shading devices suffice for much of the summer period, movable shading is the only exact means by which to match the seasonal shading requirements at all times. In buildings in warm climates, sunshading may be needed throughout the year.

Author: Donald Watson, FAIA References: Architectural Graphic Standards (Ninth edition) “Atriums.” Watson, Donald 1982. “The Energy Within the Space Within.” Progressive Architecture, July 1982. [out of print]. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

153

12 Design of atriums for people and plants C2.Use the atrium as an air plenum in the mechanical system of the building. The great advantage is one of economy, but heat recovery options (discussed above) and ventilation become most effective when the natural air flow in the atrium is in the same direction and integrated with the mechanical system. C3.To facilitate natural ventilation, create a vertical “chimney” effect by placing ventilating outlets high (preferably in the freeflow air stream well above the roof) and by providing cool “replacement air” inlets at the atrium bottom, with attention that the airstream is clean, that is, free of car exhaust or other pollutants. The inlet air steam can be cooled naturally, such as accessed from a shaded area. In hot, dry climates, passing the inlet air over water such as an aerated fountain or landscape area is particularly effective to create evaporative cooling. Allowing the atrium to cool by ventilation at night is effective in climates where summer nighttime temperatures are lower than daytime (greater than 15F difference), in which case the cooling effect can be carried into the next day by materials such as masonry (although, as a rule, if the average daily temperature is above 78F (25.5°C), thermally massive materials are disadvantageous in non-air-conditioned spaces because they do not cool as rapidly as a thermally light structure). The microclimatic dynamic no different than that evident in the Indian teepee—when stack ventilation is possible through a roof aperture, the space will ventilate naturally even in the absence of outside breezes, by the driving force of heated air. If air-conditioning of the atrium is needed but can be restricted to the lower area of the space, it can be done reasonably; cold air, being heavier, will pool at the bottom. While there is apparent conflict between the heating design principle to maximize solar gain and the cooling design principle to minimize it, the sun does cooperate by its change in its apparent solar position with respect to the building. There are, however, design choices to be balanced between the requirements for sunshading and those for daylighting. The ideal location for a sunshading screen is on the outside of the glazing, where it can be wind-cooled. When the outside air ranges about 80F (26.7°C), glass areas even if shaded admits undesired heat gain by conduction. In truly warm climates, a minimum of glazed aperture should be used to prevent undesired heat gain, in which case the small amount of glazing should be placed where it is most effective for daylighting. Heat-absorbent or heat-reflective glass, the common solution to reduce solar heat gain, also reduces the illumination level and, if facing the equator, it also reduces desirable winter heat gain. In temperate-to-cool climates, heat gain through a skylight can be tolerated if the space is high, so that heat builds up well above the occupancy zone and there is good ventilation. In hot climates, an atrium will perform better as an unconditioned space if it is a shaded but otherwise open courtyard. Daylighting In all climates, an atrium can be used for daylighting. Electric lighting cost savings can be achieved, but only if the daylighting system works; that is, if it replaces the use of artificial lighting. (Many daylit buildings end up with the electric lights in full use regardless of lighting levels needed.) Atriums serve a particularly useful function in daylighting design for an entire building by balancing light levels— thus reducing brightness ratios—across the interior floors of a building. If, for example, an open office floor has a window wall on only one side, typically more electric lighting is required than would be required without natural lighting to reduce the brightness ratio. An atrium light court at the building interior could provide such balanced “two source” lighting. An atrium designed as a “lighting fixture” that reflects, directs, or diffuses sunlight, can be one of the most pleasing means of controlling light.

154


The following principles apply to atrium design for daylighting: L1. To maximize daylight, an atrium cross-section should be stepped open to the entire sky dome in predominantly cloudy areas. In predominantly sunny sites, atrium geometry can by based upon heating and/or cooling solar orientation principles. L2. To maximize light, window or skylight apertures should be designed for the predominant sky condition. If the predominant sky condition is cloudy and maximum daylight is required (as in a northern climate wintergarden), consider clear glazing oriented to the entire sky dome, with movable sun controls for sunny conditions. If the predominant sky condition is sunny, orient the glazing according to heating and/or cooling design requirements. L3. Provide sun-and-glare control by geometry of aperture, surface treatment, color, and adjustable shades or curtains. Designing for daylighting involves compromise to meet widely varying sky conditions. What works in bright sun conditions will not be adequate for cloudy conditions. An opaque overhang or louver, for example, may create particularly somber shadowing on a cloudy day. Light is already made diffuse by a cloudy sky, falling nearly equally from all directions; the sides of the atrium thus cast gray shadows on all sides. For predominantly cloudy conditions, a clear skylight is the right choice. Bright haze will nonetheless cause intolerable glare at least to a view upwards. Under sunny conditions, the same skylight is the least satisfactory choice because of overlighting and overheating. The designer’s choice is to compromise. Unless the local climate is truly cloudy and the atrium requires high levels of illumination, partial skylighting can achieve a balance of natural lighting, heating, and cooling. Partial skylighting (that is, a skylight design that occupies only a portion of the roof surface) offers the further advantage of controlling glare and sunlight by providing reflecting and shading surfaces to the view, such as by the coffers of the skylights. Because it is reduced in light intensity and contrast, a surface illuminated by reflected light is far more acceptable to the human eye than a direct view of a bright window area. Movable shades for glare and sun control provide a further, surprisingly simple means of balancing for the variety of conditions. This can be provided simply by operable canvas or fiberglass shades. The relative importance of these design principles for heating, cooling, and daylighting can be weighted according to building type and the local climate. In the northern United States and in Canada, particularly for residential units or apartments that might be grouped around an atrium, the solar heating potential predominates, while the natural cooling potential predominates in the southern United States. In commercial and institutional structures, natural cooling and daylighting are both important. In this case, the local climate would determine the relative importance of openness achieved with large and clear skylighting (most appropriate for cloudy temperate-to-cool regions) or of closed and shaded skylighting (most appropriate for sunny warm regions). While no one set of recommendations fits any one climate, the relative importance of each of the design principles is indicated by climatic region in Table 1. Garden atriums Plants have an important role in buffer zones. If the requirements of plants are understood, healthy greenery can be incorporated into atrium design and contribute to human comfort, amenity and energy conservation. Plants, however when uncomfortable, cannot move. Major planting losses have been reported in gardened atriums because the bioclimatic requirements were not achieved. A greenhouse for yearround crop or plant production is intended to create spring-summer or the growing-period climate throughout the year. A wintergarden replicates spring-summer conditions for plant growth in wintertime by

Design of atriums for people and plants 12

Table 1. Relative Importance of Design Principles in Various Climates COLD/CLOUDY Seattle Chicago Minneapolis

COOL/SUNNY Denver St. Louis Boston

WARM/DRY LosAngeles Phoenix Midland TX

●

❑

▼

H2 For radiant heat storage and distribution, place interior masonry directly in the path of the winter sun.

▼

❑

●

H3 To prevent excessive nighttime heat loss, consider an insulating system for the glazing.

●

❑

H4 To recover heat, place a return air duct high in the space, directly in the sun

❑

●

▼

❑

❑

●

HEATING H1 To maximize winter solar heat gain, orient the atrium aperture to the south.

COOLING C1 To minimize solar gain, provide shade from the summer sun.

HOT/WET Houston New Orleans Miami

C2 Use the atrium as an air plenum in the mechanical system of the building.

❑

❑

❑

❑

C3 To facilitate natural ventilation, create a vertical “chimney” effect with high outlets and low inlets.

❑

❑

❑

●

❑

▼

L2 To maximize daylight, select skylight glazing for predominant sky condition (clear and horizontal in predominantly cloudy areas).

❑

❑

❑

❑

L3 Provide sun- and glare-control

❑

❑

●

❑

LIGHTING L1 To maximize daylight, use a stepped section (in predominantly cloudy areas).

Key: ● = Very important; ❑ = positive benefit; ▼ = discretionary

COLD/CLOUDY

COOL/SUNNY

WARM/DRY

HOT/WET

Fig. 1. Atrium designs for solar daylighting, heating, gardens, and natural cooling. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

155

12 Design of atriums for people and plants maximizing winter daylight exposure and by solar heating. Plants need ample light but not excessive heat. Although it varies according to plant species, as a general rule planting areas require full overhead skylighting (essentially to simulate their indigenous growing condition). Most plants are overheated if their roots range above 65F (18.3°C). Their growth slows when the root temperature drops below 45F (7.2°C). As a result, a greenhouse has the general problem of overheating (as well as overlighting) during any sunny day and of underlighting (in intensity and duration) during any cloudy winter day.

If the function of the atrium includes plant propagation or horticultural exhibit (replicating the indigenous climate in which the display plants flower), then clear-glass skylighting is needed for the cloudy days and adjustable shading and overheating controls are needed for sunny days. If the plant beds are heated directly, by water piping for example, then root temperatures can be maintained in the optimum range without heating the air. As a result, the air temperature in the atrium can be cool for people, that is in the 50F (10°C) range, with the resulting advantage of providing a defense against superheating the space. People can be comfortable in lower air temperatures if exposed to the radiant warmth of the sun and/or if the radiant temperature of surrounding surfaces is correspondingly higher, that is, ranging above 80F (26.7°C). Lower atrium temperature offers a further advantage to plants and energy-efficient space operation because evaporation from plants is slowed, saving water and energy (1000 Btu are removed from the sensible heat of the space with each pound of water that evaporates). Plant growth is aided by air movement, if gentle and pervasive. Air circulation reduces excessive moisture build-up at the plant leaf and circulates CO2, needed during the daytime growth cycle. The requirements for healthy planting and indoor gardening can thus be combined with energy-efficient atrium design for benefit of both plants and people. Atrium design can be integral to a bioclimatic approach to heating, cooling and lighting buildings, while adding the restorative benefit of planting. The Gardner Museum in Boston provides a turn-of-the-century U.S. precedent. wherin a Venetian Renaissance garden forms the central organizing space (Fig. 2). The Ford Foundation in New York City 1955 incorporates a landscaped atrium within an office building (Fig.3). The TVA Headquarters design in Chatanooga derives from an atrium cross-section for daylighting and for planting (Fig. 4). These examples demonstrate the amenity offered by atrium design adapted to the opportunities of their particular building type and climate.

Fig. 2. Isabella Stuart Gardner Museum. Boston, MA. E. H. Sears, Architect. 1902.

Fig. 3. Ford Foundation Headquarters. New York. Roche Dinkerloo, Architects. Dan Kiley, Landscape Architect. 1955.

156


Fig. 4. TVA Office Building Chattanooga, TN. The Architects Collaborative (TAC). 1984.

Building economics 13

13

Building economics David S. Haviland


157

13 Building economics

158


Building economics Building economics 13 13

Summary: Building economics is the art and science of making economic decisions—the best ways to allocate scarce ownership and operating dollars—at every step in the building process, from project definition through design and construction to commissioning and operation. This article provides a brief overview of building economics and life-cycle cost analysis, which accounts for all costs of building ownership over the life of the building investment.

Key words: budgeting, engineering economics, financial investment, life cycle cost analysis and operating cost. Buildings require resources to design, construct and operate. At $80 per square foot, a new 2,000 square foot residence costs $160,000 to build; this is four times the median income of American families. A university constructing a 100,000 square foot science facility at $150/ square foot plus another 25% in project development costs finds itself raising or borrowing more than $18 million to bring the facility to the day the ribbon is cut. This is only the beginning. Once a new or renovated project is occupied and in use, it requires continuing investment. Data from many sources indicate that ownership and operating costs (those designated “project-in-use-costs” in Table 1) total from $8 to $30 per square foot each year, with an average annual cost of perhaps $15 per square foot. For our university science building, this may represent another $1.5 million per year in building ownership costs. Most building projects are financed. Their owners borrow funds or raise them in the bond market, adding annual interest costs that may range from 6% to 12%. A full 20-year, 8% mortgage on the residence above will cost its owner $16,230 each year. For the university science building, the debt service—repayment of principal and interest—on $18 million in 6%, 30-year bonds is more than $1.3 million each year. Scope of Building Economics Given the large numbers involved, it is not surprising that costs and economy are fundamentally important to building owners. Owners typically want to know: •

• •

How much the project will cost—often owners want this information long before the design is detailed enough to produce a careful estimate. How the planning, design, and construction decisions being made at each step influence project cost. How the benefits to be produced compare to the costs of constructing and operating the project.

Building economics includes making economic decisions—the best way to allocate scarce resources—at every step in the building process. Project definition, design, construction, commissioning, and operation involve thousands of decisions affecting the allocation of the owner’s ownership and operating dollars (Table 1). Investment Thinking Taken together, the three questions asked above require those who own, finance, and design new and renovated facilities to view buildings as investments. Most building owners seek financing. Even if they have the resources, owners are not always willing to invest them in a project with low liquidity—that is, if they need the funds for something else, they may not be able to sell the building at the price they seek when they seek it. People and institutions who supply money charge interest for its use, and this is a substantial additional project cost. Even if an owner incurs no interest charges by using its own funds, it foregoes the opportunity to use the money for some other investment. Thus, there is an opportunity cost for using one’s own funds for a building project. Finally, those who have money to lend or invest have other possibilities for economic return. Spending the money on a building project competes with these alternatives. Some owners insist any discretionary expenditure on the building project earn a minimum attractive rate of return. Investment thinking raises these questions: • • • •

How productive will an investment be (in the project or in an alternative design concept, system, or detail)? Will the benefits outweigh the costs? If there is more than one choice, which is the most productive? Is there a better way of using my money than investing it in this way?

Author: David S. Haviland, Hon. AIA References: Bowen, Brian. 1994. “Construction Cost Management.” in David Haviland, ed. The Architect’s Handbook of Professional Practice. Washington, DC: The American Institute of Architects. Haviland, David. 1977, 1978. Life Cycle Cost Analysis: A Guide for Architects and Life Cycle Cost Analysis: Using it in Practice. Washington, DC: The American Institute of Architects. Johnson, Robert E. 1990. The Economics of Building: A Practical Guide for the Design Professional. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Kirk, Stephen J., and Alphonse J. Dell’Isola. 1995. Life Cycle Costing for Design Professionals. New York: McGraw Hill. Means Building Construction Cost Data. 1997. Kingston, RI: R. S. Means Company, updated and published annually. Means publishes cost data for use in all phases of project budgeting and estimating. Ruegg, Rosalie T. and Marshall, Harold E. 1990. Building Economics: Theory and Practice. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

159

13 Building economics Table 1. Typical project cost and budget elements

Some design decisions influencing cost of this element

Budget element Site Costs 1. Acquisition Cost of purchasing or leasing the site; includes costs of options, legal and brokerage fees, site financing

2. Improvement Cost of bringing the site to the point where one can build on it: access, remediation, clearing and grading, drainage, retaining structures, utilities, landscaping, application and approvals, permit and impact fees

• • • • •

3. Holding costs

Program evaluation and site “fit” Siting decisions: requirements for access roads, utility connections Siting decisions: requirements for clearing, grading, cuts and fills, detention/retention ponds Siting decisions: need for accommodation to neighbor and sensitivity to neighborhood and community context and issues Need for regulatory reviews, variances, and other administrative or judicial relief

Costs of holding the land, including real estate taxes, utilities, insurance, security, maintenance

Project Development Costs 1. Design Costs of predesign facility surveys, marketing, feasibility, programming, and financing studies; site development including selection, utility, and environmental studies; design and documentation; bidding or negotiation; and construction contract administration services.

2. Interim financing

• • • • •

Range of services needed Number of schemes and other iterations required Services pricing and compensation Total construction cost (amount to be financed) Construction period (time before funds are repaid)

• • • • • • • • •

Use of standard vs. custom products Product shortages, lead times to purchase Repetition, economies of scale Constructability and waste Number, variety, availability of trades required Trade work rules and jurisdiction Crew size and composition Special equipment needed to install products and systems Building siting: effects on work conditions, materials handling and storage, protection of adjacent property, etc. “General conditions” contract requirements for insurances, bonds, safety, security, temporary construction, etc. Speed and thoroughness in addressing shop drawings and submittals, design changes, and claims during construction

Construction loan costs including interest, fees, insurance, origination charges

3. Other fees Surveying, geotechnical, market and feasibility, legal, accounting, costs related to sale or rental of space or units, settlement costs including title, insurance, tax reserves, etc.

4. Owner project management Owner costs of managing consultants and contractors, organizing internal “clients,” seeking approvals, etc.

Construction Costs 1. Materials Selection and integration of construction materials and subsystems to be used

2. On-site labor Building trade and labor required to install materials and subsystems

3. Contractor overhead Contractors’ site management costs (field personnel and facilities, tools, equipment, temporary construction and utilities, staging and scaffolding, safety, cleaning, protection, permits, insurances, bonds) as well as main office and profit requirements

•

4. Design and construction contingency Reservation of funds to address uncertainties in construction: owner changes, design errors or omissions. unexpected field conditions

•

Project-in-Use Costs 1. Commissioning Project start-up including move in, fit out, systems shake-out, maintenance training, record drawing, warranty services

2. Permanent financing Debt service (repayment of principal and interest) as well as mortgage origination fees and charges

• • • • •

3. Operation and maintenance Facility operating personnel, security, cleaning, mechanical systems maintenance, trash removal, lawn and grounds maintenance, snow removal, energy and energy systems costs, property and liability insurance, taxes, water and sewer, property management

4. Major maintenance, repair, and replacements Major maintenance, repair, and period replacement of facility components, assemblies, and subsystems

5. Cyclical renewal Periodic upgrading of design or systems in response to functional, organization, tecnhnological, or market requirements

160


•

Total construction cost (amount to be financed) Finishes (cleaning, replacement) Energy-conscious design (U-values, windows, active and passive systems, etc.) Layout (e.g., snow plowing, surveillance of public spaces) Selection of interior and exterior finishes, windows and doors, roofing, elevators, lighting, mechanical and electrical systems, ground cover and paving Anticipation of in-use changes in the initial design, e.g., new interior or exterior treatments, recabling, lighting retrofits, possibilities for adding to the facility, etc.

Building economics 13 Table 2. Investment decisions

• • •

Build, lease, or reorganize (personnel, technology, or process solutions that do not require new or better facilities) Build new or renovate Probable “economic life” of processes in the building (how long before they are obsolete or require complete upgrading or replacement?) Approaches to expansion, flexibility, adaptability Major program elements and performance requirements Site selection

Programming and design concepts

• • • • • • • •

Functional analyses Building configuration, footprint, and massing Basic layout and compartmentation approaches Siting and orientation Envelope and fenestration concepts Underground construction Interstitial space (floors, utility corridors, etc.) Pre-engineered or coordinated systems

Design development: Structure

• • •

Subsystems selection, modules, bay sizes Integration of mechanical systems Exposed vs. covered

Design development: Envelope

• • •

Energy conservation features Daylighting and shading elements Cleaning devices and equipment

Design development: Interior construction

• • •

Demountability and flexibility Built-in furnishings Finishes

Design development: Mechanical and electrical systems

• • • • • • •

Individual units vs. distributed systems Zoning and layout concepts Lighting and daylighting Active and passive solar systems Energy management systems Heat/waste recovery systems Efficiency decisions

Sitework

• • •

Paving and ground cover decisions Parking alternatives Lighting

Bidding and Construction

• • •

Redesign as part of construction contract negotiation Analysis of contractor-proposed substitutions Design changes during construction

Commissioning and Start-up

• • •

Testing and turnover of building systems Maintenance programming and training Tenant-related design decisions

Project in use

• • •

Decisions on building repairs, replacements, upgrades Space reallocation and reorganization Refurbishing and renovation

Project definition and scope

• • •

Investment-related decisions are made at every step, from the earliest judgment to build or not to build, and continue as the project is designed, constructed, and commissioned. Sometimes these decisions are based on formal financial feasibility studies, such as those done to seek financing for commercial and institutional projects. Once the building is in operation, the cycle begins each time the owner considers whether and how to invest in reconfiguration, new technology, major maintenance, systems upgrades, or complete renovation of the building to meet new needs (Table 2). Baseline Cost Most new construction projects have a built-in cost that establishes a kind of investment baseline. While the variety of conditions under

which projects are conceived, constructed, and operated make this baseline number hard to isolate, there are some fundamental forces at work creating project cost: •

•

The fundamental characteristics of the product. Buildings are large and provide high levels of performance. Inherently costly, they must be durable and last a long time, requiring continuos maintenance and adding to their expense. Building code requirements. Codes set structural, habitation, fire safety, accessibility, energy, and environmental requirements that must be met. Perhaps 80 percent or more of a project’s standards and costs are established by such regulations and cannot be reduced. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

161

13 Building economics Table 3. Discount factors and their formulas Key:

P single present sum F single future sum A recurring annual sum

Factor Formula (for tables) Formula (spreadsheet format)

•

•

D discount rate N number of time periods ^ raise to power

Description

Example situation

Single Compound Amount (SCA) F=P*SCA F=P*((1+D)^n)

The future value (F) of a present sum (P)

What is the future sum of a single amount saved today?

Single Present Worth (SPW) P=F*SPW P=F*(1/((1+D)^n)

The present value (P) of a future sum (F)

What is the present value of a future replacement?

Uniform Compound Amount (UCA) F=A*UCA F=A*((((1+D)^n)-1)/D)

The future value (F) of a series of annual payments (A)

What future sum will be achieved if a sum is added each year to a replacement reserve?

Uniform Sinking Fund (USF) A=F*USF A=F*(D/(((1+D)^N)-1))

The annual payment (A) required to achieve a future sum (F)

What is the annual amount needed to achieve a future replacement cost?

Uniform Present Worth (UPW) P=A*UPW P=A*((((1+D)^N)-1)/(D*(1+D)^N))

The present worth (P) of a sum of annual payments (A)

What is the present value of annual energy costs?

Uniform Capital Recovery (UCR) A=P*UCR A=P*((D*(1+D)^N)/(((1+D)^N)-1))

The annual payment (A) required to achieve a present sum (P)

What is the annual payment required to pay off a mortgage?

Program requirements. The owner’s scope, quality, and time requirements establish a “value profile” that may well exceed code and regulatory requirements. Site and location. The site offers its own access, topographic, and geotechnical challenges; it also situates the project within a specific—and often demanding—set of planning, zoning, and environmental regulations.

While it is difficult to isolate a specific project’s baseline cost, it is not so hard to identify this cost for a large class of similar buildings. For example, a scan of building construction cost data such as data published by R. S. Means provides a useful overview of the range of costs as a function of building type. Design Decisions and Life Cycle Cost Analysis Even with a baseline cost, owners and designers make many choices influencing construction and operating costs. While building codes place restrictions, they offer choices of construction materials and systems, requiring that buildings be made of noncombustible elements if they are to be larger or taller. While codes may limit heat loss to conserve energy, they do not stop owners and designers from going further, adding conservation features that, among other benefits, reduce energy costs over the life of the building. Finally, a building’s value profile—levels of quality and amenity above the baseline—may vary substantially from one project to the next. At every step, designers have choices to make, and many of these have economic consequences for the building or for those using it. Some of these design decisions involve costs and/or benefits spread over time. Design alternatives may have different initial construction costs as well as different patterns of continuing costs or savings. To assess the economic consequences of selecting one option or another,

162


it is necessary to summarize and relate these costs and savings over time. Life cycle cost analysis (engineering economics) is an economic decision process that assists in deciding among alternative building investments by comparing the significant differential costs of ownership over a given time period and in equivalent dollars. The key lies in “equivalent dollars.” Money has time value; a dollar spent today has different value from a dollar required five years from now. As a simple example, consider two options, one of which costs $1,000 today and another costing $700 today and requiring another $300 five years from now. Selecting the first requires $1,000 now. The second requires $700 and a $235 deposit in a savings account that earns 5% annual interest. Interest earned on the $235 brings the account to $300 in five years. As a result, the second option requires only $935 in today’s dollars. Here is another view of money’s time value. An efficient energy system costs an extra $10,000 to purchase and install, and it will save an estimated $1,000 a year in energy costs. A simple calculation suggests the extra cost is paid back in ten years. The owner, however, will have to add the $10,000 to the construction budget—and then finance it. With a 20-year, 10% mortgage, the extra $10,000 requires an annual debt service of $1,175—a cost that exceeds the $1,000 savings! Accounting for the time value of money—“discounting”—involves the use of the formulas in Table 3. These formulas can be used to convert a single future value into present dollars (e.g., the $300 required five years from now in the first example above becomes $235 in today’s dollars given a 5% interest rate) or to convert a present sum (the extra $10,000 required in the second example) into an annual cost (the $1,175 in the same example) given a time period and an

Building economics 13 Table 4. Discount tables (excerpts) Single Present Worth SPW n 4% 6% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0.962 0.925 0.889 0.855 0.822 0.790 0.760 0.731 0.703 0.676 0.650 0.625 0.601 0.577 0.555 0.534 0.513 0.494 0.475 0.456

0.943 0.890 0.840 0.792 0.747 0.705 0.665 0.627 0.592 0.558 0.527 0.497 0.469 0.442 0.417 0.394 0.371 0.350 0.331 0.312

8% 0.926 0.857 0.794 0.735 0.681 0.630 0.583 0.540 0.500 0.463 0.429 0.397 0.368 0.340 0.315 0.292 0.270 0.250 0.232 0.215

Uniform Present Worth UPW

Find: P (a nonrecurring present amount) Knowing: F (a nonrecurring future amount) 10% 12% 15% 20% 25% 0.909 0.826 0.751 0.683 0.621 0.564 0.513 0.467 0.424 0.386 0.350 0.319 0.290 0.263 0.239 0.218 0.198 0.180 0.164 0.149

0.893 0.797 0.712 0.636 0.567 0.507 0.452 0.404 0.361 0.322 0.287 0.257 0.229 0.205 0.183 0.163 0.146 0.130 0.116 0.104

0.870 0.756 0.658 0.572 0.497 0.432 0.376 0.327 0.284 0.247 0.215 0.187 0.163 0.141 0.123 0.107 0.093 0.081 0.070 0.061

0.833 0.694 0.579 0.482 0.402 0.335 0.279 0.233 0.194 0.162 0.135 0.112 0.093 0.078 0.065 0.054 0.045 0.038 0.031 0.026

0.800 0.640 0.512 0.410 0.328 0.262 0.210 0.168 0.134 0.107 0.086 0.069 0.055 0.044 0.035 0.028 0.023 0.018 0.014 0.012

Find: P (a nonrecurring present amount) Knowing: A (a recurring annual amount)

n

4%

6%

8%

10%

12%

15%

20%

25%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0.962 1.886 2.775 3.630 4.452 5.242 6.002 6.733 7.435 8.111 8.760 9.385 9.986 10.563 11.118 11.652 12.166 12.659 13.134 13.590

0.943 1.833 2.673 3.465 4.212 4.917 5.582 6.210 6.802 7.360 7.887 8.384 8.853 9.295 9.712 10.106 10.477 10.828 11.158 11.470

0.926 1.783 2.577 3.312 3.993 4.623 5.206 5.747 6.247 6.710 7.139 7.536 7.904 8.244 8.559 8.851 9.122 9.372 9.604 9.818

0.909 1.736 2.487 3.170 3.791 4.355 4.868 5.335 5.759 6.145 6.495 6.814 7.103 7.367 7.606 7.824 8.022 8.201 8.365 8.514

0.893 1.690 2.402 3.037 3.605 4.111 4.564 4.968 5.328 5.650 5.938 6.194 6.424 6.628 6.811 6.974 7.120 7.250 7.366 7.469

0.870 1.626 2.283 2.855 3.352 3.784 4.160 4.487 4.772 5.019 5.234 5.421 5.583 5.724 5.847 5.954 6.047 6.128 6.198 6.259

0.833 1.528 2.106 2.589 2.991 3.326 3.605 3.837 4.031 4.192 4.327 4.439 4.533 4.611 4.675 4.730 4.775 4.812 4.843 4.870

0.800 1.440 1.952 2.362 2.689 2.951 3.161 3.329 3.463 3.571 3.656 3.725 3.780 3.824 3.859 3.887 3.910 3.928 3.942 3.954

Uniform Capital Recovery UCR

Find: A (a recurring annual amount) Knowing: P (a nonrecurring present amount) Also known as the mortgage constant (k)

n

4%

6%

8%

10%

12%

15%

20%

25%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1.040 0.530 0.360 0.275 0.225 0.191 0.167 0.149 0.134 0.123

1.060 0.545 0.374 0.289 0.237 0.203 0.179 0.161 0.147 0.136

1.080 0.561 0.388 0.302 0.250 0.216 0.192 0.174 0.160 0.149

1.100 0.576 0.402 0.315 0.264 0.230 0.205 0.187 0.174 0.163

1.120 0.592 0.416 0.329 0.277 0.243 0.219 0.201 0.188 0.177

1.150 0.615 0.438 0.350 0.298 0.264 0.240 0.223 0.210 0.199

1.200 0.655 0.475 0.386 0.334 0.301 0.277 0.261 0.248 0.239

1.250 0.694 0.512 0.423 0.372 0.339 0.316 0.300 0.289 0.280

11 12 13 14 15

0.114 0.107 0.100 0.095 0.090

0.127 0.119 0.113 0.108 0.103

0.140 0.133 0.127 0.121 0.117

0.154 0.147 0.141 0.136 0.131

0.168 0.161 0.156 0.151 0.147

0.191 0.184 0.179 0.175 0.171

0.231 0.225 0.221 0.217 0.214

0.273 0.268 0.265 0.262 0.259

16 17 18 19 20

0.086 0.082 0.079 0.076 0.074

0.099 0.095 0.092 0.090 0.087

0.113 0.110 0.107 0.104 0.102

0.128 0.125 0.122 0.120 0.117

0.143 0.140 0.138 0.136 0.134

0.168 0.165 0.163 0.161 0.160

0.211 0.209 0.208 0.206 0.205

0.257 0.256 0.255 0.254 0.253


163

13 Building economics Table 5. Life Cycle Cost Analysis in Eight Steps Step

Issues and Guidance

Step 1 Establish design options

Focus on important design decisions where: • Substantial dollars are involved • There are clear design alternatives and choices • Continuing costs and/or benefits differ among choices • Initial and continuing costs and benefits can be estimated and translated to dollars

Step 2 Establish owner’s timeframe

When is the present (year 0) and how long into the future should costs and/or benefits be considered? • Year 0 is usually the project development period • Disregard already-incurred (“sunk”) costs prior to year 0 • Tie the analysis timeframe to the owner’s investment objectives; often this is 5 to 20 years rather than 50 to 100 years • May want to consider multiple timeframes to isolate a future “breakeven” point where the decision changes from one choice to another

Step 3 Establish owner’s investment goals

Establish the discount rate for the analysis; may be • Cost of borrowing funds (interest rate) • Opportunity cost • Minimum attractive rate of return • Specified by a government agency Establish owner’s approach to handling: • Inflation and escalation • Rates of return (before-tax, after-tax, etc.) Present single nonrecurring costs (P) • Purchase and installation • Associated design costs

Step 4: Decide which costs (savings) to include Salvage value in Year 18 = $7,5K

Step 5 Diagram costs and savings Usual conventions: Costs are down arrows; savings are up (see diagram at right)

2

3

4

5

6

7

Include only costs or savings that differ among the alternatives being considered

Refurbishing in Year 10 = $15K

Initial cost = $40K 1

Annual recurring costs or savings (A) • Energy • Maintenance • Other operating costs

Annual Savings Years 11-18 = $10K

Annual cost = $10K Years 1-10

0

Future single nonrecurring costs (F) • Repairs and replacements (what years?) • Salvage value

8

9

10

11 12 13 14

15 16 17

18

Bring all costs and savings to their present worth costs • Present sums stated at their full value • Future and annual recurring sums brought to P

Step 6 Establish the measure of total life cycle cost

OR bring all costs and savings to a uniform annual cost • Annual recurring costs stated at their full value • Present and future single sums brought to A Step 7 Do the analysis

Use these factors (see Table 4)

Step 8 Reflect upon, interpret, and present the results

Find P P A A F F


Use SPW UPW UCR USF SCA UCA

Single Present Worth Uniform Present Worth Uniform Capital Recovery Uniform Sinking Fund Single Compound Amount Uniform Compound Amount

Take time to answer these important questions: • • • • • •

164

Given F A P F P A

Are the right alternatives and costs being considered? Are the investment assumptions appropriate? Do the results appear to be logical? How sensitive are the results to changes in future costs or savings? inflation and escalation? variations in timeframe and discount rate? How best to formulate and present the results? What are the important noneconomic issues and how might they influence the decision?


Table. 6. Example life cycle cost analysis

The designer is considering two alternative energy systems. Alternative A costs $12,000 to purchase and install; annual energy costs are expected to be $2,000 a year, and the system requires $6,000 in replacements ten years from now. Alternative B costs $20,000 to purchase and install, requires no significant replacement, and incurs energy costs of $500 a year. Which is the more economical choice? Key assumptions: • • • •

The owner expects to borrow all funds (including the extra purchase costs of Alternative B) at 10%, and asks you to use this discount rate. The owner expects to own the facility for at least 15 years and asks you to use this analysis timeframe. Other relevant costs e.g., routine maintenance) are equal for the two alternatives. Energy costs will not escalate.

Life Cycle Cost Analysis, bringing all costs to present terms (P): ALTERNATIVE A Present Worth : Purchase (P) Replacement (F) Annual energy (A)

$12,000 6,000 2,000

= x x

already stated as a present sum 0.386 (SPW,10%,10 yrs) = 7.606 (UPW,10%,15 yrs) = Total Present Worth Cost

$ 12,000 2,316 15,212 $ 29,528

ALTERNATIVE B Purchase (P) Annual energy (A)

$20,000 500

= x

already stated as a present sum 7.616 (UPW,10%,15 yrs) = Total Present Worth Cost

COMPARISON: Alternative B has the lowest life cycle cost by:

$ 20,000 3,803 $ 23,803 $ 5,725

Note: To consider annual escalation (e.g., for the annual energy cost), it is possible to use a Uniform Present Worth Modified (UPWM) factor, which includes an escalation rate. In this example, this step is not really necessary because any annual escalation in energy cost will add more total present worth cost to Alternative A than to B, making A even less economical.

interest—or “discount”—rate. Because the discount formulas raise very small numbers to large powers, it is common to use computers or tables such as excerpted in Table 4. Doing life cycle cost analyses requires the eight steps outlined in Table 5. Diagramming (Step 5) is, of course, optional but it helps the analyst sort out recurring and nonrecurring costs and savings over time in more complex analyses. Life cycle cost analysis has many uses and applications. The example in Table 6 translates all costs, including nonrecurring future costs (F) as well as recurring annual costs (A) into present (P) dollars. The alternative with the lowest total present value—or total present worth cost—is the most economical choice. This can be used to make the selection, or it can be used to measure the cost of making a less economical but overall better design choice. The technique can also be used as part of internal rate of return (at what discount rate do two alternatives have equal economic value?) and breakeven (at what point in the future do two alternatives have equal economic value?) Representative impacts for life cycle cost elements are summarized in Figs. 1 and 2 on the succeeding pages (after Kirk and Dell’Isola, 1995).


165


Table 7. Budgeting and estimating approaches

Project stage

General approaches

Sources of information, techniques, systerms

Project budgeting Budget evaluation Program evaluation Early conceptual design

Units of program Area (square foot) Volume (cubic foot)

Owner experience Published averages, medians Architect, builder experience

Order-of-magnitude (area modified for size, location)

Means order-of-magnitude estimate

Economic value models

Financial feasibility analysis

Simple parametric models

Comparables and appraisal techniques, e.g., Boeckh, Dodge, Marshall & Swift

Later conceptual design Early schematic design

Complex parametric models based on initial subsystems analysis and selection

Systems-based estimates, e.g., Means Square Foot Costs Dodge systems estimating

Later schematic design Design development

Subsystems evaluation and estimating

Assemblies-based systems, e.g., Means Assemblies Cost Data Dodge Systems Costs VNR Design Cost File

Construction and bidding documents

Unit-in-place estimates for key detail design decisions

Contractor or CM cost files

Detailed construction cost estimate

Bidding, award and construction

Unit-in-place systems, e.g., Means Construction Cost Data Dodge Pricing & Scheduling Manual

Pre-bid estimate

VNR Building Cost File Lee Saylor Construction Costs

Detailed estimates for proposed substitutions, change orders, special field problems, and claims

Contractor or CM cost files

Construction Budgets and Estimates At various points in a project’s evolution, and certainly as part of any life cycle cost analysis, it is necessary to forecast the cost of the project or one or more of its aspects. Budgeting begins by understanding what costs will likely be incurred, when they will arise, and who is responsible for managing them. Construction cost—the cost of the materials, on-site labor, equipment, and contractor’s overhead and profit—is only part of the total project budget. As suggested in Table 1, the total budget may include costs of site acquisition, development, and holding as well as a variety of project development costs which may, themselves, represent a 25 percent addition to construction cost. Project budgets are, in fact, the earliest cost estimates for a project. As more is known about the design of the project, cost estimating can become more informed and complete. Table 7 summarizes some of the methods available at various points in a project’s evolution.

166



Fig. 1. Relative values of (a) first cost, (b) maintenance, (c) energy cost, and (d) replacement cost.

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)


167


Fig. 2. Life cycle cost distribution—typical office building (Kirk and Dell’Isola, 1995).

168


Estimating and design cost analysis 14

14

Estimating and design cost analysis Robert P. Charette Brian Bowen


169

14 Estimating and design cost analysis

170


EstimatingEstimating and design costcost analysis and design analysis 14 14

Summary: UNIFORMAT II provides a classification and systematic approach for estimating and design cost analysis. The classification is outlined, including a comparison of design vs. construction estimate objectives, building and sitework elements, sources of cost data, and a worked example of design cost analysis.

Key words: assemblies, building elements classification, cost estimates, preliminary design, systems, UNIFORMAT II. 1

Introduction

Need for a classification of building elements The building industry needs a format or classification framework to serve as a consistent reference for the description, analysis, evaluation, monitoring, and management of facilities during their life cycle, from the planning, feasibility and design stages through to construction, occupancy and disposal. A classification of building elements such as UNIFORMAT II provides an approach to meeting these objectives. Building elements are traditionally defined as major components, common to most buildings, that perform a given function, regardless of the design specification, construction method, or materials used. In practice, an element may be any part of a logical work breakdown structure whose purpose is to control project scope, cost, time and quality. The development of the first elemental classification is attributed to the British Ministry of Education following the post World War II school-expansion program. The methodology was adapted to construction programs in other British Commonwealth countries, such as Canada, and then to the United States in the early 1970s. In 1973, the American Institute of Architects undertook to develop an elemental estimating format called MASTERCOST. In conjunction with the General Services Administration, a consensus format named UNIFORMAT was produced. Though not an official national standard, it has since formed the basis for any elemental format called for in the United States. In 1989, the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) Sub-Committee E06.81 on Building Economics appointed a task group to develop a UNIFORMAT standard. In 1992, the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) issued a special publication (Bowen, Charette, and Marshall 1992), in which the name UNIFORMAT II was selected to emphasize that it is an elemental classification similar to the original UNIFORMAT. Improvements based on experience since its first inception made it more comprehensive, particularly with respect to mechanical systems and sitework. In 1992, the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) issued an interim edition of UNIFORMAT based on the work in progress of ASTM. CSI also published a practice entitled “FF/180 - Preliminary Project Descriptions and Outline Specifications“ which recommended the use

of an elemental project description (specification) based on UNIFORMAT at the schematic design phase. The objective of the classification format was to improve communications and coordination among all parties involved in a project, particularly between the design team and the client. The ASTM standard was approved in 1993 and designated E 1557-93 “Standard Classification for Building Elements and Related Sitework - UNIFORMAT II.“ In 1996, revisions were made (ASTM 1996), providing a distinctive alpha-numeric designation for the elements similar to that incorporated by CSI (1992). Designated as E-1557-96, the newly revised ASTM classification of elements is listed in Table 1. The objective for establishing UNIFORMAT as a national and international standard was to provide a degree of consistency in cost planning, cost control, and estimating during the programming and design phases of a project. The Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) recommends UNIFORMAT II for schematic phase preliminary project descriptions. Numerous applications demonstrate that the classification system can provide a link between all phases of facilities programming and design and for all phases of the life cycle of a project, including construction and operations. Element selection criteria The following criteria are the basis for deciding what items to include as elements in the classification and in which parts of the classification to assign or list them. •

The UNIFORMAT II classification is applicable to any building type, while allowing for details appropriate for specialized buildings or cases. The classification of building elements is separate from the classification of building-related sitework. The classification is hierarchical to allow different levels of cost analysis, aggregation and summarization. It is easily related and/or referenced to other elemental classifications such as the original UNIFORMAT and the classification of the Canadian Institute of Quantity Surveyors (CIQS).

•

Items to be included in the classification are determined as any element that has bearing on project cost, significant either in magnitude or quantity and which help in understanding constructability and cost. Elemental categories provide a framework for cost control and other applications such as early design specifications. The

Authors: Robert P. Charette, P. E., CVS and Brian Bowen, FRICS Credits: Roger J. Grant of R. S. Means Company provided the office building data for the worked example estimates in this article. References: ASTM 1996. Standard Classification for Building Elements and Related Sitework - UNIFORMAT II. ASTM Designation E155796. West Conshohocken, PA: American Society for Testing and Materials. Additional references appear at the end of this article. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

171


Table 1. UNIFORMAT II Classification

172


Estimating and design cost analysis 14 decision as to where, to include specific items among various categories or classification elements is based on professional judgment. If it is not obvious based on where a particular item may logically be placed in the building system, a simple guideline is to choose that classification category or element where design and building professionals in current practice normally look for such items. •

UNIFORMAT II is not intended to classify elements of major civil works other than buildings. It is obviously based upon the definition of elements in the construction of buildings. The UNIFORMAT II classification of building-related sitework has been developed to provide a compatible system for guidance so that planners of the larger infrastructure related to buildings do not have to resort to multiple elemental classifications for one project.

Description of UNIFORMAT II elements Tables B-1 and B-2 (See Appendix B-10) present the UNIFORMAT II classification, as building and building-related sitework, respectively and given as three hierarchical levels: -

Level 1 for major group elements. Level 2 for group elements. Level 3 for individual elements.

A full description or index of specific items included and excluded at Level 3 is provided in ASTM (1996). Listings of inclusions and exclusions are not intended to be exhaustive. Rather, they provide a general outline of what to expect in that element consistent with the selection criteria outlined above. Exclusions are listed to help readers find items quickly. An example of inclusions and exclusions presented in the standard is shown in Table 2 for A10 Foundations.

Table 2. Description of UNIFORMAT II

Elements for A10 - Foundations (after ASTM Standard E1557-96).

A 1010 - Standard Foundations Includes

Excludes

° °

°

° ° ° ° ° °

wall and column foundations foundation walls up to level of top of slab on grade anchor plates pile caps foundation excavation backfill and compaction footings and bases perimeter insulation perimeter drainage

° ° °

general excavation to reduce levels (see G1030 -Site Earthwork) excavation for basements (see A2010-Basement Excavation) basement walls (see A2020 Basement Walls) under-slab drainage and insulation (see A1030-Slab on Grade)

A 1020 - Special Foundations Includes

Excludes

° ° ° ° ° °

°

piling caissons underpinning dewatering raft foundations any other special foundation conditions

°

pile caps (see A1010 - Standard Foundations) rock excavation unless associated with Special Foundations (see A1010Standard Foundations and A2010 - Basement Excavation)

A 1030 - Slab on Grade Includes

Excludes

° ° ° ° ° °

°

structural inclined slabs on grade trenches and pits bases under-slab drainage under-slab insulation

°

standard applied floor finishes (see C3020 - Floor Finishes) hardeners and sealers to the slab (see C3020 - Floor Finishes)


173

14 Estimating and design cost analysis 2

Design versus construction estimates

Overview Building design and construction estimates in North America are based either on a product classification, in which case costs are listed by materials quantities independent of their place in the construction assembly or an elemental classification (also referred to as an “assemblies” or” systems” classification) in which case costs are directly attributable to component and assembly quantities. Construction estimates based on product classification most commonly reference the CSI/CSC MASTERFORMAT Divisions 1-16, whose primary application is for construction documents-phase specifications. This classification system, widely adopted in the building trades, derives from contractor practices for convenience of price quotations from traditional construction materials/product sources, that is the specifications are used as the key reference in contractor estimates and bid proposals. Many trades incorporate products from more than one CSI/CSC Division. Therefore, MASTERFORMAT is not to be considered a non-redundant “trade classification.” MASTERFORMAT may also be used for design estimates because specifications are based on MASTERFORMAT. Given the emphasis now being placed on limited project budgets defined in design phases if not before, and the need for designers to clearly understand costs related to their early planning and design decisions, the UNIFORMAT classification is more suitable for design cost analysis and budget control. UNIFORMAT II estimates are structured to facilitate design cost analysis and monitoring from the programming phase through to completion of working drawings. Costing based on components, assemblies and systems permit a designer to understand costs based on design decisions directly at hand. Furthermore, early design specifications based on UNIFORMAT II can be directly linked to the specification. A caution, however, is that due to the differences noted, such estimates are not recommended for preparing trade estimates and are not a substitute for MASTERFORMAT.

•

Element cost data sources Element costs are obtained from published cost manuals, historical cost data, or built up from assembly and component costs. •

Published elemental cost data. The annual R. S. Means “Assemblies Cost Data“ manual provides element and assemblies costs. Although currently structured according to the original UNIFORMAT, the data can readily be used for UNIFORMAT II estimates as in the example presented below.

•

The annual R. S. Means “Square Foot Cost Data“ manual also includes an assemblies section based on the original UNIFORMAT, as do other annual cost manuals, including R. S. Means Mechanical and Electrical cost manuals. For example, Fig. 1 illustrates a brick face and concrete block insulated wall (Element B2010) priced at $20.40 per square foot. Fig. 2 illustrates a slab-on-grade (Element A1010) priced at $2.73 per square foot. (Note that unit costs include all sub-contractor mark-ups, but not the General Contractor percentage for general conditions, overhead and profit.)

•

Historical elemental cost data. Historical costs from similar projects adjusted for inflation are a valuable source of data input for elemental estimates. Such data will be most easily used if structured in the same format as UNIFORMAT II. Percentages for allowances, contingencies, escalation, and overhead and profit should be formatted in a consistent manner. Given the criticality of cost assumptions, unit costs assumptions might be reviewed with experienced builders and construction managers and, in critical cases verified by site observation of total time and materials utilization for similar elements and assemblies.

•

Built-up elemental cost data. Elemental costs can be built up from component and assemblies costs. Figs. 1 and 2 illustrate how costs are built up from component costs for B2010 - Exterior Walls and A1010 - Slab on Grade. In the case of B1020 - Floor Construction, the element cost would be built-up from assembly costs for the floor structure and the columns.

3

Elemental estimate example

Elemental estimate objectives Using UNIFORMAT II to structure elemental estimates during the programming and design phases of a project will assist in: •

174

Breaking down construction tasks into a simple, logical, hierarchical Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) of elements / systems / assemblies, that follows the construction sequence. Having a suitable WBS established early and consistently developed throughout the project is one of the basic principles of effective project management.

•

Preparing relatively simple but overall accurate estimates during programming and early design, which find their validity in the accuracy and currency of the element cost figures. Readily assessing the costs of major changes at any phase of programming and design, evidenced by the record of design drawings.

•

Indicating the anticipated quality level of a building and its elements, by reference to both design specification and cost impact reflected in the element unit rates and providing effective design cost analysis based on the parameters and ratios generated in the system summaries.

•

Setting Design-to-Cost (DTC) targets for each discipline based on the facilities program estimate and establishing effective monitoring of costs element by element from the facilities programming phase through completion of final design (the audit trail).

•

Identifying cost overruns and clarifying design and specification alternatives at the earliest possible so that corrective action may be initiated without delay.


Reutilizing, verifying and updating cost data from previous projects to develop data base of accurate, realistic, elemental budgets for future projects (cf. Parker and Dell’Isola 1991).

Office building example A simple office building described in Fig. 3 illustrates the application of the UNIFORMAT II classification for estimating, The building has eight floor levels above ground level, one basement parking level, and a total gross floor area of 54,000 sq. ft. A brief description or outline specification based on the UNIFORMAT II classification is presented in the caption, which links the estimate directly to the specification, thereby improving project team communications and coordination. The estimate summaries are presented in four distinct tables to facilitate design cost analysis. •

Table 3 illustrates an example element cost calculation for floor finishes, with rates based on U. S. averages costs.

•

Table 4 is an example building elemental cost summary. This is a stand alone estimate that provides the total estimated cost of the building (including all contingencies, escalation, overhead and profit) as well as analytic parameters and ratios for design cost analysis, i.e., the total estimated cost for the building only is readily identified, i.e., $4,781,072 ($88.54 per sq. ft. of gross ft. area.

•

Table 5 indicates an example sitework elemental cost summary. This is also a stand alone estimate that allows total estimated

Estimating and design cost analysis 14 sitework costs to be treated as a distinct separate entity from the building costs, i.e., $208,012. •

Table 6 is an example total construction cost summary., with a breakdown of costs and percentages to analyze the total construction cost of $4,989,084.

With design estimates formatted in a consistent manner from programming phase through to final design and from project to project, communications and coordination among team members is improved. The elemental cost summaries shown in the example tabulations incorporate the features that facilitate this result, e.g.: -

Element units of measurement are consistent, allowing unit costs to be readily analyzed.

-

Client and owner representatives can submit comments earlier because their quality expectations are described in the outline specifications and are reflected in the element unit rates presented to them.

-

Numerous parameters and ratios are generated to allow effective design cost analysis.

Element units of measurement For most elements, appropriate units of measurement can be selected to allow elemental unit rates to be developed for cost analysis. For example: A1010 - Standard Foundations are measured in terms of footprint area (FPA). The cost of A1010 in the example is $30,433 and based on an element quantity of 6,000 SF FPA. The unit rate is $5.07 / SF per unit FPA, a meaningful number for cost analysis. B3010 - Roof Coverings are measured in terms of roof area (SF). The cost in the example is $17,506 and based on an element quantity of 6,000 SF of roof area the unit rate is $2.92 / SF roof area. C1010 - Partitions are measured in terms of the area of partitions (SF). The cost in the example is $160,846 and based on an element quantity of 28,979 SF. The unit rate is $5.55 per SF (note that in the summary, the rate is the average unit cost of partitions). D3030 - Cooling Generation is measured in terms of tons refrigeration (TR). The cost in the example is $137,200, and based on a 150ton chiller plant. The unit rate is $915 per TR.

Table 3. Element Costs for C3020 - Floor Finishes.

Code [1]

Description

Qty (SF)

Rate ($)

Cost ($)

C3020

Floor Finishes

37,350

3.74 [2]

139,791.00

6.6-100-0060

Office Carpeting

33,075

3.31

109,478.25

6.6-100-1100

Terrazzo for lobby, corridor and toilet rooms

2,175

7.41

16,116.75

Ceramic tiles for washrooms

2,100

6.76

14,196.00

6.6-100-1720 Notes:

[1] The Code designations for line items are from 1997 R. S. Means “Assemblies Cost Data“ manual. [2] The resulting rate of $3.74 / SF of finished floor area shown for element C3020-Floor Finishes, is an average rate for the element based on the total quantity and total cost of floor finishes.


175


176




177


Fig. 1. Element B2010 - Exterior wall components

Source: Means (1997).

178



Fig. 2. Element A1010 - Slab-on-grade components

Source: Means (1997).


179

14 Estimating and design cost analysis Fig. 3. Example - office building plans and elevation (source: R. S. Means 1997).

Example office building and sitework description. GENERAL: Building size - 60' x 100', 8 floors, 12' floor-to-floor height, 4' high parapet, full basement with 11'-8" floor to floor, bay size 25' x 30', ceiling heights - 9' in office area and 8' in core area. One acre site. A10 FOUNDATIONS - Concrete spread and strip footings, 4" concrete slab on grade. A20 BASEMENT CONSTRUCTION - 12' high, 12" thick waterproofed basement walls, normal soil conditions for excavation. B10 SUPERSTRUCTURE - Steel columns, wide flange; 3 hr. fire rated; floors, composite steel frame and deck with concrete slab; roof, steel beams, open web joists and deck. B20 EXTERIOR CLOSURE - Walls; North, East and West, brick and lightweight concrete block with 2" cavity insulation, 25% window; South, 8" lightweight concrete block insulated, 10% window. Doors, aluminum and glass at 1st floor level, insulated automatic basement garage door. Windows, aluminum, 3'-0" x 5'-4" insulating glass. B30 ROOFING - Tar and gravel, 4 ply, 2" rigid insulation, R12.5; one roof access hatch. C10 INTERIOR CONSTRUCTION - Core - 6" lightweight concrete block partitions, full height. Corridors - 1st and 2nd floor - 3 5/8" steel studs with fire rated gypsum board, full height. Toilet partitions. Doors - hollow metal; Specialties - toilet accessories, directory board. C20 STAIRCASES - Steel with concrete fill. C30 INTERIOR FINISHES - Wall Finishes - lobby, mahogany paneling on furring, remainder plaster finish to ceiling height (partition and wall surfaces), paint. Floor Finishes - 1st floor lobby, corridors and toilet rooms, terrazzo, remainder, concrete, tenant developed 2nd thru 8th, toilet rooms, ceramic tiles, office and corridor, carpet. Ceiling Finishes - 24" x 48" fiberglass board on Tee grid. D10 CONVEYING SYSTEMS - Two 2500 lb capacity, 200 F.P.M., geared elevators, 9 stops.

180


D20 PLUMBING - Wall hung lavatories and water closets; service sinks. Gas-fired domestic hot water heater and reservoir; copper distribution piping throughout. Cast iron sanitary waste piping; drains in each washroom floor and parking level. 4" CI roof drains and PVC piping. D30 HVAC - Fire tube gas-fired water boiler and 150 ton water-cooled chiller installed in penthouse. Perimeter hot water finned tube radiation with wall to wall enclosures. 48,000 CFM built-up air handling unit for office floors. Low velocity air supply and return air distribution. 5500 CFM direct gas-fired parking garage air handling ventilation unit with air supply distribution and exhaust system. Pneumatic control system with central control. D40 FIRE PROTECTION - Standard sprinkler system in office area; dry sprinklers in basement parking area; 4" standpipe, 9 hose cabinets. D60 ELECTRICAL - Service, panel board and feeder, 2000 amps. Lighting, 1st thru 8th, 15 fluorescent fixtures / 1000 SF, 3 watts/SF. Basement 10 fluorescent fixtures / 1000 SF, 2 Watts/ SF. Receptacles 1st thru 8th, 16.5 / 1000 SF, 2 Watts/SF. Basement, 10 receptacles / 1000 SF, 1.2 Watts/SF. Air conditioning, 4 Watts/SF; miscellaneous connections 1.2 Watts/SF; Elevator power, two 10-HP 230 volt motors; wall switches, 2/1000 SF. Fire detection system, pull stations, signals, smoke and heat detectors. Emergency lighting generator, 30 KW. E10 EQUIPMENT - Automatic parking garage access gate, dock leveler, waste handling compactor. E20 FURNISHINGS - Vertical venetian blinds for all exterior windows. Washroom vanities. G SITEWORK - The one acre site (43,560 SF) must be cleared and excavated in part to obtain required elevations; paved parking stalls with barriers and painted lines; shrubs, trees and hydraulic seeding for landscaping; water supply, sanitary and storm sewers; gas service piping; underground electrical power and cabling in conduit, exterior lighting, duct bank for telephone cabling; lawn sprinkler system.

Estimating and design cost analysis 14 Element rates and quality levels Element rates are indicative of the their quality level; as a result, using cost modeling techniques, relatively accurate estimates can be prepared at the programming and schematic phases without detailed drawings. For example, based on a quality level scale of one to four developed by the General Services Administration (GSA), the costs attributed to B2010 - Exterior Walls could be selected from Table 7. Analytic parameters and ratios The following analytic parameters and ratios can be automatically generated in elemental estimate summaries: •

Cost of the element per unit gross floor area (Column “Cost Per Unit GFA“) e.g., from the example for D4010 - Sprinkler Systems, $1.60 per SF GFA.

•

The average rate for an element based on the quantity, e.g., from the example, for C3020 - Floor Finishes, the average cost / SF based on the actual quantity of 37,350 SF is $3.74.

•

Quantity of the element per unit gross floor area (ratio “Qty/GFA“) e.g., from the example for C1010 - Partitions, 0.54 SF per SF GFA.

•

Percentage trade cost of Level 2 Group Elements (Column “% Trade Cost“) e.g., from the example the cost of D50 - Electrical is 18.9% of the total building cost.

An understanding of parameters and ratios, that can be developed from documentation and experience, will facilitate the preparation of elemental budget estimates and the rapid analysis of detailed elemental estimate summaries.

Q: For the Superstructure B10, what is the unit cost and percentage of total building construction cost? A: The unit cost $11.49 / SF and the superstructure represents 16.4% of the total building construction costs. Q: What is the unit cost of quality level of exterior walls (B2010)? A: The unit cost is $15.45 / SF, a commercial quality level (Level 3). Q: What is the ratio of partition area to GFA and how is the partition (C1010) unit elemental rate interpreted? A: The ratio is 0.54, i.e. for every square foot of floor area, there is 0.54 SF of partition; the average unit rate for partitions is $5.55 / SF, which indicates better quality than standard metal stud and gypsum partitions. Q: What is the cost per ton of the chilled water plant (D3030 - Cooling Generation Systems) and the area per ton of refrigeration? A: The cost per ton is $915, what may be expected for a water-cooled chiller system of this capacity; the area per ton is 320 SF, an average figure. Q: What is the total estimated building construction cost exclusive of taxes and unit rate per GFA? A: The total building construction cost is $4,781,000 and the cost / SF $88.54, within the range of acceptable costs for this type of building. Q: What is the parking lot surface percentage of total net site area? A: The parking lot G2020 has 18,600 SF, which is 50% of the net site area of 36,750 SF (Ratio QTY/NSA).

Allowances, contingencies, overhead and profit Allowances, contingencies and overhead and profit must be presented in a consistent manner for all estimates. A standardized presentation format for these costs will facilitate the reconciliation of estimates from different sources, a task that is usually most difficult and time consuming because they are usually calculated in any number of ways. These mark-ups could be formatted as shown in Tables B1 and B2; the format is based on a logic that facilitates cost analysis.

Q: What amounts have been included in the total construction cost of $4,989,000 for design and inflation allowances, and what percentage of the total do they represent? A: From Table B3, $209,687 has been included for a design allowance and $145,313 for inflation; these numbers represent 4.2% and 2.9% of total construction costs respectively, i.e. a total of 7.1%.

Note that construction contingencies, though part of project costs, are not included in the estimate summaries when represent the anticipated General Contractor’s bid.

Q: Does the building design GFA conform to space program requirements? A: Table B1 parameters indicate that the current design at 54,000 SF exceeds the program area of 52,000 SF by 2,000 SF or 3.7%; this is one of the first items to address in reducing the cost of the building.

4

Design cost analysis

UNIFORMAT II elemental estimate cost summaries as shown in Tables 4 to 6 provide analytic data that would be difficult if not impossible to extract from trade or MASTERFORMAT Divisions 1-16 estimates. Some of the questions that could be asked in analyzing the office building estimate example, and the answers, follow:

As seen from the above, effective design cost analysis can be performed rapidly if the data generated is suitably structured. Elements whose cost exceeds the norm can be identified early on in a project, and corrective action taken to contain costs within the allocated budget, thus avoiding time consuming and costly redesigns at a later date.

Table 7. Quality Levels and Costs for B2010 Exterior Walls.

Quality Level

Element Description

Cost ($/SF)

1. Monumental

Granite

$65.00

2. Federal

Curtain Wall

$38.00

3. Corporate

Sandwich Wall

$18.00

4. Commercial

Metal Cladding

$12.00


181

14 Estimating and design cost analysis Other applications Additional applications have emerged since the publication@of UNIFORMAT II as an ASTM standard in 1993. The range of applications extends from the planning phase of a facility to all phases of its construction and life cycle maintenance and covers: •

Facilities planning and programming. For performance specifications and design criteria, space program requirements schedules, budgeting and program estimates.

•

Facilities design. For schematic and design development phase specifications, design estimates and cost control, functional area estimates, scheduling, risk analysis (Monte Carlo simulation), filing product literature, CAD layering, code conformity analysis, and classifying construction graphic standards.

•

Building construction. For progress reports, deficiency reports, mortgage monitoring, commissioning.

•

Facilities and assets management. For maintenance planning and budgeting, building condition assessment, long term capital replacement budgeting, reserve funds, capital cost evaluation.

•

Other applications include structuring element / assemblies cost data manuals, maintenance and repair cost data manuals, life cycle costing data, and directing value engineering sessions.

Additional references Bowen, Brian, Robert Charette, and Harold Marshall. 1992. UNIFORMAT II - A Recommended Classification for Building Elements and Related Sitework. NIST Special Publication 841. Gaithersburg, VA: National Institute of Standards and Technology, Bowen, Brian. 1994. “Construction Cost Management.” The Architect’s Handbook of Professional Practice. American Institute of Architects. David Haviland, editor. Washington D. C. AIA Press. Charette, Robert and Anik Shooner. 1995. “Using UNIFORMAT II in Preliminary Design and Planning.” Chapter 25. Means Square Foot Estimating. Second Edition. Kingston, MA: R. S. Means Company. R. S. Means. 1997. Means Assemblies Cost Data Manual. Kingston, MA: R. S. Means Company. Parker, Donald E. and Dell’Isola, Alphonse J. 1991. Project Budgeting for Buildings. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold. CSI. 1992. “FF/180: Preliminary Project Descriptions and Outline Specifications.” CSI Manual of Practice. Alexandria, VA: The Construction Specifications Institute.

182


15

Environmental life cycle assessment 15

Environmental life cycle assessment Joel Ann Todd Nadav Malin Alex Wilson


183

15 Environmental life cycle assessment

184


Environmental life cycle assessment Environmental life cycle assessment 15 15

Summary: Part I provides an overview of Life Cycle Assessment as part of environmentally responsible design, defining a framework for gathering, analyzing, and organizing information so that design alternatives can be compared from an environmental perspective. Part II describes information sources and a simplified approach for environmental life cycle assessment of building materials and products.

Key words: environmental impact, materials, life cycle assessment, products, resource recovery, specifications. Part I: Environmental Life Cycle Assessment Many characteristics are currently used to define “environmental” approaches to building design, such as energy efficiency, use of materials with recycled content, and use of lower-emitting products. By focusing only on a single criterion, however, other perhaps more important environmental considerations are ignored. Further, in many cases, these approaches only consider the building in operation or the product at its point of manufacture or use; the remainder of the life cycle is often excluded. Environmental life cycle assessment (LCA) provides a way of addressing these shortcomings by looking at environmental consequences from cradle-to-grave, that is, from the extraction of raw materials used in manufacture to final disposal or reuse/recycling. Some prefer to think of LCA as “cradle-to-cradle” to emphasize the importance of re-use and recycling at the end of life. LCA also includes all types of environmental effects. This comprehensive approach distinguishes LCA from other approaches for assessing environmental preferability. LCA provides a framework for identifying all of the environmental factors and provides information that assists in assessing which designs or products are preferable overall. LCA is not a new concept. First applied to environmental and energy issues in the 1960s, it has received increasing attention in recent years. Efforts in several countries to implement environmental labeling programs have renewed the interest in LCA as a method for acquiring and analyzing data to support these programs. Further, there has been an increasing recognition that many environmental programs of the past have succeeded only in transferring pollution from one medium to another—from water to air, from air to solid waste, etc. More holistic approaches to solving environmental problems are needed. Recent emphases on pollution prevention have led those in industry and government to look beyond their own boundaries for the causes of pollution both upstream and downstream from the production process—during the entire life cycle of products and their constituents. Life cycle assessments are increasingly being used to document claims of environmental “friendliness” or to imply superiority of one product or material over another. What is life cycle thinking? Life cycle thinking is a way of approaching a decision. It considers environmental factors both upstream and downstream from the standpoint or purview of the decision maker—the architect, designer, builder, or building owner. It broadens the decision maker’s perspec-

Roman stones reused in a Tuscany village

tive and helps to answer important questions about the environmental outcomes and preferability of design alternatives. Life cycle thinking can be applied to many decisions that the architect faces. One obvious application is in the specification of materials—it provides information that helps in determining environmental preferability of material alternatives. For example, is it better from an environmental perspective to specify a locally-made product even if it is less energy efficient or one that must be transported further to the site? Life cycle thinking can help in answering such questions and can also be applied to other decisions. Other examples include: • In siting a project, what environmental burdens are associated with new infrastructure requirements for potential sites? Can a project be considered “environmentally responsible” if it is located far from its users and is not served by public transportation? • Is it better from an environmental perspective to demolish and rebuild an existing building or to renovate the existing structure? What are the trade-offs among factors such as reducing the solid waste from demolition and avoiding the life cycle impacts of new structural materials vs. potential compromises in energy efficiency? Anyone can and should engage in life cycle thinking. It does not require overly sophisticated methods or detailed databases. It simply requires the broadening perspective of life cycle thinking. What is Life Cycle Assessment? Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is a method for gathering and analyzing information to assist in answering questions such as those posed above. LCA identifies the processes, materials, and energy required during the life cycle along with the environmental burdens that occur as a result. These environmental burdens can be the result of energy production and consumption, waste generation and disposal, or natural resource use and depletion. Each process, such as mining of ore or manufacturing of a product, is examined using the template illustrated in Fig. 1. Raw or processed materials, energy, and water flow into the process, while the product (such as ore from a mining process or final product from a manufacturing process), as well as wastes, flow out of the process. LCA explores the life cycle stages defined on the next page (Fig. 2). • Material Acquisition and Preparation. This stage includes all activities that occur prior to acquisition of “feedstock” materials and pri-

Authors: Part I: Joel Ann Todd; Part II: Nadav Malin and Alex Wilson Credits: James B. White and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency have contributed to the development of this article’s approach to environmental life cycle assessment and its application to buildings and materials. References: American Institute of Architects. 1996. Environmental Resource Guide. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Additional references are contained in the body of the text and accompanying tables. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

185


Fig. 1. Life cycle assessment template

Fig. 2. Life cycle framework (after American Institute of Architects 1996)

mary resources by the manufacturer of the product or material that is the subject of study. It includes mining of ores, minerals, and rocks; extraction of petroleum and natural gas; harvesting of trees; growing and harvesting of agricultural products; and raising and slaughter or shearing of animals. It includes processing of these raw materials into the products needed by the manufacturer. This can include crushing, grinding, and calcinining of minerals and rocks; beneficiation of ores; refining of petroleum; production of chemicals; manufacture of intermediate products; and other activities. This stage also includes transportation of the materials and the acquisition of recovered and recycled materials. The major environmental issues at this stage are natural resource use and depletion, energy consumption, water consumption, and waste generation and their impacts on health and the environment. •

•

•

186

Manufacture and Fabrication. This stage includes all of the processes that convert feedstock materials into the final product to be ready for distribution and use. It includes packaging of the product. The major environmental issues at this stage are energy consumption, water consumption, and waste generation (including that used for packaging). Construction, Use, and Maintenance. This stage includes transportation of the product to the jobsite; the installation of the material in the building; maintenance requirements; and durability and anticipated life of the material. A major health and environmental issue at this stage is indoor air quality. Another important issue is the effect of the material on building energy performance (thermal, lighting, etc.) Construction waste is an issue of concern, best made into a resource recovery program. Reuse, Recycling, and Disposal. This stage includes the handling of building materials upon remodeling, renovation, or demolition of the building. Building materials constitute an enormous quantity of solid waste. In most parts of the U.S., the infrastructure for recovery and reuse or recycling of renovation and demolition waste is only now being established. Materials that are recyclable may be incorporated into components or assemblies, making their re-


covery difficult. Some building materials contain hazardous materials and must receive special treatment for disposal. Methods have been developed for conducting LCA studies by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (Vigon et al. 1993), the Society for Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry (Consoli et al. 1993 and Fava et al. 1991), and individual researchers (Curran 1996). LCA practitioners have defined four components of a complete LCA: •

A scoping and goal setting process, during which study objectives are defined and study boundaries established

-

An inventory, which identifies inputs of energy and materials as well as outputs consisting of air emissions, waterborne wastes, and solid waste at each stage of the life cycle

-

An impact assessment, which characterizes and assesses the ecological and human health impacts of inputs and outputs identified in the inventory

-

An interpretation or improvement assessment, which evaluates opportunities for prevention or reduction of environmental burdens.

These components are not conducted in a sequential, linear fashion. The impacts of interest should be considered to assist in shaping the inventory and then revisited as the inventory data are gathered and analyzed. Improvements can be identified at any point during the study. And the study scope can be narrowed or broadened in response to the information gathered. What can an LCA tell us? The LCA inventory will provide information on the total amounts of various pollutants produced during the life cycle. For example, it will enable the decision maker to compare two alternative products in terms of total greenhouse gases produced during the life cycle of each. While this can be useful, it can also be frustrating, since one product will appear to be superior in terms of one set of pollutants and a second product will appear to be superior in terms of another set of pollut-

Environmental life cycle assessment 15

Fig. 3. Sample impact chain

ants. Users of LCAs should be cautious, however, in relying on studies that aggregate all of the inventory information into one or a few final rating numbers. Although such reports may be attractive in their ease of use, they oversimplify the information and the user cannot understand what the ratings really mean. Furthermore, it might not be clear what the effects of those pollutants are—could they potentially cause cancer in an exposed population or is their effect limited to skin irritation? The LCA impact assessment is intended to provide answers to this and other similar questions. The impact assessment identifies the potential impacts that could result from the activities included in the inventory. It includes ecological impacts as well as impacts on human health that could result from environmental changes. Assessment of impact can be quite complex. The releases of wastes and consumption of resources can often lead to more than one impact, and each impact can also lead to additional impacts.

storage area for solid wastes and sludges, or alteration of land so that its productivity or habitability is changed. • Use or depletion of resources. Since most of the resources that are used during the life cycles of building materials are finite, it is important to note the depletion of resources and the effects of acquiring these resources for building material manufacture on future worldwide resource availability. Examination of impacts on resource availability focuses on non-renewable resources, defined as those that are not being replaced or are being replaced over such a long time frame that it is not relevant to human beings. An important component of this definition is that the resource is not merely able to be replaced but that it is being replaced. •

Impacts from the processes in the life cycle can include effects on the atmosphere and air quality, surface and groundwater quality and availability, and land or soil quality and availability. Depletion of resources and effects on habitats and biodiversity are also included. Specifically, we must consider: •

•

•

Atmosphere and air quality. Potential impacts include stratospheric ozone depletion, contribution to the greenhouse effect and global warming, degradation of visibility, addition of toxic and hazardous substances, contribution to ground-level ozone or smog, acidification, and odors. The first two impacts are global in nature; the others are more localized. These impacts could also affect the health of plant and animal species, including humans. They could also have effects on the built environment and the social and economic structure of communities. Quality and availability of surface water and groundwater. Potential impacts include acidification, eutrophication (or increase in nutrients, often with oxygen deficiency), nitrification, thermal changes, increases in turbidity, contamination with toxic or hazardous substances, chemical alteration, and depletion. These impacts could result in further impacts on aquatic communities, including changes in productivity, reduced reproduction, disease, and death, and on human health and welfare, including changes in morbidity and mortality, as well as loss of economic and recreational resources. Most water quality impacts occur on a regional or local scale and are dependent on regional or local characteristics of receiving waters. Quality and availability of land and soil. Potential impacts include acidification, erosion and changes in geomorphology, soil compaction, and alteration of soil chemistry (including chemical transformations and depletion of nutrients). It also includes removal of land from available stock, for use as a landfill or other

Habitat alteration or loss. Alteration or loss of habitat and subsequent effects on biodiversity and individual species relates changes in the water, air, or land to potential effects on animal and/or plant communities, with particular emphasis on those that are rare or endangered. This category of impact is receiving more emphasis as people become more aware and concerned about the importance and value of maintaining biodiversity and preventing the extinction of species as well as minimizing the disruption of ecosystems whenever possible.

These environmental impacts can also affect human health. LCA can identify effects on human health in three areas: •

Potential impacts on workers and installers. Effects can result from exposure to chemicals, dust, and other potential health hazards.

•

Potential impacts on building occupants or users. This area focuses on indoor air quality and its effects on building users (occupants, tenants, visitors, and maintenance workers), a topic of considerable concern to architects and designers.

•

Potential impacts on the community or general population. In many cases, the information available on possible human health effects of the chemicals or other materials released during the life cycle of the building material is more generic. This information is based on laboratory testing and other studies, and generally relates the effects to dosage or exposure levels.

The LCA cannot tell the decision maker what the “correct” decision is. LCA can only contribute information to assist in the decision. The key is to begin to incorporate life cycle thinking into the design process. Then, the architect can seek out sources that present this information in the most useful ways. The Environmental Resource Guide (American Institute of Architects 1996) presents a streamlined approach to LCA and has made an effort to present LCA information on materials in understandable applications reports. Efforts continue to develop high quality life cycle data and to present this information in formats that can be applied to design. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

187

15 Environmental life cycle assessment Table 1. Estimated embodied energy of several insulation materials

Material

Cellulose2 Fiberglass3 Mineral wool4 EPS5 Polyiso6

Embodied Energy in Btu/lb. (MJ/kg)

750 (1.8) 12,000 (28) 6,500 (15) 32,000 (75) 30,000 (70)

Mass per insulating unit1 in lbs. (kg)

0.90 0.38 0.76 0.39 0.48

(0.41) (0.17) (0.34) (0.18) (0.22)

Embodied Energy per insulating unit in Btu (MJ)

676 (0.7) 4,550 (5) 4,950 (5) 12,700 (13) 14,300 (15)

1. “Insulating unit” refers to the mass of insulation required for R-20 for one ft2 at standard density. 2. Cellulose embodied energy data from personal communication with manufacturers. Assumes density of 2.0 lb/ft3, R-value of 3.7/inch. 3. Fiberglass embodied energy data from the final report: “Comparative Energy Evaluation of Plastic Products and Their Alternatives for the Building and Construction and Transportation Industries,” 1991, Franklin Associates, Ltd., prepared for The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. Assumes density of 0.75 lb/ft3, R-value of 3.3/inch. 4. Mineral wool embodied energy data from Roxul, Inc. Assumes density of 1.66 lb/ft3, R-value of 3.6/inch. 5. EPS embodied energy data from the German report, Lebenswegbilanz von EPS-Dämmstoff, Interdisziplinäre Forschungsgemeinschaft (InFo), Kunstoff e.V. Includes caloric Btu value of EPS. Assumes density of .94 lb/ft3, R-value of 4.0/inch. 6. Polyisocyanurate embodied energy data from the final report: “Comparative Energy Evaluation of Plastic Products and Their Alternatives for the Building and Construction and Transportation Industries,” 1991, Franklin Associates, Ltd., prepared for The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. Includes caloric Btu value of polyisocyanurate. Assumes density of 2.0 lb/ft3, R-value of 7.0/inch. Compiled by Environmental Building News, 3/21/95.

LCA and life cycle thinking allow the architect to go beyond the simplistic approaches that are based only on one or two elements, such as energy efficiency or recycling. There is no cookbook for environmentally responsible design, but LCA and life cycle thinking provide critical questions and useful tools to better inform the design process. Part I: references Consoli, F., D. Allen, I. Boustead, et al. 1993. Guidelines for LifeCycle Assessment: A “Code of Practice.” Pensacola, FL: Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry. Curran, M.A. 1996. Environmental Life Cycle Assessment. New York: McGraw-Hill. Fava, J.A., R. Denison, B. Jones, et al. 1991. A Technical Framework for Life-Cycle Assessments. Pensacola, FL: Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry. Vigon, B.W., D.A. Tolle, B.W. Cornaby, et al. 1993. Life-Cycle Assessment: Inventory Guidelines and Principles. EPA/600/R-92/245. Washington, DC: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Part II: Environmental Materials Selection Choosing the right materials, products and components for a building is not an easy task under any circumstances. Environmental criteria can provide information to best practices and the need for durable, safe, easily maintained and replaced materials, all of which directly improve design and building quality and ultimately the ecological systems that are thus sustained. Environmental awareness does not bring “automatic” design methods or data to provide ready-made answers. Making the right decision requires judgment continuously informed by new information as more manufacturers and contractors develop better products and practices. Ultimately the designer or specifier must use available information to make “best practice” decisions, and even these may change during the process of construction. A capacity to verify material selections, alternates and substitutions is also necessary. These design responsibilities are assisted by a number of data sources. The questions that the designer poses about environmental impacts are critical. A set of questions outlined below provides a guide to assist in the materials decision-making process. Product life cycle Most Life Cycle Assessments (LCAs) are based on an inventory of inputs and outputs. The attempt is made to identify all raw materials

188


and energy consumed in the production, use, and disposal of the product, as well as contingent pollutants and byproducts. Depending upon available data, the inventory may be detailed and quantitative or it may be cursory, in an attempt to highlight the most significant energy and environmental inputs and outputs. A subset of this inventory is the energy required to extract, transport, and process a material. Called the embodied energy of the material production process, this is often a good indicator of larger environmental impacts because of the pollution associated with energy generation in the manufacturing process. Embodied energy data for common insulation materials is compared in Table 1. LCA examines the environmental impacts of each of these material and energy flows. This involves as much art as science due to the nearly impossible task of tracking ecological impacts as they ripple through the world’s natural systems. LCAs done for specific products may include a final step—identifying areas for improvement. Given the complexity of analyzing the life cycle of a specific product, LCAs are usually undertaken only by relatively large manufacturers committed to reducing the environmental impacts of their processes. Fully detailed information is rarely fully available but significant findings are reported in professional and research literature. Strategies for compiling environmental materials information Designers who specify environmental materials (that is, materials selected to improve environmental quality and reduce negative impacts) may rely on a range of sources for their information. Professional associations, local and state agencies and recycling councils and environmental organizations offer some information resources. An array of published materials is becoming available. Software tools are being developed that may offer more flexibility in how the information can be searched and formatted. Architects and designers may begin to learn about the environmental impacts of materials by querying manufacturers and suppliers directly. If sales representatives are knowledgeable about environmental issues, that is a fair indication that a company takes such issues seriously. Such queries often reach technical support personnel or those working in development to find out where the raw materials come from and how they are processed. As most manufacturers are inclined to share only positive information about their products, it helps to seek out competitive sources to understand the full range of environmental impacts of a product manufacture and use.

Environmental life cycle assessment 15 Table 2. Material selection guides

Publication info

# materials compared

Background info

Type of ranking

Source of the data Comments

Environmental Building News, RR 1, Box 161 Brattleboro, VT 05301 802/257-7300, 802/257-7304 (fax), [email protected] (e-mail)

16 detailed material articles as of 1/97, addressing about 50 different materials

Moderate to Extensive

None

Published literature, communication with experts and manufacturers

Recommendations often provide guidance on how best to use each material; specific products are mentioned by name.

Environmental Resource Guide Joseph Demkin, editor, The American Institute of Architects; John Wiley & Sons

26 detailed Material Reports; 8 Application Reports comparing a total of 55 materials (1997 edition)

Very extensive— detailed reports and tables explaining all ratings

White-gray-black in 14 environmental categories, plus split rankings where design can affect performance

Published literature, communication with experts and manufacturers

Recommendations also provide guidance on how best to use each material.

Handbook of Sustainable Building James & James Science Publishers (U.K.), PO Box 605, Herndon, VA 22070; 703/435-7064, 703/689-0660 (fax)

80 sections. each comparing 3-7 materials (April 1996 edition)

Moderate: little detail with rankings, but some background material in a later section

1st, 2nd, and 3rd choices, and “not recommended” for most materials. Also a “basic selection” considering cost availability

Proprietary LCA database

British translation of Dutch text. Good introductory overview on sustainable construction. Ratings are in two parts, one for new construction and one for renovation.

Green Spec Siegel & Strain Architects 1295 59th Street Emeryville, CA 94608

None

Extensive considerations by CSI category for Sections 1-9

None

Published literature, communication with experts and manufacturers.

Written in formal specification format, describes environmental considertions for materials in each section.

Building material Ecological Sustainability Index Partridge Partners, 23 Ben Boyd Road, Neutral Bay, NSW 2089, Australia; +61 2 9923 1788, +61 2 9929 7096 (fax) [email protected]

29 materials and 23 building components (assemblies) (December 1995 edition)

Limited: brief comments within the table, good introduction on the methodology

1 to 5 in 16 categories, combined into total scores for 3 major categories, and further calculated for complete assemblies

Authors’ research, published data

Sophisticated weighting system for environmental categores—each area of concern is given a weighting factor that becomes part of the scoring formula. Use phase is excluded from the analysis.

Architectural firms known for their environmental specialization often develop their “office” materials data base through such active information searches. Some firms distribute questionnaires to suppliers, asking for extensive information on the composition and environmental performance of their products. A firm can improve response if it indicates that companies providing such information will be preferred suppliers. In increasing instances, environmental impact information is available in the form of a certification or evaluation from an independent agency. There are two common types of certification: those that establish the overall environmental performance of a product based on a predetermined set of criteria, and those that simply verify a specific claim made by the manufacturer, such as specified level of recycled content. In the U.S., the first type of certification is performed by the Washington, D.C.-based nonprofit organization Green Seal, and the second by a for-profit company in Oakland, California, Scientific Certification Systems, Inc. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available from manufacturers for almost all products. Obtaining an MSDS for a product is a relatively easy way to find out what it consists of, although some

specifics may be left vague if considered proprietary. These data sheets also list potential health impacts of the ingredients in each product, so are particularly useful in assessing possible health impacts to construction workers and building occupants. Additionally, a client may have the resources to assist with environmental assessment of products. In some agencies, organizations and institutions, such as scientific, governmental or educational institutions, in-house staff may have the capacity to help to make such assessments. Generic LCA studies Simplified summaries or streamlined LCAs for building materials assist designers who may not have the time or resources for first-hand research. Such assessments are for generic materials rather than specific products, so they are usually generalized in LCA terms. They analyze the flows of materials and energy considered typical for the particular industry and the environmental impacts that commonly stem from those flows. While not as accurate as a detailed LCA, the streamlined summaries provide a good starting point for comparing materials. Several such assessments are listed in Table 2. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

189


Most publications that provide guidelines to building material selection do so in the form of ratings or rankings of the alternatives for a particular application. These approaches may try to synthesize all the considerations into one overall ranking hierarchy in a single summation or they may break out various environmental aspects and rank each material separately for each aspect, thus providing more information for the user.

Product directories The other type of information source is the listing of environmentally preferable products. Directories are available in many different formats in print or electronic media. Some are specific to a particular category of products, such as those containing recycled-content. Others are more general, including products that are considered to have environmental advantages over the alternatives. See Table 3 for some specific references. Software tools are being developed—not yet available in commercial release—to provide assistance with building material selection by processing large amounts of data and presenting the user with relatively simple summaries.

Table 3. Product directories

Publication info

190

# of listings

Amount of detail on each

Categories of materials included

Publication format

Comments

Guide to Resource 425 manufacturers Efficient Building Elements Center for Resourceful Building Technology PO Box 100 Missoula, MT 59806 406/549-7678 406/549-4100 (fax) [email protected] (e-mail)

Descriptions of applications and comments on each products, plus overview articles on each section.

Any that utilize materials efficiently, including recycled-content

Perfect-bound book, updated annually

One of the first, and most reliable sources.

The Harris Directory 1,000 products 522 Acequia Madre Santa Fe, NM 87501 505/995-0337, 505/995-1180 (fax) [email protected] (e-mail)

Listing includes amount of recycled content, appropriate uses

Recycled-content materials

Computer diskette for PC or Mac, updated semiannually

Very thorough and up-to-date

REDI Guide Communications, Inc. PO Box 5920 Eugene, OR 97405-0911 541/484-9353, 541/484-1645 (fax) [email protected] (e-mail) http://oikos.com

1,700 companies, including green design and building professionals

Almost none

Energy efficient, recycled, lowtoxic, resource efficient

Spiral-bound booklet, free Internet access to listings only.

Access to Iris database on Internet is valuable, listings provide no information about the products.

Sustainable Landscapes and Gardens: the resource guide. Environmental Resources Inc. 2041 E. Hollywood Ave. Salt Lake City, UT 84108 801/485-0280

2,100 listings from 1,300 companies and organiations

Comments and descriptions of varying length

Products and materials used in landscaping

Perfect-bound text on recycled newsprint

Very comprehensive listings within the landscape area

The Sustainable Design Resource Guide for Colorado and theWestern Mountain Region. AIA Denver Chapter 1526 15th St. Denver, CO 80202 303/446-2266 303/446-0066(fax)

700 listings

3-ring binder, diskette for IBM-PC or Macintosh

Good overall directory, with regional suppliers, and articles.

Descriptions of each product, plus overview articles on each section.


Energy efficient, recycled, low-toxic, resource efficient

Environmental life cycle assessment 15 A simplified approach Outlined below it is a simplified approach methodology for environmental selection of materials. The approach is characterized by a set of questions not normally posed in selecting building materials. The results of this process are only as good as the resulting search and knowledge-base that may result. The steps set up by the twelve questions described below cannot take the place of a thorough understanding of the life-cycles of the materials and their environmental impacts. They are intended to offer a checklist of sorts to seek out and apply that knowledge.

likely to adversely affect occupant health, and design systems to minimize possible adverse effects when sources of indoor pollution cannot be avoided. -

Step 3. Durability and maintenance: Are products in this application likely to need replacement, special treatment, or repair multiple times during the life of the structure? If yes (roofing, coatings, sealants), avoid products with short expected lifespans (unless made from low-impact, renewable materials and easily recycled), or products that require frequent, high impact maintenance procedures. Also, design the structure for flexibility so that those materials that may become obsolete before they wear out (such as wiring) can be replaced with minimal disruption and cost.

•

Steps 4 thru 6: Manufacturing. The remaining steps or questions pertain less to the application (how a material or product is used) and more to the material itself. They require knowledge of the raw materials that go into each product.

-

Step 4. Hazardous by-products: Are significant toxic or hazardous intermediaries or by-products created during manufacture, and if so, how significant is the risk of their release to the environment or risk of hazard to worker health? Where toxic by-products are either generated in large quantities or in small but uncontrolled quantities (smelting of zinc, production of petrochemicals), the building material in question should be avoided if possible, or sourced from a company with high environmental standards and verification procedures.

Raw materials extraction and preparation phase is typically next in descending importance. Finally, the disposal stage can be important due to the shear volume of material that buildings embody. It falls at the end of this list, however, because of the long useful life of most building materials and the recyclability of many of them. Additionally, much of a building’s mass can be utilized as clean fill, so the potential impact on solid waste landfills could be mitigated by construction demolition and waste reduction and recovery. This listing should not be taken to mean that all materials will have their environmental burdens ranked in this order. For materials used in a natural or minimally processed state, such as wood or stone, the raw material extraction phase may be more significant than the first two, while the most significant impacts of many synthetic materials may be found in the manufacturing stage. A few products, such as preservative-treated wood, may be most problematic in the fourth stage, disposal.

-

Step 5. Energy use: How energy-intensive is the manufacturing process? If a building material and/or component is relatively energy-intensive in its manufacture (aluminum, plastics) compared to the alternatives, its use should be minimized. It is not the energy use itself that is of concern, however, but the pollution from its generation and use; industries using clean-burning or renewable energy sources have lower burdens than those relying on coal or petroleum. Results will vary depending upon changing manufacturing processes.

-

Step 6. Waste from manufacturing: How much solid waste is generated in the manufacturing process? If significant amounts of solid waste are generated that are not readily usable for other purposes (tailings from mining of copper and other metals), seek alternative materials, or materials from companies with progressive recycling programs.

•

•

Steps 7 thru 9: Raw Materials. Step 7. Resource limitations: Are any of the component materials from rare or endangered environments or resources? If yes (threatened tree species, old-growth timber), avoid these products, unless they can be sourced from recycled material.

-

Step 8. Impacts of resource extraction: Are there significant ecological impacts from the process of mining or harvesting the raw materials? If yes (damage to rain forests from bauxite mining for aluminum, or timber harvesting on steep slopes with unstable soils), seek suppliers of material from recycled stock, or those with credible third-party verification of environmentally sound harvesting methods.

-

Step 9. Transportation: Are the primary raw materials located a great distance from your site? If yes, seek appropriate alternative materials from more local sources. Final steps: Disposal or Reuse.

The twelve questions cover the life cycle of the materials, but not in the usual order. While the LCAs of many consumer products focus on the production and disposal issues, in the case of many building materials, the use phase of the product is most significant because of the relatively long lifetime over which building materials are in use. Building materials have a use-dominated life cycle. The use phase may not be the most important stage for every material one might consider, but in most cases this is where the most significant environmental benefits or liabilities can be found. The manufacturing or production stage is usually the second-most critical, especially for highly processed or manufactured materials that are becoming increasingly common. Many of these materials contain hazardous or toxic components, or they generate toxic intermediaries in the production process. Some materials, such as aluminum, require a great deal of energy for processing. Generating that energy typically results in pollution and other negative environmental impacts that should also be considered.

-

-

Steps 1 thru 3: the use phase. Two of the most significant sources of environmental impact from building materials are energy use in the building and possible impacts on occupant health. Considerations of impacts in the use phase depend not only on the material in question, but also on the application for that material. Step 1. Energy use: Will the material in question (in the relevant application) have a measurable impact on building energy use? If yes (as for materials such as glazing, insulation, mechanical systems), avoid options that do not significantly contribute to reducing energy consumption. For materials that result in an energyefficiency only with the addition of other components, then also include the impact of the additional components. Examples include glazing systems that require exterior shading systems for efficiency, and light-gauge steel framing that requires foam sheathing to prevent thermal bridging, and so forth. Step 2. Occupant health: Might products in this application affect the health of building occupants? If yes (interior furnishings, interior finishes, mechanical systems), avoid materials that are

• -

Step 10. Demolition waste: Can the material be easily separated out for reuse or recycling after its useful life in the structure is over? While most materials that are used in large quantities in Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

191


Specify OSB with MDI binder

Determine that plant is meeting or exceeding air emission standards

Determine that wood is from well-managed forests

Fig. 4. Example: the simplified methodology applied to oriented-strand board sheathing

building construction (steel, concrete) can be at least partially recycled, others are less recyclable and may become a disposal problem in the future. Examples include products that combine different materials (such as fiberglass composites) or undergo a fundamental chemical change during manufacture (polyurethane foams). Consider the future recyclability of products chosen.

192

-

Step 11. Hazardous materials from demolition: Might the material become a toxic or hazardous waste problem after the end of its useful life? If yes, (preservative-treated wood), seek alternative products or construction systems that require less of the material in question.

-

Step 12. Review the results: Go over any concerns that have been raised about the products under consideration and look for other life-cycle and environmental impacts that might be specific to a particular material. For example, with drywall and spray-in open-


cell polyurethane foam insulation, waste generated at the job site is a potential problem. Building material selection is an area where designers and specifiers make an enormous difference in the overall environmental impact of a building for relatively little cost. Further, by specifying materials and processes that reduce waste and improve resource conservation, a contribution is made to the local community and economy well beyond the building project. It is also an area where building designers can encourage manufacturing industries to improve their processes of production and the life-cycle quality of their products. Ongoing developments and changing production processes continually offer new options to designers and specifiers. The best environmental approach is that brought by the architect, engineer and builder in undertaking architectural practices with an insistent set of environmental concerns and questions.

16

Construction and demolition waste management 16

Construction and demolition waste management Harry T. Gordon


193

16 Construction and demolition waste management

194


Construction Construction and demolition wastewaste management and demolition management 16 16

Summary: Construction and demolition (C&D) activities generate large quantities of waste. Most of this material is disposed of in landfills. C&D materials are estimated to be 20-30% of the volume of landfills. There is an increasing effort to reuse or recycle construction materials. Roles of the architect include designing a comprehensive materials flow plan for building constructors and users, specifying recycled content materials and products and assisting the owner and contractor in a C&D Management Plan. Key words: Construction waste, deconstruction, demolition, landfill, modular coordination, recycling, renovation, reuse. Construction material waste, generated during construction and remodeling or demolition, is normally disposed of in landfills. The practice is costly in terms of both economic and environmental loss. Used construction materials and entire buildings normally destroyed and buried in landfill or incinerated, represent a resource stream that, in a sense, can be “mined.” Many architects, builders, and owners wish to reduce the volume of construction and demolition (C&D) waste materials that are disposed of in landfills. In some parts of the country, a recycling program for C&D waste is mandated by law. In some cases, the costs of disposing of the C&D materials in a landfill are high enough to encourage recovery and recycling of major portions of the waste stream. The economic advantages of establishing a recycling program are appreciably greater when there is a local infrastructure of businesses that accept C&D waste materials for reuse or recycling.

On-site separation of wood scraps for recycling. photo: NAHB/RC

waste is disposed of in municipal solid waste landfills. In some states, most construction waste goes into specialized Construction & Demolition (C&D) waste landfills, which frequently have less restrictive environmental standards, since much of the material is inert. However, this has lead to illegal dumping of more hazardous waste in these landfills that originate from demolition debris (Wilson 1992). EPA regulations, set to take effect in 1998, will require states to implement the monitoring of these hazardous materials at C&D landfills (Yost & Lund 1997). Some states and localities may also have separately designated sites for Land Clearing and Inert Debris (LCID) that accept concrete, masonry and similar bulk fill.

There are important differences between “construction waste” generated by the packaging, residue and excess of new construction materials produced during construction, and “demolition waste” or debris from remodeling and/or on-site destruction of an existing building structure. Demolition waste is inherently more contaminated and often mixed in with or “commingled” with all other waste from the start, making it more difficult to include a wider range of materials in a waste recovery program (Malin 1995).

Reduce—Reuse—Recycle C&D material conservation can be achieved by variations upon the familiar theme of “Reduce, Reuse, Recycle,” the so-called three “Rs” which provide a mnemonic of the consecutive steps in resource conservation and recovery. Attention to design and construction can substantially reduce the quantities of waste generated in the first place. A recent study shows that in-line framing, increased joist spacing, modular coordination and layout, and similar techniques, reduced the rate of wood waste generation of a single family detached house by twothirds, from 1.5 pounds per square foot for conventional construction to 0.5 pounds per square foot (Yost & Lund 1997).

Although statistics are limited, studies of the quantities and composition of C&D waste have been undertaken by determining the percentage (volume and weight) of construction-related debris in the waste stream. The National Association of Home Builders Research Center (NAHB/RC) estimates that new residential construction generates three to five pounds of waste material per square foot of building floor area and that roughly 80% of a home building waste stream is recyclable (Yost & Lund 1997). NAHB/RC further estimates that 100,000 residential buildings are demolished each year in the U.S., accounting for more than 8 million tons of wood, plaster, drywall, metals, masonry, and other building materials, potentially reusable but for the most part ending up in local landfills (Fig. 1).

Items being replaced in a renovation but which still have value, can be recovered for reuse. This is best accomplished by using “deconstruction” techniques, defined as careful and selective removal of building materials for reuse, in contrast to brute force destruction and demolition at building sites which adds to air and possibly soil and water pollution. Wood is a common example of a material that is salvaged from older buildings and reused directly or processed to produce other construction materials such as flooring. Brick, glass, casework, porcelain fixtures, tiles and other products can also be reused. Because of coatings on architectural glass and windows, it is difficult to recycle these products if reuse is not an option.

A study by Gershon, Brickner & Bratton (1993) of the composition of C&D waste from eight residential and eight commercial building projects shows significant differences in C&D materials waste by type and quality, depending upon the type of construction (or reconstruction), illustrated in Table 1. The opportunities and priorities for recycling are thus quite different for new vs. renovation, and residential vs. commercial projects. Most small-scale building or residential C&D

Recycling of C&D materials is accomplished through source separation, either on the construction site or at an off-site handling facility. High value C&D materials such as metals are routinely recycled for economic benefit; the resulting recycled content products may be used in construction or other industries. Packaging materials such as corrugated cardboard and plastics also have a high recycling value and should be separated from the C&D waste stream.

Author: Harry T. Gordon, FAIA References: Wilson, Alex and Nadav Malin, editors. Environmental Building News. Brattleboro, VT. 05301. This bimonthly newsletter publishes articles and current references on environmental approaches to design and construction, construction and demolition waste and related topics. Other references listed at the end of this article. Time-Saver Standards: Part I, Architectural Fundamentals

195

16 Construction and demolition waste management Another form of recycling occurs when medium value materials, such as wood or drywall scrap, are used to make new construction products. Some manufacturers have developed policies to take back their products at the end of their useful life. For example, nylon carpet (the most commonly used type), can be shredded (or fiberized) to create reinforcements for plastics and asphalt materials. Some fiberized carpet is also used as a component of carpet cushion. Several manufacturers now take responsibility for carpet replacement and thus, of “cradle to cradle” resource recovery. Wood and site clearing materials can be mulched or composted. Unpainted gypsum board waste can be pulverized and used as a soil additive. Combustible materials can also be incinerated to generate electricity, although this alternative is not usually considered to be recycling and contributes to the pollution caused by incineration. Waste recycling approaches The commonly used methods of construction recycling defined in Malin (1995) are: • • • Fig. 1. Various construction materials by percent of total generated construction waste, based on NAHB/RC studies (after Yost and Lund 1997).

Source separation on-site Time-based separation by the hauler Commingled delivery to off-site separation

Source separation on-site usually involves multiple bins or disposal areas in the site, for each type of material. Construction workers are trained to place materials into the proper bins or areas. Each material type is then transported to a facility that can make the best economic use of it, sometimes by reuse within the same construction site. Some high value materials such as metals may be sold. Other materials may cost the contractor less to dispose of at a recycling facility than at a landfill. This margin or difference between recycling cost vs. landfill

Table 1. Composition of primary C&D materials for each building sector (by percent of total weight for each sector). Wood

Gypsum

Concrete

Masonry

Roof Board

Pressboard

Metals Units

Misc. Materials

Resid Renov

31%

12%

250,000 ft2

Food Service Fast Food/Cafeteria Leisure Dining/Bar

150 2.20

138 1.91

1.34 1.71

1.31 1.56

1.30 1.46

1.40

1.90 3.30

1.81 3.08

1.72 2.83

1.65 2.50

1.57 2.28

1.50 2.10

1.60 2.70 0.30

1.58 2.37 0.28

1.52 2.08 0.24

1.46 1.92 0.22

1.43 1.80 0.21

1.40 1.70 0.20

1.80 1.90 2.40 0.80

1.80 1.90 2.33 0.66

1.72 1.88 2.17 0.56

1.65 1.83 2.01 0.48

1.57 1.76 1.84 0.43

1.50 1.70 1.70 0.40

Offices Retail Mall Concourse multi-store service Service Establishment Garages Schools Preschool/elementary Jr. High/High School Technical/Vocational Warehouse/Storage

Source: ASHRAE Standard 90.1 - 1989

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-104

Nomograph 1

Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

SPECIALTIES

D3

D3 HVAC

SERVICES

D3.4 Thermal assessment of HVAC design

Nomograph 2


D-105

D3 HVAC


SERVICES

D3

Nomograph 3

SPECIALTIES D-106



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Nomograph 4

Nomograph 5


D-107

D3 HVAC


Nomograph 6

SERVICES

D3

Nomograph 7

SPECIALTIES D-108



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Nomograph 8


D-109

D3 HVAC


SERVICES

D3

Nomograph 9

SPECIALTIES D-110


D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings

D3 HVAC

HVAC systems for commercial buildings Summary: Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning

(HVAC) systems provide the comfort and ventilation necessary for healthy and productive environments. This article reviews HVAC systems for commercial buildings and guidelines for preliminary system design and selection.

Uniformat:

Key words: air-handling unit, boiler, chiller, condenser, cooling tower, diffuser, heat pump, ventilation.

The building owner’s criteria for HVAC system selection can vary dramatically, from the speculative builder (low initial cost, marketability concerns, and “lost” rental income due to equipment and shaft space requirements) to the owner/user, who recognizes that poor HVAC system performance over the life of the building can adversely affect both operating and maintenance costs and the productivity of employees suffering from thermal discomfort or poor indoor air quality. Current research suggests that productivity improvements can be gained by providing occupants with more control over their personal

environments than that provided by the typical HVAC system (See “Flexible Infrastructure” in Chapter C1 of this Volume). Building and office managers have a stake in the HVAC system to be installed in their building. In a survey conducted by the Building Owners and Managers Association (BOMA), close to 30% of the building managers surveyed cited “HVAC System” or “Indoor Air Quality” as their most critical management, operation, or design problem. A pleasant, comfortable, healthy indoor environment can affect issues such as absenteeism, staff retention, and actual employee productivity. A simple calculation of the building occupant salaries over a ten year period, compared to the HVAC system construction costs, will usually reveal that a 1% decrease in productivity can cost more than 50 times the amortized construction costs, and 100 times the utility costs incurred by the system. This article covers the HVAC design for commercial buildings in terms helpful to architects in preliminary design, including following topics: 1

Basic components of HVAC systems

2

Basic HVAC system types

3

HVAC systems for specific building applications

4

Space planning considerations

5

Equipment descriptions

1

Basic components of HVAC systems

The HVAC system is one of the most complex and least understood of all building service systems. This is partly due to the vast number of systems and options available, as well as a lack of standardization in terminology, equipment types, sizes, efficiencies, and compatibility among different manufacturers’ lines of equipment. HVAC systems can be conceived as the “breathing system” that provides fresh air throughout a building, conditioned within proscribed temperature and humidity ranges, and that also removes and/or reconditions circulated air. Related to this are piping systems for heating and cooling and valves and dampers that control and modulate the system. Recently developed microchip electronic controls bring to the HVAC system a great deal of technological sophistication and capabilities,

Authors: Richard Rittelmann, FAIA, Paul Scanlon, P.E., Russ Sullivan, P.E., and Tim Beggs. References: ASHRAE 1993. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. Bobenhausen, William. 1994. Simplified Design of HVAC Systems. New York: John Wiley and Sons. Rowe, William H., III. 1994. HVAC Design Criteria, Options, Selection. Kingston, MA: R. S. Means Company. Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

D3

From the owner’s view, the correct selection of the HVAC system can significantly affect project first costs as well as long-term operating and maintenance costs. The initial system cost (including the “hidden” cost of constructing mechanical equipment rooms and large duct shafts) can amount to a substantial percentage of total construction costs in modern fully serviced buildings (see, for example, the article on Building Economics in Part I of this Volume). Building users, on the other hand, are generally more affected by the long-term impacts of the system selection, annual utility bills, maintenance costs, and employee productivity.

15700

SERVICES

From the architect’s view, the type of HVAC system selected can significantly affect floor plan layouts. Mechanical equipment rooms and vertical distribution shafts typically occupy between 3% and 10% of the typical floor plan area, and an even greater percentage in highrise buildings with substantial mechanical cores. If not considered early in the design process, the number, size and location of ducts, air intake/exhaust louvers and rooftop equipment can also detract from the building aesthetics.

MasterFormat:

SPECIALTIES

Outline of topics covered in this article HVAC systems provide both the thermal comfort and ventilation necessary for healthy, productive environments. HVAC systems that are efficient, accessible for inspection, testing and balancing and economical to operate, are extremely important to the success of most building projects. The architect’s understanding of HVAC design principles is essential for effective design and mechanical system integration. At the same time, technological innovation in HVAC systems and new information about the critical importance of energy efficiency and indoor air-quality requires continuous review of HVAC design practices.

D3020 D3030

D-111

D3 HVAC including continuous monitoring and system balancing, such as with Energy Management Systems (EMS). In HVAC system design, the coordination of components is critical, including the designation of different space occupancy requirements, and the designation of different heating/cooling zones as influenced by building orientation. Electronic controls engineering is a significant subspecialty of HVAC design, which must be carefully reviewed to conform with the architectural program and owner expectations during design, construction, building commissioning phases. While HVAC systems tend to defy simple categorization, there are three basic components common to all HVAC equipment systems: •

generation equipment

•

distribution system

•

terminal equipment

• Generation equipment Generation equipment produces the heat (steam or hot water boilers, warm air furnaces, and radiant panels) or cooling (chillers and cooling towers, and air-cooled compressors in packaged equipment). Packaged equipment (equipment which is self-contained, often all-electric) requires no central mechanical equipment; the source of heating and cooling is contained within each piece of HVAC equipment. While the type of generation equipment used does not identify the appropriate type of HVAC system to use in a given application, it can limit the choices available to the designer. For example, the Owner/Developer of a residential building project may dictate that the designer consider only packaged equipment to avoid the premium in first cost and onsite maintenance skills associated with central equipment such as boilers and chillers and provide a system where energy costs are directly charged to the occupant. The critical architectural decisions related to HVAC generation equipment are the location, size and service options of equipment rooms, which typically require both air intakes and exhausts, that must be separated for indoor air quality health and safety.

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-112

• Distribution system The distribution system is the method by which cooling and heating energy is “moved” throughout the building (hot / chilled water piping systems, or ductwork that distributes warm or cool air around the building). For systems using packaged equipment, the distribution system is limited to a modest amount of ductwork (if any), limited by the capacity of the supply air fan provided as part of the packaged equipment. In larger central systems, the distribution system is powered by large central pumps and/or air handling units; these systems are almost unlimited in their capacity and can be quite complex, including both piping and ductwork which extends throughout the entire building. The critical architectural decisions in design of distribution system is coordination with all other structure and services to eliminate conflicts and to provide for effective and efficient distribution of air and water throughout the building. Most critical junctures in a distribution system have to be made accessible for testing and balancing. • Terminal equipment Terminal equipment include the devices which distribute conditioned air to the space (a diffuser is considered a terminal unit) and, in some cases, either a separate or integral device is used to control the local space temperature (the “temperature control device”). Both types of terminal equipment are usually located in close proximity to the occupant. In some systems, they are visible (as in the case of window air-conditioners or fan coil units, which act as both the terminal unit and temperature control device). In others systems, they are concealed above the ceiling(that is, a variable air volume box acts as the temperature control device which controls the amount of air discharged from a number of ceiling diffusers, the terminal units). Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings In a single zone system, there is no separate terminal control device; the local diffuser is the “terminal unit,” and a single thermostat sends control signals straight to the distribution equipment to maintain the set-point temperature for the entire area served by the single zone system. Rather than having multiple zones served by one large air handling unit, multiple single zone air handlers are used to achieve multiple zones of temperature control within the building. The terminal control device of the HVAC system is usually crucial in selecting the most appropriate HVAC system type; to a large extent, it dictates the degree of comfort which the system will be capable of providing. The type of terminal unit used, together with the number of thermostatic control zones desired, significantly affects both occupant satisfaction and the overall system capital cost and operating costs. Critical decisions related to terminal equipment is coordination with the architectural elements of the building interior. 2

Basic HVAC system types

The nomenclature used in the HVAC industry often relates to the size of the typical unit rather than the generic type of system; hence a single-zone self-contained unit might be referred to as a “throughwall air-conditioner” when discussing apartment buildings, a “unit ventilator” when discussing school buildings, or a “rooftop unit” when discussing a low-rise office building. Compounding this problem is the fact that a variety of heating and cooling energy sources are available for each type of equipment (that is, a unit ventilator isn’t considered a “single-zone self-contained” unit unless it uses an air-source heat pump compressor to meet its heating and cooling requirements; if it relies on central hot water or chilled water from a central equipment room, it wouldn’t be considered “self-contained”). To simplify understanding of the basic HVAC options, it’s easiest to start by classifying all systems into one of two categories: self-contained or central systems. 2.1 Self-contained systems Self-contained systems require no central equipment to perform their function. This basic system type could be described as “plug’n’play;” all system components (air circulating fan, refrigerant compressor / condenser / cooling coil, and heating coil) are contained within one box, which generally needs only to be plugged in to a source of electricity. As shown in Fig. 1, there are five different equipment configurations used for self-contained systems. The most common heating options used in self-contained systems include electric resistance heating coils (sometimes called “strip heat”) and air-source heat pumps (ASHP). ASHPs are two- to three-times more efficient than electric heating coils in mild weather, but still must rely on electric resistance heating coils when the outdoor air drops to about 25F (-4°C). Therefore, ASHPs are only 1.5 to 2.0 times more efficient than electric resistance heating coils on an annual basis in areas characterized by cold winters. While many self-contained systems are all-electric, larger commercial rooftop applications may also use natural gas piped to each unit. Gas is used in these systems most frequently to provide a lower cost heating option (via direct gas-fired furnaces contained within the unit). A more recent product—the gas-fired desiccant air-conditioner—uses natural gas in its cooling cycle. Although these systems require a separately-piped fuel, they are still categorized as self-contained systems because they require no central equipment such as boilers, pumps, and chillers. In most applications, each unit provides a single temperature control zone, so an individual unit is often provided for each space which has a different heating or cooling load. All self-contained units use aircooled refrigeration equipment, so a portion of the unit must be exposed to the outdoor air. A “split system” unit is a variation of the

In addition to low first cost, other advantages of self contained systems include minimal maintenance, full system quality control/testing at the factory, and reliance on many independent units so that failure of any one unit affects only a small portion of the building. Self-contained systems for residential applications The quality of self-contained systems can vary substantially. Smaller systems such as window units, through-wall units, and small split system units are considered “residential appliance” quality, with expected service lives of as low as 5 years and as high as 10 years. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)-certified Package Terminal Air Conditioners (PTAC equipment) of the same size and type are manufactured to higher industry standards, and are considered commercial quality equipment with an expected service life closer to 15 years. Because these self-contained systems have limited capacities (1/2 to 3 tons) and must have access to outdoor air in order to reject heat from the conditioned space, their use is limited to conditioning small individual rooms at the building perimeter. Typical applications, therefore, include single-family homes, apartments, motels, hotels, and small, residential load type offices at the perimeter of commercial buildings. In multi-story buildings, the remote condensers of split system units are located either on grade or on the roof of the building. Self-contained systems for commercial applications Self-contained systems designed for larger commercial applications are often referred to as “unitary equipment” or “packaged” equip-

Larger self-contained systems may include limited ductwork for distributing conditioned air over a relatively large area. Multiple single zone units are most commonly used to provide temperature control of the entire area served by each unit, but duct-mounted terminal control devices may also be used to provide additional zoning capabilities. For example, reheat coils or VAV boxes can be mounted at branch ducts and controlled by a local thermostat to give more localized control. These temperature control devices are described in the “central systems” section, since they are much more widely used in central, rather than self-contained, air handling systems. Self-contained rooftop multi-zone units are also available; a recent product introduced to the market uses multiple heating and cooling coils to provide multiple zones of temperature control (Fig. 2).

Fig. 1. Five configurations for self-contained systems

Fig. 2. Self-contained rooftop multi-zone unit (Source: Carrier Corporation) Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

D3

A limitation of self-contained systems is that they are pre-engineered units, with limited sizes available. They are almost exclusively a commodity product designed to minimize material costs because their selection is normally price-based, and therefore tend to have relatively short expected service lives. Self-contained systems are also limited in the type of air filtration options available; normally, flat panel filters capable of screening out only the largest air-borne particles are provided.

ment. Common equipment configurations include rooftop units, larger split system units, and floor-mounted indoor units (located at a perimeter wall). In areas characterized by mild climates and reasonably low electric costs, large through wall unit ventilators may be used in classroom applications.

SERVICES

self-contained unit, wherein the condensing section(part of the aircooled refrigeration equipment) can be separated from the rest of the unit and be located 50 ft (15 m) or more away from the indoor unit.

D3 HVAC

SPECIALTIES


D-113

D3 HVAC

D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings Heating options for each of these configurations include straight resistance electric heating coils or air source heat pumps. The most commonly used equipment capacities range from 5 tons to 25 tons refrigeration capacity, although much larger units are available for primarily industrial applications. Equipment quality can range from “light commercial” to “commercial,” with an expected service life of 10 to 15 years. Gas-fired desiccant air-conditioners (Fig. 3) are a relatively new product, and combine some of the ease-of-installation benefits of selfcontained systems with the low operating costs more often associated with central systems. They are particularly applicable to areas characterized by high humidity and in buildings with high ventilation loads, since they have the capability to remove latent heat(from humid outdoor air) very efficiently.

Fig. 3. Self-contained dessicant air conditioner (Source: Englehard/ICC)

The air-cooled equipment of commercial self-contained systems must be located at or near the outside of the building. Due to distance limitations of the refrigerant tubing, the use of these systems is limited to low-rise buildings. The capacity of the supply air fans provided with this type of equipment is also limited. Hence one of the most popular applications for self-contained systems is in the use of rooftop units serving a one-story structure, where multiple units, each serving up to 10,000 sq. ft. (929 m) of space, are easy to locate and require only minimum duct runs to the areas served. Table 1 summarizes the basic choices available in self-contained systems: 2.2 Central systems Unlike systems using self-contained units, these systems require a central equipment space where boilers, chillers, cooling towers, pumps, and similar equipment are located and used to distribute the heating and/or cooling medium to remote terminal units. Central systems may be sub-classified into two types, based on the amount of central equipment required to support their operation:

SERVICES

D3

Closed loop heat pump systems Closed loop heat pump systems represent a special category of central systems. They employ water source heat pumps (WSHP) which require only a small heating source, a circulating pump, and a small evaporative cooler (Fig. 4). Each WSHP contains an air circulating fan, a water-cooled refrigerant compressor / condenser, and a DX heating and cooling coil. Fig. 4. Closed loop heat pump system

Table 1. Basic choices for self-contained HVAC systems

SPECIALTIES D-114

Type of space

Equipment type

Typical unit cooling capacity range

Electric resistance

Air Source Heat Pump (ASHP)

Small [residential]

Window air-conditioner

1/2 to 3 ton

X

X

5 to 10 years

Through-wall airconditioner Unit ventilator Commercial split system Rooftop unit

1/2 to 5 tons

X

X

5 to 10 years

3 to 5 tons 5 to 25 tons

X X

X X

to Large [commercial]


Gas

X

Expected service life

15 years 15 years

D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings Air source heat pumps reject heat to the ambient air (the heat sink) when operating in the cooling mode and extract heat from the air (the heat source) in the heating mode. In contrast, water source heat pumps use water from a closed loop piping system as both their heat source and heat sink. Each water source heat pump can operate in either the heating or cooling mode, as required to meet varying space loads. For this reason, they have an inherent heat reclaim capability. If one third of the heat pumps(that is, those located at perimeter zones of a commercial office building) serving a building operate in the heating mode while the remainder of the heat pumps(serving interior zones) operate in the cooling mode, no external source of supplemental heating or cooling would be required. The building is internally balanced. The temperature in the piping loop needs to be maintained between 60F - 90F (15°C - 32°C) for the heat pumps to operate properly; if the loop temperature approaches 90F (32°C), an evaporative cooler is activated to decrease the loop temperature. If the water in the loop drops to 60F (15°C), supplemental heat is required. In conventional closed loop systems, a hot water boiler would perform this function. In the special case of an earth-coupled ground source heat pump (GSHP) system, a piping loop buried in the earth acts as both the source for supplemental heating and cooling.

D3 HVAC systems, all-water systems can be used in any size and height building; they are not limited to exterior zones or low-rise structures. Like watersource heat pumps, terminal units for all-water systems come in the same configurations: wall-mounted console units, vertically-stacked closet units, and horizontal ducted units designed to be concealed above the ceiling. Fig. 6 indicates a stacked unit fan coil unit placement commonly used in limited spaces. Variations of all-water systems include two-pipe systems and fourpipe systems. While any system using chilled water coils requires a condensate drain line to carry off water which condenses on the cold coil and collects in the condensate drain pan, the condensate piping is not counted in the nomenclature which distinguishes two-pipe systems from four-pipe systems.

Closed loop heat pump systems strike a balance between conventional central systems (energy-efficient, but expensive and requiring large central equipment rooms) and self-contained systems (low cost but limited capabilities and service life). Closed loop heat pump systems employing many small, or modular, WSHPs compete with residential self-contained systems in residential applications such as apartments, hotels, and dormitories. In these applications, wall-mounted console units replace the through-wall units of self-contained systems; they are also available as pre-piped, vertically-stacked closet units which offer improved aesthetics and quieter operation.

D3

Fig. 5. Large ducted floor-mounted water source heat pump (Source: Carrier Corporation)

SERVICES

In modular WSHP systems using separately-ducted ventilation air, horizontal concealed units can also be located above the ceiling. Unlike air source heat pumps, they can be used in any space (interior rooms as well as perimeter rooms) and in any height building. Some small units require no more than a 12 in. (30 cm) ceiling cavity. Larger WSHPs also compete with commercial self-contained systems in larger commercial applications, and are available in both floor-mounted (Fig. 5) and rooftop units which can be ducted to serve limited areas— approximately 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m) of space for the largest factory-built units commonly used.

-

all-water systems

-

all-air systems

-

air-water systems

• All-water systems All-water systems typically use small modular equipment, such as fan coil units or unit ventilators, to provide the local temperature control, In these systems, hot and chilled water piping systems are the primary distribution system. All-water systems offer more energy efficient operation than self-contained systems, but at a higher first cost. The use of chilled water and hot water coils offer closer control over temperature and relative humidity than do the DX refrigerant cooling coils and electric heating coils used in self-contained systems, but allwater terminal units also share the disadvantage of limited air filtration capabilities with self-contained terminal units. Another advantage over self-contained systems is that, like closed loop heat pump

Fig. 6. Vertical “stacked” closed unit


SPECIALTIES

Conventional central systems Conventional central systems require a full complement of central equipment (boilers, chillers, cooling towers, and circulating pumps) and a distribution system (pipes and/or ducts). Conventional central systems are often described as one of three types:

D-115

D3 HVAC

D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings The most common type of two-pipe system is the two-pipe changeover system, which employs a single heating/cooling coil in each terminal unit (typically called a fan coil unit) and a single set of distribution pipes. There is only one supply pipe and one return pipe, hence only hot water or chilled water can be made available to all the terminal units at any given time, and the building operator must change over the system from heating to cooling in the spring, and vice versa in the fall. This often creates comfort problems during swing seasons (spring and fall) such as a cold but sunny, clear day when the north side of a building requires heat and the side south requires cooling. For this reason, some two-pipe change-over systems are designed to include an electric resistance heating coil to provide partial heating capability for the changeover season; other systems are designed with full-size electric heating coils so either full heating or cooling is available at any time. These systems represent a compromise between the low cost of self-contained systems for residential applications such as hotels and the higher-cost of four-pipe systems. Four-pipe systems use fan coil units which include two separate coils, a chilled water coil and a hot water coil. They also require two sets of supply/return pipes, one for hot water and one for chilled water. Fourpipe systems share the same advantages over competing systems as do two-pipe systems, but are capable of providing heating or cooling at any time at the first cost premium of an additional set of supply/ return pipes and terminal coils. Four pipe systems are usually the most economical all-water system to operate.

D3

SERVICES

• All-air systems All-air systems employ large central air handling units, from which warm or cool air is distributed throughout the building primarily by duct distribution systems. Central all-air systems offer the most energy-efficient equipment options, and are the most flexible of any HVAC system; they can use a wide variety of terminal units to provide unlimited zoning capabilities, and factory-built air handlers can serve areas as large as 50,000 sq. ft. (4,650 sq. m) of conditioned space. The quality of construction of central system equipment can range from commercial to institutional grade, with institutional grade equipment service lives exceeding 25 years.

SPECIALTIES D-116

Each component of the central station air handling unit (AHU)—the fan, fan motor, cooling coil, heating coil, air filtration equipment, and humidification equipment—can be selected and sized precisely to meet the specific application needs, providing higher potential energy efficiency, comfort control, and indoor air quality. than can be accomplished with self-contained, closed loop heat pump, or all-water systems (Fig. 7).

Fig. 7. Typical components of an air handling unit


off-the-shelf equipment which are pre-engineered and mass-produced in limited size ranges,

-

modular components with the flexibility to select different sizes and configurations of each component, and

-

custom units which are designed for a specific application and built up in the field.

All-air systems are usually described by two variables: the type of air handling unit provided, and the type of terminal control device used to control local zone comfort conditions. Hence a system might be described as “constant volume / reheat” or “variable volume / cooling-only.” Central station air handling units are available as Constant Air Volume / Variable Air Temperature (CAV/VAT) units or Variable Air Volume / Constant Air Temperature (VAV/CAT) units. CAV/VAT units (referred to simply as Constant Volume systems) supply a constant volume of air to the building; central heating and cooling coils vary the temperature of the air based on the building requirements (determined by local thermostats or sensors in the return air system, which indicate whether the spaces require heating or cooling). In a single zone application, this is all the control required. For some building applications with limited zoning requirements, this can be accomplished with multi-zone units, in which up to 12 sets of separate heating and cooling coils provide different temperature air to each zone. Most central air handling systems are used to serve a large number of individual temperature control zones; therefore, the air provided by the central system must be cooled enough to meet the cooling load of the worst case zone of conditioned space; to provide local control for all the other zones, some form of reheat must be used. Hence an electric reheat coil or hot water reheat coil is used to reheat this central air—typically supplied around 55F (12°C)—as set by a local thermostat. While this system provides the best control of temperature and relative humidity, it is also very energy-inefficient to reheat the full volume of cool air supplied by the central air handler. For this reason, constant volume / reheat systems are restricted by energy codes and limited to special uses (such as hospital operating rooms and museums) which require such a high degree of control. To overcome the inherent energy waste of constant volume / reheat systems, Variable Volume Air (VAV) systems were developed and became very popular in the 1970s. These systems include variable volume air handling units which are designed to conserve fan energy by varying the amount of central air to each zone, based on local zone requirements. Once a local control terminal (VAV box) throttles down the central air to the minimum required for ventilation and proper air circulation, reheat can be applied (at a minimum energy penalty) to the reduced volume of air to avoid overcooling the local space. A wide range of terminal control devices, typically located above the ceiling of occupied spaces to provide local zone control, are available. To meet current energy codes, these devices must reduce the flow of central cool air to a minimum before any reheat is applied. The type of VAV box used is extremely important to the comfort conditions provided and the energy efficiency of the entire system; the types of VAV control devices available are: •

VAV cooling-only box

•

VV / VT and VAV diffusers

•

VAV / electric reheat coil

•

VAV / hot water reheat coil

•

VAV / fan-powered box, electric reheat

•

VAV / fan-powered box, hot water reheat

• VV / VT and VAV diffusers VV / VT (Variable Volume / Variable Temperature) systems rely on a complex controls and mechanical volume dampers at each individual supply air diffuser to provide zoning capabilities to small commercial systems. Both the supply air temperature delivered by the central air handler and the supply air volume at individual diffusers is varied to meet local space conditions; the control system must continuously “poll” thermostats to determine the appropriate mode of operation (heating or cooling) of the central air handler. VAV diffusers operate similarly to VAV / cooling-only boxes; each diffuser has its own mechanically-operated dampering system to control the volume of cool air discharged from the diffuser. Both VV / VT systems and VAV diffusers rely heavily on sometimes intricate control systems and many mechanical devices, which usually have a shorter service life than the equipment they operate. Because of their limitations, they should be used to control only zones of very similar heating and cooling loads; otherwise, the system may revert to the heating mode because one or two perimeter zones require heating, even though the rest of the interior zones may be calling for cooling. The central systems used in conjunction with these devices may or may not employ a variable speed fan; if not, all the energy efficiency benefits of “true VAV” systems are lost. VV / VT systems and VAV diffusers are generally successful when applied as a low-cost alternative, in smaller commercial buildings with many small zones (that is, many private offices in an interior area), where true VAV system costs are prohibitive. • VAV / electric reheat coil This VAV box is similar to a VAV cooling-only box, but has a small electric reheat coil attached to it. The reheat coil is not activated until the air volume is reduced to its minimum, and the electric coil must be matched to the minimum air flow to ensure adequate flow occurs across the coil. This is a flexible, low cost terminal control device, but using resistance electric heating coils involves a penalty in heating costs. Energy efficiency of the system is enhanced if a less costly heating fuel is used at the air handling unit, so the electric coil does not have to operate during overnight unoccupied periods. During the overnight heating period, the large central air handler must operate to heat the building, incurring a cost penalty in electricity usage compared to the use of fan-powered VAV boxes (described below). VAV / electric reheat boxes also do not provide temperature control as closely as do VAV / hot water reheat boxes because the electric coil has a limited number of stages of heating (normally from one to three), whereas the hot water temperature / flow through a coil can be modulated to more closely match the heating need. • VAV / hot water reheat coil Similar in operation to the VAV / electric reheat coil, but more costly (due to additional hot water piping to each box). The main benefit of Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

D3

-

• VAV cooling-only box This is the simplest type of VAV terminal control device, consisting of dampers which regulate the flow of cool air based on a signal from the local thermostat. This is one of the more inexpensive control devices, often used to condition large interior zones of commercial office space (which typically require no heating during occupied periods). It can also be used to serve perimeter zones when either a separate heating system or VAV / reheat boxes are used to serve perimeter zones. Because this type of VAV box requires no reheat coil or piping connections, it is one of the most flexible to use. Changes to interior layouts may require only minor ducting and diffuser changes or, at the worst, changing out the VAV box with one of different capacity. VAV cooling only boxes range in capacity from approximately 200 CFM (e.g., 8x12x14 in.) to 3200 CFM (e.g., 18x65x54 in.).

SERVICES

Central station air handling units are available as:

D3 HVAC

SPECIALTIES


D-117

D3 HVAC


using this VAV box is reduced heating costs compared to the VAV / electric reheat device. VAV-reheat boxes range in capacity from 200 CFM (e.g., 9x50x22 in.) to 5,000 CFM (20x60x80 in.). • VAV / fan-powered box, electric reheat This type of VAV box uses a small fan contained within the VAV box. Fan arrangements include: -

series fan / continuous operation arrangement

-

parallel fan / intermittent operation

-

series fan / continuous operation arrangement

The VAV box fan runs continuously, and provides the motive force to distribute the central air from the box to all associated diffusers. As the cooling load drops and the thermostat calls for heating, it reduces the volume of primary air (cold air from the central air handler) to the minimum required for ventilation while drawing warm return air from the ceiling plenum through the box. In this way it recovers heat from the ceiling plenum, and the reheat coil is activated only when the recovered heat is insufficient to heat the zone. While the use of recovered plenum heat does reduce the heating costs, these savings can be lost by the continuous use of the small (inefficient) fan, which adds heat to the primary cold air during operations in the cooling mode. Some analyses have shown this method of operation to actually use 4 to 5 times more energy than the parallel fan / intermittent operation arrangement described below.

D3

SERVICES

This arrangement, although a true VAV application (providing efficient operation of the central air handling fan), actually provides a continuous volume of air to the occupied space. For this reason, it is sometimes used in conjunction with ice storage / cold air distribution systems which deliver colder air than the conventional 55F (12°C) supply air temperature; mixing the cold air with warm plenum air permits the use of conventional diffusers without creating the effect of “dumping” cold air on the occupants. It also helps to prevent condensate from forming on diffusers. This method of handling cold air distribution now competes with recently-introduced induction diffusers designed to obtain greater mixing of the supply air with room air before it enters the occupied zone. - Parallel fan / intermittent operation Parallel fan with intermittent operation: During the cooling cycle, the cool primary air volume is reduced as the cooling load decreases, until it reaches the minimum air volume required for ventilation. The VAV box is not activated until there is a call for heating. On the first call for heating, it draws 100% warm air from the ceiling plenum,

making maximum use of the recovered heat. If the recovered heat from the ceiling plenum is insufficient to satisfy the thermostat, there will be a second call for heating. The reheat coil will then be activated. The parallel fan is only sized to deliver the maximum amount of air required for heating, and therefore is much smaller than the fans designed for series / continuous operation. The parallel fan only runs during the heating cycle, when the heat given off by the inefficient motor provides useful work. For these reasons, the parallel fan / intermittent operation tends to be much more energy efficient than the series / continuous fan arrangement. - VAV / fan-powered box, hot water reheat This type of VAV box is the most energy efficient of all when used in the parallel fan / intermittent operation arrangement. Other than the opportunity to use a more efficient heating source from a central plant, its operation is similar to that described for the VAV / fan-powered box, electric reheat. Because it is more expensive and less flexible than other VAV boxes (due to the box fan and hot water piping), this VAV box is commonly used to condition perimeter zones which require more heat, and often are used for relatively fixed private office layouts. Less expensive, more flexible, cooling-only VAV boxes are then used to condition large interior spaces. • Air-water systems These systems include any type of air-water system which is combined with a separately-ducted ventilation air system, plus a unique system called the induction system. An induction system uses “primary air” from a high velocity central air handling system, which is ducted through a type of terminal unit which is specially designed to use the Venturi effect of the primary air stream to induce room air into the unit and across the heating / cooling coil. Hence it operates like a fan coil unit without requiring a local fan. This type of system is found in to high-rise buildings where a minimum amount of ductwork is desirable). A good use is typified by building applications where modular units are desired for individual room control. Improved air quality and humidity control is provided since a central ventilation system air handler can be used to provide better outside air filtration, better control of relative humidity, and an opportunity to recover waste heat from building exhaust air streams). Primarily due to high maintenance costs, the constant volume induction system has fallen from favor and no new induction system has been installed since about 1985. It is still found, of course, in existing buildings. Table 2 summarizes the basic types of central systems currently available and their general characteristics:

Table 2. Basic central HVAC system types

Type of space

Small [residential]

SPECIALTIES D-118

to Large [commercial]

Equipment type

Electric resistance

Modular fan coil units Modular closed loop heat pumps Unit ventilators & induction units Air handling units: Off-the-shelf Modular Custom

X


Air Source Heat Pump (ASHP)

Water Source Heat Pump WSHP/GSHP

X

Steam/hot water water

X

20+ years 19 years 20+ years

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Expected service life

15 + years 15-20 years 25+ years


-

Available utilities & costs: Which utilities are available (electricity, gas, district or central plant steam, hot water chilled water), and at what unit cost? Are their specific rate schedules available for all-electric systems? Are equipment rebates available from local utility providers for “preferred” equipment? Should the system be designed for flexibility in fuel choices, so that the least cost fuel can be switched based on periodic utility negotiations?

-

Visual sightlines: Will rooftop equipment be visible?

-

Building and site boundaries: Do current buildings abut sides of this building, or could they in the future?

•

Owner / developer requirements

-

First cost: How important is it relative to long-term operating costs? Should systems requiring large mech. equipment rooms, duct shafts, or increased ceiling heights be avoided?

-

Construction schedule: Is off-the-shelf packaged equipment required to avoid long lead times for equipment procurement?

-

Annual energy and utility costs: Are there economic criteria established for decision-making on any energy-related premiums in system first cost?

-

Capacity of building maintenance staff (number of staff and skill level): Will custodial staff be available to change air filters and clean condensate pans on many small modular terminal units, or should most maintenance be performed in a central equipment room by more skilled staff? Will the use of high pressure steam boilers require the presence of operating engineers around the clock?

-

Space considerations: If rental property, how much income is lost annually for lost rental space occupied by mechanical equipment and duct and pipe shafts?

-

Equipment location considerations: Should equipment locations at building perimeter and corner office space be avoided at all cost? Would this eliminate the use of self-contained or floor-byfloor indoor air handlers?

Once a shortlist of potential system types is developed in this manner, further steps can be taken to reduce the final choices to perhaps one or two:

-

Durability: Will exposed equipment be vulnerable to vandalism or physical abuse?

-

-

Reliability: How important is redundant central equipment or multiple self-contained units?

-

Use the preliminary screening criteria noted in Table 6. Rule out any system type which is shown to be inappropriate for the given building application.

Flexibility: How often are interior space layouts expected to change, and how much will it cost to make the required changes to the HVAC system? Is the churn rate high enough, or cubicle density requirements high enough, to warrant consideration of allair, below-floor distribution plenums rather than conventional ceiling distribution systems?

-

Review the detailed system selection criteria below and the HVAC system descriptions (on the following pages) for the remaining options to select the HVAC system most likely to meet the application’s needs.

Adaptability: How easily should the HVAC system be adaptable to a new space function; will the building be more marketable, now or in the future, with a more adaptable system?

•

End user and occupant requirements

-

Degree of temperature and humidity control: How precisely must indoor air temperature be controlled; is close control of relative humidity important?

-

Degree of air filtration required: Are low efficiency flat filters associated with self- contained and modular terminal units adequate, or is high efficiency filtration available with central all-air systems required?

-

Need to avoid cross-contamination between rooms: Should allair systems using common return air plenums be ruled out?

3.1 Selecting the HVAC system The following process can be used to efficiently select, or at least to shortlist, the final HVAC system options for a given building application: 1

Identify the range of HVAC system types that are appropriate for a given application from a master matrix of system types and building applications;

2

Shortlist the original set of generally applicable HVAC systems using a few key screening criteria which relate to a more specific building (high-rise vs. low-rise), owner criteria, or climatic consideration;

3

Once the number of potential HVAC systems is shortlisted to two or three, review the more detailed descriptions of each system’s cost, equipment requirements, and performance characteristics to better understand their differences; either make the initial system selection at this point or

4

Review the final system shortlist with the Owner and engineering consultant to determine if more detailed analyses are required to select the best system, or to evaluate specific system options.

The matrices indicated in Tables 4 and 5 illustrate the basic HVAC system types (across the top of the chart) and basic building applications (left side of the chart) for residential and commercial building systems, respectively. Using this system selection matrix allows one to quickly narrow the potential system types to be evaluated further to three or four, simplifying the decision-making process.

-

-

3.2

Rule out any system that does not fit with the basic category appropriate to the building application (that is, a speculative builder of apartment buildings might not want to consider any central system types; a university may rule out the use of self-contained systems due to a preference for central equipment rooms or the availability of campus-wide steam, hot water, or chilled water lines from a central plant).

Summary of HVAC system selection criteria

•

Site constraints and opportunities

-

Climatic considerations: How do local weather factors affect annual utility costs, and how important are the annual energy costs to the client’s business operation?

-

Ambient air quality: Does the general area air quality affect the degree of air filtration and treatment required? Do local condi-


D3

Describing HVAC system types by category (as above) is a convenient method of explaining the nomenclature used by engineers and the engineering principles involved. However, the system selection process for any project begins with the application in mind. For this reason, the charts in this article were developed to provide an overview of the HVAC systems to be considered in different commercial building applications. Table 3 can be used to view all the HVAC systems commonly used in commercial building applications (denselypopulated buildings with high internal air-conditioning loads due to people, lights, and office equipment).

SERVICES

tions affect the location of outdoor air intakes(that is, are there local pollution sources from street level traffic, or from the roofs of adjacent buildings?

Overview of HVAC systems

SPECIALTIES

3

D3 HVAC

D-119

D3 HVAC


Table 3. Overview of commercial (non-residential) HVAC system types

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-120



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 4. HVAC system selection matrix for heating-only applications


D-121

D3 HVAC


Table 5. HVAC system selection matrix for combined heating/cooling applications

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-122



Once the HVAC system has been selected, the first step in planning its layout is to identify the location and configuration of the central equipment. In large buildings using central systems, this often includes three types of equipment rooms: •

a central plant equipment space (usually one location in the building, housing central chillers, boilers and related equipment)

•

a rooftop location for cooling towers, and

•

equipment room(s) for large central air-handling units.

Central plant equipment rooms are often located at the top of a building to minimize the piping distance to connect the chillers to the rooftop cooling towers, and to minimize the length of expensive boiler flues which typically extend will above rooftop heights. Depending

The nomograph shown in Fig. 8 in conjunction with Table 7 provides a simple technique for approximating the sizes of the main air-conditioning system components, the space required to house them, and associated duct sizes. 4.1 System sizing nomograph: an example The nomograph is used by entering with total building area on bar (A). To use and example: •

Consider a 300,000 sq. ft. office building. In Table 7, the data for an office building indicates a medium air conditioning load of 400 sq. ft. per ton and medium air quantity of .9 CFM/sq. ft.

-

Entering the nomograph with a building area of 300,000 sq. ft. and proceeding vertically up to (B), and the sloped line representing 400 sq. ft./ton on bar (C), the air conditioner size can be approximated as 750 tons.

-

Continuing horizontally to the right to the 45° turning line, we proceed vertically down to bar (D) and vertically up to bar (E). On bar (D) we read the mechanical equipment room volume as 45,000 cu. ft.

-

On bar (E), the cooling tower area would be read as 900 sq. ft.

-

Going back to bar (A) and proceeding vertically downward to (F) and turning to the 1 CFM/sq. ft. line, we read on bar (G) that the total air volume is 300,000 Cubic Feet per Minute (CFM).

•

The above narrative on air handling equipment indicates that the largest commercially available units (not custom) are about 40,000 CFM. We know that this office building will require several air handlers. For design estimating purposes, assume we are designing a 10 story office building with 30,000 sq. ft. per floor and that we will have one 30,000 CFM air handler on each floor.

Table 6. Preliminary screening criteria

IF the building application: is not a hospital operating room, laboratory, museum, or other special use space requiring exceptionally close control of temperature, relative humidity, and/or space pressurization relationships

THEN: Rule out constant volume terminal reheat systems (current energy codes prohibit the use of this system type except for special use applications, unless the source of reheat is recovered heat).

considers building aesthetics to be crucial to commercial success

Rule out self-contained through-wall and window airconditioners (which require many visible A/C system components penetrating exterior walls).

is greater than six stories high

Rule out self-contained rooftop, split systems, and multizone units (these system types typically don’t have the capability to serve tall/large buildings due to inherent equipment limitations).

requires the use of economizer cooling (“free cooling” in winter) or maximum outside air capability for “purging” the building

Rule out all-water and air/water systems (which have little or no separately-ducted outside air capability).

requires simultaneous heating and cooling for different areas of the building at any time of the year

Rule out two pipe “change-over” fan coil unit systems OR provide supplemental electric heating coils designed to provide adequate heat for “in between” seasons.

is located in a climatic area characterized by high humidity at summer design conditions (hot/humid climates)

Rule out multizone systems (due to inherent system limitations in handling high humidity/high temperature conditions). Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data

D3

Space planning considerations

In this section, the critical planning and design considerations are reviewed for efficient layout of central mechanical equipment rooms and air handling equipment rooms (“fan rooms”). The space required to house HVAC equipment and associated pipe and duct shafts can amount to over 10 percent of the building floor area, depending upon the building application and type of HVAC system used. Heavy structural loads of central equipment will also effect the building’s structural system design. The location of the mechanical equipment can impact both the building aesthetics and the acoustical environment in occupied areas. Due to such impacts, the spatial layout of the HVAC system needs to be programmed early in the design phase and coordinated with all other building elements.

on the building application, the central plant equipment room may also be located on the lowest floor of the building, or the boilers and chillers may be located in two different locations.

SERVICES

4

Number of separate temperature control zones required: What is the ratio of private spaces requiring individual thermostatic control compared to large open plan areas requiring only one temperature control zone per 1,000 SF or more of floor area? Should modular all-water terminal units be used in small perimeter spaces, with larger all-air VAV systems serving large interior cooling-only zones?

SPECIALTIES

-

D3 HVAC

D-123

D3 HVAC


SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-124

Fig. 8. Space and duct sizing nomograph



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 7. Air conditioning and air quantities for various building types


D-125

D3 HVAC -

Enter bar (A) with 30,000 sq. ft.

-

Bar (G) shows 30,000 CFM.

-

Bar (H) shows 12,500 cu. ft. If we have a clear height of 12 ft. in the fan room, it would have a floor area of 1,041 sq. ft.

•

Typical air handling unit data (e.g., Sweet’s catalog manufacturer’s literature) indicate, let us assume, an approximate unit size of 14x11x7.6 ft. This should fit comfortably within a room of 25 ft. x 40 ft. and have space for all associated ductwork and servicing. Proceeding from 3 on bar (G) horizontally to the branch duct and supply duct turning lines:

-

We read on bar (I), a supply duct total area of 25 sq. ft.

-

We read 33 sq. ft. of branch duct area.

•

We now know we have a supply air duct of approximately 36 x 100 in., leaving the fan room before it begins to branch to smaller sizes to serve various areas of the floor. Note that the sum of the branch duct area is larger than the total supply duct area. This is dues to a lower air velocity being used in the branches.

•

Remember that return air duct work with the same area as the branch ductwork will be required to for return air back to the fan room to complete the system ducting.

•

Bear in mind that cooling towers can range in height from 12 ft. to over 40 ft. and should be located far away from building openings (such as windows and outside air intakes) to avoid the possibility of any carryover of moist, and possibly contaminated air back into occupied areas.

SERVICES

D3

4.2 Central equipment room planning Central equipment rooms housing boilers, chillers and large pumps should have between 12 - 16 ft. clear height available, from the finished floor to underside of structure, to allow for adequate clearance above the main equipment for accessories and large piping crossovers. Long narrow rooms—with an aspect ratio (width to length) of approximately 1:2—usually allow for the most flexible and efficient layout of equipment. The equipment room sizes given in the nomograph above should provide adequate space for typical equipment accessories, clearances around equipment for servicing and replacement, and “tube-pull” clearances. Equipment such as chillers and shelland-tube heat exchangers require clear space equal to the length of the equipment in order to pull the heat exchange tubes for servicing. Often a “back-to-back” arrangement of equipment minimizes the total floor area required to accommodate such needs. Care should be given to proper vibration isolation for large equipment, particularly rotating equipment, such as chillers and pumps. In addition to planning the location and configuration of equipment rooms, access to these rooms is an important consideration. Adequate equipment room doors and routes to freight elevators and/or the building exterior, should be planned such that the largest piece of equipment can be easily installed (and possibly removed in future).

SPECIALTIES D-126

4.3 Air-handling equipment planning The number and location of central air handling unit equipment rooms (commonly called “fan rooms”) are critical to a successful HVAC system, because they often occur in more than one location and tend to be closer to the occupied areas of a building. As noted above, the nomograph in Fig. 8 indicates an estimate of the CFM requirements for the building. Since the largest central fans typically used in commercial applications are approximately 40,000 CFM in capacity, dividing the building CFM by 40,000 yields the minimum number of air handlers required to serve the building. (If self-contained equipment, such as rooftop units, are to be used, a maximum size of 10,000 CFM per air handler should be used.


D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings Once the number of air handling units is determined, the next planning decision is how (or whether) they are to be grouped together in separate rooms. Generally speaking, the more “centered” or centrally located within the building, the more efficient and less costly will be the distribution systems. However, other planning considerations may dictate a more beneficial arrangement. The following discussion summarizes typical air-handling unity equipment room arrangement approaches: • “Scattered” or separated units In this approach, often used in low-rise buildings employing rooftop equipment, the air handlers are simply located as centrally as possible to the separate zones they serve (and are thus scattered throughout the building as a function of its separate zones). This arrangement results in the most efficient fan sizing and minimal duct sizes. Since the layout results in air handlers being located directly above occupied areas, noise and vibration isolation are critical factors. • “Central core” placement In “central core” placement, all air handling unit rooms are located together near the building core often on multiple floors in high-rise buildings. This arrangement, very common for large commercial buildings, tends to yield the most efficient equipment room layout and duct distribution layout if one air handler can serve and entire floor. However, horizontal or vertical ducting is required to admit and reject fresh outside air and to exhaust spent air. -

Air handling unit rooms placed in the central core can take advantage of other service elements such as elevator shafts and restrooms to buffer noise. Ideally, no equipment room wall should be located immediately adjacent to an occupied space and equipment rooms are best stacked vertically to minimize piping and air shaft space requirements. Also, in an ideal planning arrangement, at least two and preferable three sides of the equipment room are free of vertical obstructions so that supply and return ductwork can pass through them to serve the occupied areas.

-

Because the floor-to-ceiling height is limited to the typical building floor height, the supply/return mains tend to be dimensioned “flatter” than desired for optimal air flow efficiency and noise control. This, coupled with tight space constraints and less than optimal fan ducting, often results in excessive fan noise and high velocity duct noise from the mains. For this reason, plans should place the exiting ducts to pass over low occupancy service spaces, such as closets and restrooms, and also to include a duct turn above these spaces to reduce duct transmitted noise.

• “Perimeter” rooms Arranging the fan rooms at the building perimeter minimizes the ducting required for outside air and exhaust air, but can reduce the efficiency of the supply/return duct system, unless multiple units are required for each floor. Disadvantages to this configuration include the potential lost use of premium perimeter floor areas, the aesthetic impact of large air intake/exhaust louvers on the exterior, and proximity of potentially noisy equipment close to occupied areas of the building. • “Detached” rooms This arrangement moves the equipment room outside the main building, such as an adjacent protruding service shaft. While decreasing the efficiency of duct distribution, it sometimes allows for maximum space utilization and flexibility within the main floor plate of the building it serves. 4.4 System summaries The descriptions that follow in tabular form (Tables 8 to 16) summarize the operating characteristics and key design considerations for the HVAC systems described above. These tables, listed here for reference, include:


Boilers can be categorized by construction material. Cast iron boilers are built up in sections, and are expandable to add capacity. They are used in closed, low pressure heating systems. There are also several types of steel boilers. Among the steel firetube boilers are scotch marine and firebox types, which direct the flue gasses through tubes surrounded by water. Several varieties of watertube boilers, which direct water through tubes in the combustion gas chamber, are also used. Typical capacity ranges and other properties for a number of boiler types are shown in Table 17. Selection criteria are shown in Fig. 9. General space requirements must allow ample room for service, which may include space to pull boiler tubes. As an example, firetube boilers, from 15 - 80 ft., have tube unit lengths of 8 - 27 ft., and widths of 4 - 10 ft. These units require an additional 5 - 23 ft. of space to pull tubes as necessary. The tube-pull space provided may be within the boiler room, or may extend through a doorway. The total weight associated with these boilers varies from 300 lb. per BHP (Boiler horsepower) at 15 BHP, to 110 lb. per BHP at 800 BHP. In general, boiler room heights should be 12 - 16 ft. For a given boiler system, multiple units should be considered. Matching total boiler capacity to a variable load requirement will provide backup capability if one boiler is out of service. Gross oversizing of boiler capacity should be avoided, because excessive cycling will compromise net efficiency. Modular boilers are individual cast iron boilers which are installed in banks. Module capacities range from 9 to 57 BHP. Supply, return, and breeching systems are common to the entire bank of boilers, but the units are step-fired, using only the number of modules necessary to meet the load. Each module fires continuously or in long cycles, at its peak efficiency, and avoids the on-off cycling of single capacity boilers. This type of system can retain high efficiency through the heating season, and the entire assembly need not be shut down to repair a single unit. Also, the modules require less field assembly and at less than 30 in wide, are small enough to fit through standard door openings. Module lengths are approximately 3 in. per BHP, and heights before stacks are installed are less than 6 feet. Condensing boilers available today allow cooler return water temperatures, cooler stack temperatures, and higher efficiency than non-condensing boilers.

The efficiency of cooling equipment is determined by the quantity of cooling generated for a given quantity of mechanical compressor energy used. There are several ways of expressing this. The Energy Efficient Ratio (EER) rating is used for residential equipment. It represents the cooling capacity in Btu/hr divided by the electrical input in watts. A seasonal energy efficiency ratio (SEER) is frequently used, which divides the total seasonal cooling Btu by the total watt-hours. Common SEER values range from 7 to 16. Coefficient of Performance (COP) is used for heat pumps and large equipment - up to a value of 7. COP is the EER divided by 3.412 Btu/watt. Chillers are often rated by kW/ton, with values ranging from .1 - 1.0. In general, cooling equipment should not be oversized. Oversized cooling equipment compromises comfort (humidity) conditions, and short cycling leads to excessive equipment wear. When an oversized system short-cycles, the air is cooled but the cyclic behavior doesn’t remove moisture adequately. The result can be a “cold and clammy” environment. If anything, a slight undersizing will allow improved comfort and operating conditions for a larger number of hours, if there are relatively few peak hours in the year. Chillers The primary piece of equipment in a central cooling system is the chiller. A chiller basically packages together those individual components necessary to support the vapor compression cycle and create a cooling effect (the evaporator, condenser, and compressor). These components may be contained in one piece of equipment, or separated with the evaporator inside, and the compressor / condenser outside. Chillers are usually classified by the type of compressor used to drive the refrigeration cycle. Several types of compressors are available, including centrifugal, reciprocating, rotary screw, and scroll. Centrifugal chillers compress the refrigerant with a rotating impeller. Rated efficiencies are generally good, with values as low as .5 kW/ ton, and COP’s falling in the 4.2 - 6.0 range. When these units operate at less than 30% of full load, their efficiency drops off rapidly. Multistage compressors are available to increase part load efficiencies. Centrifugal chiller are available with capacities starting as low as 100 ton, but they are used primarily in large central plants, with capacities of 1,000 tons and more. There are several types of compressors: •

Reciprocating (piston) compressors are common in the 3 to 50 ton range, where they are typically more efficient than centrifugal units. Reciprocating chillers use a proven technology, serve a wide variety of commercial applications, and generally have a lower initial cost than other chiller types. They have more individual parts than some other chiller types, and therefore require more maintenance. Reciprocating compressors produce more vibration than other machines. For this reason, care must be exercised in mounting, particularly if used on a rooftop.

•

Rotating screw compressors operate with single or double interfitting rotors to compress the refrigerant. Screw compressors are rated as low as .57 kW/ton, and have superior part load characteristics. The COP of screw compressors is not reduced at higher

Cooling equipment Cooling equipment is sized by ton of cooling capacity. A ton in refrigeration terms is equal to 12,000 Btu/hr, which corresponds to the hourly heat input required to melt one ton of ice in one day at 32F (0°C). Cooling equipment capacities range from less than one ton for small devices such as window air conditioners, to several thousand tons for the largest central plant equipment. The vapor compression refrigeration cycle is the most common technology used in cooling equipment. In the basic process, a low temperature, low pressure refrigerant liquid is sent through an evaporator

D3

Boilers Boilers are used to provide a building with steam or hot water for space heating, processes, and services. Steam is selected as the medium if required by the process needs, but hot water is more common for space heating because it is more flexible and offers better space temperature control. A boiler may be rated with a gross output in thousands of Btu per hour (MBH), boiler horsepower (33,475 Btu/hr = 1BHP), or pounds of steam per hour (970.3 Btu per pound). Fuels used include natural gas, oil, electricity, and coal. Outdoor air for combustion should be provided at the rate of approximately 12.5 CFM per BHP The net free area of direct openings in boiler rooms for combustion air should not be less than 1 square inch for every 4 MBH, or for every 2 MBH if the combustion air is ducted to the boiler. Boilers typically have turndown capability to reduce the boiler output in response to the load. Common turndown ratios are 4:1 and 10:1.

heat exchanger, where it absorbs heat (that is, from the heat load generated by the building) and evaporates into vapor form. A cooling effect is left in the building from which the heat was absorbed. The low temperature, low pressure refrigerant vapor is then mechanically compressed to raise its temperature and pressure. The high temperature, high pressure vapor is sent to a condenser heat exchanger, where it rejects the heat (to the outdoors) and condenses to a medium temperature, high pressure liquid. After flowing through an expansion device, the refrigerant again becomes a low temperature, low pressure liquid, and the cycle continues. The basic vapor compression cycle is illustrated in Fig. 10

SERVICES

HVAC equipment descriptions


SPECIALTIES

5

D3 HVAC

D-127

D3 HVAC


SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-128

Fig. 9. General selection criteria for boilers (Source: Cleaver Brooks)


D3

D3 HVAC

SERVICES


SPECIALTIES

Fig. 10. Basic vapor compression cycle.


D-129

D3 HVAC


Table 8. Self-contained air conditioners and air-source heat pumps (window units, thru-wall units, and residential split-system units).

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-130



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 9. Self-contained single-zone (ducted) air conditioners (rooftop single zone units and large split-system units).


D-131

D3 HVAC


Table 10. Self-contained ducted multi-zone air conditioners (rooftop units).

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-132



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 11. Modular water source heat pumps (Closed loop heat pump systems with/without central ventilation air)


D-133

D3 HVAC


Table 12. Central ducted water source heat pumps (rooftop units, floor-mounted and horizontal indoor units)

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-134



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 13. Two-pipe change-over systems (fan coil units and unit ventilators, with/without central ventilation air)


D-135

D3 HVAC


Table 14. Four-pipe fan coil units and unit ventilators (with/without central ventilation air)

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-136



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 15. Constant volume / reheat, central station air handling systems (with electric, hot water or steam reheat)


D-137

D3 HVAC


Table 16. VAV central station air handling systems (with electric and hot water reheat VAV boxes)

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-138



D3 HVAC

D3

SPECIALTIES

SERVICES

Table 17. General characteristics of boilers


D-139

D3 HVAC

D3.5 HVAC systems for commercial buildings Table 18. General characteristics of chiller systems

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-140

Fig. 11. Basic absorption cycle. Source: Rowe (1994)



•

Vapor compression chillers most often use electricity to drive the compressor. Gas engine driven chillers offer an alternative, with lower energy costs. However, space and weight requirements may increase, as well as the associated noise and vibration.

Absorption chillers use an absorption cycle rather than the vapor compression cycle to produce chilled water. The cycle, illustrated in Fig. 11, relies on the input of heat energy. The basic absorption cycle takes advantage of the affinity that a salt has for water. A lithium bromide salt solution acts as the absorbent, and water is the refrigerant. The cooling effect is created as the salt solution rapidly evaporates water from the low pressure evaporator section. Absorption chillers are considered in applications where there is an existing low cost source of heat, often steam or waste heat. While their Coefficient of Performance (COP) ratings are quite low compared to vapor compression equipment (often .67 - 1.2 with kW/ton values as low as .1), the low cost heat input makes them attractive. Absorption chillers may also be direct-fired with natural gas, as in a combination chiller/boiler unit, where utility costs or rebates offer savings over electric units. In the case of the combination unit, less space is required than for a separate chiller and boiler, and simultaneous heating and cooling is available. In addition, a heating COP up to 1.8 is possible. Maintenance requirements for absorption machines have improved, but is still higher than vapor compression equipment. The advantage is that maintenance procedures are not as complex on absorption equipment. Table 18 outlines many of the general characteristics of common chiller systems. This is a general outline, and many of the listed characteristics vary widely with chiller size, operating conditions, application, maintenance, number of units, and manufacturer. Generally for chiller equipment, space requirements range from .4 sq. ft./ton for large centrifugal units to 3 sq. ft./ton for smaller (100 ton) absorption units, usually with a 3 or 4:1 length to width ratio. Height requirements range from 10 ft. for 100 ton centrifugal units to 18 ft. for 1,000 ton 2stage steam absorption units. Operating weights range from 40 to 160 pounds per ton of capacity. Absorption units typically are on the high end of the space and weight ranges, and often have more limitations in the size of opening for the individual sections that may be passed through for field erection. Heat recovery options are available with many chiller packages to use waste heat for purposes such as water heating. This option should be considered for buildings that require substantial hot water supply and space cooling simultaneously. Heat rejection equipment There are three common types of heat rejection equipment: air cooled, water cooled, and evaporative. The purpose of heat rejection equipment in a refrigeration system is to provide a heat transfer means to reject all the heat from the air conditioning system. This heat includes the heat absorbed by the evaporator from the space plus the heat of energy input into the compressor. Air cooled, heat rejection equipment is typically used with refrigerant based air conditioning systems. Two variations of the air cooled heat rejection equipment are condensers and condensing units. An air cooled

Water cooled, heat rejection equipment is commonly used in four configurations: shell and tube, shell and coil, tube and tube, and braised plate. The type selected depends upon the capacity required, refrigerant used, temperature control required, and amount of water available. The water cooled condenser typically takes water from an external source to be superheat, condense, and subcool refrigerant. In most cases, the compressor is located remote from the water cooled condenser. Water cooled condensers typically have a higher cost and a higher maintenance cost associated with them. This cost, however, is offset by the higher efficiency of the water cooled types. The last type of heat rejection equipment is the evaporative type. There are two major classifications in evaporative systems: the evaporative condenser used in refrigeration systems and the cooling tower used in water cooled systems. The evaporative condenser circulates refrigerant through a coil which is continuously wetted by outside recirculating water system. This allows the evaporative condenser to be the most efficient type of condenser system. A cooling tower is used for systems such as a water source heat pump system or chilled water system where water is used as the condenser source in lieu of refrigerant. In all cases where fans are used to assist in the heat rejection process, adequate space is required around the heat rejection equipment to allow proper air flow. If proper clearances cannot be maintained, considerable capacity reduction of the equipment will result. As a rule of thumb, free clearance at the air inlet should equal the length of the unit. Diffusers, registers and grilles There are three major types of air distribution outlets. The ceiling diffuser, linear slot diffuser and grilles and registers. •

The ceiling diffuser is the most common air outlet. Diffusers have either a radial or directional discharge which is parallel to the mounted surface. Some diffusers have adjustable vanes which allows discharge air to be directed. Diffusers come in a variety of shapes and sizes; round, rectangular, square, perforated face, louver face and modular type diffusers. Some typical applications for diffusers are spot heating or cooling, large capacity, mounting on exposed ductwork, horizontal distribution along a ceiling, and perimeter air distribution to handle the perimeter wall load in addition to the interior load.

•

Linear slot outlets typically are a long narrow air supply device with an air distribution slot between 1/2 to 1 in. (12.7 to 25.4 mm) in length. Linear slot outlets are available with multiple slots and may be installed in continuous lengths to give the appearance of one long device (not all need to be active). Various types of linear supply outlets are available. These types are; linear bar, T-bar slot, linear slot and light diffuser. Some applications for linear slot outlets are high side wall installation with flow perpendicular to the mounting surface, high side wall installation with 15-30 degree upward or downward directional adjustability, perimeter ceiling installation, sill installations, and floor installations.


D3

Scroll compressors generally have smaller capacities than many other types, and are becoming popular in some residential equipment. These units use two interfitting scroll members for compression. Chillers with scroll compressors are gradually taking over markets once dominated by reciprocating chillers. The scroll units have fewer parts and thus less maintenance concerns, have smoother, quieter operation, and can operate under dirtier conditions.

SERVICES

•

condenser has the refrigeration compressor located remotely. The condensing unit has the compressor included within the unit. This system typically contains centrifugal or propeller fans which draws air over aluminum fins with hot refrigerant running through copper tubing connected to the aluminum fins. Air cooled condensers and condensing units may be located indoors or outdoors and the discharge may be vertical or horizontal. The heat transfer in an air cooled condenser or condensing unit occurs in three phases: the super heating of the refrigerant; condensing of the refrigerant; and sub-cooling of the refrigerant. Air cooled heat rejection equipment typically has the lowest first cost installation.

SPECIALTIES

condensor temperatures as much as other chillers. For this reason it is frequently selected for use as a heat recovery chiller.

D3 HVAC

D-141

D3 HVAC •

A grille is a supply air outlet which consists of a frame enclosing a set of vanes which can be mounted vertically, horizontally, or in both directions. A grille combined with a volume control damper is called a register. Some types of grilles and registers are adjustable bar grilles, fixed bar grilles, security grilles, and variable area grilles. Applications for grilles and registers are high side wall and perimeter location in the sills, curbs, or floors. Grilles mounted in the ceiling and discharging down are unacceptable. Ceiling installation would require a special grille with curved vanes to discharge the air parallel to the mounting surface.

Fig. 12 is a sizing nomograph to approximate sizes and quantities of diffusers for various air quantities. For example, a room requiring 300 CFM (cubic feet per minute) of conditioned air could use one 12x12 louvered diffuser, one 10x10 in register or one 12 ft. long one slot linear diffuser. If multiple outlets are desired or required, read the appropriate sizes from the multiple outlet lines. For example, the same 300 CFM room could use four 6x6 louvered diffusers, four 6x6 registers, or one 4 ft. long 4 slot linear diffuser. For early planning purposes, the size and quantity of return outlets can also be approximated from this nomograph. Pumps The four most common types of centrifugal pumps are end suction, horizontal or vertical split case, in-line mounted, and vertical. The configuration of the pump shaft determines if the pump is a horizontal or vertical pump. Pumps are typically constructed of bronze or cast iron with the impeller made of steel, stainless steel, or bronze. Pumps may be arranged in a variety of configurations to provide the design flow and economical operation at partial flow or for system backup. These arrangements and control scenarios are as follows:

D3

SERVICES

-

multiple pumps in parallel

-

one pump on, one pump on stand-by

-

pumps with two speed motors

-

primary and secondary pumping

-

variable speed pumping

-

distributed pumping

In-line pumps or circulator pumps are pipe-mounted, low pressure, low capacity pumps. In-line pumps are typically used in residential and small commercial applications. End suction pumps, either close coupled or frame-mounted, usually require a solid concrete pad for mounting. In addition, these pumps require a vibration isolation base to prevent vibration transmission to the floor. The coupling between the motor and the pump requires a guard. This pump takes up more room than the in-line circulator pump. Horizontal or vertical split case pumps require mounting on a solid concrete pad with a vibration isolation base. This pump coupling requires a guard. The split case on this pump permits complete access to the impellers for maintenance. This pump is typically utilized in larger pumping systems over 1,000 GPM (Gallons Per Minute).

SPECIALTIES D-142

Vertical turbine pumps are a multiple stage pump that provides high pressure at normal flow rates. This unit typically has multiple impellers. Mounting requires a solid concrete pad above with a wet pit and accessibility to the pit for suction side maintenance. Air handling equipment There are two common types of air handling equipment: refrigerant type, which are considered air conditioning units, and chilled water type, which are called air handling units. An air conditioning unit is typically factory assembled with refrigerant type cooling and electric, steam, or hot water heating. These units are very basic in nature and do not have many options. Typical options are economizer or free cooling cycle, increased motor size, and upgrade DDC package controls. Time-Saver Standards: Part II, Design Data


Advantages of air conditioning units are fast delivery times and low installed cost. Disadvantages include higher operating costs, little or no control over indoor relative humidities, and higher maintenance costs. These units are also very inflexible relative to the type of filtration which can be provided. Air handling units are usually a semi-custom type of air handling device which can be factory assembled, field assembled, or a combination of both. In the semi-custom variety, selection is made from a standard list of components to customize the air handling unit within set guidelines. The custom air handling unit will be constructed to any dimension, size, and configuration the designer chooses. Air handling units typically use chilled water or refrigerant as the cooling medium and electric, steam, or hot water as the heating medium. Disadvantages of this type of system are increased delivery time and a greater installed cost. Advantages of this type of system include complete flexibility with regard to size, configuration, fan size, and filtration types. These units typically have lower operating costs. In all cases, sufficient space is required around the air handling system to allow for proper maintenance. Access is required for regular maintenance: filter removal and replacement, fan and motor removal and replacement, coil pull in event of a coil failure, and access to belts and bearings. Fans Fans are available in a variety of impeller or wheel design and housing design. These variables effect the performance characteristics and applications for each individual type of fan. Refer to Table 19 for impeller or wheel information, performance characteristics, and applications.

D3

D3 HVAC

SERVICES


SPECIALTIES

Fig. 12. Diffuser, register and grille sizing nomograph


D-143

D3 HVAC


Table 19. Fan performance characteristics.

SERVICES

D3

SPECIALTIES D-144


D3.6 Spacial HVAC systems

D3 HVAC

Special HVAC equipment Summary: This article reviews selected items, classified as “Special HVAC Equipment” in Uniformat D3070, including dust and fume collectors, air curtains, air purifiers, and paint spray ventilation systems.

Key words: air filters, centrifugal collectors, chemical filters, curtain jet, industrial ventilation, pressurized air, scrubbers, spray booths.

a hood (plain, flanged, slotted, or canopy) to capture the dust or fumes where they are generated,

-

flexible ductwork, and

-

an exhaust fan that directs the dirty airstream towards the collector.

The typical capacity of dust or fume collectors are loadings of 0.003 grains per cubic foot and higher. Once the collector captures dust or fumes, the relatively dust- or fume-free air is then discharged from the exhaust stack to the outdoors or is recirculated to the room or process. During system design, the maximum pressure drop through the collector must be added to overall system pressure calculations.

15800

-

the degree of removal required to meet regulatory requirements or permit recirculation.

-

fire safety and explosion control (need for explosion venting for combustible dusts).

-

the disposal method.

-

energy requirements.

Dust and fume collectors include: -

Fabric collectors.

-

Wet collectors.

-

Dry centrifugal collectors.

-

Electrostatic precipitators.

Key features of fabric collectors: -

High efficiencies possible (>99%).

-

Useful for small particles (

Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

Data Converters for Wireless Standards

Design Hotels: Architectural Design

Architectural Design Portable Handbook

Architectural Drafting and Design

Architectural Design and Ethics: Tools for Survival

Architectural Design and Regulation

Multiunit Housing: Architectural Design

Architectural Design in Steel

Protocell Architecture: Architectural Design

Design Data for Plastics Engineers

London! (Timesaver)

Time-Saver Standards for Urban Design

Standards for Engineering Design and Manufacturing

Standards for Engineering Design and Manufacturing

Time-Saver Standards for Urban Design

Post-Traumatic Urbanism: Architectural Design

Artists' Impressions in Architectural Design

Architectural Engineering Design: Mechanical Systems

architectural design - new health facilities

architectural design - new working spaces

Artists' Impressions in Architectural Design

Timesaver Elementary Listening

Data Mining for Design and Marketing

Data Analysis for Database Design, Third Edition

Digital Design for Computer Data Acquisition

Digital Design for Computer Data Acquisition

Data Mining for Design and Marketing

Experimental Design and Data Analysis for Biologists

Data Modeling and Design for Today's Architectures

Data Analysis for Database Design, Third Edition

Time-Saver Standards for Architectural Design Data

Data Converters for Wireless Standards

Design Hotels: Architectural Design

Architectural Design Portable Handbook

Architectural Drafting and Design

Architectural Design and Ethics: Tools for Survival

Architectural Design and Regulation

Multiunit Housing: Architectural Design

Architectural Design in Steel

Protocell Architecture: Architectural Design

Design Data for Plastics Engineers

London! (Timesaver)

Time-Saver Standards for Urban Design

Standards for Engineering Design and Manufacturing

Standards for Engineering Design and Manufacturing

Time-Saver Standards for Urban Design

Post-Traumatic Urbanism: Architectural Design

Artists' Impressions in Architectural Design

Architectural Engineering Design: Mechanical Systems

architectural design - new health facilities

architectural design - new working spaces

Artists' Impressions in Architectural Design

Timesaver Elementary Listening

Data Mining for Design and Marketing

Data Analysis for Database Design, Third Edition

Digital Design for Computer Data Acquisition

Digital Design for Computer Data Acquisition

Data Mining for Design and Marketing

Experimental Design and Data Analysis for Biologists

Data Modeling and Design for Today's Architectures

Data Analysis for Database Design, Third Edition

Recommend Documents